Ree pple he et re SPE RRM rts tapes preter soba pals - ohh pote oe i@hhab eo Crnt bsiet Vip ig i. . « oF che rad is ob thot a4 i a » Se ees + teh oarhish Pa vie pod ol visas yer heyy ¢ ba h1934 te Astodaihsh etry gr pet eth sae shan heh ak i eae ab etek alr ry : rs yee Pt a AAS eh lope pep a> YW 708 oto hee Pat saath ofl oll ath J eee Ce | + yabiwe 3 or any ot ahd oils CaM Sst 2 + trL. epeat e+ oe iy 44 verbenetse nal hike ol ch dd ih eh efae Like Be! - P oF ont ” " ee cays ' apt Ls % e pe AOR, wre acy eres ALA at Labrulrine ty fh Land} etme pom a ree ee be Byer teen ri aah ad Ba vied ee beset $1 9224 eae th etek okibatal Egiaghy cia piers vite: oe am dph at ysqqed eSemy pea CRY rr > Prey piak sp.’ iM glbgaisll aot as chet 1. eget rw “wey “ pret Arpt awe 5 ote oP aif bgretied § vhs mer abege ei er AOS is wgrhs pir, ee Ae a Panadol petra iozh phumey adn, not HM he Ys , Pesce ph of ly fies Hs oo: is 0h adherend Td ee rh pets ee Lisptipher alte. Puy este vee) 90 pos sliey of wo aW Shae eee ess) ag Spobi 42 pte pbdetrats bag get iv aratee ge Rote wi pie stabehed “ Mbt cgau rl ete aes eee | AEA auibhdh nuck chara > ets Renaes, Madeese ey » oe PER Tete habe phe its , apryt ioe sh: WS? Beer EEN bob dehy hatin. RAs PRE aah ba rte Re Pres Loiie at a2 v4 we rs hat abil ote hed af oh 9 Laie aoc} fh pO Ba a dahl atl sai ek ohkd ca hada a rege, Later isiyes: 6 PEE Hi 8 ov + eae ear na be BSN FeDe SE 8 fat FB dbkeheltoste! shemshel mache petra teeie é $ WE S-Di der ede Pe Pk ear iy ed piste pps +4 4 5 ened Ebeksh stehthetbheb fab chokes ete Le f “ Peer Pp ho Hbteoee Metege bkrtoll ed Sart 3a Teh in re} ate sai he fi sie See dl te: Entire elds tneind hk ee err ae Hehe? peg sae Pe Ne Leela. heepeee Oey “tite ne » ailedehentan pt erat 38.94 838 beh die hi ieee Bk om tee te) MepiPia ny -sates pei epeeewer es t . bak peg a el Aah rate rath ook bata dh as Sipe tenes rR reba FANN erry » "4 4 bab si alah ai a id ' reast-so 48 2 ee sb a Former | Bickera' sis hed ata HrAage! 9496 rh ‘ ie ~ : i : et te e* ¢ ¥ oe - 4 bal £42 ol eon, tee tet pt aed me ewe iP sty - oA bat Aro erry es Wie Lak PESTS CE dig. " : fa Weare ae WELL ee oy 2 ‘ nae J th es + ore SUG ae tae tape erp bth ne es ‘i = ; am oe oy ee FTPs Oh) 84> gay Seovhstni.che Pre Shire nee, = - aeher ney oe iad jh ee ‘3 ty EYE 6 : ¥ are 7 4 1. ee AG EA 228TH! OS one qb ey . : - AW ie. : eek: oe UP de rid ahi pt mye Sth engin he wrk ee g rate ect aie taped dat Hi Lakhs yee Samba ba G2 SEER be a a> VE deer ede a Ns nk ptr i4,} ss'eh bieDt i044 2heens 4b, eek Lote et een ere Pi ht deg ets ~ vs pede oe hake nF: i aot ot er phys re PR EIFEG Hi Snag pevee 4 ee ded Feish ahibaakelbed shock och think en ce hoe eee * aia ke ete’ ce Aed ai bier thal: ch ue ae ¢ £4 Wt ret etki: ay ghee vl PEARL AY ekg tiga) WH § ell cece ek oe VeaW Se peg are sx pega: rit e'b yeipiersy yest oka rwaaag ety? + Tee Bd ery. a pay 4 aay Brit EE tee tS ~ CA Oe lO AL eh pe Bees GAtiaEd shah oi: 3 tale’ ergy eae Ne ere Le ue tie rs Sw? 90 + wa! ad rp ae tae cP clba bat bieitih desc sb nek Coats dc oe eis a ee bat Pasi Niet cats wight plaperelebeedoee ra afew Sa ee a ik be abe oa btw erase 2 oe See 4? 4 ; A ASK pe beets eet pag a: ‘ fess ‘ t marae ares fire Tote ia dvaies: wits ye 1? Bs Sets Fol stat ated Sat atl fo ba i Bates bade 00) Shia hens sieahobel nt ae bers Hains siakaitiaty desnhek ones bcbotchaneteas tRpmed pM yaar gay ye pant ped ett herr is mp leah & e AS Eee yr \ Pains shuily hfe 5 reef Sed itt Sb cg hog lets ree eee Pou ’ Legh esdge i519 Ge Fg agrhakrsee ee Wat s py Ried phere PRR Te Pe wo) beer gi ddd Leech pas -. : ane ee peta teed ed ries ma Ebeste-pbind ‘ an , elise aah ee ee ‘ press 24 ees, Wish io '9% a 204) sSanalid 46 Stee See ye i / seta abiess Seed ruta ry bid J sd) is sha] Fi5;-995 sd sh 30g Feber pres sbet het nels Seait LEBER Ft Pe DAM 7 : his : yi a BNE He C924 < itor Ori sai a hat prs Si Sn hee Gy SS a } UY. Cte tae 4 47 * ght Shank ir acetr ho) ee . aris ph ee ss rf dybeh ante ce ‘ Seb rtybocpare eeoapenings oy é 2 epeis e ren? gohvaighe 4 jeu raee FEEEH ats Sek Pao ee Manse be pa) a 87 ae P orist - vi aches rt Sab at segs * ” 2 mate oh Tra peat let eo 7 : 69 Sib og aN hel abe Wied cai dhaaeh Be 2a 25 i ficigatnoxbed > ert Mice: eer ae | Stalatecaas ng ee pices ct int ieee ‘ ‘7 ska tans, er As pate abit es ta alae ob ee > sebteretad SVE ek Me arta Ge §? bi peel bee ss ksi WP y : " Peet 30 Mae uy beret APES: ec ee Att ese Syteie ae ai4sq & = y Ae erat Be al salt she att A fiat Fe ea bias farted cake i at a reatier meat pes ease oee Posen cre ote aoe Pit4eo iG) id PA ie Lena, “a ENS arek \ PS ie Gahan: Ppa aieeheghy betel. obihet Pee etek hep Spacbeeeies Steep Per ate we pre : Fs aes : - eigen eu grrr, tad Poe iy * + 4rl/ Fie the PMA Met oe ie Sheba iete Read ja t ree ve a = tbbs ted eyd teks ah . a cies ‘ in aye aebed el) Neat os tosiwesuacies be atyer its ORE : ‘e eater es Sp hed pats bal bic P isietndebsteites ho MS BT ARK GO sli: Reset Ab enka ; aps ER EY tenes SE ee oer nae aa PS ti Sara bl Tiara eee 259) sheen 87 > Peja : gr Stott nie z EE oS rare re eee y' ti hq eaeqhat LAA HRI TE IF Et BY bod acaba sey: ‘ hae dues sibel aksicc bk nak hie eek abl ob oh tc ata ta ee sad MesdaboSedak cota tambelon deecaetekas token ae “20 hey of an of Seah ao wh 58 he tle Seger pe 4.2 Po peterwe oad the “ : Meese piston ye : Brie Sh oe ? Ab stad pietes sl sokemeel (as rail A a Set Ree anit : ‘ : - fersesete APS pees i u tose a rs med. siege sats pve Anert tiny 5 ‘ fede rie iaard’ nD phen ape wer : ot ¢ (Scay LK byrne Lathe dedokepsjstoeaivhtipaeMeastel tein beneene Oe ea peas eaceanae “flies ane Pessina tates Sis hikiemeentiae er Ran citrate eens aie Sos ‘ a < tai Med © € nh oer's onttureasted etter ace : soy . oe z cyeak er seeetey Paige es xd orte | igi heed iaeiearte pedny hae ade Vie {scehpb sari we adele 4 re pabbgete Stamens cet yeaa Peele, ees : r tht: o> os ie ease ‘ : Stercass : : cesta sage : - ; nat ° st sates ¥ rotted ogg tan Fe 4 pene ‘ ree . ‘ 4 Hx: igs 4: borg dap yore iki ae & oer ‘ pe ee re a ix Wg n sof + ont pene > A 5 t Saver ererrs ayer Tat pejled id igi ( : Shidts J igouads(ubakenenaitekan: s Su ob peateeh Peete BS a4 itercer dickens ° prbphcioeetoh-bateee Reh eh ices a oe ed Lee PRO Ge” perc. A hitity be ute eget ocey eh atebes pee vd pede 2 sik aihev eteb patted ot) A ; if Sileaeasitlociedeagsrte weer itbviigl vs eine ead hese tc t eh t pao eer Oris saints rpaeted ays 5 werertat--4 ae: Kvesietes Ge, ae ; ‘ " ‘ > r Lape ae ISD. ges opet TRESS TORO D gee MOAR to bal der ok, » eed, lhe eag lc, habe ‘ “pain ttig: ‘ Ee reres that “e RY a 1,448 aire heles al ohe 4 5” stige sey Prades iibbennetscien MER VERT ANE Stk Sete fry PR wrhsae PWS poets ew ) Nod hak et hae eh al} eae yeeanee eee chchehak. cakacele Sohate 4 reat bosdeet es Letter ore ue ith tke ; rat ; ae hhedees of ee Gs ee os 7 4 “e : att wer 3 petri as oath ‘ x woe Ped win 94 % setebased ata zins Bed ote . - are es Penna Siete tte Giese Pecos aoe ats aye aeey ft é ns > + z] 3 oe 3 ects Ss Meseietl siigereint 3a ete eearst wager - 4 obi it “4 fins! she seer one tee 2. ies She pireestrereinitts P < sheik Ze URS - 7 7 Z ser Oa) tetas hac ok alee Pine Sa seh ge be | S7b si ad vinuagen gh the? Sgasindas hgceds 6 had oe ale sna iis Gok 6b oe yb aos ayaa SEM 9B wotakee del 2 i an anersitst re ase < get : : oe apres oe a SPs ae sos Decree ote Seaom ee ; : Sarees, he = ; ; > En a SS Big mee I ays ieee Le. ear lenght wear aa iia? > = nae = > = Parra = ~ Fe é ~ é : 5 = ~ He i = Z F : ~ Fo ~ hae tig eas re 2 5 A > . = Ve : ait eat = - : | . $ : be ‘ ae = 7. . = = 2 - i = ~ ~~ 3 > 2 = Sepegicss + 2 =e ri - : > ° M: > ; x Zs E Z = = z z se ee is - 7 Ts 5 Z cg < j ' a : " , = ba - 7 « he é E 1 oan ; . i 7 - -~ AL f i ‘ : - 7 : \ J rt : =o F g ; = i ; : 7 7 1 7 : 4 i a - i : i Y - as ca : : , Fs 7 a ; | | 7 i} Yr , Ms - : / i "i P : 4 x 7 - ’ La ; i : > | ‘1 1 fi : r 7 F v , : ‘ aaa : : ' ;7 ; ; ; » al > Es i 5 j ’ * i 1 ih - ie h i : - = | Le) : if * = = - : ” ‘ J : ; : = ‘ i] 7 - , 7 1 5 a = : a i ct i i re a r a ; , i + d f: t= jee Se =F ies ba mec nilitti aie ae: - WASHINGTON “GOVERNMENT PRIN ES @ OF FICH 19 Og #3. PS AGH] CULTURE CKENZIE REGION ERR cme ~ _ — > a > wa - wy =e i | ee - ee a EL iwditig scape as bse DON Ln SNA e gp OU tM mai orpuate 5 CSE he ve ERS DA AF RO RESINS FREER Saas eG dete NO Ns NR TPN eR Hse PIR, x ROD —,, yon eae SS EE NS Wee NED FNC De Td NCL eSE eR Seno THE NORRIS PETERS Co., WASHINGTON, D, C. iT, S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE BUREAU OF BIOLOGICAL SURVEY NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA INO. 2 | Actual date of publication, October 26, 1908] @ A BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE ATHABASKA-MACKENZIEH REGION BY EDVV AR DA] PREBLE ASSISTANT, BIOLOGICAL SURVEY Prepared under the direction of Dice. HARD MeERRIAM CHIEF OF BUREAU OF BIOLOGICAL SURVEY OCIA —— (SSS SSS a a a i Sn ft he anette ili i) > | a eal til il ine fl y i p WES H A ay, WY) ay i Ty yoke WF re WASHINGTON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 00 3423 19 O'S North American Fauna, No. 27, U. S. Dopt. of Agriculture, Blological Survey. 100" 96" 92" 68" 64" BO" 76” 72" Plate |. I s SProLyn 1A 18 FINCAY, PRINCE Alsen? [cats wou = | Snavaevorenn Js [Sa Se Ph Rien id Arguasr ie) e Sh sees vemmeus Piscine o stig atl Pare al CAS, can” \ CHESTER FLL ee ee Oe Map oF THE ATHABASKA-MACKENZIE REGION. eres € oe tire, LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE, BroLoGicaL SURVEY, Washington, D. C., April 13, 1908. Sir: I have the honor to transmit herewith, for publication as North American Fauna No. 27, a report on the natural history of the Athabaska-Mackenzie region, by Edward A. Preble. It is based mainly on the results of two expeditions conducted by the author in the interests of the Biological Survey—the first in 1901, the second in 1903-4. The report was completed by Mr. Preble in the fall of 1906, but owing to the condition of the printing fund was not sent to the printer until April, 1908. During the interval a large num- ber of additional notes were incorporated, so that 1t now represents ihe state of knowledge of the region in the spring of 1908. The facts here brought together fill a broad gap in our knowledge of Boreal America, and connect the work previously done in the Hudson Bay region on the east with that in Alaska on the west, on which the Biological Survey is still engaged. Respectfully, | C. Harr Merriam, Chief, Biological Survey. Hon. James WILson, Secretary of Agriculture. eth ecg eh -CONTENTS: Page 22 LE EDDOR 25 25 Sos EST a ee ra ar 9 Itinerary .-.--.- eet cs to oe So Sele ae enna c ee saes oeteee 11 we EE IB OT QTL ee i ae a nec 11 Continuation of investigations during 1903 and 1904.......-- oe Ce eee 13 Physical geography and climatology of the Mackenzie Basin -...-..-----...- 16 Mem mo tokmVyiailen. 55. ke eo. os toe de eee vee ee eels 1 PreemacimmorAthabaska Lake ..........2..-.0s5. 0225.22 eae eles ees Ni 21 ES ESSE. LTR SIE TTS peg gO 23 Bereaiacmueonreteat slave Lake: .. 2. o.-s.-.. 2-2 oe -eec tee - 5 - e eee ee ace ee 26 2 LE LLL TRB YT UIE a 30 Maewietelcnzic River Valley ..........c2----2c--+- cee 3 peewee eee 32 . Seasonal phenomena in Mackenzie Valley, 1903-4 ....-.-..--.------ 37 Seasonal phenomena at Fort Simpson, winter 1903-4-.........-.- 37 Seasonal phenomena on Mackenzie below Fort Simpson, sum- OME WOSE Se Se ES eae Se Sea a ee 41 Siwmacmeomoneat bear Lake oo. 05222. ceace scent heceee tees eee ee se 42 LS LESS PSTD GTO ENC (Sa 46 mre ones ot the Athabaska-Mackenzie region.......---.----<-.------------ 49 LEG e BOMG ..oSo Se She eee eee eae ee ee ee 50 “ED SDIRL SI LADINO S ESE Se a ee 51 PLES 2 POMS. 55 Se SR eaten ee O2 Mmeoncexplorations and collections .............-...-.-+----------+----:- 54 Earliest explorers, Hearne and Mackenzie, 1770-1798......-.----------- 54 Remains koto, ,s1mpson, 1839 22226 o0. 2262.22... Se eee eee ene 57 Mhereranklim search expeditions, 1845-1855........-. 2.-......------.- 64 Menmicote s expedition, 1859, and its results-..............---.----- -+- 70 Mme Ee MMI ONS OO2—1 90 (aos = 2 San os be pede cote eceesee ese 74 General account of routes traversed by Biological Survey parties during 1901, LIE, Snel TOD eee Re ee eee re ee sate 85 Route between Edmonton, Alberta, and mouth of Mackenzie ........--- 85 bccn @Menghan Cede ne sy ts eae ie siee cect Seek lke fee 109 . Route between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes.............---------- 110 morons boundaries of region treated... 2.....--...-.2.------.--2----.--.---- 125 Mammals of the Athabaska-Mackenzie region .............----------------- 126 Sreds ot the Athabaska-Mackenzie region ..-...........2.--+---------- ee cene 2oll Reptiles and batrachians of the Athabaska-Mackenzie region.......--------- 500 | Wenes onthe Athabaska-Mackenzie region ...........-.-.-0--.--.-:--------- 502 Trees and shrubs of the Athabaska-Mackenzie region ..............--------- 515 mipliovraphy....2.....-.: See e Sen nets ae Nye wee i Oe ee er 535 12 JOS ee a ere SEE SE ah ce Cog 559 5 ILLUSTRATIONS. PLATES. Page. Puate J. Map of Athabaska-Mackenzie region ...........--..--- Frontispiece II. Map of life zones Athabaska-Mackenzie region....-.--------- 50 Ill. Fig. 1.—Main channel of Athabaskaat Grand Rapid. Fig. 2.— waver bank of Athabaska at Grand Rapid-.--2..2...-.-4-..- 88 IV. Fig. 1.—Fort Chipewyan, Athabaska Lake. Fig. 2.—Shore of Athabaska near Fort McMurray. Fig. 3.—Athabaska Land- BYR os ey eg Ce aa ge I eee 88 V. Fig. 1.—Uprooted trees, result of landslip. Fig. 2,—View in muskeg. Fig. 3.—Slide terraces, Athabaska River ......-..- 92 VI. Fig. 1.—Road on Smith Portage. Fig. 2.—Grove of aspen poplars Mthabaska River 6: 06h oes ee ole 92 VII. Fig. 1.—Slave River near Smith Landing. Fig. 2.—Bank worn by current, Slave River. Fig. 3.—Foresting on island, VOWGIRO AVG INCRs sete cee Wee woe eee ee fo 96 VIII. Fig. 1.—Fort Smith, Slave River. Fig. 2.—Fort Resolution, Great Slave Lake. Fig. 3.—Hay River post, Great Slave JERE, aes GI Ss aS aS eter er el a 96 IX. Fig. 1.—Summit Loon Island, Great Slave Lake. Fig. 2.—Bay near Fort Rae. Fig. 3.—Fort Rae, Great Slave Lake......- 100 X. Fig. 1.—Fort Simpson, Mackenzie River. Fig. 2.—Fort Provi- dence, Mackenzie River. Fig. 3.—Camp of Slavey Indians MC OG HOU ROVIGeN CC as aan lec ks ee UL 43 100 XI. Fig. 1.—Mount Camsell from Mount Tha-on’-tha. Fig. 2.— Mount Tha-on’-tha from mouth Nahanni River............ 104 XII. Fig. 1.—Summit Mount Tha-on’-tha. Fig. 2.—Junction of Nahanniand: Mackenzie: 02.5.2 -. 22.35.22? pe ae Ne ce 104 XIII. Fig. 1.—Fort Good Hope, Mackenzie River. Fig. 2.—Fort Wrigley, Mackenzie River. Fig. 3.—Main buildings at Fort MieBbersonte ose. e eae Joe {SSE eee ae eee 108 XIV. Fig. 1.—Muskeg pond, height of land. Fig. 2.—Lake and Mountam country mear Lake St..Croix 2202-2 2.2 225. 8. 108 XV. Fig. 1.—Rapid near MacTavish Bay. Fig. 2.—Rapid on owermGrandimuRiverce us solace oe ee 118 XVI. Fig. 1.—Sandy bay near Leith Point. Fig. 2.—Rocky shore west of McVicar Bay. Fig. 3.—Semibarren shore near Leith TPR oe a DSO GA We os Gar ee ee coeee 118 XVII. Fig. 1.—-Biological Survey camp near Leith Point. Fig. 2.— Shoreroncandy bay west of MeVicar Bay ....-....2....-..- 122 XVIII. Fig. 1.—Bank of upper Bear River. Fig. 2.—Trapper’s cabin near Fort Franklin. Fig. 3.—Mount Charles, Bear River.. 122 lord é 8 ILLUSTRATIONS. ; Page PuaTtE XIX. Map of distribution of Barren Ground caribou ae arc- HiCus) . 05-22 sel one ins ee on er 158 XX. Map of distribution of Parry marmot ( Citellus parr. vi) and re- lated forms ......----2.-..2204-. 0525. ee ee 162 XXI. Fig. 1.—Snare set for rabbit (Lepus americanus). Fig. 2.— Rabbit in snare. Fig. 3.—White spruce denuded by rabbits.. 200 XXII. Fig. 1.—Lynx (Lynx canadensis) in snare. Fig. 2.—Snare set for lynx -.l.06 25.2202 ee 210 XXIII. Fig. 1.—Nest and eggs Arctic great horned owl (Bubo v. sub- arcticus). Fig. 2.—Nests of chif swallow (Petrochelidon lunifrons)..-....-- 222.2 2ees eee ee ee Sie XXIV. Fig. 1.—White spruce near Leith Point. Fig 2.—Dwartfed trees, upper slopes Mount Tha-on/’-tha?=22 = 225s 518 XXV. Fig. 1.—Mat of Dryas integrifolia. Fig. 2.—Wild roses (Rosa actcularis) .. 22-22 sess oc Se Cee ee eo 528 TEXT FIGURES. 1, Athabaska River near ‘La Biche: Rivers. 2322222. e550 ere 7 2. A brulé or fire-swept forest, Athabaska River]. 22 ssose see eee 18 3. Valley of‘stream filled with ice.) 2.2 225 ee : 42 4, Fort Anderson, Anderson River. (From sketch by Petitot)......_.. 72 5. Bowlder-paved shore, Athabaska, River. 222222 -— 3.2 eee 89 6. Roche Trempe-l’eau, or Rock by the Riverside....................-- 104 7. Bear Rock, at.mouth of Bear River. 2-224 3 sae 105 8. Entrance to Ramparts, Mackenzie River...-....----- Re be ne 106 9. Lower end of Ramparts, Mackenzie River... . 2212-22222 2 107 10. Map of former distribution of elk (Cervus canadensis)..........----- 129 11. Man of distribution of moose (Alces americanus) .....-....---------- Le 12. Map of former distribution of bison (Bison bison and B.b. athabascae). 144 13. Map of distribution of musk-ox ( Ovibos moschatus).........----- aaa lal 14. Seales of cones collected by red squirrel (Sciurus hudsonicus).....---- ial 15. Nesting pond of red-throated loon ( Gavia stellata) .......- Pea Meas 258 16. Creeping juniper (Juniperus'sabina). 22232 eee 519 No. 27, NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA, October, 1908. A BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE ATHABASKA- ~ MACKENZIE REGION. By Epwarp A. PREBLE, INTRODUCTION. The greater part of Boreal America falls naturally into three great regions—the region tributary to Hudson Bay, that drained by the Mackenzie and its tributary rivers, and that whose waters unite to form the Yukon. The present report deals with the natural history, especially the higher vertebrates, of the second of these great areas. Though not offering to the student of geographic distribution so many problems as the Alaska region, where the various combinations of boreal, humid, and alpine conditions have resulted in the differ- entiation of many well-marked races, the region drained by the Mac- kenzie in many respects is the most interesting of these great natural divisions. Many mammals, some of them among the most valuable of the fur-bearing species, range over it, and also extend over large portions of adjoining areas. Within its borders live the last wild herds of that all but extinct species, the American bison, while an- other equally notable ruminant, the musk-ox, abounds on its Barren Grounds, where probably it is destined to make its last stand. In the spring, when its rivers and swamps are freed from the grasp of the long Arctic winter, the region becomes the resort of millions of birds which hasten to breed within its borders. These include repre- sentatives, and in some cases the bulk of the individuals, of most of the migratory game birds, which are of great economic importance in the United States, where many of them winter. Though explored nearly a century later than Hudson Bay and consequently not furnishing so many species new to science (for many animals first described from Hudson Bay are common to both 9 10 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. regions), the interior region richly repaid an examination of its zoological wealth. As is often the case, the desire for the promotion of trade, here evidenced by the long search for a feasible Northwest Passage, played an important part in the exploration of the region. In the narratives of the hardy pioneers of the North are recorded many observations on the native animals, enabling the later student to compare the present and former status of many species. The first white man to enter the Mackenzie region was Samuel Hearne, of the Hudson’s Bay Company, who in the years 1770 and 1771 made a journey on foot from Fort Prince of Wales (now Churchill) on Hudson Bay, to the mouth of Coppermine River. Nearly twenty years elapsed before another explorer penetrated be- yond Great Slave Lake. In 1789 Alexander Mackenzie, of the North- west Company, an early rival of the Hudson’s Bay Company, fol- lowed to its mouth the great river which now bears his name, thus being the second white man to set eyes on this part of the Arctic Ocean. Following his notable exploration was a period of thirty years, during which our knowledge of the geography and natural history of that part of Arctic America remained at a standstill. Then, with the first journey of Franklin, in 1820, began a series of explora- tions which extended over a period of about thirty years, in connec- tion with which the study of the natural history and geography of the country was carried on as systematically as the time and resources of the explorers allowed. During these various journeys, the zoologi- cal results of which were published both in systematic works and in the narratives of the various explorations, the sum of knowledge con- cerning the natural history of the region was greatly increased. In 1859 Robert Kennicott visited the Mackenzie region and re- mained three vears. That gifted naturalist, sent north in the interests of science by Professor Baird, of the Smithsonian Institution, so im- pressed the various officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company with whom he came in contact that they forthwith became zoological collectors, and during the next few years sent to the Smithsonian Institution thousands of mammals, birds, eggs, and other specimens, in this brief period probably adding more to our knowledge of the natural history of this part of the great Northland than had been accumulated since it was first entered. Unfortunately Kennicott was called to other fields, where he died in 1866, and no report on this work was ever published. Still, during the thirty-odd years since these collections were made, many additions to knowledge have resulted from the elaboration by others of the extensive material thus accumulated. Although much had been accomplished, yet at the close of the nine- teenth century much remained to be done. The unprecedented activ- ity in the study of the geographic distribution and variation of animals, the migration of birds, and the economic relations of the ~ 1908. ] EXPEDITION OF 1901. itu various species to man, displayed during the last decade or two in other parts of North America, rendered a more detailed study of this northern region desirable. The recent increase in knowledge of the zoology of Labrador, the Hudson Bay region, and Alaska left the great interior region drained mainly by the Mackenzie (see Frontis- piece) the most neglected large area in North America. The need of material from this area became so urgent that the Biological Sur- vey, in the early spring of 1901, determined to send there one of its trained field naturalists to obtain representative collections of the mammals, birds, and plants. This was the more necessary since the early material, consisting mainly of alcoholic specimens or skins with- out flesh measurements, is not now in a condition satisfactory for comparison. As it was evident that only a part of the region could be satisfactorily examined in a single season, it was determined to make first a reconnaissance of the region about Athabaska and Great Slave lakes. Accordingly, in the spring of 1901 I was detailed for this service, accompanied, as on the trip to Hudson Bay, by my brother, Alfred E. Preble, then of Tufts College, Massachusetts. ITINERARY. EXPEDITION OF 1901. As on our previous trip,’ arrangements were made with the Hud- son’s Bay Company, whose trading posts are scattered over nearly the whole of British America, to furnish subsistence and means of transportation. Realizing that it was desirable to start as early in the season as possible, in order that the time of arrival of the migra- tory birds could be noted, we left Washington on April 23, 1901, and reached Edmonton, Alberta, the termination of our railroad journey, on April 29, having stopped over a day at Winnipeg, Manitoba, to confer with the officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company. After per- fecting plans and securing supplies we left Edmonton on the after- noon of April 30 for Athabaska Landing, a small settlement and trading post on Athabaska River, nearly 100 miles distant by wagon road to the north of Edmonton, where our journey by canoe was to begin. 3 Because of the marshy character of the country, which had been liberated only a short time from the grasp of the semiarctic winter, the roads were almost impassable, and five days were consumed in reaching Athabaska Landing. The Hudson’s Bay Company’s scow, sent annually to Fort Chipewyan on the opening of navigation, was ready to depart, and on May 6 we left Athabaska Landing by canoe in company with the scow, on which a part of our heavy baggage @See N. Am. Fauna, No. 22, 1902. 12 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. © [No. 27. was shipped, as the rapids which begin about 155 miles below can not be run by a heavily loaded canoe. Being delayed somewhat by stormy weather, and by portaging at the Grand Rapid, we reached Fort McMurray on May 14, and the mouth of the Athabaska three days later. Athabaska Lake to the eastward of the delta and the portion between the mouth of the Athabaska and Fort Chipewyan had been open only a few days, and was still full of floating ice, which under the influence of the strong current was hurrying toward the outlet. The traverse among the grinding floes to Fort Chipewyan was made during the night of May 17. Here we remained until June 5, moving camp twice in order to work the different kinds of ground in the vicinity. On June 5 we started down Rocher River, and entering Slave River, as the stream is called after uniting with the Peace, descended it to Smith Landing, stopping for a few days at several favorable points. We left Smith Landing June 18, and crossing the 16-mile portage to Fort Smith, spent ten days investigating the fauna in that vicinity. Leaving Fort Smith on June 29, we descended Slave River to Great Slave Lake, collecting a little on the way, and reached Fort Resolution on July 4. Here we worked in company until July 9, when I left my brother to examine the place more thoroughly, and crossed to Fort Rae, making collections on the way, and arriving July 18. The next ten days I spent in the vicinity of Fort Rae, securing a good representative series of the small mammals and many inter- esting birds. : On July 29 the steamer Wrigley, returning from the mouth of the Mackenzie, reached Fort Rae. The next day at daylight I went aboard and arrived at Fort Resolution the following morning, where I was joined by my brother. With our united collections we left Fort Resolution on the afternoon of August 1, when the Wrigley resumed her journey, and steaming continuously, except when a stop was made to ‘ wood up,’ reached Fort Smith on August 3. On August 5 we crossed Smith Portage to Smith Landing, where the Hudson’s Bay Company’s steamer Grahame, which ples between that point and Trort McMurray, lay moored to the bank. A stop of a day at Smith Landing was improved by adding to our collection. Leaving on the afternoon of August 6, we reached Fort Chipewyan on the evening of the next day, and Fort McMurray on the evening of August 10. We left Fort McMurray on August 12 on one of the company’s scows, by means of which the furs are transported to Athabaska Landing by tracking, and traveled slowly up the Athabaska, collect- ing when possible, and reaching Grand Rapid on August 20. Here, the rapids being passed, we obtained a canoe in order to have a better opportunity to collect than was afforded when traveling on scows. The weather was very favorable, and we reached Athabaska Landing 1908.] EXPEDITION OF 1903-1904. a a on August 29, two days ahead of the transport, having obtained many interesting specimens on the way. Being obliged to wait for our baggage, we utilized the time collecting in the vicinity. Leaving Athabaska Landing with our baggage and specimens on September 1, we reached Edmonton on the afternoon of September 4, shipped our collections, and as soon as practicable left for Washington, where we arrived on September 15. CONTINUATION OF INVESTIGATIONS DURING 19038 AND 1904. In the spring of 1903, the results of our work in 1901 having been elaborated but not published, I was sent to complete our work in the Mackenzie region. This was especially desirable, since on the previ- ous trip we had penetrated only as far as Great Slave Lake. On the second trip, in addition to my brother, I was accompanied by Merritt Cary, an assistant in the Biological Survey. We left Washington May 2, Edmonton May 11, and Athabaska Landing May 16. Collect- ing when opportunity afforded, but not stopping to do any detailed work, we reached Fort Chipewyan June 2 and Fort Resolution June 19. Here the party was divided, my brother and Cary proceeding to the Mackenzie and working there until obliged to start back with the southward trip of the boats, while I made a trip northward through almost unknown country to the eastern part of Great Bear Lake. My companions left on June 26, reaching Hay River the following day and remaining there until July 1. Thence they proceeded to Fort Providence, situated on the Mackenzie a few miles below the out- let of the lake, and there remained until July 8. Descending the Mackenzie past Fort Simpson, at the mouth of the Liard, they made their next stop at the mouth of Nahanni River, about 75 miles below the latter place. Here they spent several days, ascending a near-by mountain and obtaining many interesting and valuable specimens. They left this place July 19 and voyaged down the river to Fort Wrigley, where they remained until July 22, when the steamer W7i¢- ley arrived on her upward trip, and they were obliged to start on their return. Their journey to Athabaska Landing, where they arrived on September 2, was made by the same conveyances utilized on our pre- vious trip. Many interesting specimens and records were obtained during their return trip, especially along the Athabaska. The time from September 2 to 15 was spent on the river above Athabaska Land- ing, and good series of the smaller mammals and many desirable birds were obtained. In the meantime I had crossed Great Slave Lake to Fort Rae, accompanied by James MacKinlay, formerly of the Hudson’s Bay Company, and engaging two Fort Rae Indians as guides and canoe- men, had started northward for Great Bear Lake, following a chain of lakes and rivers by way of Lake St. Croix. It had been my intention 14 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. to cross by one of the Indian routes to the upper Coppermine and to descend that stream, but various circumstances rendered this impos- sible and I was obliged to take the shorter, more westerly route. Leaving Fort Rae on July 30, we traversed the remainder of the Northern Arm and its extension, Lake Marian, and on August 1 began the ascent of Grandin River, first explored and named by Petitot, a missionary who traveled a great deal in this region. Nu- merous rapids and the consequent portages made progress slow, and the height of land, 80 miles shghtly west of north of Fort Rae in a straight line, but much farther by the river, was reached August 6. Up to this time only a few small lakes had been traversed, but beyond our route lay mainly through large and small lakes, between which we sometimes made portages and sometimes followed the streams, now flowing northward toward Great Bear Lake. My guide turned back on August 22, and I reached Great Bear Lake, accompanied by Mr. MacKinlay and one Indian, three days later. Coasting along its sem1- barren southern shore, where we were sometimes delayed by northerly storms for days at a time, we reached its western extremity September 17. Ten days were spent near the site of Fort Franklin, the winter- ing station of Franklin’s second northern expedition, and here many desirable specimens were taken. Then we left for the Mackenzie, descending Great Bear River. Its rapid current bore us swiftly on our way, but the spray, freezing thickly on the paddles and gunwales, warned us that navigation would soon be closed. We reached Fort Norman, at the mouth of Bear River, on September 30, and there saw white faces for the first time since leaving Fort Rae two months before. | More than 3800 miles of upstream navigation still lay between us and Fort Simpson, where f intended wintering. We remained at Fort Norman, therefore, only long enough to secure provisions, and on October 2 commenced to track up the Mackenzie. During the first few days good progress was made, but snow soon began to fall almost nightly, making tracking slow and difficult. We reached Fort Wrigley on October 11, and left the next morning on the last stage of our journey, still confident of reaching Fort Simpson before navigation closed, although the indications pointed to a much earlier winter than usual. The snow, however, increased in depth, and on October 15, near Nahanni River, the ice began to drift in earnest. Two days were spent in struggling against it. On the morning of October 17 the water had become so thick with ice and slush that further progress was impossible. Accordingly the canoe was pulled up beyond high-water mark and camp was made, and accompanied by the Indian I pushed on to the fort on foot. We were still 50 miles from the post, were obliged to carry blankets and provisions, and, as walking was very difficult, we were nearly three days on the way. As 1908.] EXPEDITION OF 1903-1904. 15 soon as possible a dog sled was dispatched to our camp, and the lighter and more valuable articles were brought up to the post, while the remainder of the outfit was securely cached to await conditions more favorable for transportation. From October 20, 1903, to June 1, 1904, I remained at Fort Simp- son. A good collection of the winter birds and smaller mammals was made; and being in one place during the entire spring migration, I was able to secure many valuable notes and specimens. I had planned to make a trip down the Mackenzie in the summer and accordingly left Fort Simpson on June 1. Stopping for several days at Fort Norman and Fort Good Hope, and a shorter time at a few other points, I reached Fort McPherson, on the lower Peel, on July 1. Here I remained until the arrival of the steamer Wrigley on July 16. and on the following day started on my long homeward Journey. Steaming day and night, for there was nearly continuous daylight, I reached Fort Simpson on July 26, Fort Resolution August 1, and Fort Smith August 3. Thence, by the same conveyances before utilized, I journeyed up the Slave and Athabaska, arrived at Athabaska Land- ing on September 1, and reached Edmonton September 4. From here I shipped my collections and as soon as possible left for Washington. During the progress of my work in the north I was assisted in many ways by numerous persons, to all of whom my cordial thanks are hereby extended. Acknowledgments are especially due to my field assistants, Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary, whose labors added so materially to the results obtained, and to J. W. Mills and H. W. Jones, of Fort Simpson, who in the spring of 1904 procured many specimens and notes, and have since sent me additional informa- tion. James MacKinlay also, who accompanied me on my Great Bear Lake trip, assisted by every means in his power. Through the cour- tesy of C. C. Chipman, commissioner of the Hudson’s Bay Company, arrangements were made to secure transportation and supplies at the company’s posts throughout the region. I wish to make acknowledg- ment to all the emplovees of that company with whom I came in contact. Their number makes it impracticable to mention names. To the other traders, and to the missionaries, I am also under many obligations. I must refer also to Roderick MacFarlane, of Winni- peg, whose name occurs so often in these pages, and whose vast fund of information, the result of many years’ experience in the north, has been at my disposal. During the preparation of this report I have been assisted mate- rially by the officials of the United States National Museum and the Smithsonian Institution, especially by Gerrit S. Miller, jr., and Robert’ Ridgway, in charge of mammals and birds, respectively, who have given me free access to the collections under their control. T have also received much help and encouragement from various mem- 16 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. bers of the Biological Survey. The photographs (except the one of the lynx, on Plate X XIJ, which was contributed by J. W. Mills) were taken by members of the Biological Survey—some by Merritt Cary, the greater number by myself. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY AND CLIMATOLOGY OF THE MACKENZIE BASIN. The Mackenzie Basin is here to be understood, in a broad sense, as comprising the area drained by the Mackenzie and its tributaries. and in addition a large section to the north and northeastward of Great Slave and Great Bear lakes, drained by the Coppermine and other smaller rivers tributary to the Arctic Ocean. Thus con- sidered, it comprises a vast region in the northern part of North America, with an area of nearly 700,000 square miles, bounded roughly as follows: On the north by the Arctic Ocean; on the east by the valleys of the Great Fish, Thelon, Telzoa, and Churchill rivers; on the south by the Churchill and Saskatchewan valleys; and on the west by the main range of the Rocky Mountains. (See Frontispiece.) The principal lakes of this region form a more or less connected system, which is a part of a series extending from Lake Superior to the Arctic Sea. These lakes le along the junction of the primitive or - granitic and the newer limestone formations, usually heading in the primitive belt and outletting in the limestone district. They are of irregular shape, usually sending long arms eastward into the primi- tive formation and north and south along the junction of the two systems, though in some cases the southern arms have been filled by the sediment-bearing streams which enter them. In addition to the large lakes thousands of smaller ones are scattered over the entire region. With the exception of a large area at the north, mainly outside the actual drainage basin of the Mackenzie, this region for the most part is covered with woods—the great transcontinental coniferous forest. The principal trees of this forest are the white and black spruces, whose ranges are coextensive with its limits, and the canoe birch, tamarack, aspen and balsam poplars, Banksian pine, and balsam fir, which are common in the southern part of the belt, and which terminate, counting from the north, in about the order given. With these are associated, generally in the form of undergrowth, a va- riety of shrubs, some of which, also, have a continuous distribution through the forest zone, while others are more or less restricted in range.¢ For convenience of reference this great region may be divided into several areas: The Athabaska Valley; the basin of Athabaska Lake; “ See list of trees and shrubs, p. 515, for detailed limits of range of the several species. | 1908.] PHYSICAL GEOGRAPH Y—ATHABASKA VALLEY. Lf the Peace River Valley, including the Slave; the basin of Great Slave Lake; the Liard River Valley; the Mackenzie Valley proper; the basin of Great Bear Lake; and the region to the north and east of that body of water, and drained by the Anderson, Coppermine, and smaller rivers which enter the Arctic Ocean. These areas wili be considered in the order given. _ Fie. 1.—Left bank Athabaska River near La Biche River. THE ATHABASKA VALLEY. | The Athabaska River rises in the Rocky Mountains near Mount | Brown, at an altitude of about 5,700 feet, and pursues a northeasterly _and northerly course for nearly 600 miles to Athabaska Lake, falling | 1n this distance some 5,000 feet, and being interrupted by several series | ofrapids. In the first 300 miles of its course it falls about 4,000 feet, | and receives in succession Baptiste River from the west, the McLeod /and Pembina from the south, and the Lesser Slave, draining the large lake of that name, from the west. Below its confluence with the last-named stream, the Athabaska turns southeastward for some 44131—No. 27—08——2 18 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. | 50 miles and then resumes its northerly course. In the course of the next 150 miles it receives in succession La Biche River from the east (fig.°1); Quito or Calling River from the west; Big Mouth Brook from the east; Pelican River from the west; and House River from the east. Just below the mouth of the last river the Athabaska strikes a range of low hills, and in forcing a passage through them is deflected eastward, and for a distance of about 75 miles contains many rapids, falling in this distance some 400 feet. At the lower end of this stretch it receives the waters of Clearwater River, its principal tributary below Lesser Slave River. The Clearwater rises on the height of land between the Churchill and the Athabaska, and, pur- suing a nearly straight easterly course for some 150 miles, mingles its limpid waters with the sediment-laden flood of the latter stream. In_ Fic. 2.—A brulé or fire-swept forest, Athabaska River, below Grand Rapid. the lower part of its course the Clearwater occupies a deep valley | and is very rapid. Thirty or forty miles above its mouth it is joined by the Pembina, a stream of about equal volume. Below the mouth of the Clearwater the Athabaska pursues a nearly direct course northward, receiving Red, Moose, and Tar rivers from the west, and enters Athabaska Lake through a number of channels - inclosing alluvial islands. Besides the rivers mentioned, scores of lesser streams enter the Athabaska throughout its course. The country drained by the Athabaska is mainly a rolling plain, and with the exception of a few areas of semiprairie land is well , wooded with a forest composed mainly of spruce, fir, pine, tamarack, poplar, birch, and willow. ) (7) | Oct. 24 | Oct. 29 | Nov. 3 GuieAp ray (>) | Dee. 21 | Oct. 8 | Oct. 19-) Oct: 25 Pee a | axes ES ee OSS el ene Apr. 16 | 22). a | @ Did not come. > None passed. The climate of Athabaska Lake is not radically different from that of other parts of the Mackenzie region which are practically removed from the influence of the warm Pacific winds. Though it hes at a low altitude, the proximity of the lake to the Barren Grounds, from which winds are frequent, keeps its average temperature rather low. An occasional warm west wind slightly tempers the winter climate. The Peace and Athabaska break up at their mouths about the Ist of May, but the neighboring part of the lake usually does not open until about the middle of May, and the eastern part prob- 1908.]_ - PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY—PEACE RIVER VALLEY. 23 ably not before June. The lake usually closes at Fort Chipewyan some time in November. The following table illustrates the temperature conditions at Fort Chipewyan, Athabaska Lake: Summaries of temperatures taken at Fort Chipewyan during the year 1900. 2 eat Extremes. Month: Mean daily Mean daily) RT eae Monthly eee | eatHan loan gna ‘Maximum. | Minimum. ee [rhe SS: n= 1689 12.5| —36.0 12.2 IPGIDTUIGU Ae eS Se a Te| =P 2 | 7.0 —42.0 = 1409 pe 19092). We astan ai Ocle = meats 419 LL a See 49.4 | 29.6 66.0 | 8.5 | 39.5 I pene 2 =------. 61.8 | 41.9 70.0 | 25.5 51.8 JMO RS Se ee 68.1 | 48.5 81.0 | 39.0 | 58.3 PWS tk ee 70.0 | 51.0 79.0 38.0 60.5 OMI EUIS pot 68.3 | 47 7 83.0 31.5 58.0 pe eae eH eS 55.5 | 37.6 68.0 24.0 | 46.6 CC NEP ee 43.4 | 28.0 58.0 15.0 BAT LO DTP SIRE Ni ee ae ee 16.7 | iL 40.0 1820 9.3 IEC ETN Cheers ae a 12.8 = Lali || 29.0 —34.0 5x5 SUERTE a gr Dee 83.0 —42.0 28.5 The following table has been compiled from records taken at Fort Chipewyan, Athabaska Lake, probably by R. MacFarlane. Dates of seasonal events at Fort Chipewyan, Athabaska Lake. Seasonal event. 1883. | 1884. 1885. | 1886. | 1887. SMO EPROM be OGeC = s2. 2 2 ee Mar. 22 | Mar. 29 | Apr. 5 Cae AseOOSesUIES EMO LG Ce ae ee See | Apr. 9°| Apr. 13°) Apres 11 | Apr. 11 COSPLAY Le a a nn eA DiS TOR PATS eA a eA Div 12 sh Mare 25 TP TE OVERS! LETEGTE. TOYO EG Lc a a [a | May 8 |.Apr. 30] May 8 | May 2 TRU D IMR TAS RE: TEV OC LS a ea Gm (6 [0 ees (pe ene | Apr. 23 | Apr. 26 SHOE AO OSeTTTS tem Ole Cae. Se ee ee | Seen eee NM aivael S| Ed Oe == Apra as Snowabumtinevanrived trom northe =. .2 Oct elCainO cia 44 |" Octhe l|sO cts: 9) |= es Ppa saneareived i:om: North. — =.= 2 Over, Tob) Oxegs US eee [et eee | Oct. 28 THE PEACE RIVER VALLEY. Peace River is the largest of the affluents of the Athabaska-Mac- kenzie system, and being in fact much larger than the Athabaska, may be considered the main river. It rises on the western side of the Rocky Mountains and is already a good-sized stream when it breaks through that range. Its principal feeders west of the range are the Finlay and the Parsnip. The former river rises near the headwaters of the Skeena and flows southeasterly. The Parsnip rises close to some of the head feeders of the Fraser, at an altitude of about 2,500 feet, and flows northward, uniting with the Finlay in latitude 56°. Here the river turns eastward through the mountains, the pass being about 1,600 feet above sea level, and the mountains on each side rising some 4,500 feet higher. The tree limit on these mountains occurs at about 4,000 feet. 24 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. -[NO. 27. From the confluence of the Finlay and the Parsnip, the Peace flows in a general easterly direction for some 300 miles to its junction with the Smoky, falling in this distance a little less than 800 feet. The country through which it flows may be considered as a plateau, in which it has excavated a rather deep valley. A number of streams, Pine River from the south being one of the largest, discharge their waters into it. Back from the river the country is mainly level or rolling, and is thinly wooded. Smoky River is the largest tributary of the Peace. Its principal branches rise on the eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains, and it drains a large extent of thinly wooded and prairie country. Below the mouth of the Smoky the Peace turns and pursues a winding though general northerly course nearly to Fort Vermilion. It is bordered at first by steep sandstone cliffs, but its valley gradu- ally becomes wider and shallower. Extensive plains, comparatively level -and clothed with grass or a sparse growth of poplars, border it on both sides. North of Fort Vermilion this character of country is said to extend to the valleys of Hay and Buffalo rivers. The coun- try between Peace River and Great Slave Lake, however, is very im- perfectly known. : Between Fort Vermilion and the Peace-Athabaska Delta the Peace is very broad and contains many wooded islands. Red and Loon rivers, coming from the south, are its principal tributaries. The country drained by them has been alluded to briefly in describing the Athabaska. (See p. 19.) Vermilion Falls, a formidable rapid, inter- rupts navigation a short distance above the mouth of Red River, and another, usually called the ‘ Little Rapid, occurs at some distance below. The Quatre Fourches, an offshoot of the Peace, connects that stream | with Athabaska Lake, and a few miles below, Rocher River also joins the Peace. These streams traverse the Peace-Athabaska Delta, and their currents run to or from Peace River, being dependent on the relative heights of the water in Peace River and Athabaska Lake. (See p. 98.) The delta isa vast marsh, partially wooded with poplars and willows and studded with hundreds of reedy lakes. Below the delta the combined stream, here called the Slave, turns abruptly northward and flows for a distance of about 70 miles in a general northerly direction to the Smith Rapids. It is a broad, rather deep stream with a moderate current, and its low banks are well wooded with spruce, poplar, and willow. It receives in this stretch no tributaries of importance, but drains many outlying marshes. In latitude 60° it cuts through “a gneissic spur from the Laurentian district to the east,” forming the Smith Rapids, some 16 miles in length. Below here it flows in a rather irregular manner for about 175 miles in a general northwesterly direction to Great 1908.] | PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY—PEACE RIVER VALLEY. AS Slave Lake. In this stretch it hasan average width of about half a mile, and its banks are high at first, but gradually diminish. The country bordering it is level and mainlv well wooded, but to the west are extensive tracts of prairie, especially in the region of Salt River, its principal tributary, which enters the Slave from the west 16 miles below the rapids. Slave River enters Great Slave Lake through an extensive delta, in forming which it has silted up an extensive arm of the lake. The Peace River Valley, as here considered, exhibits the greatest diversity of climatic conditions at the same season of any of the re- gions now under discussion, excepting possibly the Liard River Valley. Its extreme upper portion, lying at a comparatively low altitude and near the Pacific, has a relatively mild winter climate, while its lower part at the same season is surrounded by almost Arctic conditions. Its middle part, just east of the mountains, seems to be characterized by violent extremes of temperature, Judging by the figures for Dun- vegan, the only post for which I have been able to obtain a complete record. Fer the extreme upper and lower pertions, exact data being wanting, data for near-by localities may be substituted. Thus the temperatures for Stuart Lake, a locality lying close to and at about the same altitude as the extreme headwaters of the Parsnip, probably represent approximately the conditions in the valley of the upper Peace. In the same way the table for Fort Chipewyan, elsewhere given (see p. 23), may be taken as an index of the climate of the lower Peace River proper, and that for Hay River, Great Slave Lake (see p- 28), as fairly representing the lower Slave. Summaries of temperatures taken at Stuart Lake, British Columbia, during the year 1900. Extremes. | MONTH Mean daily Mean daily | Monthly maximum.) Minimum. Maximum. Minimum. | mean. 18.6 3.4 | 44.0 99.7 11.0 14.1 = Babs 33.9 —38.6 | 5.5 23.1 DESe! 45.0 | —30.2 12.7 42.9 Dees 64.0 | 14.2 | 32.2 52.2 27 5 65.0 20.2 | 39.9 59.4 33.2 (hed 22, .2 46.3 64.4 38.3 81.0 31.2 | 51.3 59.5 35.3 70.0 TID) | 47.4 55.0 28.9 68.0 | 19.2 | 41.9 39.7 22.4 54.0 | Dales 31.( OTe ia eet eicartIS 43.0 | —27 4 | 19.5 30.0 | 15.8 43.0 | —15.6 | 22.9 au cst Pa eee tas 81.0 | —38.6 30.8 The ‘ chinook’ winds exert a powerful, though irregular, influence on the climate of the middle Peace River Valley and, together with a favorable soil, allow a considerable amount of agricultural de- velopment. 26 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. two27. The following table shows the monthly extremes and means of temperature at Fort Dunvegan “from observations made during — 1880-84 : ” Summaries of temperatures taken at Fort Dunvegan, Peace River, during 1880-1884. Extremes. Extremes. Month: M Sime tes sei Monthly | Re _| Monthly Maximum.| Minimum, | ™¢@?- | Month. Maximum.| Minimum. | ™¢€2"- JAnWanyeo eee 48 —62 =i 9) 4) Aieustas ssn 90: 3l 57.4 HMebrwWaryee see 45 —55 2.6 || September___- 78 22 45.7 Mian chy sical 55 —52 20%3"|| OCtobersunaums U2, — 4 31.6 SG Gi en) Wess et Oh 73 —27 35.1 || November-____. 58 —26 16.5 Mayes oe aie 79 20 50.1 || December_____. 46 —30 — 4.9 Jie Sees ees 87 30 55.9 a ULL ye See ee 87 34 60.5 Yeanisae 90 —62 29.9 J The following table relating to Fort St. John, Peace River, gives the dates of opening and closing of the river, and other phenomena dependent on the climatic conditions, during a series of years: Dates of occurrence of certain events at Fort St. John, Peace River. s River First Potatoes Potatoes Tee drift-| River Year. opened BOCse lanted har- in closed 5 seen. Dp ‘| vested. 8. : WO52o2 etl SSS ea a SIS Se a ar lg | Nov.12 | Dec. 10 OOO J sete ees Melts Geet Maen remeron team Apr. 19 | Apr. 7 | Apr. 30 | Sept.25 | Nov. 7 | Dee. 2 HL) OW (ental erly tala ee pee ROB r= oti Nae eh a outa, Apr Qi.) oo ee SI ee a |e Nov. 8 | Dee. 3 CL SG Bete EAS EE a ERE Cn Rael elle aa eee ADT. 20) 3] Sept.30 | Nov. 7 | Nov.1 1 L2 (G10 NRE Nee ales eee mea lee AA aC ea | ADOT DB fs Yc INJOW og Gh ee INCOR GW 2 beret oi hee ARE me nga reece Penn ene hay te Alpr. (26) )) 2 ea Seeder [seine SO ee STS (lect oe ee ee oe ea. haar on ae See ASPY DBE | ee a Sa ea eee Peertcennmrase Nov.10 | Nov. 15 I Lot fo pind ahaa Ne estan nego nar Caley Py sco ea LY AVY 9 os a er ae cg Nov. 8 | Nov. 28 ea pee es Core arabia CM mie ene eR ge ADT :238 |S Roe eee Apr. 26 | Sept.2 Nov. 4 | Nov. 30 EL eS 2k eee OS ee ON rca Apr. 191) Apr. 215 May a5 iS Gite 22a Citeue silane BLES ee ae A ey Apr. 216'3) Ap hs ile Mia yrs Ss cacti ene aa ey cy ye eC a fete yaad eee ie one et i Ua ere cl re ADT. 26 Vc ss Sa ae ee a Rega IDO, -B SUSY et SG malay oy So aero ein ae ele ne tyme ta PS VB YM a se Gc pe | cr Nov. 16 PRE OE LAO yaaa 5 Gaaetiis hand Ze eo ees Ree har. BO) ate chs a | ae | a Novy. 24 3 S19) 0 een acinar ee pe eee oe a eS Apr’. 30 one ese8 a a | eae ecg Dec. 21 Hf SESS ee a he ae he ee eae es Apr U7 |s2 se bes So | ee ae [ao em gece | Re nS eee THE BASIN OF GREAT SLAVE LAKE. Great Slave Lake may be briefly described by quoting in part the account of R. G. McConnell: Great Slave Lake, so far as known, has a superficial area, including islands, of about 10,400 square miles, and ranks fifth among the great lakes of the continent. No complete survey of its shores, however, has yet been made, and our knowledge of its geography is still confined to the disconnected explorations of Hearne, Mackenzie, Franklin, Back, and Petitot.2 These give the lake a total length from east to west of about 288 miles. Its width is variable, and in one place exceeds sixty miles. It is situated along the western margin of the Archzean axis, and had originally the form of a great cross with one arm pene- 4Jt is exceeded in size by Superior (381,500), Huron (23,800), Michigan (22,300), and Great Bear (11,400). [McConnell. ] 6The less known eastern part of the lake has been carefully examined recently (1899) by Dr. Robert Bell and J. Macintosh Bell, of the Canadian Geological Survey, but, as far as I know, the report on the work has not yet been published. 1908.] PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY—GREAT SLAVE LAKE. a7 trating the crystalline schists, while two others stretched north and south along the junction of these with the newer sedimentaries, and the fourth ex- tended over the flat-lying Devonian to the west. The southern arm, as stated before, has been silted up by Slave River. The eastern or archzean portion of the lake has an irregular outline, and is dotted with rocky islands. It is reported to be much deeper than the western part, and its water is exceedingly clear and limpid. * «x * ‘The northern arm is situated nearly opposite the mouth of Slave River, and is narrow and filled with islands. At its upper end it contracts, and opens out again under the name of Lake Brochet, which communicates in turn by a short river with Marten Lake. Yellow Knife River, at the mouth of which old Fort Providence was situated, and which Franklin ascended on his way to the Coppermine, enters this arm from the east. The [western] arm of Great Slave Lake rests on the flat-lying Devonian limestones, and is wider, and presents a greater expanse of water, unbroken by islands, than either of the other divisions. Its southern shore has a gently sinuous outline, and is characterized by low banks and gently shelving beaches, which are often thickly strewn with boulders. The banks <«s pointed out by Richardson are often built up of drift timber. The northern shore is more uneven, and is indented by several deep bays. The water of Great Slave Lake between Slave River and the Mackenzie, is never entirely clear, as a portion of the sediment brought down by the former stream is held in suspension and drifts slowly eastward for a hundred miles. The impurity of the water is especially noticeable along the southern shore, and the shallowness of this part of the lake is undoubtedly caused by the partial settlement of the suspended material.@ Great Slave Lake hes wholly within the forested region, though some of its eastern aflluents drain large areas of treeless country. Its southwestern shores, being watered by rivers coming from the south and southwest, are well wooded, while the northern shores, exposed for most of the year to cold winds from the north and watered by colder streams, are poorly wooded. The soil conditions, also, being more favorable on the southern side of the lake, exert a marked influ- ence on the foresting. The Eastern Arm of the lake, however, is largely removed from these modifying influences, and the conditions on its northern and southern borders are more nearly uniform. Several streams, whose courses and drainage are practically unknown, enter this arm on the southern side. Hoarfrost River, draining Walmsley Lake, and Lock- hart River, carrying the waters of Mackay, Aylmer, Clinton-Colden, and Artillery lakes, which lie almost wholly in the Barren Grounds, fall into this arm near its eastern extremity. The country bordering its northern shore is rocky and sparsely wooded, and contains a great many lakes, but the streams flowing thence into Great Slave Lake are few in number and comparatively insignificant. The Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake, as before stated, lies along the junction of the primitive and the newer formations. Its eastern shore, therefore, is mainly composed of granite, while its western @ Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., IV, p. 65 D et seq., 1891. oe 28 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. — [No, 27. border is of limestone. Yellowknife River, a considerable stream. which rises near the Coppermine and drains a number of lakes, enters this arm on its eastern side. At the head of the Northern Arm, in an expansion named Lake Marian, or Lac du Brochet, Grandin River discharges its waters. This stream has several branches, the main one being Marten River, which forms the outlet of several large bodies of water, of which Marten Lake is the largest. Grandin River proper descends from a few small lakes near the low height of land to the northward and receives from the northeast, above its junction with Marten River, a small unexplored stream. The country drained by these rivers 1s mainly rocky and poorly wooded. To the westward of the Northern Arm and north of the main body of Great Slave Lake lies a low, broad plateau, dotted with many lakes and muskegs. It contains no rivers of consequence and is mainly rather thinly wooded, though a number of large prairies occur in the western part, north of the outlet of Great Slave Lake. The country to the southward of the main part of Great Slave Lake is mainly flat and swampy. Eagle Mountain, a low, isolated range, lies a short distance south of the extreme western end of the lake. The principal stream is Hay River, which rises close to the height of land between the Nelson and the Peace, far to the south- west. The country drained by it is practically unknown, but is reported to be low and swampy and mainly well wooded, though it contains much grassy prairie, Hay River being said to mark the northern limit of this character of country. To the eastward of Hay River, Buffalo and Little Buffalo rivers enter the lake. So far as known the country drained by them is similar to that bor- dering Hay River. Slave River, the principal affluent of Great Slave Lake, has already been described. The main facts in regard to the climate of Great Slave Lake may be gathered by reference to the accompanying table of tempera- tures taken at Hay River post, at the mouth of the river of that name. Summaries of temperatures taken at Hay River, Great Slave Lake, during the year 1900. Month. Mean daily Mean daily | _ JBecinOe. Monthly MmMaxXimMum.) M1ipimum. | Maximum Minimum mean. TAMU Tyson eon Oh ore aly Wee em a SEO —26.9 5.0 | 47.0 —18.3 Me bi wativecs che8 2s ae eae alee ene he — 7.1 —29.5 6.0 —44.0 —18.3 ITT Chee aera cin ie DRE ie nee ee 15.6 S55 46.0 —44.,0 1.0 Je RE a a ey RR Te ST 47.8 22.9 68.0 5.0 35.3 IVE a VS ae tee ee le Donita ee en eee aR 56.4 34.7 72.0 20.0 45.6 Tue ees Me ee TRG, Sie ey SO 67.3 43.5 79.0 31.0 55.4 Jill yess alter Nie UR haa maa 72.1 49.3 85.0 42.0 60.7 INU US (eee eaetien Abt TARE Fee seca iRe es 68.8 46.9 83.0 32.0 57.9 S eptember sae seers Ihe aes ee ee 58.5 38.1 76.0 28 .0! 48.3 OCtobert ee wea Lis eee eee cane ees 40.3 22.6 61.0 8.0 31.5 ING VEIN Dorin wala on arieets nO NTGR ES 15.2 aaOnS 39.0 28.0 6.3 Mecemiper: sie MobLe 1 cinemas T Miaka! OE Os 24.0 —40.0 ag a G12 he ON MpieeS eN polna Pl at ULC He MEY Te 85.0 —47.0 24.9 1908. ] PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY—GREAT SLAVE LAKE. 29 These temperatures for Hay River, however, are not strictly rep- resentative of Great Slave Lake, since this post is situated at the mouth of a large river which heads far to the southwestward, a fact which probably considerably influences the climate at its mouth. The temperature conditions at other poimts on the southern shores of the lake probably do not differ materially during an average year from those here recorded. On the Northern and Eastern arms, however, the spring and autumn temperatures are considerably lower. The winters are severe and the conditions recorded at that season by the thermometer are intensified by high winds which sweep over the surface of the lake and in the autumn keep it from freezing until a late date. Ice forms to a considerable thickness and persists until midsummer. I have no exact data regarding the time of the freezing and breaking up of the ice during a series of years, but the dates given by McConnell (loc. cit.) probably represent about the average time. He says: Ice forms_in the bays and along the shores of Great Slave Lake between the 20th and the last of October, and the whole lake is usually fast by the middle of November. The ice attains a thickness of from six to eight feet. In the spring the disruption of the ice takes place about the 1st of July, but sometimes occurs as early as the 20th of June and as late as the 10th of July. In the main or western part of the lake the ice breaks up earlier than in the eastern part. At Fort Rae, according to Russell, it dis- appears earlier than in the main body of the lake. The following table was compiled by him from the journals kept at the Hudson’ s Bay post: _ Dates of breaking up and setting of ice in the Northern Arm at Fort Rae. w | Ice broke i re | Ice broke 2 Year. Fan. | Ice set. Year. up. Ice set. U3 ee FTA AL § AO re 1G) A eee ee eee ee JuUNeL esa hae ene SSE CDT a Cee ec aera ee AG SAS vate 6 ese erat ere EE nN | ARaYeS VSS | ee (410.2 SS ee ee ee Maver 3 On ae Seis: See cose ies ee ee A femayss | neni in| | Oct. 6 | 1898_2______----_-__.--L- hese Oct. 19 ISSO. oe Soe ee ee ee Oct. 28 | After the disruption of the ice the floes are tossed back and forth by the winds until finally they become disintegrated. In 1903 a little ice still remained about the western end of the lake until July 1, anda week earlier the Wrigley, crossing from the outlet to Fort Resolution, had made its way with difficulty among the drifting floes. In the eastern part of the lake the ice does not entirely disappear in some seasons until late in June. “The center of the Jake has been known to remain open until the ist of December (fide Richardson). | | 30 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. THE LIARD RIVER VALLEY. A short account of Liard River may well begin with a brief descrip- tion by R. G. McConnell, who descended it from Dease Lake in the summer of 1887. He says in part: The Liard River is one of the three principal tributaries of the Mackenzie, the other two being the Athabasca and the Peace. It has its sources west of the Rocky Mountains, one of its branches reaching to within one hundred and fifty miles of the sea, and drains the eastern part of the broken country lying between that range and the coast mountains. Its branches spread through four degrees of latitude, from 58° N. to 62° N., and interlock with those of the Yukon, Stikine, Skeena, and Peace Rivers. In its upper part it divides at inter- vals into four nearly equal streams, the Mud or Black River, Dease River, Frances River, and the branch which retains the common name. Of these the latter and Black River are still practically unknown. * * #* Rising in the elevated country west of the Rocky Mcuntains, the Liard falls rapidly toward the east, the difference in altitude between the mouth of the Dease and the Mackenzie amounting to nearly 1,650 feet, and is characterized nearly every- where Dy impetuous currents, by dangerous rapids and narrow whirlpool-filled canons. The descent of the river is greatest and its rapids most numerous, while passing through, and for some distance on either side of the Rocky Mountains. After leaving the foothills it is nearly free from interruptions until near its junction with the Mackenzie, where a series of strong riffles occurs.% In its upper portion the Liard bears a strong superficial resemblance to the upper Peace, being formed by large north and south trending branches which unite west of the mountains and, like the Peace, cut eastward through the main range of the Rocky Mountains. The Frances, one of these branches, is formed by several streams which rise close to the headwaters of the Pelly and flow southward, while the Dease takes its waters from Dease Lake, near the source of one of the branches of the Stikine. Below the junction of the Frances and the Dease the united river passes eastward through the mountains, being interrupted by a series of dangerous rapids and receiving sev- eral affluents, most of which are very imperfectly known. Fort Nel- son River, entering the Liard from the south, is its principal branch east of the mountains. It rises near the headwaters of Pine River (north), and pursues a very tortuous, though general northerly, course to the Liard. Below the junction the Liard flows northerly and then northeasterly, still being bordered on the western side by a spur of the Rocky Mountain range. The country east of the lower Liard is mainly low and swampy in character. It is drained by Black River and many smaller streams. The valley of the lower Liard is heavily wooded, the largest tree being the balsam poplar (Populus balsamifera), which here attains perfection of habit, and from which the river is said to take its name. The other forest trees also are those common to the whole region. a@ Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., IV, p. 33D, 1891. 1908.] PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY—LIARD RIVER VALLEY. 31 The climate of the Liard River Valley, lke that of the Peace. varies widely in the different sections. The upper part of the river. lying west of the mountains, enjoys a climate much tempered by the warm Pacific winds. The upper Nelson River also, the principal tributary of the Liard east of the mountains, lies far to the southward and sufficiently near the Pacific to come within its modifying influ- ence. Unfortunately no exact data regarding the temperature of the upper Liard or the Nelson are at hand; hence the conditions there can not be compared directly with those on its lower course. The average temperature conditions on the lower Liard may be fairly represented by those taken at Fort Simpson in 1900, given on page 34. The warm westerly winds which reach the valley of the Liard extend their influence as far as its mouth and have been known to cause a pronounced thaw there even in January, the coldest month. This modifying influence is apparent in the character and progress of vegetation, the migration of birds, and in other phenomena. It is especially manifest, however, in its relation to the breaking up of the river and the attendant effect on the conditions along the banks. Furthermore, the disruption of the Liard ice starts that in the Mackenzie also, which thus opens considerably earlier than would be the case were it not affected by its warmer tributary. This, of course, has its natural effect in accelerating the progress of vegetation on the banks of the Mackenzie below the Liard. The following table shows the dates of the opening and closing of the Nelson at Fort Nelson during a series of years: Dates of opening and closing of Nelson River at Fort Nelson. ] | River River = River River UGae: | opened. closed. MOLE, opened. | closed. Lite ee ae Oceues | eig0ts Apr. 30 | Nov. 4 (SG 2 eee eee IeMinivaeere |e Ct toe sia | ok SO tee ee eee eee ne Te PNTATER, WP) ee TRA 2 ee ae ees ee Apr. 10 ee The following table shows the dates of the closing of the Liard at Fort Liard during a series of years: Dates of closing of Liard River at Fort Liard. | Date of | Date of ~ Daie of Pa Date of Year. | closing. | Year. | closing. : Year. closing. Year. closing. | | | | d é Lhe Kes a a LO Cis 229 st 1S Ts Sn | INO\Ws 16) Ie eee OCtarSls |e SBS ee Nov. 4 Ly (Ds eed IN OMe ei= EN SSI oS oe MINTO ic} | SSO == ae See INOvs 20 || 1S89s = Nov. 14 SSS) eee | Nov. 9 {| SS e ee ee weet Nov. 9 | NSS fate INO or | S90e= = ae ee Do. | I The dates of the opening of the Mackenzie at the mouth of the liard during a series of years appear in a table given on page 36. At Fort Liard the river is said to break up generally about the Ist of May. The approximate dates for the years given may be ascer- on NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. tained by consulting this table and by assuming that the Liard. opened at Fort iiard a few days earlier, since the disruption of the Liard ice is almost invariably the immediate cause of the opening of the Mackenzie below their junction. An account of the progress of the seasons and attendant phe- nomena at Fort Simpson, as observed from October, 1903, to June, 1904, appears in the discussion of the Mackenzie Valley. (See p. 37.) THE MACKENZIE RIVER VALLEY. The Mackenzie (taken in a restricted sense as comprehending only that part of the river known under this name) has a course of over 900 miles from Great Slave Lake to the Arctic Sea. As its imme- ciate valley is more fully described elsewhere (see p. 100), the present account may be confined to a few general statements and brief de- scriptions of the country bordering it on either side. It averages over a mile in width and is usually deep, with a current of from 2 to 6 miles an hour. Its general course is to the northwest. It is bor- dered mainiy by sandy or gravelly beaches and occupies a narrow, comparatively shallow valley, through which it flows in a succession of gentle curves. Many low islands, usually well wooded, occur throughout its course. Its rocks are chiefly Devonian. Issuing from Great Slave Lake, the Mackenzie first follows a general westerly course for nearly 300 miles. The tributaries which it receives in this stretch, with the exception of the Liard, already described, are of minor importance. The Horn Mountains, a long ridge less than a thousand feet in height, he in an easterly and west- erly direction at some distance north of the middle of the stretch. To the southward of the river occur other lower ranges, the principal one being Trout Mountain. These mountains are very imperfectly known. Had not closed on Nov. 24. ¢ Had not begun to drift Nov. 1. The following table shows the dates of occurrence of certain phe- nomena at Fort Norman, distant from Fort Simpson about 180 miles Some of the years being represented in the Fort Simpson table also, the rates of progress of the opening and closing | of the river may be noted: by the river. Table showing condition of Mackenzie and date of first snow at Fort Norman, Mackenzie. Moar River First First River Wore River First First River opened snow. ice. closed. nie opened. | snow. ice. closed. SUD erie ae ees ee Sept.28 |Octs. i lSiNOngegeoal | Seis eee Ob 2 Ob, Wal INOW 12 Si Beesee May, if |2=--do 22-Oct-21 Nove dail SS zeneaee May 14 | Oct. 9 | Oct. 14 | Nov.14 Sia earns Maye 255 (Octo: 1b JP NOve) 2 NOV ST liiSesies aun Wiper j258 Clos) Os Bah | INOnns UO IS 7iese = (May; 24a| Sees Oct. 28 | Nov.. 9 || 1884_____.| DUD | er a St 1876... 5-- |) May 19-| Oct. 10.|___-do-__|__=do —-4|| 1885.25 1/2525) | eee ee Shia Maver 2a |S epice2 onl O Cthramel Si |eeeemeeeenees [N° SSG sa ee a | eee i Oct. 18 | Nov.13 AS See ee ae ee Septezsr Oct 225) NiOwvare nell SS | May 24°) Sept.23 | Oct. 75 | Nov. 8 NG AO Seon: May 9/1] Oct. 31} Oct. 20 | Nov. 2 SSSaaeen May: (19:2) ee ees eee ee Re US May 22 Stee (all OCte 22m NO o04 sae 1 5 Ws 7 a | Bee ee In the autumn of 1903 the ice in Peel River at Fort McPherson commenced to drift on October 4, and the river set fast on October 12. In the following spring it opened on May 23. The lowest tempera- ture registered there during the same winter was — 60°. 1908. ] SEASONAL PHENOMENA—MACKENZIE VALLEY. at SEASONAL PHENOMENA IN MACKENZIE VALLEY, 1903-4. As a contribution to the climatology of the Mackenzie Valley, it may be well to present a brief account of the progress of the seasons and attendant phenomena from October 1, 1903, to July, 1904. The first three weeks in October were spent in ascending the Mackenzie from Fort Norman, at the mouth of Bear River, to Fort Simpson, at the mouth of the Liard. The fact that these notes were taken while the party was traveling detracts but little from their value, since the conditions in different parts of this stretch of river were nearly uni- form at that time. The period from October 20, 1903, to June 1, 1904, was spent at Fort Simpson, and the month of June in descend- ing the Mackenzie to its delta. When the Mackenzie was reached, on September 30, 1903, by de- scending Bear River, a marked contrast was noted between the condi- tions left behind at Great Bear Lake and those encountered on the Mackenzie. The temperature was considerably higher, and several species of small birds which had practically disappeared from Great Bear Lake were common. The high mountains on the west side of the Mackenzie were covered with snow. During the first few days of October, as we were ascending the Mackenzie, the weather was mostly fine, with southerly winds part of the time. The nights were frosty and ice formed on still water. The blue flowers of a gentian (apparently Gentiana acuta), the latest flowers observed, were seen on October 3. During the night of Octo- ber 7 (above Blackwater River) a little snow fell, but it disappeared during the following day. On the mght of October 12 (above Fort Wrigley) 4 inches of snow fell, and on the night of October 14 another fall of snow occurred. Some ice was seen drifting on the west side of the Mackenzie on October 15 (above mouth Nahanni River).* On the following day the drifting ice had greatly increased in quantity, and on October 17 our progress by canoe was arrested. At this time the last of the tree sparrows and a few other hardy . species left for the South. Snow fell on the nights of October 17 and 18 while we were continuing on foot to Fort Simpson, and the drifting ice continually increased in quantity. SEASONAL PHENOMENA AT FORT SIMPSON, WINTER 1903-4. The Liard was partially closed at its mouth on October 21, but broke away once or twice before it finally set fast. The weather from Octo- ber 21 to 25 was considerably milder than it had been during the pre- “Tt should be noted that the appearance of drifting ice at this early date was almost unprecedented. 38 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. vious week, and on the 26th and 27th it became still warmer and the ice practically ceased running. On October 28, however, the weather became colder and the ice again appeared. From this date it contin- ued to run and the snow steadily accumulated. The thermometer did not rise above the freezing point, and consequently there was no thawing, except to a very shght extent in sheltered spots directly exposed to the sun. While the river remained open its expanse of ice-laden water added greatly to the intensity of the cold. From the same cause the trees and shrubs were nightly loaded with ice crystals. On the night of November 7 the minimum temperature recorded was — 10°, and on the night of November 15 a temperature of —27° was registered. During the night of November 18 the river finally set fast. In this process the drifting ice accumulates until it has so filled the river that it jams in some place where it has partially bridged the channel. Against this barrier the oncoming floes, laden with saturated snow, are pushed by the current, and becoming lodged in all possible posi- tions are almost imstantly cemented together by the intense cold. This process continues upstream, usually without interruption, until the whole river is closed. Asa result the surface of the river becomes extremely rough and is almost impassable until the drifting snow fills the interstices and the projecting points are somewhat rounded off by evaporation. The time of the closing of a river depends greatly on the height of water. During November and December the cold steadily increased in intensity and the snow gradually accumulated. When no thaw occurs the snow remains so light and powdery that it does not settle appreciably. On the shortest days the sun rose in the southeast about 9.30 o’clock and, after describing a low arc over the tree tops, set about 2.30. Even at midday its heat was scarcely appreciable. After the middle of December the thermometer scarcely ever rose above zero. From January 1 to March 12, 1904, it rose above zero on only eight occasions, as follows: January 6, 3°; January 7, 1°; January 28, 2°; February 24, 2°; February 25, 5°; February 274°; March 4, 4°; March 5, 4°. The lowest temperature recorded was — 54°, on January 20 and 21. During the third week in January the average daily maximum was —30°; the average daily minimum —45°. A grave which was dug on February 26, 1904, afforded an oppor- tunity to ascertain the depth to which frost had penetrated. The location was a sandy knoll somewhat sheltered on the north by a thick growth of young trees and open to the south. Snow lay to a depth of about 3 feet. The frost had reached a depth of only 20 1908. ] SEASONAL PHENOMENA—MACKENZIE VALLEY. 839 inches, but the excavation was not carried to a sufficient depth to reach the permanently frozen substratum.* On March 26 the temperature first rose above the freezing point and from that date did not descend below zero. When the spring thaw set in the snow had attained a depth of nearly 4 feet. “Yn this connection it may be well to present some additional data regarding ground ice at Fort Simpson. The information was given me by A. F. Camsell, of that post. In excavating a cellar on a sandy ridge in the midst of a field on July 21, 1903, frozen ground was reached at a depth of 7 feet. In October, 1903, an excavation made in the yard of the dwelling house revealed frozen ground at 7 feet. Recent frosts had penetrated about 4 inches from the surface. This yard was sheltered by a high, tight fence. In October, 1901, a pit was sunk beneath an engine house which had con- tained a fire during two previous winters, and frozen ground was encountered at a depth of 25 feet. A foot of frost was succeeded by a foot of thawed ground, beneath which frozen ground was again reached and was penetrated a short distance. Two years later the hole was deepened 3 feet through ground which had thawed since the pit was originally dug, and frozen ground was again encountered. It is proper to state that this pit was situated only a few feet from the edge of the river bank, where the effect of the summer heat would be greater than in a situation where the soil was not exposed to this lateral infiuence. Relating to the same phenomenon at Fort Simpson, Richardson says: * In October 1836, a pit sunk by Mr. M’Pherson, in a heavy mixture of sand and clay, to the depth of 16 feet 10 inches, revealed 10 feet 7 inches of thawed soil on the surface, and 6 feet 3 inches of a permanently frozen layer, beneath which the ground was not frozen.” (Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 166, 1851.) Permanently frozen ground occurs in many parts of the north. According to some authorities, its southern limit is the isotherm of 32°. It is unfortunate that more observations regarding this phenomenon, especially as regards the thickness of the frozen substratum, have not been recorded. There is reason to believe that in muskegs and marshes the summer thaw penetrates to a shorter distance than in dry ground. On June 3, 1901, in a marshy pond near Fort Chipewyan, which had been free from ice for about a month, the muddy bottom was still frozen solidly. In the middle of June, 1904, the bottom of a muskeg at Fort Norman flooded with a foot of water was still solid. In such Situations it is likely that the covering of cold water prevents the summer heat from penetrating to any considerable depth. McConnell contributes the following: “Around Great Slave Lake the soil seldom thaws out to a greater depth than eight feet, and in many of the muskegs and marshes ice remains throughout the year at a depth of about two feet. In descending the Mackenzie the frozen soil gradually approaches the surface. At Fort Norman at the end of summer it lies at a depth of about six feet, at Fort Good Hope at about four feet, and at the mouth of Peel River at about two feet. The thickness of the frozen stratum was not ascertained.” (Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., IV, p. 32 D, 1891.) Richardson states that in the vicinity of Fort Franklin the soil during the greater part of the year “is firmly frozen, the thaw in the two seasons [1825-26] we remained there never penetrating more than twenty-one inches from the surface of the earth.” (Franklin’s Narr. Second Expedition to Polar Sea, Appendix, p. XI, 1828.) 40 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. {no. 27. The progress of the season at Fort Simpson from March to June, 1904, as indicated by the temperatures of successive weeks, is shown in the following table: Temperatures of successive weeks, spring of 1904, at Fort Simpson, Mackenzie River. First Second Third Fourth week. week week. week.@ Average of daily maxima: Miarehc 6 2802 Piet ei rie et eto OE ae — 2.8 — 2.7 9.5 30.7 AEDS GAS ce SC aie ce Sis le i ehh ers sewn Peer ara ae ane 39.4 42.7 16.4 57.9 AVI a yeaa eae ne alee ee ae ee A EES Be. (IC ral OME ceca oe a nm 46.0 50.8 59.7 53.2 +) fb a; eee manne eee he Re ee A Nes ab cen ae ie a a 62.1 63.1 60.0: 70.4 Average of daily minima: IA 23a ho ete aa hese nf tes a Ml dae ag RAS pe —25.4 —26.8 — 60 3.3 BANG o'er (Shia tec arte SRR ee aL ere ct ey YoU EIN a era 11.8 “23.4 23.4 33335)5) i [Fs In apa gee erie pee tenn hae Sine, Er eee. 8 4S eg SE 30.6 33.2 38.8 34.5 SUEY 5 ee Se Re Sr fa ee eg eee en 39.7 44,4 43.8 48.6 «The ‘ fourth week’ includes the last nine or ten days of the month. On March 19 a flock of white-winged crossbills, evidently migrants, was seen. On March 28 the first hawk owl of the spring was ob- served, and snow fleas (Achorutes) appeared. About the same time several species of small birds, which had been seen rarely during the winter, appeared in larger numbers. On March 30 the buds and catkins on the willows and alders imparted a brown tinge to the hillsides, where these shrubs were common. On the same date snow buntings, which had been absent since the middle of December, reap- peared. On April 2 many small grayish moths were seen in the woods. On April 17 a mourning-cloak butterfly (Hwvanessa)* was seen. By April 18 the snow had nearly disappeared from the fields. Mosquitoes (Culex annulatus) first appeared on April 20, and were biting on April 24, but did not become troublesome until over a month later. The sap of the white birches began to flow freely on April 20. On April 23 a small space of open water was seen near the mouth of the Liard. Frogs were first observed on April 28. On April 29 Liard River broke up. Its advancing flood first opened a channel nearly straight across the Mackenzie, forcing the ice with irresistible power up on the opposite bank in immense piles. At the same time a mound 60 or 70 feet in height was formed at the mouth of one of the channels of the Liard, several immense cracks opened in the white expanse before the post, and the huge sheets were soon broken up. ‘The stupendous amount of force exerted by the river upon the broad expanse of ice, 5 feet in thickness, as with a erinding roar it folds and crushes the mighty sheets like cardboard, reducing them to powder and forcing them aloft in great mounds, im- “A list of the butterflies of the region has been published by Merritt Cary (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXXII, pp. 425-457, 1906). 1908. ] SEASONAL PHENOMENA—MACKENZIE VALLEY. 41 presses the beholder, who 1s likewise occupied in considering the pos sibility of the river being dammed sufficiently to overflow the geround on which he stands. Such a catastrophe has destroyed more than one post on the Mackenzie in years past. On this occasion the immense volume of ice blocked the channel below the post. and did not begin to move in earnest until the night of May 2, when the jam broke and the water, which had risen several feet, again fell. At this time a few ducks appeared in open places on the river. On May 6 a small quantity of snow fell. The leaves of Pibes oxyacan- thoides began to appear on May 8. By this time the river was nearly clear of ice below the mouth of the Liard, but above its mouth the ice in the Mackenzie was still intact. On May 10 large sheets of the Mackenzie ice broke away and floated down, but the river did not open from above until May 13. The water then rose and became filled with ice, but on the following day was nearly clear again and had fallen. On this date the leaves on aspens and birches were half an inch in length. About the middle of May blue violets (Viola albertina) blossomed.- The weather continued warm and vegetation advanced steadily. On May 18 Viburnum: pauciforum and Populus bal- samifera put forth their leaves, and mountain cranberry (V7tis- idea) was in flower. Birds were now coming fast and additional species were noted daily, but on May 21 the weather turned cold and stormy. ‘This had the effect of retarding the advance of vegetation and the tide of bird migration. On May 22 fibes oxwyacanthoides and Calypso bulbosa were in flower. On May 23 a quantity of ice from the Little Lake, or from Great Slave Lake itself, came down the Mackenzie. The weather remained cold and stormy during the remainder of the month and the conditions of vegetation and of bird migration remained almost at a standstill. On May 29 several inches of snow fell. SEASONAL PHENOMENA ON MACKENZIE BELOW FORT SIMPSON, SUMMER 1904. On June 1, 1904, I left Fort Simpson, and spent the remainder of the month descending the Mackenzie. Though stops were made here -and there, my general rate of travel kept pace with the advance of spring. The weather during the first few days of June was favor- able and vegetation made good progress. On June 2, a few miles below Fort Simpson, the leaves of the tamaracks were just coming out, and they were in the same condition at Fort Norman, 3° farther north, on June 11. All along the river more or less ice still lay on the banks, but a few miles above Fort Norman the quantity was as- tounding. Many of the stranded cakes were upward of 20 feet In thickness. They had evidently come from the mouth of some tribu- tary which had frozen to the bottom, and whose waters, continually overflowing and freezing, had filled the valley with ice (see fig. 3). | 492 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. On June 17, below Fort Norman, a small quantity of snow fell. On_ June 21, at Fort Good Hope, the leaves on most of the trees were about half grown. On the same date the sun was visible at midnight from a low hill near the post, and many birds were in full song at that hour. Fer the next three weeks, north of this point, the sun was continually above the horizon. Vegetation now advanced rather faster than our rate of travel northward, but was not at its height when we reached the delta of the Mackenzie on June 30. Fic. 5.—Valley of small stream filled with ice which has persisted until late. Athabaska River below Fort MacKay, May 29, 1903. THE BASIN OF GREAT BEAR LAKE. A short account of Great Bear Lake may begin with a portion of the description by Richardson, who examined most of its shore line in 1825 and 1826. He says: Great Bear Lake is an extensive sheet of water, of a very irregular shape, being formed by the union of five arms or bays in a common center. The great- est diameter of the lake, measuring about one hundred and fifty geographical miles, runs from the bottom of Dease Bay, which receives the principal feeding ul of ay 1908. ] PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY—GREAT BEAR LAKE. 43 stream, to the bottom of Keith Bay, from whence the Bear Lake River issues. and has a direction of N.E. to S.W. The transverse diameter has a direction from N.W. by W. to S8.E. by E., through Smith and M’Tavish Bays, and is upwards of one hundred and twenty miles in length. M’Vicar Bay, the fifth arm of the Jake is narrower than the others, and being a little curved at its mouth, appears less connected with the main body of water. The light bluish- coloured water of Great Bear Lake is everywhere transparent, and is particu- larly clear near some primitive mountains, which exist in M’Tavish Bay. A piece of white rag, let down there, did not disappear until it descended fifteen fathoms. The depth of water, in the center of the lake, was not ascertained: but it is known to be very considerable. Near the shore, in M’Tavish Bay, forty-five fathoms of line did not reach the bottom.? Great Bear Lake, according to the Canadian Geological Survey, has an area of approximately 11,400 square miles and lies 391 feet above the level of the sea. Its shores, with the exception of parts of MacTavish Bay, are rather low. Its southern and western shores are well wooded, while its northern and eastern borders are more thinly forested. The immediate shores are mainly of sand or gravel and are usually devoid of trees, but are well clothed with willows and various ericaceous shrubs and herbaceous plants. In most places along the south shore this treeless stretch 1s only a few hundred yards in width, and in the bays the forest extends to the water’s edge. In {he vicinity of Leith Point, however, a treeless area stretches from near MacTavish Bay to McVicar Bay, and extends inland for several miles (see PI. XVI, fig. 3, facing p. 118). On this area the faunal and floral conditions are practically those of the Barren Grounds. The junction between the primitive or granitic rocks and the lme- stone formation crosses Great Bear Lake near its eastern extremity. To the eastward of the dividing line the shores are higher, especially around MacTavish Bay, where the mountains approach closely to the shore. The Grizzly Bear Mountain, which occupies the peninsula between Keith and McVicar bays, is upwards of 900° feet high and several hundred feet of its upper portion are devoid of trees. On the opposite side of the lake, between Smith and Keith bays, a broad peninsula is occupied by the Scented Grass Hills, of about the same height and similar in structure to the Grizzly Bear Mountain. The mountains which border MacTavish Bay are so rocky that it is dif_i- cult to trace the mit of timber on their sides. The northern shores of Great Bear Lake are described as mainly low and thinly wooded, although the country at some distance inland is better wooded. “Tn reality about one hundred and fifty. 5 Narr. Second Exp’d to Polar Sea, Appendix, p. ii, 1828. ¢The altitudes of mountains given in this paper are mainly taken from pub- lished narratives, but being largely estimates, can be regarded only as approx- | imate. Thus Grizzly Bear Mountain, stated by Richardson to be 900 feet high (above the lake?), appeared to me to be higher than Mount Charles on Bear River, stated by Bell to be 1,500 feet high. 44 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [wo. 27. The tributaries of Great Bear Lake are comparatively few in number. Dease River, which discharges into the northeastern ex- tremity of the lake, is probably the best known of its feeders. It rises on the treeless height of land between Dease Bay and the lower Coppermine. Several important streams enter the lake from the north. Several others draining a very large extent of country to the southward enter MacTavish and McVicar bays. The latter receives also the waters of a chain of large lakes lying north of Marten Lake (which discharges into Great Slave Lake). The country drained by the southern tributaries is very rough and rocky, though fairly well wooded, and is traversed in various directions by ranges of low mountains. Bear River, which forms the outlet of Great Bear Lake, flows from its western extremity, and after following a general westerly course for about 90 miles, jos the Mackenzie. It is mainly confined be- tween steep banks of sand or clay, is from 150 te 200 yards wide, and has a current of about 6 miles an hour. About midway of its course it passes through a sandstone chasm, forming a rapid nearly 3 miles in length. A ridge of hills, some of whose peaks attain a height of 1.500 feet, crosses the river at this point. From the summit of these hills the surrounding country is seen to consist of a rolling wooded plain dotted with many lakes of various sizes. Below Bear River Rapid the river is wide and the current less impetuous. Bear River is extremely clear, and although it is joined by several muddy streams its waters still present a marked contrast to those of the Mackenzie at their confluence. | The following table shows the summaries of the temperatures re- corded during a fuli vear (being for parts of 1825 and 1826), at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, during Franklin’s second Journey (Nar- rative Second Expedition to Polar Sea): Summaries of temperatures taken at Fort Franklin from September, 1825, to August, 1826. 3 ; Extremes. Dae Mean daily Mean daily Monthly = maximum. minimum. | ya.imum.| Minimum mean. 1825 Septemper =. 2s = eee eae 48.12 38.08 60.5 30.0 42,92 OCEOD Gree a ee a ee ee 24.80 | 14.18 | 40.3 —18.0 20.28 NOVEM Der = sans eee ee eee 8.39 | Bi | S935 5) —22.0 2.7S DOC OTD TS eek a eo eee — 8.18 | —21.63 | 27.5 —47.5 —13.96 1826. ; DTN ee ee a re ee Sees ee ee —16.17 | —31.25. | 11.8 —49.0 —23.78 IBEDT UW any se ee es eee es — 4.95 —21.71 27.8 —39.0 —12.7 TVG Ta eee ee ees es Se es 3.87 | —22.01 31.8 —43.0 — 8.26 ADT S223 Se ae Se a ee 24.83 3.99 41.6 —23.0 | US S2Al IVD iy es Se ee ne vA ee 43.89 27.47 61.0 | 1.0 36.35. JUNG22 28 SL a | a a ee ee «48.00 AG hy ee iene ee SS ee es a a 60.24 42.64 80.0 | 30.0 52.10 NUTS hoe a ee ee el hae en 58.21 42,98 74.0 | 33.5 51.09 Year___----------------------------- | 80.0 | —49.0 17.49 ¢ Assumed. Records for June lost. ’ Temperature for the first eight days of July supplied from observations taken on the Mackenzie. t 1908.) PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY—GREAT BEAR LAKE. 45 It is evident that these figures are not comparable with those taken ein 1900 at various other points in the region. From its position _ Fort Franklin should have a mean temperature at least as low as Fort Good Hope, which, although situated a degree farther north, is at a lower altitude and on the banks of a northward flowing river. The temperatures of the three winter months would seem to indicate that the winter of 1825-26 was exceptionally mild, and the temperatures recorded by Richardson as taken elsewhere in the Mackenzie region during the same year seem also to point to the same conclusion. The fellowing notes regarding the progress of the seasons at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, are taken mainly from . Richardson’s accounts: 3 The relative temperatures of December, January, and February differ considerably; either of these months may be the coldest in dif- ferent years. In some years snow exposed to the sun thaws very shehtly during these months; in other winters there is no thaw what- ever. The snow attains its greatest depth, about 3 feet, in March. By April.10 the snow begins to thaw decidedly in the sunshine. From the Ist to the 6th of May the earlier waterfow! arrive. The smaller streams break up about the 10th or 12th of May. Between the mid- dle and the end of May most of the small birds arrive. At the end of May or early in June the earlier shrubs and herbaceous plants flower and sprout their leaves. Frogs are heard at the same time. By the last week of May there is bright light at midnight. No snow, excepting the remains of deep drifts, is left. On June 8 (1826),. the small lake was clear of ice, having been frozen for two hundred end forty days. By the middle of June summer is fairly established. Great Bear Lake begins to break up about June 20, and drift ice sometimes obstructs navigation until the first or second week in August. By the 25th of July blueberries (Vacciniwm uliginosum) are ripe. At the beginning of August stars are visible at midnight. By the last of August or first of September snow falls. Severe frosts set in by the last of September. In October, when the soil begins to freeze, the summer thaw has penetrated about 21 inches, beneath which the ground is perpetually frozen. The small lakes are frozen ever by the 10th or 12th of October, and the last of the waterfowl depart. The bays of Great Bear Lake are filled with new ice by the end of October or early in November, but the center of the lake does not freeze over until December. The ice attains a thickness of about & feet. . Bear River opens at its head early in May, the result (according to Richardson) of its being fed by warm water from the depths of the lake. Probably from the same cause the lake remains open at the 46 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. outlet until very late in the autumn, or throughout the winter. At the rapid of Bear River the ice forms from the bottom and sides and finally completely blocks the stream. The resulting overflow con- tinually adds to the volume of ice, which reaches an enormous thick- ness. The heat of an ordinary summer is insufficient to melt this mass entirely, and great quantities of it usually persist on the south or sheltered bank throughout the season. This vast accumulation of ice probably prevents the lower part of the river from opening as soon as the early disruption of its upper part would seem to justify. Richardson states that the lower part usually opens in June, while Petitot gives the usual time as the last of May. In 1904 it was al- ready open when the Mackenzie broke up at Fort Norman on May 21. THE BARREN GROUNDS. Under this heading will be considered the great area lying to the northward and northeastward of Great Bear and Great Slave lakes. It is watered by the Anderson, Coppermine, Great Fish, Thelon or Ark-i-linik, and many smaller rivers. With the exception of Great Fish River all those named are wooded to some extent on their upper portions, but by far the greater part of the area drained by them is treeless. It may be well to trace the northern boundary of the great transcontinental forest from the western shore of Hudson Bay to the mouth of the Mackenzie. Starting from the mouth of Churchill River, Hudson Bay, the tree line follows the shore closely for a few miles and then curves gently - inland (see Pl. IL). Thence it extends northwesterly, cross- ing Nueltin, or Island Lake; Ennadai Lake on Kazan River; and Boyd Lake on the Dubawnt. Just north of 60° on Artillery Lake is the next point where we have a definite dividing line. Between the Dubawnt and Artillery Lake is the valley of the upper Thelon, or Ark-i-linik, along whose banks the forest extends in a narrow line far into the general treeless area. This northward extending tongue of forest will be more fully described beyond. From Artillery Lake the line extends northwestward to Point Lake, curving toward the southwest in the interval and crossing Lake Mackay south of latitude 64°. From Point Lake, whose shores are practically devoid of trees, nearly to latitude 67°, the banks of the Coppermine are so thinly wooded that the river may be taken as the approximate boundary of the woods. Spruces occur on the Cop- permine as far north as the mouth of Kendall River, but are absent from the summit of the divide between there and Great Bear Lake and reappear on lower Dease River. Between Dease River and the 1908.] PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY BARREN GROUNDS. 47 lower Anderson the boundary of the woods is not weil known. ‘The north shore of Great Bear Lake is thiniy wooded and tongues of timber follow the northward-flowing rivers well into the Barren Grounds, on the Wilmot Horton to latitude 69°. The tree line crosses the Anderson to the northward of the same parallel, and thence extends northwestward to the mouth of the Mackenzie, prob- ably dipping to the southward in the interval, as is usually the case in the areas between rivers. West of the timbered delta of the Mackenzie a considerable area of treeless country occurs. In describing briefly the region whose southern boundary is thus roughly indicated, a part of MacFarlane’s description of the Ander- son River region may be quoted. He says: The belt of timber which at Fort Anderson extends for over thirty miles to the eastward, rapidly narrows and becomes a mere fringe along the Anderson River and disappears to the northward of the 69th parallel of latitude. The country is thickly interspersed with sheets of water varying in size from mere ponds to small and fair-sized lakes. In travelling north-eastward toward Franklin Bay, on the Arctic coast, several dry, swampy, mossy and peaty plains were passed before reaching the Barren Grounds proper. ‘The country thence to the height-of-land between the Anderson and the deep gorge-like valley through which the Wilmot Horton River (MacFarlane River of Petitot’s map) flows, as well as from the “ crossing” of the latter to the high plateau which -forms the western sea-bank of Franklin Bay, consists of vast plains or steppes of a flat or undulating character, diversified by some small lakes and gently sloping eminences, not dissimilar in appearance to portions of the north-west prairies. In the region here spoken of, however, the ridges occasionally assume a mound-like, hilly character, while one or two intersecting affluents of the Wil- mot Horton flow through valleys in which a few stunted spruces, birches and willows appear at intervals. On the banks of one of these, near the mouth, we observed a Sheltered grove of larger growth, wherein moose and musk-oxen had mequently browsed. * * * The greater part of the Barren Grounds is every season covered with short grasses, mosses, and small flowering plants, while patches of sedgy or peaty soil occur at longer or shorter distances. On these, as well along the smaller rivulets, river and lake banks, Labrador tea, crow-berries, and a few other kinds of berries, dwarf birch, willows, etc., grow. Large flat spaces had the honey-combed appearance usually presented in early spring by land which has been turned over in the autumn. There were few signs of vegetation on these, while some sandy and many other spots were virtually sterile. 66 This description applies fairly well to the entire region north of Great Bear Lake and west of the Coppermine, as far as it 1s known. To the eastward of the Coppermine, within the region of the crystal- line rocks, the country is much more rugged and rocky. Thousands of lakes dot its surface, and they are often bordered by grassy plains and gentle slopes, on which, during the short summer, the bright @Canadian Record of Science, LV, pp. 52, 53, 1890. 48 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. flowers of a profusion of shrubby and herbaceous plants lend their beauty to the landscape, and prove the appellation *‘ Barren Grounds ’ to be a misnomer, though in many parts, from the nature of the soil, there is little plant hfe. Alders (Alnus alnobetula) occur in a more or less dwarfed condition in favorable places well into the treeless area, and several species of willows, some of which here attain a height of 5 or 6 feet, border some of the streams as far north as Wollaston Land. These are the only trees which occur even in a dwarfed state on the Barren Grounds proper. The northward extension of the coniferous forest along the banks of northward-flowing rivers has already been referred to. The most remarkable example of this phenomenon is found on the Thelon, or Ark-i-linik, a stream tributary to Hudson Bay. It was first explored by Hanbury in 1899, and by J. W. Tyrrell during the following | season. From a point near latitude 624°, which is as far south as the river has been explored, and which is within the main area of the Bar- ren Grounds, a more or less continuous belt of spruce borders the river as far north as latitude 644°, a distance of over 200 miles by the river. A few species of woodland-breeding birds follow these extensions of the forest to their limits. No tables of temperature taken throughout the year at any point in the Barren Grounds being available, remarks on climatology may be confined to a few general statements and to more or less fragmentary records. The winters are, of course, very long and.the summers short, with the intervening seasons practically wanting. Winter sets in soon after the Ist of September and persists until May, with only a short season of spring. During the short summer the progress of vegeta- tion is. very rapid, but the seeds and berries are scarcely ripened before winter again asserts its sway. In the table which follows, an attempt is made to show approxi- mately the conditions of temperature on the Barren Grounds during the summer months. The records were taken by the expedition of J. W. Tyrrell between Artillery Lake and the mouth of Chesterfield Inlet in the summer of 1900. From June 1 to the first week in Sep- tember the party was traveling within the general limits of the Bar- ren Grounds. Observations were taken every three hours from 6 a. m. to 6 p. m., and the highest and lowest of these temperatures recorded daily have been assumed, with but little probability of error, to rep- resent the maximum and minimum. As no observations were taken during the night the actual minimum would be lower in some cases. As the observations were made in 1900, the figures, so far as they go, are comparable with those taken during the same year in other parts of the Mackenzie region. - 1908. ] LIFE ZONES. 49 Weekly summaries of temperatures, June to September, 1900, between Artillery Lake and Chesterfield Inlet. First Second Third Fourth week. | week. week. week. Mean daily maxima: 3 PO cee Se 447.0 460.4 465.7 b58.8 TE ocece nt ae ¢67.7 464.2 | ¢49.8 156.6 JES Lect rr 954.5] 254.0] 155.2 547.8 S EDINGTON FA Da yl eer eae fr Bes ee es I 8 Mean daily minima: | {8G ee a ee 36.7 | 46.7 48.5 4.7 2 ees 09.4 | 52S 44,2 49.8 SSSR oe ee 47.5 | 49,1 46.1 36.9 “SOTr CT OCR Ss 2 Se ee a E3} app A |e 5 ce wane ae tor ewe a Ba « Artillery Lake. 9 Chesterfield Inlet. » Kasba Lake to Hanbury River. % Lower Thelon to Aberdeen Lake. ¢ Hanbury River. ~t Thelon River. 4 Thelon River. Jj Thelon and Hanbury rivers. € Theion River to Aberdeen Lake. k Hanbury River to Artillery Lake. f Schultz Lake to mouth Chesterfield Inlet. The monthly means were as follows: June, 52.29; July, 55.51; August, 48.96. ; Owing to the great thickness of their icy covering, some of the lakes of the Barren Grounds are not clear of ice in backward seasons until July, or even August, when new ice has usually begun to form in still water. They generally break up in late June or early July. The rivers, having the advantage of a current, open earlier than the lakes. During a residence of about five years at Fort Anderson, on Ander- son River, MacFarlane observed the river to set fast on two occasions as early as September 10, though once it remained open until October 10. In 1857 the Anderson broke up at the mouth of the Lockhart on June 12. At Fort Anderson the dates of the opening of the river were as follows: 1861, about May 15; 1862, May 19; 1863, May 30; 1864, May 31; 1865, June 2. During the last days of June, 1864, MacFarlane found nearly all the lakes on the Barren Grounds still covered with ice, though the rivers were open. In 1821, when Franklin’s party started to descend the Coppermine on July 1, the lakes on its upper course were still covered with ice. Apparently the river had opened only a short time before. In 1849 Doctor Rae noted the breaking up of the same river near its mouth on June 28. At this time the leaves of the dwarf birches were out, and the leaf buds of the willows had begun to develop. The lower part of the river remained blocked with ice until July 13. LIFE ZONES OF THE ATHABASKA-MACKENZIE REGION. The area treated of lies within the Boreal Region and comprises parts of each of its three subdivisions—the Arctic, Hudsonian, and Canadian zones. The boundaries of these belts are shown on Plate I in as much detail as is possible with our present knowledge. | 44131——No. 27—08—_4 50 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 2 nN ARCTIC ZONE. The Arctic zone comprises the islands of the Polar Sea and the area commonly known as the ‘ Barren Grounds,’ stretching across the northern part of the continent north of the great transcontinental coniferous forest. The physical characteristics of the country com- prised in the Arctic zone are given in the description of the Barren Grounds (p. 46). Various shrubby plants are common, among which Rhododendron lapponicum, Cassiope tetragona, and several dwarf willows are perhaps the most characteristic. Several other less strictly representative plants also are abundant. The zone is further charac- terized by the presence of certain mammals, as the lemmings of the genera Lemmus and Dicrostonya, the Arctic fox, musk-ox, Barren Ground caribou, and polar hare. The birds which characterize this area are migratory, spending only the breeding season within its boundaries. They comprise, among the Anatide, the various species of the genus Chen and one or two genera of maritime ducks. Among the Limicole, the genera Lobipes, Phalaropus, Macrorhamphus, Tringa and related genera, Calidris, Tryngites, Numenius (hudson- icus and borealis), Squatarola, Charadrius, and Arenaria. The Gal- line are represented by Lagopus lagopus and L. rupestris, the Raptores by the gyrfalcons, and the Passeres by Plectrophenax, Cal- cartus lapponicus and C. pictus, and Anthus. The southern extension of the Arctic zone, the Arctic-Alpine, occupies the treeless summits of mountains which he within the forested area. It comprises in this region the summits of the Rocky Mountain Range. The inconsiderable barren areas that occur on the mountains east of the Mackenzie are near the main Barren Ground area and of course have closer affinities with the true Arctic than with the Alpine summits farther south. Since the mountain area west of the Mackenzie is practically unknown geographically, it is impossible to define the limits of the Arctic-Alpine area with even approximate accuracy. On these mountains timber line occurs, on the sixty-second parallel, at an altitude of about 3,000 feet, and at a diminishing altitude to the northward. As the best information available indicates that extensive areas lie above 5,000 feet, the amount of country to be classed as Arctic-Alpine must be very large. Farther south the zone occupies isolated peaks down to or below latitude 35°. The Arctic-Alpine zone along the northern Rocky Mountains is characterized by various dwarf willows and several other plants representative of the Arctic. Its mammals are the Dall sheep (Ov/s dalli), the pika (Ochotona), and probably the hoary marmot (J/ar- 5 AGAMA TTI "RGEC — 60 70 100 90 80 Biological Survey. 136 120 = «110 140 145 i50 NES OF HUDSON BAY AND MACKENZIE REGIONS. 155 LiFe Zo Doe A US Ny North American Fauna, No. 27, U. S. Dept. Agr., 10wn.) WASHINGTON, 03. C } i UNCOLORED—ARCTIC. y, but is not here s THE NGRRIS PETERS CO. Saskatchewan Valle Hursonian. Ss sition covers part of the CANADIAN. [eee] (An area of Tran eT pedo etees ee igoG. 2 uF %8 one: 7A aj ene me oo ” Sage od 1908. ] LIFE ZONES—ARCTIC. 5] mota caligata), and lemmings of the genus Lemmus. The charac teristic birds include the white-tailed ptarmigan (Lagopus leucurus). the pipit (Anthus rubescens) and probably the rosy finch (Lew- costicte tephrocotis). HUDSONIAN ZONE. South of the Arctic zone lies the Hudsonian, a belt of more or less stunted timber. In the Mackenzie region it has no strictly characteristic mammals, though the range of a red-backed vole (Z'vo- tomys dawsoni) is practically confined within its limits. Most of the woodland mammals necessarily have their northern mit within this zone. Such comprise the following: Rangifer caribou, Alces, Sciuropterus, Sciurus, Castor, Hvotomys, Fiber, Erethizon, Lepus americanus, Lynx, Lutra, Lutreola, Mustela, and others. Among birds, the great gray owl (Scotiaptex nebulosum), hawk owl (Surnia ulula caparoch), pine grosbeak (Pinicola e. leucura), and tree spar- row (Spizella monticola) breed principally within it. Its trees are those of the Canadian zone, though the Banksian pine (Pinus divari- cata) and balsam poplar (Populus balsamifera) barely enter its borders. Its shrubs are mainly species that overlap from the ad- joining zones. Among those which seem to reach their greatest per- fection in the Hudsonian may be mentioned Hmpetrum nigrum, Ledum palustre, Vaccinium uliginosum, Vitisidea vitisidea, Oxy- coccus oxycoccus, and Betula nana. The northern hmit of the Hudsonian, being the line dividing it from the Arctic, has just been defined; its southern boundary remains to be indicated. On the southwest shores of Hudson Bay. the zone occupies a strip about 200 miles in width. Thence its southern boundary extends inland, passing through Athabaska Lake, and then bending northward crosses Great Slave Lake just east of the mouth of Slave River. Practically all of the northern shore of Great Slave Lake hes within its limits. Beyond here its lower boundary is very uncertain. It is bounded by a strip of Canadian country, probably only a few miles in width, extending northward along the Mackenzie. This southern influence ceases to be effective near the mouth of Bear River, and the southern limit of the Hudsonian may be considered to eross the Mackenzie near latitude 65°. Thence it bends again south- ward, following the western border of the Canadian strip. Here, as on the eastern side, the position of the boundary is unknown, but because of the great altitude of most of the country west of the Mackenzie and north of the Liard the Canadian zone influence can not extend far from the river and the Hudsonian must cover nearly the | 52 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27; entire area, exclusive of the alpine summits of the mountains. The » Canadian of the Liard Valley is probably continuous, or nearly so, by way of the valleys of the Frances and Pelly, with the Canadian on the Yukon. CANADIAN ZONE. The Canadian zone includes all the country to the southward of the line just defined. It thus comprises the Athabaska and Peace River valleys, the Slave River Valley, and all the country stretching south- ward from Great Slave Lake, the upper Mackenzie, and the lower Liard. Along the Mackenzie it sends a narrow tongue northward through three degrees of latitude. This strip merely represents the influence exerted on the fauna and flora by the warmer waters and climate of the Liard and by the broad stretch of low country to the southward. 3 Among the birds limited in their northward range by the upper border of the Canadian zone and which are more or less character- istic of it, are Picoides arcticus, Bonasa u. umbelloides, Nuttallorinis borealis, Empidonax minimus, Zonotrichia albicollis, Spizella p. ari- zone, Melospiza lincolni and M. georgiana, Lanivireo solitarius, Helminthophila celata and H. peregrina, Dendroica magnolia, Hylocichla u. swainsont, and H. g. patlasi. The northern border of the Canadian zone in the Mackenzie region limits the successful cultivation of barley, potatoes, and the more hardy root craps, although with special care most of them are raised in certain favored localities in the southern part of the Hudsonian. Even in the Canadian, however, an occasional failure occurs, in the case of the less hardy crops, because of the occurrence of unusually late spring or early autumn frosts. In most parts of the Peace River Valley, and even in the lower Liard Valley, wheat is a success- ful crop. Peas, potatoes, radishes, turnips, beets, carrots, cabbages, lettuce, and onions are raised with a considerable degree of success as far north as Fort Norman, near latitude 65°, near the northern extremity of the Canadian strip. Nearly or all of these meet with a fair amount of success at Fort Rae and also at Fort Good Hope, in the lower Hudsonian, but at Fort Rae the situation is especially. favorable as regards slope exposure, and the permanent frost, which remains near the surface in most parts of the Hudsonian, probably retreats to a much lower depth. At Fort Good Hope the almost continuous sunlight of summer probably compensates in part for its extreme northern position. 1908.] LIFE ZONES—CANADIAN. 583 The following table shows the mean temperature of the two warmest months (usually June and July), and the mean temperature for the year at various stations in the Athabaska-Mackenzie region : Table showing mean temperature of two warmest months of year and for entire year at various stations. Mean of | | | Mean of | : two (Mean for| : ; | two |Mean for Station. warmest year. | Station. warmest year. months. | | months. op | or, | oR. P. Hamonton (4900) === ==-=-_ -=.- 59.3 37.7 || Fort Simpson (1900)_---____- 57.4 20.7 Athabaska Landing (1900)___- 5G a (tll sea ee || Fort Good Hope (1900) _____- ~58.1 3.6 Fort Dunvegan (1880-1884) ___- 59.0 30.0 || Fort Franklin (1826)_________ 450.0 —iG (As Fort Chipewyan (1900)__-_=-- 59.4 28.5 || Fort McPherson (1900)___-__-. 250250 | a= aye Rivier (1900) =.= 2 = =. 58.0 25.0 || Herschel Island (1900)_______. 40.9 9.8 Hoteeku2e(lSSs) 222 eon! 56.3 ADS «Approximate. 5’ June only. In the case of a few stations it would have been possible to obtain the means of two or more years, but it is believed that the figures fer 1900, being more directly comparable, are, on the whole, more. satisfactory and represent fairly well the normal conditions. It is manifest that these data are much too scanty to afford assistance in platting life zones or in formulating general laws, but a few signifi- cant points may be noted. | If these figures are platted on a map, it will be seen that the mean temperature of the two warmest months is very uniform throughout the Canadian zone, the greater amount of sunlight compensating for the hrgher latitude in the case of the more northern localities, while the mean temperature for the year lowers rapidly toward the northward. Omitting the means for Athabaska Landing, which seem to be lower than the position of the place would warrant, the extremes for the two warmest months for the places within the Canadian zone are 57.4 and 59.4, and the average 58.4° I’. Merriam considers that the mean temperature of the six warmest weeks of summer has an important bearing on the dis- tribution of species. Exact data for this period can be obtained for so few localities in the north that the figures would be of little value, but it is believed that the mean temperature of the two warmest months would be found to be only a degree or two lower. Corre- sponding temperature data for more easterly points in the Canadian zone vary only 2° or 3°, and lead to the conclusion that in that region a2 mean of approximately 60° F. for the six warmest weeks of summer characterizes the Canadian zone. Data for the Hudsonian and Arctic zones are less full, but so far as they go indicate that the limiting temperatures for the southern boundaries of the Hudsonian and Arctic zones are approximately 57° F. and 50° F., as stated by Merriam.¢ 4@Nat. Geog. Magazine, VI, p. 236, 1894. ' 54 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. PREVIOUS EXPLORATIONS AND COLLECTIONS. EARLIEST EXPLORERS, HEARNE AND MACKENZIE, 1770-1793. Samuel Hearne, who made his famous journey of exploration in 1770-71, was the first civilized traveler to penetrate the Great Slave Lake region. Though not a naturalist, he had a general knowledge of the larger birds and mammals, was a good observer, and recorded in his narrative many notes on the fauna.‘ During the eighteenth century the Indians of the unknown region west of Fort Prince of Wales (Churchill) on their occasional trad- ing visits brought to the post specimens of native copper, which they claimed to have discovered near the banks of a large river far to the northwestward. The Hudson’s Bay Company, in accordance with its avowed policy of prosecuting discovery, finally decided to send an expedition to discover the source of the metal and at the same time to throw light on the supposed existence of a feasible passage by sea to the westward. Hitherto all the expeditions in search of the Northwest Passage had been by sea, but now the com- pany decided to undertake exploration by land. For this important mission Samuel Hearne, a factor in the sery- ice of the company, who for some years had been stationed at Fort Prince of Wales, was selected. He made three attempts, two of which were unsuccessful. The first failed because of lack of provi- sions, and the second because Hearne was plundered by his Indian companions and broke his sextant. On these trips he attempted to penetrate to the northwestward through the Barren Grounds; but on the third venture, leaving in December, 1770, he kept more to the westward and, being in the wooded country, was able to provide himself with provisions and to travel with much less discomfort. As he was accompanied by a number of famihes of Indians as bearers and hunters, his progress was necessarily slow and indirect, on account of the difficulty of crossing lakes and large rivers, and of providing food for so many. His general line of travel was at first a little north of west to Clowey Lake, which was reached May 3, 1771, and thence a little west of north to the eastward of Great Slave Lake, probably passing Artillery Lake, to the stream since called Coppermine River, which was reached probably near Sand- stone Rapid. At Bloody Fall, named from the circumstance, the Indians, small parties of whom had joined the company from time to time, fell upon a large party of Eskimos, then their bitter enemies, and, much to Hearne’s horror and disgust, massacred the entire company. -9o7 * For full references to publications, see Bibliegraphy, p. 535. 1908.] PREVIOUS EXPLORATIONS—-HEARNE AND MACKENZIE. 55 Desiring to satisfy himself that the river emptied into the sea, Hearne proceeded to its mouth, where he arrived July 17. He then turned southward and in a general way retraced his outward course until he reached the vicinity of Point Lake, when he bore slightly westward and crossed Great Slave Lake somewhere to the eastward of the Northern Arm about the last of December, 1771. This lake he called the “Athapuscow,”’ and it has been by some supposed to be identical with the Athabaska, but a careful examination of his narrative and map renders this idea untenable.t| Entering the com- parative level country south of the lake, a welcome change from “the jumble of rocks and hills” which he had been traversing, he struck Slave River at a point where its banks were high—that is, at some distance south of the lake—and after following the river for some 40 miles turned off to the eastward, reached his outward track near Clowey Lake, and returned to Fort Prince of Wales over nearly the same route followed on the first part of his outward journey. The narrative of Hearne’s journey, which was published in 1795, contains many notes on natural history, and in his closing chapter the author gives a more or less detailed account of many of the animals with which long residence in the north had made him familiar. 3 The next traveler to be referred to in the present connection is Alexander Mackenzie, who, in the summer of 1789, descended to its mouth the great river which now bears his name. Since Hearne had penetrated the interior, hitherto unknown to the northward of the Saskatchewan, the fur traders of Canada had gradually extended their field of operations northward, first to the upper Churchill River, then by way of Isle a la Crosse and Methye Portage to Athabaska River, where a post was erected by Peter Pond in 1778, about 40 miles above the mouth of the river. In 1785 trading houses were built on Great Slave Lake to the eastward of the mouth -of the river, apparently near Stone Island. In 1787 the various private traders and small companies united under the name of the ‘North-West Company,’ which was a most formidable rival of the Hudson’s Bay Company until their consolidation in 1821. The post established on the Athabaska was removed in 1788 to the south shore of Athabaska Lake, about 8 miles east of the mouth of the river. It was named Fort Chipewyan and for some years was the principal post of the district. From here Alexander Mackenzie started on his famous journeys of exploration. “For a brief discussion of this part of Hearne’s route, by Doctor Richardson, see Back’s Narrative Arctic Land Expedition to Mouth of Great Fish River, pp. 150-155, 1836. EEE ee 2, a, 56 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. He left on June 3, 1789, and, descending Slave River, reached Great - Slave Lake June 9. Ice delayed him until June 15, when he worked slowly across as wind and ice permitted, reaching Yellowknife Bay on June 23. Crossing the Northern Arm, he coasted the north shore of the lake and reached its outlet June 29. Then, entering the great river, he traveled with such expedition that he reached the mouth of Great Bear River July 6, and the mouth of the Mackenzie about the middle of the month. After a short examination of the vicinity he commenced his return against the stream. Great Bear River was passed on August 2, Liard River on August 13, and Great Slave Lake was reached on August 22. Retracing his course around the northern border of the lake, he reached the mouth of Slave River on September 3, the Slave [Smith] Rapids on September 8, and Fort Chipewyan on September 12. Three years later Mackenzie undertook another voyage of, discovery and penetrated the unknown country lying beyond the most distant post on Peace, or Unjigah, River, as it was known to the natives. He left Fort Chipewyan on October 10, 1792, and passing through the smaller lakes to the westward of Athabaska Lake entered the Peace and ascended it to a point 6 miles above its junction with Smoky River, or the ‘ Forks.’ To this place men had been sent earlier in the season to prepare materials for the erection of a trad- ing post. His map and narrative show that up to that time three posts had been established on Peace River—the ‘ Old Establishment,’ then abandoned, a short distance from Vermilion Falls; the ‘ New Establishment,’ evidently near the present site of Fort Vermilion, and a post called on his map ‘ McLoed’s Fort,’ about 33 miles below the mouth of Smoky River. The site of the proposed post, called | Fork Fort, was reached November 1, and here buildings were erected and the winter of 1792-93 was passed in trading with the Indians. On May 9, 1793, his westward journey was resumed. Peace River and its tributary, the Parsnip, were ascended to a point near the source of the latter, and a traverse made to the Fraser River, supposed by Mackenzie to be the Columbia, and this was descended for some distance. Thence, by a journey on foot westward through the valley of *‘ West Road’ River (evidently the Blackwater), and by descending ‘ Salmon’ River (the Bella Coola), Mackenzie reached the Pacific late in July near King Island, a short distance north of Vancouver Island, thus being the first traveler to eross the con- tinent north of Mexico. After examining a few miles of the coast and observing for lati- tude and longitude, Mackenzie retraced his course to the mountains and, after great exertions and much suffering from famine, reached Peace River and, descending it, arrived at Fort Chipewyan in Sep- 1908. ] PREVIOUS EXPLORATIONS—FRANKLIN. 57 tember, 1793. The narratives of these voyages, published in 1801, contain many interesting notes on the natural history of the region traversed. | FRANKLIN, 1819, TO SIMPSON, 1889. The first journey of Captain (afterwards Sir John) Franklin to the Polar Sea was the beginning of a series of explorations which resulted in the accumulation of a vast amount of information relat- ing to the fauna of the region. The party, including Franklin, John Richardson, George Back, Robert Hood, and John Hepburn, an English seaman, left York Factory on September 9, 1819, and travel- ing by way of Oxford House and Norway House, arrived on October 22 at Cumberland House, where they went into winter quarters. In order to arrange in advance for the further progress of the expedi- tion, Franklin, accompanied by Back, left Cumberland House on January 18, 1820, and traveling by way of Carlton House, Isle 4 la Crosse, and Methye Portage, arrived at Fort Chipewyan, their objec- tive point, on March 26. With the opening of navigation the re- _mainder of the party pursued practically the same route and joined Franklin at Fort Chipewyan on July 13, and the entire party leaving five days later, reached Great Slave Lake on July 24. Starting from Moose Deer (now Mission) Island three days later, the party crossed Great Slave Lake to Fort Providence on the Northern Arm, where Indian -guides and hunters for the descent of the Coppermine were engaged. The party left Fort Providence on August 2, ascended Yellowknife River, and traversing a series of lakes, established win- ter quarters on Winter River, after making a preliminary trip as far . as the banks of the Coppermine. After passing the winter of 1820-21 here they resumed their travels on June 14, 1821, dragging their boats and baggage on the ice. On July 1, at Red Rock Lake, they commenced the descent of the Coppermine, and on July 18 reached its mouth, the Indians turning back from this point. Leaving here July 21, the party, now numbering twenty persons, explored the coast to the eastward as far as Pomt Turnagain, which was reached August 16. Further progress in that direction being impossibie, the return journey was commenced on August 22. Retracing their way along the coast to the mouth of Hood River, the party attempted to ascend that stream with the large canoes, but this being found im- possible, the journey toward Fort Enterprise was undertaken on foot. two small canoes, made from the material of the large ones, being carried for the purpose of crossing the rivers encountered. Owing mainly to the abandoning of their canoes by those deputized to carry them, the party experienced intense suffering from starvation and ex- posure. Several of the voyagers wandered and died, and Hood was murdered by one of the party, an Iroquois. The survivors assembled es —— i 58 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. at Fort Enterprise about the last of October. Here two more of the voyagers died, and the whole party must have perished from starva- tion but for the Indians under the chief Agiatcho, who supplied them with food. The explorers were shortly afterward conveyed to Fort Providence, and thence to the trading post on Moose Deer Island (near Fort Resolution). In the spring of 1822, the party left Great Slave Lake, and proceeding by the same route followed when enter- ing the country, returned to England. The fauna of Melville Island was made known by the first expedi- tion of William Edward Parry, in the Hecla and the Griper. This navigator, entering Barrow Strait for the first time, passed through it to the westward and discovered Melville Island about the last of August, 1819. Coasting along its southern shore, the expedition was stopped by the ice on September 24, and went into winter quarters in Winter Harbor, where it remained until the following August. In June, 1820, the ships being still fast in the ice, an exploring party sent out to the northward crossed the island and discovered and named Liddon Gulf and Hecla and Griper Bay, and other parties made shorter trips in the same direction. On August 1 the ships were freed from the ice, and working slowly westward reached Cape Dundas a few days later. From this point, land (Banks Land) was discerned to the southwestward, but being unable to reach it on ac- count of the ice, or to penetrate farther to the westward, Parry re- traced his course through Barrow Strait and returned to England. Many notes on the natural history of the region appear in Parry’s narrative of the voyage, and an account of the mammals and birds observed and collected was prepared by Edward Sabine, naturalist to the expedition, and published as a supplement to the narrative. The narrative of Alexander Fisher, surgeon to the expedition, also contains a great many notes on natural history. In May, 1824, Parry left England in the Hecla and Fury on his third voyage to the Arctic; his second voyage, in 1821 and 1822, penetrated only as far westward as Melville Peninsula, and need not be noticed in detail. He reached Lancaster Sound on September 10, 1824, and Port Bowen, on the east side of Prince Regent Inlet, about the last of the month. Nearly a year was spent in the vicinity, and the expedition then returned to England. Reports on the nat- ural history were published by J. C. Ross. Franklin’s second expedition to the Polar Sea was sent out to explore the coast line to the westward of the mouth of the Mackenzie and eastward to the Coppermine. The principal members were John Franklin; George Back, second in command; John Richardson, surgeon and naturalist; Thomas Drummond, assistant naturalist ; EK. N. Kendall, and P. W. Dease, who was afterwards associated with Thomas Simpson in explorations west of the Mackenzie and east of 1908. ] PREVIOUS EXPLORATIONS—FRANKLIN. 59 the Coppermine. The first five named entered the country by way of New York and the Great Lakes, and Franklin, Richardson, and Drummond, traveling a little in advance of the others, reached Cumberland House on June 15, 1825. Here Drummond remained. with the intention of making collections on the Saskatchewan and among the Rocky Mountains to the westward. Franklin and Rich- ardson left the following day, and on June 29, at Methye Portage, overtook the boats which had left Cumberland House a short time previously with the heavier supplies. The party then descended the Clearwater and Athabaska to Fort Chipewyan, where Franklin remained until the arrival of Back’s party, Richardson keeping on with the boats. On the arrival of Back’s detachment, Franklin descended the Slave and Mackenzie to the mouth of Great Bear River. Here Franklin and Back separated, the former, accompanied by Kendall, to descend the Mackenzie to its mouth, while Back was to proceed to Great Bear Lake to the winter residence, Richardson having already preceded him there for the purpose of exploring the shores of the lake. Franklin, after making a preliminary survey of the Mackenzie to its mouth, returned to the prospective winter quarters, established near the head of Great Bear River by Dease. who had passed the previous winter at Great Slave Lake and had arrived here late in July. At this establishment, which had been named Fort Franklin, the entire party assembled on September 5, and passed the winter of 1825-26 in comparative comfort. On the breaking up of Bear River in the following summer, they descended it and the Mackenzie, dividing into two parties on July 4 at Point Separation. Richardson and Kendall surveyed the Arctic coast eastward to the mouth of the Coppermine, and, traveling overland to the northeastern part of Great Bear Lake, crossed it to Fort Franklin, where they arrived on September 1. Richardson left at once for Great Slave Lake and Cumberland House, for the purpose of meeting Drummond and making spring collections on the Sas- katchewan.* In the meantime Franklin and Back had explored the Arctic coast to the westward of the Mackenzie for 374 miles, and returned to Fort Franklin, reaching there September 21. Franklin remained here until February, 1827, when, leaving Back to follow in the spring, he left for Cumberland House, where he joined Richard- son on June 18, 1827. Richardson, after leaving Fort Franklin, had proceeded to Great Slave Lake, where he passed a part of the winter collecting, and then proceeded on the snow to Carlton House, where he was joined by Drummond on April 5, 1827. The two spent some “Tn an old journal at Fort Simpson I found the record of Doctor Richardson’s arrival at that post on September 14, 1826, and of his departure for Great Slave Lake two days later. He is stated to have left Great Bear Lake on - September 3. 60 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. weeks here in making collections, until Richardson left for Cumber-- land House, where he was jomed by Franklin, as before indicated. Franklin and Richardson left almost immediately, and, voyaging by way of Lake Winnipeg and the Great Lakes, returned to England by nearly the same route which they had followed when entering the country. Drummond remained in the neighborhood of Carlton House for the purpose of making further collections, since Back’s detachment, which he was to accompany to England, would not arrive at Cumberland House from the interior for about two months. When Back arrived he was joined by Drummond, and the party, ~accompanied by David Douglas, who was returning from a collecting trip of three years to northern California and the banks of the Co- lumbia, and. had crossed the Rocky Mountains by the Columbia portage road (Jasper Pass), returned to England by way of Oxford Lake and York Factory. In order to complete the account of this important expedition it is necessary to refer briefly to the itinerary of Thomas Drummond from the time of the departure of the main expedition from Cumber- land House in the summer of 1825 to the time when he joined Rich- ardson at Carlton House. He remained at Cumberland House until about August 1, when he accompanied the Hudson’s Bay Company’s brigade to Carlton House, and leaving there September 1, reached Edmonton September 20. After two days’ delay here he accompanied the brigade overland to Fort Assiniboine, on the Athabaska, near the mouth of the McLeod. Leaving here October 2, the party reached the mountains October 14. Drummond traveled mainly on foot and, as snow fell on the third day after they started, found this portion of the journey very disagreeable. After proceeding about 50 miles | on the Columbia portage road he left the brigade, in company with a hunter who had been engaged to supply him with food during the winter, intending to pass that season on the ‘Smoking’ River, so called from the burning beds of coal on its banks. The snow became so deep, however, that they had to give up the attempt to reach their proposed destination, and leaving the mountains, went into winter. quarters on Baptiste River, a tributary of the Athabaska. Here Drummond passed the winter mainly alone, his only shelter being a hut built of branches. About April 10, 1826, he left this place for the Columbia portage road, where he remained until August 10, when, in company with another hunter, he traveled along the mountains to the northward, reaching ‘Smoking’ River on September 10 and the ‘“ headwaters of the Peace ”* on September 24. He then set out on his return, and desiring to cross the portage to Columbia River, he com- menced drying provisions for the journey. Soon after reaching the portage, on October 9, however, he received instructions from Cap- “Referring, probably, to one of the southern tributaries of the upper Peace. 1908. ] _ PREVIOUS EXPLORATIONS—LEADBEATER. 6] iain Franklin to rejoin the expedition in the spring of 1827. He therefore proceeded only to the west end of the portage, and return- ing, commenced his journey down the Athabaska, floating down the river until it set fast and finishing the journey to Fort Assiniboine on foot. Then procuring horses, he proceeded to Edmonton, where he remained until March 17, when he left for Carlton House, arriving there April 5, when the welcome of Doctor Richardson caused him to forget his previous hardships. The natural history material and notes accumulated on this expedi- tion were so extensive that it was decided that they should be published separately, instead of as an appendix to the narrative. The result was the series of magnificent volumes, the Fauna and Flora Bore- ali-Americana, in which, in addition to the material collected on the Franklin expeditions, appeared the results obtained on the earlier voyages of Ross and Parry. This publication, the several volumes of which treated of the mammals, birds, fishes, insects, and plants, was for many years the chief source of information regarding the natural history of northern North America, and continues to be a standard work. During the early part of the last century Mr. Leadbeater, a London collector and dealer in natural history specimens, obtained from time to time many birds from the country controlled by the Hudson’s Bay Company, evidently securing them from employees of that com- pany. Probably only a few of these specimens were ever made known to science, but here and there are found references to interesting spe- cies obtained from this source. Bonaparte, in his ‘American Ornt- thology ’ and in other articles published about the same time, records four species of birds ostensibly from “Athabasca Lake,” or “ near the Rocky Mountains,” which he found in Leadbeater’s collection. =a2e= = 65 10 | Big Cascade Rapid__________ 212 1 iPelicaneBorta geass == eae 100 35 || Mountain Rapid_——__-______- 219 7 iPelicansRivers a2 sss =e 102 2 || Moberly, Rapids ae 225 6 FOUSETRIV.GL= sn seas ee 143 41 | Clearwater River (Fort Mc- Grand Rapid (altitude 1,200 Murray, altitude 840 feet)_ 228 3 PCCi) = es es Sree Sener 153 10 || Upper Steep Bank River____ 251 23 PomtelbalBiches = eee 159 | 6 | Red River (Fort MacKay)__- 263 12 Little Buffalo River______=_-_. 166 7 -\\- Pierre.al Calumet == ==s 278 15 BTU ap 10 ee 172 6 || -PRoplar-Point= eee 318 40 iIBOilerzva D1 dae 191 | 19 | Athabaska Lake (mouth | MiddletRapid] === a 193 | 74 Athabaska River)_________ 388 70 | SLAVE RIVER. Distance | | Distance from | Distance | from | Distance Station. Atha- | between Station. Atha- | between - baska | points. | baska | points. Lake. Lake. Fort Chipewyan (Athabaska | Miles. Miles. Miles. Miles. Lake, altitude 690 feet)_____ 0 01 “Point-Brulés ee eee 181 14 Peace Rivers-—— assess | 32 32. || Point Honuyex aes 213 32 Smith; Landing===) 5 = 100 68 || Limestone Point-—-_=-__--- = 219 6 TGV Reh AOD NG Mees eS SS ee 116 16 | McConnell Islands__________-_ 243 24 SalipRivers "= ses 132 16 || Great Slave Lake (mouth | Grand Detours. == 151 19 | Slave River) = 290 47 Around Grand Detour_______- 167 16 |j mau MACKENZIE RIVER. Distance Distance. from | Distance | from | Distance Station. | head of | between || Station. head of | between ' Macken- | points. -Macken- | points. | zie. Eales =) Big Island (head Mackenzie JMiles. Miles. Miles. Miles. River, altitude 520 feet)___-. 0 O:)|-Gravel: River. aa 440) HoOcLbeeTOVIdeRn Cees e= =e | 48 48 | Old Fort Norman (site 1844) 454 14 Willow or Horn River-------- 68 90+1) Fort Noman= = sas 484 30 Headolstbhe aimee eee | 138 70. || Wolverene: Rock == asses 584 100 Spence River. sw ee | 173 35 || San Sault Rapid_--=-="-—— = 609 25 Rabbits kine River=——— ss 2 188 15 | Beavertail Pont 623 14 Liard River (Fort Simpson)_. 209 7 .|| -Beaver-Rivete=== === =ane 645 22 Martinuhiver oo omen eee | 217 sats | Ramparts.) > ee 662 17 wo Islands. --—2 = 2s | 241 24 || Fort Good Hope-_--_-_--_____. 670 8 Wahanni River _---==- 22-2 285 44-|| Loon Rives 690 20 RO OLERIV Cl res eee 301 16:3|||-Grand Viewo--2-2) eee 730 40 Wallowalake Rivers =e | 321 20 Old Fort Good Hope (site) __ 790! 60 Fort Wrigley (site 1904)______. 341 20 || Trading River. ==) === 802 12 Roche Trempe-l’eau______-_-_- 366 25 || dhowel amp acts=.— eae 867 65 Blackwater River. sees 394 28 || Arctic Red River (post)__-__. 875 8 Red ROcksRiv ers —= = 2S 404 10 | Mackenzie Delta (head)_--__- 907 32 GalisRiver2< 0 © ares 426 22, Arctic Ocean (mouth Mac cl IBircheislan d= saan eee 432 6\||- kenzie) 2 -223-2 See 995 | 88 ROUTE BETWEEN GREAT SLAVE AND GREAT BEAR LAKES. To complete the account of the routes traversed by the parties of the Biological Survey, it remains to describe the canoe route followed by the writer northward from the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake to MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake, and thence to the Mackenzie. 1908.] ROUTES TRAVERSED—MACKENZIE. EL The first part of this route, which follows a chain of lakes, has been previously traversed by so few travelers that brief mention may be made of the earlier explorations. In May, 1864, Emile Petitot, a Catholic missionary, accompanied a party of Dogrib Indians from Fort Rae northward toward Great Bear Lake. They traveled on snowshoes and penetrated a short clis- tance north of a lake which he named Lac St. Croix. On this lake he remained a short time, and on a prominent point erected a large wooden cross. His return journey was made in June, mainly by canoe. A brief account of his journey, with a map, was published in 1875, and other fuller accounts later. The principal streams and lakes were named by him, and until 1900 his accounts and maps con- stituted the only sources of information in regard to the tract in question. In the winter of 1866 the Rev. W. C. Bompas, an Episcopal mis- sionary, and W. C. King, a Hudson’s Bay officer, traveled with dogs along Petitot’s route and northwestward to Fort Franklin on Great Bear Lake. I have seen no published account of this journey. In 1900 J. Macintosh Bell, of the Canadian Geological Survey, trav- ersed the region from MacTavish Bay southward to Great Slave Lake. On entering the territory first explored by Petitot he at- tempted to apply his names, but owing to discrepancies between the positions of the lakes as located by his own observations, and the loca- tion of those described by Petitot, who traveled by dead reckoning, he was unable to correlate his own and the latter’s discoveries, and con- sequently applied Petitot’s names incorrectly to some lakes and renamed others. When I made this traverse in 1903 I chanced to discover Petitot’s eross, now fallen and disjomted, but readily identified by its position and the remains of the date, inscribed by him in Roman letters on the crosspiece. This fortunate circumstance positively identifies this lake as his Lac St. Croix, and also aids in identifying the other lakes to the north and south. In view of the positive nature of the evi- dence it seems best im the interests of accuracy to use the names applied by Petitot to the various lakes on this route. Accompanied by James MacKinlay and two Indians I left Fort Rae late in the afternoon of July 30, 1903, and encamped on the eastern shore a few miles to the northward. On July 31 we trav- ersed the remaining part of the Northern Arm and passed through the short narrow channel which connects with Lake Marian.¢ Lake Marian is about 20 miles in length and nearly 10 miles broad in its widest part, and contains a multitude of rocky islands. Its shores are rocky, and altogether it is exactly similar to the Northern 4 This lake is sometimes called Lake Brochet, but this name is applied to so many that the name Lake Marian, used by Bell, seems preferable. jee NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Arm, of which it is a continuation. Several limestone hills stand on its western shore. The trading post of Hislop and Nagle, built on its eastern shore, is much resorted to by the Dogribs, who hunt the extensive country to the northward. On July 31, being delayed at the trading post, we did not reach the end of the lake, but early the following day we entered Grandin River, which flows into its northern extremity. Grandin River at its mouth is about 50 vards wide, and has a rather strong current. The first rapid, where a portage of a few dozen yards is made over a rock, is reached within a mile. About 2 miles above another fall is encountered, where also a portage was made. Above here we continued to work our way slowly against the current, having to propel the canoes entirely by the paddles, as the shores are unfit for tracking. In the afternoon we paddled through a small, marshy jake and passed the mouth of Marten River shortly before camping. The next day we paddled through several marshy lakes, above which we ascended a small rapid with the aid of the line and soon afterwards reached a fork of the river. The right-hand branch is followed by the Dogribs on their way to the Coppermine. Our route lay up the left fork. The shores here are low and the chan- nels narrow, winding, and much obstructed by fallen trees. Above here we paddled through several small, marshy ponds and portaged past a small fall. We then passed through a rocky defile, above which we made four portages, and ascended several small riffles with the paddles or with the help of the line. On August 3 we avoided eight falls or rapids by making portages and ascended several others with the line. At the last rapid, where we encamped, the river rushes for a hundred yards through a rocky gorge (see exe fig.2). The spruce woods about here have escaped the fires which have devastated most of this section. Some of the small ponds and channels passed through were bordered by banks of clay, clothed mainly with white birch. ? Continuing, on August 4 we ascended a small rapid with the line and soon came to Hislop Lake, a fair-sized body of water with irregu- lar shores. A conspicuous, well-wooded ridge bordered its northwest shore. We crossed the lake diagonally and passed up its principal feeder, a small, willow-bordered stream, very deep in some places and in others much obstructed by bowlders. In the afternoon we made two short portages and ascended several small riffles. Toward evening we made a portage about half a mile long over a rocky ridge to the right, cutting off a bend of the river which was evidently full of rapids. The upper end of the portage passed over a rocky hill and ended with an abrupt descent to the water’s edge. The next day, August 5, we soon reached a rapid, which we avoided by a short portage on the left, embarking again on a small, rock- 1908. ] ROUTES TRAVERSED—MACKENZIE. rales bordered lake. A rapid falling into this lake was next portaged and we soon entered another small lake. Leaving this on the north side we made a portage of a mile and a half over a wooded ridge, avoid- ing a circuitous stretch of rapid water. This portage, the longest on the route, led through small muskegs, where tracks of bears and moose were numerous. On August 6 we paddled through a small, irregular lake, out of which we made a short portage, avoiding a rapid, and almost imme- diately entered another small expansion of the channel. From this lakelet a small stream with alternating depths and shallows led us to Lake Mazenod (Nagle Lake of Bell), which is practically the head of the stream we had been ascending. Closely wooded regular ridges border Lake Mazenod to the south, and irregular rocky hills to the north. Its greatest length (about 8 miles) is from east to west. We paddled among its rocky islands to its western extremity and made a series of four short portages between three small muskeg ponds to the shores of a larger body of water, Sarahk Lake. Ibid., p. 274, and plate facing p. 271, 1829. € Zool. of Herald, Fossil Mammals, p. 87, 1854. 4Ottawa Naturalist, VI, p. 131, 1892. The first published reference to Ovis fénnini as a distinct species seems to have been made by McConnell in this article, in which he states: ** Another variation in color was reported to me by some miners on the Yukon, who described some sheep shot by them on the upper part of this river as having a brown patch on both sides behind the fore shoulders, and referred to them as the ‘ saddle-backed sheep.’ ”’ a Se ee 158 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. They were killed the latter part of May, 1898, with the old coat about half shed. The two coats thus represented being both white, shows that the species is always white. As stated above, Mr. Stone first met with the species just north of the Beaver River, and north of the Liard River below its confiuence with the Beaver. He adds: “ This is their southernmost range, whence it extends north almost to the Arctic coast. I made very careful inquiry of the Indians of the Ettshotas, Takullas, and Spatotimas tribes, who hunt this region, and they were unanimous in their declaration that the Black and White Sheep never mingle together; that the Black are never found north of the Beaver River, and that the White Sheep are never found south of it. This information was “substantiated by the testimony of the Histolenas or Mountain Indians and that of the Schotinas of the Liard River.” I subjoin the measurements of six additional adult specimens collected in July and August, 1898, by Mr. Stone, but not yet forwarded. They were taken in the Rocky Mountains, in latitude 65° 45’, near where the Carcass [Carecajou?] River leaves them.% A. J. Stone gives the range of this species as follows This beautiful inhabitant of Boreal America occupies two separate and distinct ranges, namely (1) the Alaskan Mountains and the Kenai Peninsula; and (2) the entire stretch of the Rocky Mountains north of latitude 60°, to near the Arctic coast west of the Mackenzie, ranging thence west to the headwaters of the Noatak and Kowak rivers, that flow into Kotzebue Sound. He states that they are in most places much less common than- formerly.? Oreamnos montanus (Ord). Mountain Goat. Ross listed this species as having been taken near Fort Simpson.°¢ Concerning the range of this animal in the Mackenzie Valley, Fannin and Grinnell publish an extract from a letter from MacFarlane, in which he says While stationed at Forts Simpson, Norman, and Good Hope, on the Mackenzie, I often partook of the flesh of this species, killed by Indians at a distance, amid the Rocky Mountain spurs. The eastern limits are the mountains which extend on the Liard, or Turnagain, the Peel, and the Mackenzie rivers. They are also to be met with in the Rockies on the upper Peace River, but I have never heard of any being found to the east of the Mackenzie, but they come close to the latter river.@ In a recent article MacFarlane states that this species ranges north at least to the Arctic Circle: At Forts Norman and Good Hope the company frequently receives small quantities of the dried meat of this animal from their Indian hunters on the west side of the river and in the mountains.? 4 Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., XII, p.-3, 1899. 6Tbid., XIII, p. 43, 1900. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.)}, p. 275, 1862. He had. previously (Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 442, 1861) recorded specimens from La Pierre House, but this was probably an error. @¥orest and Stream, XXXIV, p. 64, Feb. 13, 1890. € Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus:, XXVIII, p: 685, 1905. 1908.] MAMMALS. 159 During the autumn of 1895 J. Alden Loring saw a band of 6 on a cliff in the mountains about 25 miles west of Henry House, and was told that the animals were found throughout the mountains in that region. On visiting the same region in 1896 he found that those observed the previous year west of Henry House had been killed by Indians just before his arrival. Several specimens were taken at his eamp 15 miles south of Henry House early in July. A few seen a few days later, not being wanted for specimens, were allowed to escape. He describes their gait as ungainly and slower than he expected. When the animals started up the mountain from the salt lick where they had been disturbed he amused himself by chasing them, and succeeded in getting within 20 feet of one, partially cut- ting off his retreat. The goat lowered his head as though preparing to charge, but started off to one side and finally succeeded in getting past, and then walked leisurely up the mountain, occasionally turning. his head to get a good look at his enemy. In this region they were less common than the mountain sheep, but somewhat resembled them in habits, frequently visiting the same licks. Along the route be- tween Jasper House and Smoky River the species was rare, most of the country not being adapted to their wants. At a camp near the head of Grand Cache River he found wool of this species, showing that it occurred there. According to information obtained at Fort Liard this species is still found in the Nahanni Mountains back from Liard, and used to occur near the river. It is said to occur also in the mountains opposite Fort Norman, but is rare. Marmota monax canadensis * (Erxleben). Canadian Woodchuck. The woodchuck, usually called * wenusk’* in the north, occurs in suitable places, usually where there are rocks or sandy soil, through- out the region north to Great Slave Lake and the mouth of the Liard. Owing to lack of material from Quebec, the name canadensis is used only provisionally for the woodchuck of the Mackenzie Valley. In June, 1901, I found the burrow of one in poplar woods 10 miles below the mouth of the Peace, and another at Fort Smith. In 1903, at Smith Landing, Cary saw several skins, said to have been taken in the hilly country to the eastward. I was informed that the species occurs commonly on the sandy ridres in the vicinity of Fort Resolu- 2Tn 1902 (N. A. Fauna, No. 22, p. 47) I used the name Arctomys m. empetra (Mus empetra, Pallas, Nove Species Quad. e Glirium Ordine, p. 75, 1778), which was based mainly on the Quebec Marmot of Pennant, for the Canadian woodchuck. Unfortunately, however, I then overlooked the fact that Erxleben (Systema Regni Animalis, p. 363, 1777) had already described the same animal under the name Glis canadensis, giving the same citations as Pallas. The name canadensis being thus equally pertinent with cmpetra, and having a priority of one year, will stand for the Canadian woodchuck. i6v0 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO, 27. tion. Near Fort Simpson it is said to be fairly common, living in high clay banks. I obtained a female from a native on May 23, 1904, and J. W. Mills secured a male on June 20. They measured, respec- tively: Total length 455, tail vertebrze 112, hind foot 73; and 508, 120, 76. The species is said to abound in the vicinity of the Liard River rapids, about 30 miles above its mouth, and at Fort Liard. While walking along the bank of the Athabaska at the Cascade Rapid on August 17, 1904, during my homeward trip, I found the skin and head of a well-grown woodchuck which had been captured and eaten by a golden eagle. Richardson states that this species inhabits the wooded districts of Canada as far north at least as latitude 61°. Ross, under the name Arctomys monax, recorded a specimen from Liard River (probably Fort Liard),’ and also gives the species as having been taken at Fort Simpson.° Allen, under the same name, records specimens from Fort Chipewyan and Fort Simpson.“ MacFarlane mentions that skins of this animal were traded at Fort Simpson, Fort Chipewyan, Isle a la Crosse, Portage la Loche, Green Lake, and Pelican Narrows.e J. Al- den Loring obtained a specimen at Edmonton, Alberta, September 14, 1894. It was killed in a grain field, and the species was reported to be rare. He took another on June 5, 1896, on McLeod River about 150 miles west of Edmonton. They were both males and measured, re- spectively: 446, 121, 67; and 510, 129, 75. A skull from Fort Liard taken by B. R. Ross, and probably the one recorded by him (loe. cit.), is in the National Museum. Skins and skulls from the region agree essentially with specimens from the Hudson Bay region. Marmota caligata (Eschscholtz). Hoary Marmot. This large woodchuck inhabits the Rocky Mountains and their spurs west of the Mackenzie, north at least to near the Arctic. Circle. Harmon’ mentions this animal under the name ‘ whistler’ as an inhabitant of the mountains near the upper part of Peace River, and Mackenzie met with it farther to the westward. Richardson, under the name Arctomys pruinosus, quotes the description of one which was killed on the south branch of the Mackenzie (Liard).2 Allen, under the same name, records specimens from Fort Liard and Fort Good Hope. | Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 147, 1829. 6 Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 442, 1861. ¢Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 274, 1862. @ Monographs N. A. Rodentia, p. 919, 1877. € Proc..U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 7541; 1905. f Journal of Voyages and Travels, p. 427, 1820. 9¥Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 151, 1829. 2 Monographs N. A. Rodentia, p. 929, 1877. 1908.] MAMMALS. 161 On September 28, 1895, during Loring’s trip to western Alberta, several were seen in the mountains west of Henry House, and a young specimen was taken. At this time there had been a heavy fall of snow, but most of it had melted. In 1896 Loring found the species | common at and above the timber line near his camp 15 miles south of Henry House in July, and observed several about one-quarter grown about the first of the month. In many places the entrances to their holes were in snowdrifts, and the animals could be seen seated there on sunny days. A well-grown female was taken on July 7. It meas- ured: 616, 202, 85. In the late summer and early autumn, he re- ported the species common at and above timber line in the high mountains between Jasper House and Smoky River. When he visited the mountains 25 miles west of Henry House about the mid- dle of October, the animals had hibernated, but he saw many skulls about an Indian camp, and judged that the species was common there. John Firth, Hudson’s Bay officer in charge of Fort McPherson, who has spent many years in that region, informed me that this species, which he accurately described, occurs in the mountains about the headwaters of the Porcupine. From other sources I learned that it is a well-known inhabitant of the mountains about Fort Liard. Citellus (Colobotis) parryi (Richardson). Hudson Bay Spermophile. Ground squirrels inhabit the entire area of the Barren Grounds across the northern part of the region now under review (see PI. XX), and are usually abundant wherever found. In the absence of specimens it 1s impossible to draw a definite line between the habi- tats of C. parryi and of hennicotti, which is the form found about the mouth of the Mackenzie, and with which parryi undoubtedly intergrades. It being desirable, however, to separate the records, I have taken the watershed between the Coppermine and Great Bear Lake as the dividing line, though this boundary is purely arbitrary and subject to correction. The species was first recorded from the region in Franklin’s nar- rative of his first northern journey, under the name Arctomys rich- ardsoni, as occurring near Gordon Bay, Bathurst Inlet. Richard- son mentions seeing many of the animals on the lower Coppermine in August, 1826;” later he states that the species abounded in the vicin- ity of Fort Enterprise.© Back mentions the species as occurring near the northern end of Artillery Lake, northeast of Fort Reliance; 4 @Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 378, 1823. 6 Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 271, 1828. € Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 158, 1829. 4Narrative Arctic Land Expedition to Great Fish River, p. 128, 1836. 44131—No. 27—_08——11 162 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. and King noted it on Back River, above Pelly Lake. Pike also found it numerous on Back River, above Lake Beechey, in July, 1890." Hubert Darrell, who accompanied Hanbury down the Thelon or Ark-i-linik in the summer of 1901, informs me by letter that ground squirrels were very numerous along its banks, and in the summer of 1902 were common also along the Arctic coast between Bathurst Inlet and the Coppermine. Hanbury mentions that one was killed on May 29 of the same year near Melbourne Island, and implies that it was the first observed that season. He states that the animals are easily taken by hand when surprised at some distance from their burrows, and that they form the chief food of the wolverene during the summer months.¢ Citellus (Colobotis) parryi kennicotti (Ross). Mackenzie Spermophile. Arctomys kennicottii Ross, Canadian Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 484, 1861. In an article on the animals useful to the Chipewyan Indians, Ber- nard R. Ross proposed the name Arctomys kennicottii for the spermophile of the lower Mackenzie region. The name has hereto- fore been overlooked or not taken at its full value, from failure to trace it to the place where it was first used, where it is accompanied by a fairly full description. In order to present the matter clearly the original description is here quoted. Under the head of Marmots (Arctomys), Ross says: There are three, if not four, species of this animal in the Mackenzie’s River District, viz, A. pruinosus—inhabiting the northern Rocky Mountains and Nahaunay Hills; A. Mennicottii—dwelling in the same localities, with a more northern range, and extending eastward to the Anderson River. * * * As [f do not think that the Marmot, which I have named A. Kennicottii (after my friend the enterprising Naturalist Mr. Robert Iennicott,) has been yet de- scribed, I shall here insert a brief notice concerning it. It is in size as large as a small muskrat, and in color a silvery gray, inter- spersed with orange hairs on the back, but changing on the flanks into a decided yellow, palest on the belly; the tail is short. It has cheek pouches, and is de- cidedly smaller than A. monaz. In habits, so far as I know, it assimilates closely to the other marmots. It is a social animal and digs its den on the mountain’s side, or in the banks of rivers. * * * Very far north there is a variety which is perfectly black, instead of hoary and yellow. The habitat, as above given, is somewhat indefinite. Fortunately, however, on a succeeding page (p. 442), he lists specimens from [near] Fort Good Hope and Anderson River, which may be considered to fix the name on the animal of the lower Mackenzie region. Since specimens from this region prove identical in characters with topo- types of Spermophilus barrowensis, recently described from Point Barrow,? the latter name becomes a synonym of kennicottt. 4@Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 281, 1836. ® Barren Ground of Northern Canada, p. 183, 1892. ¢ Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 154, 1904. @Merriam, Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., II, p. 19, March, 1900. PLATE XX. No. 27, U.S. Dept. Agr. Biological Survey. n Fauna North America ANTE: Cr PAW R tt \\ \\ ANY \ \ we Aw \\ I wo Ch OO ANI \ AW SN I a nd BS DISTRIBUTION OF PARRY MARMOT (CITELLUS PARRY!) AND RELATED FORMS IN CENTRAL CANADA 1908.] MAMMALS. 163 While descending the Mackenzie in June, 1904, I was constantly on the lookout for this spermophile. C. P. Gaudet, of Fort Good Hope, informed me that it was not found in the vicinity of that post, but occurred beside the river at some distance below. Descending the river, I saw the first burrows on some sandy hills on the right bank about 60 miles below Fort Good Hope, and was afterwards informed by Pere Giroux, who has paid much attention to the animal life of the region, that this point is the uppermost limit of their range on the river. They become common on the right bank 50 miles below, where the river bends sharply to the west, and is bordered by a suc- cession of high clay banks. Well up on these banks, above high flood mark, the animals make their permanent burrows, and are usually seen scampering toward them, or sitting upright at the entrances, to whistle a moment at the intruder before plunging into their depths. Here on June 27 I took a pair of adults and two half-grown young. The adults were shy and difficult to secure, but the young were much less wary. The latter were digging burrows on the sandy shores below high-water mark, evidently merely for temporary occupation. During the following day, while pursuing my voyage down the river, I saw many burrows and occasionally one of the animals, and noted that the Indians had set snares at many of the holes. The ant- mals occur in suitable places along the right bank of the river nearly to the Lower Ramparts, but below this point none were observed. In certain places on Peel River near Fort McPherson, where sandy banks occur, they are numerous, and I obtained two specimens there on July 11. They are said to be common also on the mountains west of the Mackenzie below this point. A female taken near the site of old Fort Good Hope, June 27, is in worn breeding pelage and has a pale, washed-out appearance. A male taken at the same time is assuming the postbreeding pelage. This is nearly completed in a male taken at Fort McPherson, July 11. These specimens, compared with topotypes of C. barrowensis in correspond- ing pelages, agree very closely. On comparing the full pelaged speci- mens with a series of C. parryi from Hudson Bay in comparable con- dition, (. kennicotti is seen to differ considerably, being much paler throughout. The paler tint of the ochraceous suffusion of the lower parts, sides, and thighs is especially noticeable. The pair taken near old Fort Good Hope measure as follows: Male: total length, 410; tail vertebrae, 120; hind foot, 60; female: 375, 118, 62. The two males from Fort McPherson measure, respec- tively, 380, 120, 62, and 380, 110, 64. The following records in all probability refer to the present form. Richardson states that the species abounded about Fort Enterprise and was plentiful on Cape Parry.” Simpson noted its occurrence near @¢¥auna Boreali-Americana,:I, p. 158, 1829. 164 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Fort Confidence, and its abundance at Marmot Rapid on Dease River. Ross mentions specimens from [near] Fort Good Hope and Anderson River (loc. cit.). In addition to skins from Lockhart and Anderson rivers, localities still represented in the collection of the U. S. National Museum, specimens are listed by Allen from Liver- pool Bay, Franklin Bay, and Onion River (a tributary of the Lock- hart).’ Russell mentions the ‘ siffleux’ as very abundant near War- ren Point, between the mouth of the Mackenzie and Herschel Island, and took specimens at the latter locality in the late summer of 1894.° A. J. Stone says: “I saw Spermophiles sitting on their mounds among the hills to the east of Darnley Bay early in April [1899], during very cold weather.” “ J. M. Bell, who explored the region of Great Bear Lake in the sum- mer of 1900, informs me by letter that he found this animal common along the north shore of the lake; and Peter McCallum, who has lived several years in the same region, told me that it is abundant on the ‘ Big Point, a local name for the point separating Smith and Keith bays, and mainly occupied by the Scented Grass Hills. Mac- Farlane, in manuscript notes sent to me, speaks of these animals as fairly numerous along the banks of the Onion and Lockhart rivers in July, 1860. Citellus (Colobotis) plesius (Osgood). Lake Bennett Ground Squirrel. While collecting at Fort Norman in June, 1904, I fortunately ob-— tained from a native a male ground squirrel which he had shot a few miles back from the west bank of the Mackenzie, opposite the post. The species was said to be common in the mountains farther back, but to be rare near the river. It measured: Total length 350; tail vertebre 108; hind foot 55. On comparison, it agrees precisely with specimens from Lake Bennett, British Columbia, the type local- ity of C. plesius, and thus greatly extends the known range of that. well-marked form. C. plesius probably inhabits the Nahanni Moun- tains, and other ranges west of the Mackenzie. A specimen from Fort Liard, which I have recently examined, is unmistakably refer- able to it. Citellus (Colobotis) columbianus (Ord). Columbian Ground Squirrel. Ground squirrels referred to this species inhabit the Canadian Rockies in western Alberta and southern British Columbia, for an undetermined distance northward. The species was redescribed by Richardson under the name Arctomys parryi var. erythrogluteca, 4 Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, pp. 216, 249, 1845. ’ Monographs N. A. Rodentia, pp. 846, 847, 1877. ¢ Expl. in Far North, pp. 148, 249, 1898. @Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., XIII, p. 6, 1900. 1908.] MAMMALS. 165 from specimens taken by Drummond on the Rocky Mountains near the sources of the ‘ Elk’ (Athabaska).* While in that region in 1896, J. Alden Loring found the animals rather common in Smoky Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House. They were extremely shy, probably on account of being harassed so much by bears, which, in their attempts to capture the spermophiles, had dug great holes in many places. They seemed to prefer bushy flats to hillsides. Seven specimens were taken on August 27. Later in the summer he found a skull in the mountains about 25 miles west of Henry House. Most of the specimens taken are young of the year, though some apparently are full-grown. The older ones have the general color of the back yellowish brow>, vermiculated with black; upper surface of thighs and hind feet. and face as far back as the eves, bright brick red: lower parts tinged with ochraceous buff; nape, sides, and rump fiecked with gray, evidently the fall pelage coming in; tail fringed with gray. The younger specimens are similar, but lighter in color. These specimens agree closely with skins from various points in Idaho, collected in the type region of the ‘ burrowing squirrel’ of Lewis and Clark, the Arctomys columbianus of Ord.” The largest specimen taken by Loring measures: Total length, 345; tail verte- bree, 93; hind foot, 53. Citellus (Ictidomys) franklini (Sabine). Franklin Spermophile. This ground squirrel occurs in the region now under review only in central Alberta. It is abundant along the road from a few miles north of Edmonton, Alberta, to Sturgeon River, and I saw a few individuals to the rorthward of that poimt. During the first days of May, 1901, when we passed through this section, the animals were very active and had evidently been out of hibernation some time. They were common in the same region also in 1903. They frequented brushy tracts avd the borders of cultivated fields, and were doing considerable damage to the sprouting grain. Many were seen during our return trip through the region in September, but the species was then less conspicuous. Tbid.; p. 805, 1877. € Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Sury., VIII (new ser.), p. 14D, 1896. 170 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [xo. 27. their scolding chatter was often heard. A pair which occupied a nest in a large tree beneath which we pitched our tent were allowed to remain undisturbed until their almost continual scolding at our intrusion rendered their company intolerable. At the other posts where we collected they were much less common, and at Fort Rae they seemed to be rare, only one being seen during my ten days’ work, though one or two others were heard. It is probable, however, that they had been killed off by the natives. A specimen from Fort Resolution, taken by Alfred E. Preble on Mission Island, July 22, is abnormally colored, being very light yel- lowish-rufous above, very sparingly vermiculated with black; the central area of the tail is hght rufous, unmarked. Six specimens from Fort Chipewyan, including both sexes, average: Total length 333, tail vertebrae 188, hind foot 51. During the season of 1903 we found the red squirrel abundant in the country traversed as far north as Great Slave Lake, and Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary took specimens at Hay River, Fort Provi- dence, and Nahanni River. Along my route between Fort Rae and Great Bear Lake it was common, and I took specimens on upper Grandin River and at several other points between there and Mac- Tavish Bay. At my camp east of Leith Point I saw a few tracks early in September, but the forest was too thin to afford the animals a congenial habitat. As we traveled westward, however, and the country became more thickly wooded, as was the case after we passed MeVicar Bay, I found the species common. A number were seen and several were collected at Fort Franklin. Adults taken there September 19 and 25 had partially assumed the winter coat, the underparts, however, still retaining the unmarked summer pelage. Along Bear River and the Mackenzie the species was common. Owing probably to their comparative immunity from predatory animals, red squirrels were extremely abundant about Fort Simpson, especially on the island where the post is situated. A large series was collected during the winter of 1903-4. Hundreds of nests, con- structed of grass, bark, and moss, were found in the trees on the island, and many of the animals appeared to be living in burrows dug in the piles of cone scales which accumulate under the trees where they feed (see fig. 14). During the winter they lived almost exclusively on the seeds of the white spruce, but about the middle of May they fed largely on the blossoming catkins of the balsam poplar (Populus balsamifera). ‘They mated late in March and on May 9 I found a litter of young a week or so old in a nest in a spruce. While descending the Mackenzie in June, I found the species common throughout its course, and took specimens at Forts Norman, Good Hope, and McPherson. 1908.] MAMMALS. ah In the early autumn of 1895 J. Alden Loring found red squirrels common throughout the Jasper House region and took specimens at several localities. He observed large piles of spruce cones which the animals had collected for winter use, as well as quantities of mush- rooms accumulated on the branches of trees near their nests. In one place about a half bushel of mushrooms were thus deposited near a single nest. In 1896 he found the species common 15 miles south of Henry House, July 3 to 21; along his route between Jasper House and Smoky River, August 20 to October 8; and in the mountains west of Henry House later in October. Specimens taken by Loring in this region, mainly in 1895, were recorded by Allen, under the Fic. 14.—Pile of scales of cones of white spruce, collected by red squirrel (Sciurus hud- - ST sonicus), Fort Simpson, March, 1904. name 8S. h. baileyi, from the following localities: Banff, 2; Edmon- ton, 1; Jasper House, 6; Cache Picot [Pecotte], 3; Corral (near Jasper House), 1; Henry House, 1; Muskeg Creek, 3... They are in the rufous phase of coloration, and apparently are not separable from typical hudsonicus. Ross listed specimens from Big Island and Fort Simpson;?’ and Allen specimens from Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Liard, Fort Good Hope, and Fort Anderson.° Tyrrell states that the species was *Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., X,-p. 262, 1898. ’Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 441, 1861. € Monographs N. A. Rodentia, pp. €91, 692, 1877. 172 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. found everywhere in the wooded country between Churchill River and the eastern end of Athabaska Lake, where he explored during the summer of 1892.2 Sciuropterus sabrinus (Shaw). Hudson Bay Flying Squirrel. Though flying squirrels occur apparently throughout the wooded portion of the region, they are rare in most localities, and their nocturnal habits and the great number of abandoned woodpecker holes available for hiding places insure almost perfect immunity from detection. On the Athabaska above Grand Rapid, and also on the upper Mackenzie, we secured almost typical specimens of both S. sabrénus and S. alpinus, showing that these species meet or overlap, or more probably that they intergrade, in these sections. Considering their close affinity, the latter view is the more reasonable. In the dusk of the evening of May 27, 1903, while encamped at the Cascade Rapid, Athabaska River, I shot a fine specimen in a small grove of poplars, from one of which the animal had been roused. It proved to be an adult female, and measured: Total leneth, 332; tail vertebrae, 160; hind foot, 41. Compared with skins from Norway House and Hudson Bay, typical S. sabrinus, it agrees almost perfectly. in color, differing only in the slightly paler tint above. While collecting at Fort Providence early in July, Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary obtained another fine adult specimen, a male, which measures 339, 157, 41. It 1s apparently typical of this form and.matches almost perfectly the Cascade Rapid specimen. The under side of the tail shows as much rufous as the most extreme examples of S. sabrinus, thus differing markedly from S. alpinus. In both of these specimens the upper surfaces of the hind feet are brownish, reheved by a slight amount of white on the toes. An imperfect specimen in the National Museum from Big Island (No. 6505) agrees closely in color with skins from Hudson Bay and Norway House. Another younger specimen from the same locality (No. 34959), the skull.of which can not be found, also is referable to this form. Specimens from Big Island and Fort Resolution have been recorded under the name Sciuropterus hudsonius by Allen,’ and as S. sabrinus by Bangs.° In a recent article MacFarlane, on the au- thority of Pierre Deschambeault, states that the flying squirrel is not uncommon at Isle 4 la Crosse and at Lac du Brochet post | Rein- deer Lake].?. The skeleton of a flying squirrel, now in fragments, taken by MacFarlane at Fort Anderson, is also provisionally re- ferred to this species, and shows that the animal probably ranges to the limit of the forest. 4@Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., VIII (new ser.), p. 14D, 1896. 6 Monographs N. A. Rodentia, p. 664, 1877. € Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash.,-X, p. 163, 1896. @Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 749, 1905. 1908.] MAMMALS. £7035 Seiuropterus sabrinus alpinus (Richardson). Mountain Flying Squirrel. This flying squirrel is mainly an inhabitant of the Rocky Moun- tain range from the Jasper House region northward at least to Liard River. To the eastward of the mountains it apparently grades into 8. sabrinus, as before stated. ‘Pteromys sabrinus var. alpinus” was described by Richardson from specimens taken by Drummond near the sources of Elk River | Athabaska].*. Two specimens, male and female, taken by D. E. Noyes at Jasper House, Alberta, December 15, 1896, can thus be considered typical. Compared with winter skins of S. sabrinus from Norway House, and skins without date from Oxford House and Hudson Bay, the Jasper House specimens are much less rufous, the general color above being sepia or grayish-bister; the tail is much darker, being dusky-brownish above and but shghtly lhghter beneath; the upper surfaces of the feet are darker: the lower parts are dull grayish-white, tinged with fawn, not conspicuously differ- ent from S. sabrinus. A specimen, not fully adult, taken by us on the Athabaska about 60 miles above Grand Rapid August 25, 1901, agrees closely with the Jasper House specimens. In December, 1903, while at Fort Simpson, I received a flying squirrel from Joseph Hodgson, of Fort Providence, where it was taken about December 7. It is a male, evidently a young one of the previous summer, and measured: Total length 310, tail vertebre 140, hind foot 39. The molt had been retarded, and the specimen is consequently in poor pelage. The general duskiness of both surfaces of the tail and the lack of brownish suffusion on the back indicate that this specimen should be referred to S. alpinus. Two specimens, both males, taken at Fort Simpson March 14, 1905, have been received recently from J. W. Mills, who writes that they were found in a nest on the branches of a tree, evidently a repaired bird’s nest. These specimens evidently are referable to S. alpinus, though perhaps slightly inclining toward sabrinus. They are slightly more rufous on the back than the topotypes of alpinus, but agree in having the tails much suffused with sooty. The upper sur- faces of the hind feet also are very dark, as in typical alpinus. The measurements, reduced to millimeters, are as follows: Total length 318. tail vertebrae 146, hind foot 39: and 305, 127, 36. The skulls are smaller than the topotypes of S. alpinus, due evidently to imma- turity, but show no striking peculiarities. €7ool. Journ., I1I, No. XII, p. 519, 1828. (See also Fauna Boreali-Ameri- eana, I, p. 195, 1829.) oT. th Mee lee NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. With the rather limited amount of material available, I am unable to discover tangible cranial differences between S. sabrinus and alpinus. In addition to the Elk River specimens, Richardson mentioned having received others from the south branch of the Mackenzie [Liard];¢ and Rhoads has recorded two specimens from Fort Liard as S. alpinus.” Ross recorded Pteromys alpinus as rather rare in the mountain ranges of Liard River.° Peromyscus arcticus (Mearns). Arctic White-footed Mouse. This familiar species is abundant throughout the region north to the lower part of Grandin River and Fort Norman. During the three seasons spent in the north we collected a very large series, com- prising specimens from the following localities: Alberta: 40 miles north of Edmonton; Athabaska River, 5 and 30 miles above Atha- baska Landing; Swift Current, and several points between there and Pelican Portage; Pelican River; Grand Rapid; Brulé Rapid; Crooked Rapid; Cascade Rapid; Mountain Rapid; Fort McMurray; Fort Chipewyan; Slave River, 10 and 25 miles below the Peace; Smith Landing. Mackenzie: Fort Smith; Fort Resolution; Trout Rock (25 miles south of Fort Rae) ; Fort Rae; lower Grandin River; Fort Providence; Willow River (near Fort Providence) ; Fort Simp- son; mountains at mouth North Nahanni River; Fort Wrigley; and Fort Norman. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., XIX, p. 547, 1903. ¢ Appendix Parry’s Second Voyage, p. 309, 1825 (1827). @Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, pp. 130, 131, 1829. € Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 250, 1836. f Monographs N, A. Rodentia, p. 243, 1877. 182 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. parison. I have, however, already described the species from speci- mens taken on the Hudson Bay Barren Grounds,¢ which are prob- ably fairly typical. Allen has recorded specimens of Lemmus from Herschel Island.’ J. C. Ross states that this species was seen on the coast of Boothia Felix in considerable numbers.° Lemmus helvolus (Richardson). Tawny Lemming. This species is known only from Richardson’s descriptions of a specimen taken by Drummond in the Rocky Mountains, ostensibly ‘in latitude 56° ”—but in reality from near the headwaters of one of the southern tributaries of Peace River, or between there and the Jasper House region. His descriptions indicate an animal more tawny than L. triémucronatus, but it does not wp peNs that a direct comparison was made. Dicrostonyx hudsonius alascensis Stone. Point Barrow Lemming. Since specimens from Fort Anderson and the mouth of the Mac- kenzie agree essentially with topotypes of DY. alascensis, the follow- ing notes are included under this name, though the affinities of the animals inhabiting the islands of the Arctic Sea and the eastern part of the Mackenzie region are unknown. Sabine recorded ‘Lemmus hudsonius’ as abundant on the islands of the Polar Sea;* M’Dougall relates that lemmings [probably Dicrostonyx | were seen in innumerable numbers on Melville Island, in April and June, 1853, by Lieutenant Mecham.’ J. C. Ross stated that a few were noted at Port Bowen in the winter of 1824-25;9 he later recorded the animal as common at Felix Harbor, Boothia." | Back recorded lemmings which were undoubtedly of this genus from the northern shore of Aylmer Lake.’ Sutherland states that tracks of lemmings were frequently observed about the south end of Corn- wallis Island in the autumn of 1850.7 McCormick states that young were taken at Beechey Island in August, 1852.% Armstrong noted aN. A. Fauna, No. 22, p. 55, 1902. 5 Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, XIII, p. 61 (in footnote), 1900. CAppendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XIV, 1835. d Zool. Journ., III, p. 519, 1828. See also Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 129, 1829. (Though specimens referred to Lemmus helvolus have recently been re- corded from Cassiar Mountains, Telegraph Creek, and other points in northern British Columbia, this region is so far from the actual type locality of helvolus that the specific identity of the specimens must at present be considered merely as assumptive. ) : © Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. CLXXxvilI, 1824. ! Voyage of Resolute to Arctic Regions, p. 298, 1857. 9Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 93, 1826. 4Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XIII, 188 ‘Narrative Arctic Land Expedition to Great Fish River, p. 296, 1856. j Journ. Voyage to Baftin Bay, I, p. 362, 1852. k MeCormick’s Voyages, II, p. 91, 1884. ; 1908.] MAMMALS. anes 1838 the presence of the animal on Prince Albert Land near Princess Royal Islands, October 10, 1850.° Rae mentions lemmings as migra- ting northward near the mouth of the Coppermine early in June, 1851.2. In a later paper he refers to the circumstance as follows: I am not aware if it is generally known that the lemmings (Myodes hud- sonicus, etc.) of North America migrate much in the same manner as do those of Norway and Sweden. When traveling in June 1851 southward from the Arctic Coast along the west bank of Coppermine River, and north of the Arctic Circle, we met with thousands of these lemmings speeding northward, and as the ice on some of the smaller streams had broken up, it was amusing to see these little creatures running backward and forward along the banks looking for a smooth place with slow current at which to swim across. Having found this, they at once jumped in, swam very fast, and on reaching the opposite side gave themselves a good shake as a dog would, and continued their journey as if nothing had happened.° Under the name Cuniculus torquatus, Coues records specimens from the Rocky Mountains near Peel River; mouth of Mackenzie River; ‘Arctic Coast’; Anderson River; and Fort Anderson.? Allen has recorded specimens of Dicrostonyx, probably of this form, ob- tained by A. J. Stone on Herschel Island.° MacFarlane, referring particularly to the Anderson River region, states that this species was more abundant than Lemmus trimucrona- tus. He mentions specimens from Fort Anderson, lower Anderson River, and shores of Liverpool and Franklin bays. Two females se- cured in the * Barrens’ on June 26, 1865, each contained 5 embryos./ Synaptomys (Mictomys) borealis (Richardson). Northern Lemming Vole. Arvicola borealis Richardson, Zool. Journ., III, No. 12, p. 517, 1828. ‘Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 127, 1829. (From [Fort Franklin] Great Bear Lake. ) Synaptomys (Mictomys) bullatus Preble, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., XV, p. 181, August 6, 1902. (From Trout Rock, near Fort Rae, Mackenzie. ) Our investigations show that this vole inhabits the region from the Athabaska north to the vicinity of Great Bear Lake. Richardson first described Arvicola borealis in 1828, giving a short. description of a specimen from Great Bear Lake (loc. cit.). A year later he gave a detailed description of the animal, which he says was found in abundance at Great Bear Lake (loc. cit.).. Though Richardson does not particularly mention Fort Franklin, it is reason- ably certain that the specimens, which he says were taken in spring “Narr. Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 254, 1857. 6 Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc., XXII, p. 81, 1852. ¢ Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., XX, p. 143, 1890. @ Monographs N. A. Rodentia, pp. 250, 251, 1877. “Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., XIII, p. 61 (in footnote), 1900. / Proc, U, S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 736, 1905. 184 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. after the snow had melted, came from that place, where he spent the spring of 1826. (See footnote.) Arvicola borealis has been variously referred by authors to Arvicola, Microtus, and Phenacomys, usually to one of the two first- mentioned genera. A careful study of the very full description in Fauna Boreali-Americana, however, seemed to point so strongly to Synaptomys that I felt reasonably sure that it actually referred to that genus. On visiting Fort Franklin in September, 1903, there- tore, I made a special effort to ascertain if Synaptomys inhabited the region and was rewarded by the capture of 8 specimens, includ- ing adults of both sexes and nearly grown young. These specimens accord so well with the later detailed description that there is no doubt of the advisabilty of applying the name borealis to this ani- mal. It may be well to quote the more pertinent portions of Rich- ardson’s description: The body and head are clothed with fur, which is very long in proportion to the size of the animal. The fur on the upper parts is shining blackish-gray, from the roots to the tips, some of which are yellowish or chestnut-brown, some black. The hairs with black tips are the longest, and are equally dis- tributed amongst the others, giving the whole a dark umber or liver-brown color, but producing no spots. There is a rufous mark under the ears. The fur on the back is about ten lines long, that on the crown of the head is three or four. The fur on the under parts (including the chin and lips) has a lead- gray colour, and is shorter than that covering the back and sides. The tail is round, well clothed with short, stiff hairs, which do not permit any scales to be seen. It is clove-brown above, and grayish-white beneath. * * * The thumb of the fore-feet consists merely of a small strap-shaped nail, slightly convex on both sides, and having an obtuse point projecting from the middle of its extremity. (Fauna Boreali Americana, I, p. 127, 1829.) Among the dimensions given the length of tail (1 inch=26 mm. approximately), and the length of hind foot (74 lines=17 mm. ap- proximately), accord well with the measurements of Synaptomys.* The first specimen of Synaptomys taken during the summer of 1901 was trapped on June 12 in a Microtus runway, on the border of a small meadow near Slave River, 25 miles below the mouth of the Peace. A few days later we took two in a wet swamp near Smith Landing. We did not detect the species at Fort Smith nor at Fort Resolution. On July 17 I took two specimens at Trout Rock, 25 miles south of Fort Rae, and during the latter part of the month trapped a few about small muskege ponds at Fort Rae. One taken 4@Since the above account was written all question as to the application of the name borealis to this species has been removed by an examination of the type in the British Museum by W. H. Osgood, of the Biological Survey, who has found it to belong to the genus Synaptomys. Its label bore the following legend: “Arvicola borealis. Mouse A. 42. 10. 7. 10. See p. 12. Note book. Awinnak, Dog-ribs. 44 inches long exclus. tail. Fort Franklin. Dr. R.” (Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, XX, p, 49, 1907.) 1908. ] MAMMALS. 185 here July 20 contained four embryos. On comparing the specimens of this series with examples of the various recognized species of this boreal genus I found the Mackenzie series to represent an unrecog- nized form, and not suspecting at that time the possible appheabil- ity of Richardson’s name, characterized the species under the name Synaptomys (Mictomys) bullatus, taking as the type a specimen from near Fort Rae. In 1903, on again visiting the Mackenzie Valley, we further extended the known range of the genus in this region. Early in July Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary took a small series at Fort Providence, and in August, during my trip northward from Great Slave Lake, I took specimens on Sarahk Lake, just north of the height of land, and on Lake St. Croix, midway between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes. Later I found the species fairly common in the marsh bordering Great Bear Lake near the site of Fort Frank- lin, and took a series, as mentioned above. Two or three of these specimens were trapped in runways of J/icrotus, and the remainder near the border of the marsh about a small bushy ridge which seemed tenanted solely by these lemmings, since my traps set there captured nothing else. Considering the wide area over which many northern species range without appreciable variation (and this is especially true of the Microtine), it is not surprising that these topotypes of Arvicola borealis should prove identical in characters with the spec- imens taken in the Great Slave Lake region, thus proving budlatus a synonym of borealis. In color this form differs from S. dalli of Alaska in being much darker at all seasons, and it has a shorter hind foot. Cranially the two forms do not differ appreciably. Four adults from Fort Frank- lin average in measurements: Total length 129, tail vertebrae 26.2, hind foot 17.6. Seven adults of both sexes, selected from the series taken in the Great Slave Lake region in 1901, average: 128, 24.8, 17.7. Synaptomys borealis dalli Merriam. Dall Lemming Vole. During his trip from Jasper House northward to Smoky River in 1896 J. Alden Loring took two lemming voles on Stony River, 25 miles north of Jasper House, on August 25. About the middle of October of the same year he found the animals rather common in a high valley about 25 miles west of Henry House, where they in- habited the sphagnum swamps, frequenting runways used by d/icro- tus. Here about a dozen specimens, including both adults and young, were taken. These specimens are much lghter and redder than typical borealis and agree so well with a series of S. dalli from various points in Alaska that I refer them to that form. In cranial characters S. borealis and dalli agree very closely. In the specimens taken by Loring the hind foot averages a little longer than in typical 186 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. (No. 27. borealis, in this respect also resembling da/lz. Six adults of both sexes from the two localities represented average: Total length 128.3, tail vertebree 24.6, hind foot 18.5. In the autumn of 1903 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary took a series of Synaptomys on the Athabaska 50 miles above Pelican Rapid, at Swift Current, and at points 5 and 30 miles above Athabaska Landing, Alberta. In color these specimens resemble S. dalli closely and are here provisionally referred to that form, but apparently they are somewhat intermediate between borealis and dalli. The series is largely composed of immature examples. Five of the largest average in measurements: Total length 123, tail vertebra 21.9, hind foot 17.6. Microtus (Microtus) drummondi (Aud. and Bach.). Drummond Vole. This is the most abundant small rodent, occurring commonly from the plains of Saskatchewan and Alberta north to the limit of trees. Even north of the area of extensive agriculture it does considerable damage about the trading posts, where it enters the buildings freely. In the spring of 1901 we saw fresh traces of this vole along our route between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, and here and there as we descended the Athabaska to Fort Chipewyan, but the animals were not common. We first secured the species at Fort Chipewyan, but obtained only a small series, though we trapped carefully for the animals. The species was rare at our camp on Slave River, 10 miles below the mouth of the Peace, there being little ground in the vicinity suitable for it. Near our next camp, 15 miles below this point, a colony was found in a marsh on the borders of a small pond a short distance back from the bank of Slave River. Here we easily secured a large series, and at Smith Landing and Fort Smith we found the species equally common. At the latter locality we found it occupying the haunts of I/crotus xwanthognathus, and using to some extent its runways. As we did little trapping between this poimt and Fort Resolution the species was not detected, although it undoubtedly occurs. It was only fairly common at Fort Resolution, and by careful trapping a small series was taken in the clearing about the post. I took a large series at Fort Rae, mainly near the post, although a few— were found about some small ponds among the hills to the eastward. During our trip northward to Great Slave Lake in the spring of 1903 we obtained little additional information respecting this species. While on their trip to the upper Mackenzie my brother and Cary took specimens at Hay River and Fort Providence. On their out- ward trip they found it very abundant along the Athabaska, and after each rise of the river noted numbers that had been drowned. They took specimens along the Athabaska at Cascade, Stony, Brulé, and Pelican rapids; 50 miles above Pelican Rapid; Swift Current; aS ti “‘O:COC*S 1908.] MAMMALS. 187 Quito or Calling River; and 5 and 30 miles above Athabaska Landing. They noted embryos as follows: Hay River, June 30, nine embryos; Cascade Rapid, August 15, four embryos. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I found this vole fairly common along Grandin River and about some small ponds near the shores of MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake. At my camp near Leith Point, early in September, I took a small series among dwarfed birches and willows bordering a tiny stream. I secured a good series also at Fort Franklin, mainly along a small stream on a partially cleared hillside. At Fort Simpson, where I took a large number during the autumn of 1903 and the following winter and spring, it is common and enters the buildings freely. While descending the Mackenzie in June, 1904, I found it only fairly common at Fort Nor- man and Fort Good Hope, and collected a few at each place, but failed to secure it below the latter point. The large series taken is plainly referable to Jf. druwmmondi, al- though the more northern specimens are considerably larger than typical examples of this species from the Jasper House region.* The Fort Rae specimens are especially large, and show an approach in characters toward J/. aphorodemus, described from the Barren Grounds north of Fort Churchill.’ The heavy, widely spreading zygomata of aphorodemus, however, do not appear in the Fort Rae skulls, although some of the larger specimens are nearly or quite as large as that species. It is highly probable that to the northeast- ward of Fort Rae J/. drummondi merges into aphorodemus. Five adults of both sexes from Fort Chipewyan average: Total leneth 1514, tail vertebrae 41.4, hind foot 19; ten from Slave River, 25 miles below the Peace, average 168.4, 49.1, 19.3; ten from Fort Smith, 162.2, 42.8, 18.6; five from Fort Resolution, 160.8, 42.8, 19.6; ten from Fort Rae, 169.5, 44.6, 19.3; ten from Fort Simpson, 158, 45.4, 19.6; three from Fort Good Hope, 160, 43.3, 19.6. During his several trips in Alberta, J. Alden Loring found this species common in most localities and took specimens at Edmonton; St. Albert; 15 miles south of Henry House; Smoky Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House; Fishing Lake, 90 miles north of Jasper House; and Muskeg Creek, a tributary of Smoky River. At Edmon- ton, where he collected in September, 1894, he found the animals very abundant in the oat fields, where they were domiciled beneath the shocks of grain, and were destroying large quantities of it. Speci- mens from the localities just mentioned, as well as others from Lesser Slave Lake; Big Island; Fort Rae; Fort Simpson; Fort Good Hope; *Concerning the larger size of northern specimens of J/. druwmmondi, see Bailey, N. A. Fauna, No. 17, p. 23, 1900. BN. A. Fauna, No. 22, p. 52, Oct. 31, 1902. 188 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Fort Anderson; and Fort McPherson, have been referred to M7. drum- mondi, and recorded by Bailey.* During the autumn of 1900 great numbers of mice, probably mainly of this species, overran central Saskatchewan and central Alberta. They entered the storehouses and committed great havoc wherever grain or other food was stored. Immense numbers, many of which were floating down the rivers, were found dead. Throughout the country between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing we found abun- dant evidence of their former presence, but fresh runways were only sparingly noted, showing that most of the animals had disap- peared. This invasion must have extended over a very large extent of country. I was informed by W. A. Burman, of Winnipeg, that small rodents were so common in Manitoba during the same autumn that fir-bearing animals were trapped with much difficulty, their natural food being so easily obtained. Microtus (Microtus) xanthognathus (Leach). Chestnut-cheeked Vole. This large vole occurs locally nearly throughout the wooded region. Although it inhabits the valley of the Athabaska, we did not detect it in the summer of 1901 until we reached Fort Smith, where we found a colony and secured a series of about 20 adults. This colony in- habited a strip of young mixed woods bordering a marsh about half a mile south of the post. The burrows of the animals were in dry ground in the woods or shubbery, and evidently were quite deep, as T saw nearly a bushel of dirt at the entrance of a single burrow. From the burrows their well-trodden runways extended in various direc- tions to a distance of 50 or 75 yards, only rarely reaching wet or even damp ground. As a rule only a pair was taken in one set of run- ways. The favorite food seemed to be the stems of H’quisetum, which grew luxuriantly in their haunts. Only old ones were secured, the voung evidently not being large enough to run about, though several of the females had recently borne litters. A female taken June 19 contained 11 well-developed embryos. The measurements of 10 adult specimens from this locality average: Total length 212.6, tail vertebre 52.8, hind foot 24.5. At Fort Resolution my brother took a few specimens during July, but was unable to find any colony. At Trout Rock, 25 miles south of Fort Rae, I found a small community, and took 3 adults and a number of quarter-grown young on July 17 and 18. Contrary to their usual habit, the individuals of this colony had extended their runways into a wet sphagnum swamp. At Fort Rae I was unable to find any evidence of the presence of this mouse, though the Indians informed me that the species inhabited the vicinity. @N. A. Fauna, No. 17, p. 238, 1900. 1908.] MAMMALS. 189 While we were ascending the Athabaska during the autumn we detected the presence of the species at several localities. The unmis- takable burrows and runways of a large colony were found in deep mixed woods on the summit of the hills bordering the valley of the Athabaska at Big Cascade Rapid, August 14, and on the following day I caught a half-grown individual at the foot of a limestone cliff at Crooked Rapid. Evidences of a small colony were found also at a cabin near the foot of Boiler Rapid, and an adult female was found dead on the bank. of the river 60 miles above Grand Rapid on August 25. The series from Fort Smith shows little variation in color, some individuals being merely a little more reddish than others. Young ones from Trout Rock are duller and darker than adults, and have the nose patch duller, though always sufficiently bright to distin- guish the species from others of the genus without reference to other characters. A half-grown young one taken at Crooked Rapid, August 15, is in fresh pelage, and is darker and more reddish than any other in the series. An adult female taken 60 miles above Grand Rapid, August 25, is very dark, owing to the great number of black hairs in the pelage. A specimen taken at Cache Pecotte, 40 miles east of Jasper House, March 20, 1897, by D. E. Noyes, though in less worn pelage, can be exactly matched in color by specimens in the series from Fort Smith, and the species evidently breeds in the left- over winter pelage. In 1903, during our hurried trip to Great Slave Lake, we failed to observe this species, and I did not detect it north of Fort Rae or about Great Bear Lake, though I searched carefully in the vicinity of Fort Franklin, having in mind Richardson’s allusion to its occur- rence there. While ascending the Mackenzie in October I found a colony inhabiting a willow-covered island about 30 miles above Fort Norman, but could not stop to secure specimens. No other traces of the animal were found on the Mackenzie. In August of the same year, while ascending the Athabaska, my brother and Cary found several colonies in poplar woods between Brulé and Grand rapids. Two specimens were taken at the latter place on August 20 and 21. A year later, while on my outward trip, I found a large colony on the Athabaska 30 miles above Pelican Portage. It must have com- prised many thousands of individuals, and occupied a heavily wooded area, at least half a mile square, on the gently sloping sides of the valley. I took a series of eight specimens here on the morning of August 29. } Richardson states that the species was abundant in the immediate vicinity of Fort Franklin. Coues lists specimens from Fort Resolu- *Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 123, 1829. 190 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. tion; Buffalo River; Big Island; Fort Good Hope; Fort McPherson ; Fort Anderson; Anderson River; and Liard River. The context shows that the specimens in this list had chestnut cheeks, so there seems to be no reason for doubting the identification. More recently, Bailey has recorded specimens (in the collection of the National Museum) from Fort Resolution; ‘Great Slave Lake;’ Fort Rae; Anderson River; and ‘Arctic Coast’ [Franklin Bay] east of Fort Anderson; as well as the Cache Pecotte specimens above mentioned.” Microtus (Microtus) macfarlani Merriam. MacFarlane Vole. Little is known of the distribution of this species, which was de- scribed from specimens taken by MacFarlane at Fort Anderson.° It is closely related to M/. operarius of Alaska, but differs in cranial characters. With d/. drummondi and wanthognathus, which occupy the same general region, it has no close affinities, though superficially it closely resembles the former. In addition to several from the type locality, Bailey has recorded specimens from [lower] Mackenzie River; and ‘Arctic Coast’ | north or east of Fort Anderson].¢ I trapped carefully for it on Great Bear Lake and the lower Mackenzie, but failed to secure specimens. Microtus (Microtus) mordax (Merriam). Long-tailed Mountain Vole. This is a Rocky Mountain species which ranges northward to the headwaters of the Liard and the Yukon. Specimens taken by Loring at Henry House in September, 1895, and 15 miles south of Henry House, and on the Smoky River trail between Muskeg@ Creek and Baptiste River, north of Jasper House, in the summer and early autumn of 1896, have been recorded by Bailey.¢ At his camp in the mountains 15 miles south of Henry House, Loring found the species living in muskegs near timber line. Bailey records also (loc. cit.) two specimens from Liard River. These were taken by A. J. Stone at Hell Gate, and mouth of ‘ Black River’ [probably the Kachika], and were the types of M/. cautus and M. vellerosus, respectively.’ Microtus (Arvicola) richardsoni (DeKay). Richardson Vole. This species was discovered by Drummond “near the foot of the Rocky Mountains ”’—somewhere in the Jasper House region. lRich- ardson first referred to it under the name Arvicola riparius, and stated, doubtless on the authority of Drummond, that its habits were similar to those of the common water rat (Arvicola amphibius). “ It 4 Monographs N. A. Rodentia, pp. 201, 202, 1877. ON. A. Fauna, No. 17, p. 58, 1900. € Merriam, Proc. Washington Acad. Sci., II, p. 24, 1900. @N. A. Fauna, No. 17, p. 40, 1900. €N. A. Fauna, No. 17. p. 50, 1900. f Allen, Bull. Am, Mus, Nat. Hist., XII, p. 7, 1899. 1908.] MAMMALS. | 191 frequents moist meadows amongst the mountains, and swims and dives well, taking at once to the water when pursued.” ” DeKay, perceiving the animal to be different from ‘ riparius, redescribed it under the name A. richardsoni.” Eight specimens taken by J. Alden Loring at points 10 and 25 miles west of Henry House, in October, 1896, have been recorded by Bailey.“ They were found inhabiting wet sphagnum swamps and were trapped with difficulty. None of the specimens were fully adult, but the largest one, a nearly full-grown female, measured: Total length 208, tail vertebre 61, hind foot 28. These records from the Jasper House region furnish all we know regarding its distribution within the area now under review. Microtus (Pedomys) minor (Merriam). Least Upland Vole. Two specimens, taken by J. Alden Loring at Edmonton, in Sep- tember, 1894, as well as one from Red Deer, Alberta, have been re- corded by Bailey.? The Edmonton specimens were taken beneath oat shocks in a dry upland field, where the animals were found occupying the same locations as J/. druwmmondi, but were much less common than that species. Fiber zibethicus spatulatus Osgood. Northwest Muskrat. In the spring of 1901 we found muskrats rather uncommon along the Athabaska above Fort McMurray, but observed a number on the lower part of the river May 17. The species was very common in the delta of the Athabaska and Peace, and among the hills near Fort Chipewyan we found it inhabiting the muskeg ponds as well as the small streams which formed their outlets. We often observed the animals along Rocher River, and near the mouth of Peace River found them frequenting the small landlocked ponds in dense spruce woods, where their well-worn trails between the ponds were very conspicuous in the deep mossy carpet which covered the ground. At Fort Smith they were common in the marshes to the south of the post, and on the lower part of Slave River and in its delta they were very abundant. While crossing Great Slave Lake to Fort Rae I found them inhabiting the islands and shore of the Northern Arm wherever marshy inlets occurred, Trout Rock, 25 miles south of Fort Rae, evi- dently being a favorite locality. In the immediate vicinity of Fort Rae, though the conditions were favorable, I found the animals very rare, doubtless owing to the presence of a large band of Indians then congregated about the post. On our return trip the species was sev- 4@Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 120, 1829. 56 Zool. New York, Part I, Mammalia, p. 91, 1842. CN. A. Fauna, No. 17, p. 60, 1900. aN, A. Fauna, No. 17, p. 76, 1900. 192 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. eral times observed, and was found to abound in the streams and’ ponds between Athabaska Landing and Edmonton. During our trip we collected a series of about a dozen, comprising specimens from our several camps near Fort Chipewyan; the mouth of Peace River; Fort Resolution; Great Slave Lake near the mouth of the Northern Arm; and 40 miles north of Edmonton. During our descent of the Athabaska and Slave rivers in the spring of 1903 we occasionally saw muskrats, though these large rivers, except at their mouths, offer a less congenial habitat than the smaller streams and outlying muskegs. On my trip northward from Fort Rae I found them abundant along Grandin River and in the various lakes northward to the height of land. North of this they ‘became less common, and the last ‘ house’ was seen on a small lake a few miles north of Lake Hardisty. I did not observe the species while traveling along the south shore of Great Bear Lake, but found it rather common in the small lake at the mouth of Gray Goose River, near the site of Fort Frankln, and took a small series during the latter part of September. Here the animals were occupying burrows in the banks and were living mainly on coarse grass, which was abundant on the marshy parts of the shore. In the spring of 1904 I took two specimens on the Mackenzie at Fort Simpson. In this vicinity the species is common in the muskegs back from the main river, and hundreds of skins are traded annually. During my voyage down the Mackenzie in the summer I found the species abundant in the numerous ponds in the valley of the Nahanni, but seldom observed the animal elsewhere, though it is common in suitable places throughout the region. At Fort Norman large num- bers are traded annually. At Fort Good Hope the species was said to be very common in the numerous ponds on Manito Island, and this particular locality is a favorite hunting ground of the natives and furnishes hundreds of skins annually. On the lower reaches of the Mackenzie and Peel rivers muskrats are excessively abundant. Thousands are annually traded at Fort McPherson. The Eskimo take a great many by means of the bow and arrow, and the throwing dart, in the use of which they are very expert. I obtained a series of adults at this place. A careful comparison of the series collected in the Athabaska- Mackenzie region with specimens from Alaska, representing /’. 2. spatulatus, and from Keewatin, comprising the type series of /’. 2. hudsonius, leads me to refer the Mackenzie series to spatulatus, though a number, especially those from Athabaska and Great Slave lakes, are somewhat. intermediate and might without impropriety be re- ferred to hudsonius. In general, the midsummer specimens have more reddish in the fur than typical spatulatus. The Fort Franklin sera 1908.] MAMMALS. 193 specimens, taken late in September, agree very well with spatulutus from Alaska in corresponding pelage. The series of adults taken early in July at Fort McPherson are in a very pale, washed-out pelage. It is highly probable that this condition results from some mineral in the sediment-laden water of Peel River. Specimens from the comparatively clear waters of Great Siave Lake, also taken in July, do not exhibit this bleaching to a degree approximating the condition in the Peel River examples. Five adults from the Athabaska and Great Slave Lake region average in measurements: Total length 546, tail vertebra 264.4, hind foot 75; five specimens from Fort Franklin average 499, 218.8, 74.6. This series includes several youngish individuals; the largest in the series, an adult male, measures 540, 244, 80. Five adults of both sexes from Fort McPherson average 544, 251, 76. The muskrat is quite generally distributed throughout the northern region, nearly to the limit of the forest. Richardson mentions that the species extends its range nearly to the mouth of the Mackenzie; 4 and Russell speaks of it as abundant near the mouth of Peel River in the summer of 1894.2 Tyrrell speaks of seeing it in all the streams to the southeast of Athabaska Lake during his exploring trip in that region in the summer of 1892.¢ J. Alden Loring reported it common at Edmonton in September, 1894, and along the trail between that point and the mountains in the early autumn of 1895. In 1896 he frequently observed it in the same region during the summer, and noted it in the valleys and foot- hills between Jasper House and Smoky River in the early autumn. - A male, taken at Henry House, September 6, 1895, and another from Edmonton, have been referred to F. spatulatus by Osgood." During the first year of Fort Anderson’s existence (outfit 1861), 500 muskrat skins were traded; for the next year 1,500 skins figured in the returns. MacFarlane states that this animal occurs on the lower Anderson to its outlet, though less commonly than on the Mackenzie. He gives data regarding the number traded and sold during different series of years, and the notable reduction in numbers during certain vears on account of unusual seasonal conditions or other causes. He states that the animals are subject to a liver disease which kills them by thousands. They are said to have two or three litters during the summer.” *Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 117, 1829. b’xpl. in Far North, p. 138, 1898. © Ann. Rept. Can: Geol. Surv., VIEL (new ser.), pp. 13D, 1896. dN. A. Fauna, No. 19, p. 37, 1900. erro, Us. Nat Mus, XXVIII, pp.. 737, T38, 1905. 44131—No. 27—08——_13 194 NORTE AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Castor canadensis Kuhl. Canadian Beaver. Formerly abundant throughout this region north nearly to the limit of trees, the beaver is now almost exterminated in many parts, and nowhere is common, though skins are received annually by all the posts throughout the region. During the night of May 15, 1901, - while encamped near Poplar Point, 90 miles below Fort McMurray, we several times heard the slap of a beaver’s tail on the water. ‘ Cut- tings’ were seen on the banks of the Athabaska below this point. Among a large number of skins seen at Fort Rae the color varied from light brown to sooty black. During the season of 1903 we saw numbers of skins at the various posts passed on our way to Great Slave Lake. We learned that a considerable number are traded at Fond du Lac, an outpost of Fort Chipewyan situated near the eastern end of Athabaska Lake. The vast region which stretches from Great Slave Lake to the Rocky Mountains at present seems to be the best beaver country in the north. Many skins are brought from the upper reaches of Hay River by the Beaver Indians, and from Trout Lake by the natives who frequent that locality. The Horn Mountain country also furnishes many skins. Along my route between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes, the beaver has now become scarce, owing to constant hunting, but my guide intimated that in certain localities off the main route which we were following he knew of small colonies of beavers. About Great Bear Lake the best beaver ground seemed to be to the north- ward of Fort Franklin, and I saw several skins, some quite dark, just brought from the hunting grounds about two days’ travel to the northward. While ascending the Mackenzie in October we obtained fresh beaver meat from natives near Roche Trempe-l’eau. During the winter of 1903-4 several beavers were killed by In- dians in the region about Fort Simpson. In the spring the animals often descend the smaller streams to the main river and follow it to the mouth of the next tributary. A young one was shot near the mouth of the Liard in May, and several adults and young ones have been killed in recent years near the mouth of Bluefish Creek, opposite Fort Simpson, as a result of this habit. While descending the Mackenzie in the summer of 1904 I saw no beavers, but obtained information regarding the traffic in skins. About 700 skins were said to have been traded during the preceding winter at Fort Norman, which receives the fur of a very large extent of country. Many skins are annually traded at Fort Good Hope. Skins from the country toward the Barren Grounds, according to the testimony of C. P. Gaudet, of that place, are smaller and average darker than those from the vicinity of the post. Fort Anderson, according to the fur returns, never received more than five skins annually during the few years of its existence, io) x! 1908.] MAMMALS. 1 We obtained no skins of this species, but procured a series of skulls from various points throughout the region. At the time of Hearne’s exploration the beaver occurred abun- dantly throughout the wooded part of the country.. He found it plentiful to the northward of Great Slave Lake east of the Northern Arm early in December, 1771,* and also found some occupying the islands in the eastern part of the lake.’ Richardson intimates that the beaver ranged nearly to the mouth of the Mackenzie, and states that the animals were numerous in the country lying immediately to the northward of Fort Franklin.© MacFarlane noted the animal on Lockhart River, a tributary of the Anderson, in the summer of 1857.4 Petitot found the beaver occupying the small lakes on the terraced slopes of Grizzly Bear Mountain, near its western extremity, while exploring the southern shores of Great Bear Lake in 1868.¢ Allen recorded specimens from Fort Simpson, Fort Good Hope, and Fort Anderson.’@ In the summer of 1892, while exploring between Atha- baska Lake and Churchill River, J. B. Tyrrell found a “ considerable colony ~ near the source of Geikie River, southeast of Athabaska Lake MacFarlane, from Indian information, states that this animal has from 1 or 2 to 9 young at a birth.” In the early autumn of 1895, while in the mountains in western Alberta, J. Alden Loring saw a few fresh ‘ cuttings’ and tracks of beavers, but found the species very rare. During his second visit to the region, in 1896, he obtained evidence showing that the animal formerly abounded in suitable localities throughout the region, but had been nearly exterminated. Tracks were seen on a small stream between Jasper House and Smoky River, but no other recent traces of the animals were observed. - Thomomys talpoides (Richardson). Saskatchewan Pocket Gopher. In certain places along the wagon road leading northward from Edmonton, during our spring and fall journeys, we saw many hills = fos) ‘ > eh thrown up by this species. The most northerly traces seen were near ) I ; Vermilion Creek, 40 miles north of Edmonton. In September and the early part of October, 1894, J. Alden Loring found this species common along the railroad from Calgary north = ra) oy to Edmonton. At the latter place he took seven specimens; September “Journey to Northern Ocean, p. 223, 1795. bTbid., p. 248, 1795. €Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 108, 1829. @ Canadian. Record of Science, IV, p. 32, 1890. € Expl. du Grand Lac des Ours, p. 182, 1893. f Monographs N. A. Rodentia, p. 448, 1877. J Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., VIII (new ser.), p. 13D, 1896. Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 748, 1905. 196 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. 9 to 23, and later he collected the species at both Red Deer and Cal- gary. In 1895 he reported it common at St. Albert, a few miles north- west of Edmonton, and took a specimen there on October 30. This was still in the dark, worn summer coat. Several specimens taken by G. F. Dippie near Red Deer in April and May, 1900, are in the Bio- logical Survey collection. Two of these are melanistic, being of a nearly uniform sooty color throughout, only slightly lighter beneath. The measurements of six specimens from Edmonton average: Total length 214.6, tail vertebre 63, hind foot 27.8. Zapus hudsonius (Zimm.). Hudson Bay Jumping Mouse. During our trip in 1901 we did not detect this species until we reached Fort Smith, where we took several in shrubby woods border- ing a marsh. Here one afternoon I watched one for some time hop- ping about in some willows near the edge of a marsh. He moved quite leisurely, taking jumps of only 2 or 3 feet. Only two were trapped at Fort Resolution, and at Fort Rae, though I trapped carefully for them, I failed to capture any. During our return trip we took two on the Athabaska, 60 miles above Grand Rapid, on August 25. In 1903 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary took one at Fort Reso- lution in June, and while working on the Athabaska in the early autumn trapped specimens at Fort McMurray; Brulé Rapid; 25 miles above Pelican Rapid; Swift Current; La Biche River; and 30 miles above Athabaska Landing. An adult male taken at La Biche River on August 29 had assumed the fall pelage, was very fat, and in all probability would have hibernated soon. The species was last taken, above Athabaska Landing, on September 11. The measurements of three adults from Fort Smith average: Total length 210.6, tail ver- tebre 129, hind foot 29.3; two from Fort Resolution average 216, 132, 31; four from the Athabaska average 220, 34.5, 30.7. These speci- mens are not separable from typical Z. hudsonius from the Hudson Bay region. Ross recorded specimens from Portage La Loche;¢ later he gave the species as common there, and recorded it also from Fort Simpson.? I have recently recorded Z. hudsonius, on the strength of specimens in the National Museum, from Fort Resolution and Fort Rae.¢ MacFarlane reports this species, on the authority of P. Descham- beault, as occurring at Isle a la Crosse and at Lac du Brochet post (Reindeer Lake) .? @Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 442, 1861. bNat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 274, 1862. ON, A; Hauna, Nor 15,2 p16 899: ¢Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 739; 1905: 1908.] MAMMALS. 197 Zapus princeps Allen. Rocky Mountain Jumping Mouse. J. Alden Loring took two individuals of this species a few miles west of Henry House, Alberta, September 6, 1895. In 1896 he took several near his camp in the mountains 15 miles south of Henry House. They were trapped in shrubby willows beside a small stream near timber line, and have already been recorded. The vicinity of Henry House is the northernmost point from which this Rocky Mountain species is known. Zapus princeps minor Preble. Saskatchewan Jumping Mouse. Three specimens taken on Blindman and Red Deer rivers, near Red Deer, Alberta, in June and July, 1900, by G. F. Dippie, and now in the Biological Survey collection, agree perfectly with Z. p. minor from the type locality. This form is known only from the Saskatch- ewan basin. Erethizon dorsatum (Linn.). Canada Porcupine. Though originally abounding nearly throughout the forested region, the porcupine has become rare in most parts of the north, mainly owing to its sluggish habits and its desirability as a food animal. The Indians are very fond of its flesh, and as the animals, in a fairly open country, may be left almost indefinitely with a reasonable cer- tainty of being found again when wanted, they have been unable to hold their own in most sections. None were seen during the course of our journeys, and I obtained only a few records of its occurrence. J. 8. Edmonton informed me that he had seen a few near Firebag River, a small stream which enters the Athabaska about 75 miles below Fort McMurray. The animal was reported fairly common in the country north of Fort Chipewyan, and in the region about Fond du Lac, at the eastern end of Athabaska Lake. James MacKinlay informed me that he had seen a few about the eastern end of Great Slave Lake. In the summer of 1892, while exploring in the region between Atha- baska Lake and Churchill River, J. B. Tyrrell found the porcupine plentiful about Cree Lake.’ MacFarlane states that porcupines are but rarely met with in the northern part of the Anderson River region, but are more numerous to the southward of that section, though nowhere very abundant in the far north.° Erethizon epixanthum Brandt. Yellow-haired Porcupine. Data to define the ranges of this and the preceding form in this region are not at hand, but /. epivanthum appears to be confined mainly to the region of the Rocky Mountains. Porcupines are occa- ON. A; Wanna, No: 15, p. 23, 1899. » Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Sury., VIII (new ser.), p. 13D, 1896. Seeoc, WU, S. Nat. Mus:;, XXVIII, p.. 741, 1905. a 198 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. sionally killed at Fort Simpson. In some sections of the Liard River country they are still rather common, and most of the quills used in ornamental work in the Mackenzie region are brought from that quarter. The porcupines of the Liard are said to be of the yellow- haired form. Richardson stated that the porcupine occurred on the banks of the Mackenzie as high as latitude 67°, his note probably referring to this form.¢ Ross included Liard River in its range; while Allen referred skulls from Peel River to /£. epixanthum.¢ While collecting in the Jasper House region in 1895 and 1896 J. Alden Loring found this species rather common. In 1895 he took one at Jasper House on September 14, and later in the autumn saw many tracks and several of the animals in ‘ Rodent Valley’ about 25 miles west of Henry House. In 1896 he saw one in the mountains 15 miles south of Henry House in July, found the species common in the high mountains in the early autumn, and saw one in slide rock in ‘ Rodent Valley ’ in October. In an article published a few years later he gives many notes on their habits as observed by him in this region.? Ochotona princeps (Richardson). Rocky Mountain Pika. This species was described by Richardson from specimens from the Rocky Mountains,’ undoubtedly the ones taken by Drummond near the sources of Elk (Athabaska) River. Richardson later mentions, in addition to those taken by Drummond, several obtained by Mr. MacPherson from the River of the Mountains (Liard)./ B. R. Ross, thirty years later, listed the species as common among the mountain ranges of Liard River. The limits of its range to the northward are unknown. | | While in the mountains of western Alberta, the locality of Drum- mond’s specimens, in 1895 and 1896, J. Alden Loring found the species common in the higher ranges, and secured a series of nearly 50 specimens. In 1895 he took a number at Henry House early in September. In 1896 he found it common in the mountains 15 miles @Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 214, 1829. 6Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 141, 1862. © Monographs N. A. Rodentia, p. 397, 1877. @¥orest and Stream, LII, p. 345, 1899. A27OOl. JOULN, LE pa O20 1828: f Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 227, 1829. Richardson’s references to re- ports and specimens from the ‘ River of the Mountains,’ received from Murdoch MacPherson, usually refer to Fort Nelson, on Fort Nelson River, the principal southern tributary of the Liard. He sometimes refers specifically to the “east branch of the River of the Mountains.” (‘A collection of birds and quad- rupeds, of much interest, made at Fort Nelson on the River of the Mountains, a branch of the Mackenzie, was forwarded to us by Mr. MacPherson.” F. B.A., I, Introductions p: xixeetSZ295) 9Can, Nat. and Geol,, VII, p, 141, 1862. Se a \\ 1908.] MAMMALS. 199 south of Henry House in July and secured a good series. During the early autumn he secured specimens in the mountains at points ‘about 50 and 60 miles north of Jasper House. He took a few also in the mountains 10 and 25 miles west of Henry House, October 17 and 18. The latter specimens are in fresh pelage, and above are yellowish brown fiecked with black, which in some cases becomes the pre- dominating color posteriorly; beneath they are white, more or less suffused with ochraceous. Among the skins taken 15 miles south of Henry House in July, 1896, are some in a different pelage, being much more grayish, but most of them are in process of transition from this coat to the fall pelage referred to above. Ten adults of both sexes taken 15 miles south of Henry House average: Total length 190.4, hind foot 30. io Lepus americanus Erxleben. Hudson Bay Varying Hare. White Rabbit. The varying hare or rabbit is common and quite generally distrib- uted throughout the Athabaska and Mackenzie regions north to the limit of trees. As is well known, the species is subject to great fluc- tuations in numbers, gradually becoming more and more common during a period of years, and then becoming scarce again, the peri- ods ce greatest abundance occurring every seven years, according to general report, but in reality not recurring with absolute regularity nor at the same time in all sections. During our first trip to the Athabaska region in 1901 we found that the rabbits had begun to increase after one of their periods of scarcity. We found them rather common at Fort Chipewyan late in May, and secured a number of specimens, some of which still re- tained a few scattered white hairs of the winter pelage. Between that point and Fort Smith we occasionally noted the animals. At Fort Smith some of the Indians were living principally on rabbits, taking them in snares. Alfred E. Preble secured several specimens at Fort Resolution during July, and I took a small series, comprising adults and young, at Fort Rae during the latter part of the same month. In 1903, when we again “thieg the region, we found that the ani- mals had continued to increase during the interval, and were then apparently at the height of abundance. While descending the Atha- baska and Slave rivers we saw large numbers. In many places along the banks the dense thickets of willows and other shrubs had been. eaten almost down to the ground. On the Smith Portage road their ravages were especially noticeable, the young Banksian pines being here the principal food. The many evidences of winter snaring and the thousands of white rabbit skins which littered the neighborhood of an occasional deserted Indian camp showed that this locality had been a favorite resort for both rabbits and Indians during the pre- 200 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. ceding winter. ‘The region about the lower Slave also abounded with’ rabbits. While paddling a distance of 3 or 4 miles along a narrow channel in the Slave River delta on June 19 we saw nearly 40 on the banks, and shot several with a pistol. A party arriving at Fort Res- olution from Hay River in June, having skirted the shore of the lake, reported rabbits extremely abundant, and stated that a large pro- portion of those shot had accumulations of pus beneath the skin of the neck. Others have reported a similar condition in sick or dead rabbits along the lower Athabaska. During their trip to the upper Mackenzie in July my brother and Cary found the animals abun- dant and took a number of specimens. In the country to the northward of Fort Rae the animals were com- mon during August, and contributed largely to our larder. The Dogribs entice them within shot by making a rasping squeak through the nearly closed lips. To insure the proper salivary condition for this vocal performance, they sometimes chew the bitter bark of some shrub, usually Lepargyrwa canadensis. I easily learned to imitate the sound by a modification of the squeaking in common use for al- luring birds, and soon became a proficient rabbit caller. What attrac- tion this sound has for the animals is not clear, but the method is successful only during the summer or breeding season. Adults of both sexes are attracted by the sound, but the young seldom respond to it. As far as I could learn the native tribes of the lower Macken- zie do not practice this method of enticing the animals, though I found that it was equally successful there. Under favorable condi- tions the animals respond to the sound by a hurried approach, usually along a runway, and donot stop until suddenly arrested by the un- expected sight of the caller, when they usually remain motionless for a few seconds, apparently in wonder, and then bound away. The same animal can seldom be completely deceived a second time, but usually can be made to approach within a certain distance, varying with the nature of the ground, apparently to get a second look at the intruder, and may be heard scurrying about and loudly thumping its displeasure. Sometimes the approaching rabbit makes a grunting noise as it rushes toward the source of the sound. This apparently denotes great eagerness, as in such cases as I observed the animal al- ways came very close, sometimes almost to my feet, before perceiv- ing me. Along the south shore of Great Bear Lake to the eastward of MeViecar Bay, I found rabbits uncommon, but occasionally saw tracks or other evidences of their presence. To the west of McVicar Bay, where the country is better suited to their needs, they were more abundant. At Fort Franklin rabbits were common late in Septem- ber, and at the rapids on Bear River a party of Indians were snaring the animals by hundreds. They had now commenced to change to PEATE Xx bm omy eee ee 7 eens enn APTURED IN SNARE. Cc Fic. 1.—SNARE SET FOR RA AMERICANUS). FORT Fic. 3.—FALLEN WHITE SPRUCE DENUDED OF LEAVES AND BARK BY RABBITS. SIMPSON, SPRING, 1904. 1908.] MAMMALS. 201 the white winter pelage. While ascending the Mackenzie in October I saw numbers daily. At Fort Simpson the opinion was unanimous that the animals had not been so abundant for many years. Each Indian, and some of the white inhabitants, maintained a line of snares, popularly termed a ‘rabbit track, being a trail extending for several miles through a district where the animals were common, with snares set close to the track at frequent intervals. A pole to which the noose is attached is balanced over a convenient limb and tips up when the snare is released, suspending the animal in midair (Pl. XXI, fig. 2). This insures a speedy death and places the quarry out of reach of dogs and other predatory quadrupeds. Rabbits pref- erably are caught by the neck; when suspended by the leg, as fre- quently happens, their flesh is less palatable. Usually for a few days previous to the actual setting of the snares, quantities of brush are eut and placed in convenient spots, to attract the animals, and get them into good condition. Hundreds were brought in and sold, the price given in trade being about the equivalent of 5 cents. They freeze in the snares and are kept for weeks and months in this state without ‘deterioration, and figure extensively on the winter bill of fare at the northern trading posts. In summer, when the animals live mainly on herbaceous plants, their flesh is very palatable, though woefully lacking in nourishing qualities, but in winter, when they feed largely on the foliage and bark of resinous trees, the meat acquires a somewhat bitter taste. When Indians are living mainly on rabbits, they call it ‘starving, though they may be eating bounteously of the meat every two or three hours, and it is said that if nothing else is obtainable, they gradually grow weaker on this diet. Bad as a continuous diet of rabbits is, however, more deplorable still is the condition that ensues when these animals are scarce. Their periodical failure is anticipated by the Indians with grave forebod- ings. Disinclined to exert themselves to provide for the future, cruel etc ; is their lot when the short cold days of winter are upon them and the snares yield only a meager supply. The principal use made by the Indians of the skin of this animal is in the manufacture of robes. For this purpose the skins are cut into strips, which are twisted, and woven on a frame into a robe of the desired size. The mesh is very coarse, and the fingers may be thrust through the finished robe at any point. The loose, soft fur, however, resists the action of the wind, and on account of their light- ness and warmth these robes are considered second only to those made of caribou skins, and are preferred by some. To obviate the unpleas- ant consequences of the shedding of the fur, they are usually inclosed in a cotton case. Capotes, shirts, and mittens made in the same way were formerly in common use, and are still made by some of the remote tribes, 202 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. The skins of this species are scarcely ever traded in the Mac- kenzie region, owing probably to the cost of carriage, but according to MacFarlane, the Hudson’s Bay Company annually export many thousands from Hudson Bay.“ Throughout the upper Mackenzie region during January, and to a less extent during February, 1904, many thousands of rabbits per- ished from disease. In some cases death overtook them as they sat in their forms at the foot of trees or beneath logs or stumps; in other cases the animals left the shelter of the woods and after wandering a short time on the frozen surface of the river suddenly sprawled in their tracks and died without a struggle. In the spring when the snow went off many were found in all conceivable positions. After February the disease seemed to have run its course, as no sick animals or any which had recently died were found. When affected, the rabbits become excessively thin. On skinning some which had died of this disease I was at once struck by the dry condition of the skin and flesh, which separated with difficulty. The viscera were in an excessively moist condition. The stomach contained a small quan- tity of comminuted woody food of the consistency of The throat and lungs were much inflamed. Despite the Thorens which were caught in snares or died from disease the rabbits were fairly abundant when spring arrived. The Indians still lived on them to a large extent, and when the breeding season arrived took note of the number of embryos, since on this de- pended the relative abundance of the animals during the following winter. The prospect was not encouraging, since in the few in- stances where I ascertained the number it seldom exceeded two. According to the natives the animals have three litters during the summer. Young the size of red squirrels were seen near the mouth of Nahanni River on June 6. While descending the Mackenzie in June, 1904, I found the species common along its banks and learned that the area of abundance had extended throughout the length of the Mackenzie. The animals were especially common on the lower Mackenzie and Peel rivers. When I ascended the Athabaska in August of the same year, I found them common there also. | Through the kindness of correspondents I have been able to trace the decline in numbers of the rabbits since my return from the Mac- kenzie in 1904. They were still abundant during the winter of 1904-5 about Fort Simpson, though less so than in 1903-4. By December, 1905, they had become much scarcer, and in December, 1906, they @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 741, 1905. See also Poland’s List, for numbers of American hare skins collected by the Hudson’s Bay Company annually (with some exceptions) between 1788 and 1890. Poland’s Fur-Bear- ing Animals, Introduction, p. xxyi1, 1892. a 1908.1 3 MAMMALS. 208 were very scarce, both at Fort Simpson and Hay River. The latest report is from Fort Simpson, where A. F. Camsell, writing December 4, 1907, stated that there were practically no rabbits to be found. A letter received from Maj. A. E. Snyder, of the Royal Northwest Mounted Police, dated at Whitehorse, Yukon, March 8, 1907, indi- cates that the rabbits were abundant there at nearly the same time that they were at their maximum in the Mackenzie Valley. They had been very abundant two years before the date mentioned, but had been practically exterminated by an epidemic. He says: The disease has evidently spent itself and only the healthy rabbits are left. In a journey, recently, of twenty days’ duration, I only saw two rabbits; in other words, where there were thousands two years ago, they are in ones and twos now. During the fall, winter, and spring I had a good chance to observe the seasonal changes of pelage in this species, and collected about 35 specimens, comprising a nearly complete series. Specimens taken at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, on September 19 and 21, 1903, are perhaps properly referable to the form Z. a. macfarlani, but this distinction may be ignored for the present purpose. They had scarcely begun to assume the winter pelage, the ears, feet, and legs alone being white. One seen, but not secured, about the same time, was shghtly flecked with white on the rump. Others seen near the rapid on Bear River the last of September were in about the same condition. During the first three weeks in October, while we were ascending the Mackenzie, none were collected, and there is a sight break in the series in consequence. Adults taken near Fort Simpson, October 20 and 24, were in nearly complete winter pelage, but still retaimed brown on the head; the ears were largely white. A young one of the year, taken October 24, was white beneath and on the feet. A little white also appeared on the sides of the head and about the bases of the ears, but most of the head and back was still in the immature summer coat. Another taken three days later was similar in color, but the white extended higher on the thighs, and the back was flecked with the same color. The young, however, acquire the white winter pelage earlier than the adults, which were then ulmost entirely white. Specimens taken November 27 and 28 were entirely white, except that the edges of the ears showed a dark line, and the under fur was of a fawn color. This is the normal winter condition. On April 11, 1904, the rabbits began to show traces of the change to the summer pelage, first made evident by the tawny under fur showing on the head and ears, owing to the white hair having been shed. In a specimen taken April 20 the fawn formed the predomi- nating color above. In others collected about the same time the fawn and white were about equally divided, the head, however, being 204 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. mostly dark. One taken May 1 was still further advanced in the’ molt. By May 4 the animals were mainly fawn colored above, a few white hairs being still retained, and the long summer fur beginning to show in patches. This condition was still further advanced in specimens taken May 7 and 11, and one taken on May 16 was in nearly complete summer dress. Rabbits noted near the mouth of Nahanni River early in June still retained scattermg white hairs on the back, and a few of these sometimes persist until late in the season. A careful study of the series collected, together with a series of skulls in the National Museum from various points in the region, and specimens from Oxford House, Keewatin, the latter representing typical L. americanus, convinces me that the varying hares of the in- terior of British America east of the Rocky Mountains, due allow- ance being made for individual variation, are very uniform in char- acters. There is a shght increase in size northward, culminating in the form named macfarlani from Fort Anderson, which seems to occupy the upper Hudsonian zone. Only two adult skulls of typical L. americanus from the Hudson Bay region (Oxford House) are available for comparison. These are rather small, but can be matched in size by some adult specimens from the upper Mackenzie region. It is probable that they do not fairly represent americanus, and that a larger series would be found to agree approximately in size with specimens from Athabaska and the upper Mackenzie. In color the Oxford House skins can be matched by specimens from Fort Chip- ewyan and various points about Great Slave Lake, but the larger series naturally shows much individual variation. Two specimens from Fort Chipewyan average in measurements: Total length 460, tail vertebra 39, hind foot 133; one from Fort Reso- lution measures 470, 33, 188; one from Fort Rae, 480, 45, 138. Ten of the largest specimens from the Fort Simpson series average 466.5, 43, 142. The following references are quoted mainly because of their bear- ing on the abundance of rabbits during certain years. MacFarlane found them in great abundance on Lockhart River, a tributary of the Anderson, in the summer of 1857.* He states that they were fairly abundant in the same region in the summer of 1860.2. Macoun gives them as very abundant along the Clearwater in the early autumn of 1875.¢ J. B. Tyrrell, while exploring the country between the east- ern part of Athabaska Lake and Churchill River in the summer of 1892, states that rabbits were found everywhere in the denser woods, but did not seem to be anywhere abundant.? Russell found them @Can. Record of Science, IV, p. 32, 1890. 6 Ms. notes. ¢ Manitoba and Great Northwest, p. 352, 1882. @ Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Sury., VIII (new ser.), p. 13D, 1896. 1908.] MAMMALS. a 205 abundant at Fort Rae in the winter of 1893-94... Whitney states that they were plentiful in the region southwest of Smith Landing in February, 1895, and south of Fort Resolution in the following May.? These two latter notes evidently refer to the cycle of abundance pre- ceeding the one which came under my own observation. Allen records specimens from Methye Portage, Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Liard, and Fort Simpson.° Lepus americanus macfarlani Merriam. MacFarlane Varying Hare. The varying hares of the Hudsonian zone, as before intimated, are larger than those of the Canadian. This race has been separated under the name Z. a. macfarlani, described from Fort Anderson.? Specimens from Fort Franklin and from the Mackenzie near the site of old Fort Good Hope belong to this form. Owing to the great amount of individual variation in the northern varying hares, no satisfactory color differences are apparent. Three specimens taken on the Mackenzie near the site of old Fort Good Hope on June 27, 1904, are in nearly complete summer coat.’ One still retained much white on the thighs, and all had a few white hairs on the back. These specimens are rather dark; in one black is the predominating color above. The three average: Total length 191.6, tail vertebra 41.3, hind foot 149. The largest measures 500, 40, 155. Besides specimens from Fort Anderson, the type locality, the collection of the National Mu- seum contains skulls from La Pierre House and Peel River. Lepus americanus columbiensis Rhoads. British Columbia Varying Hare. The hares of western Alberta are separable from typical ameri- canus, and apparently are referable to Z. a. columbiensis. Specimens from Jasper House and Fiddle Creek, Alberta, exhibit considerable individual variation, but in general are more rufous than more eastern and northern specimens, and have less black on the back. -A large proportion of these Alberta skins have white feet. I may mention that this character, which has been regarded as an important one, I consider of little weight, as it depends merely on altitudinal or latitudinal conditions, the white feet of the winter pelage not being entirely replaced by a summer molt in northern and high ranging individuals of the various forms. The young of all the forms of this group have brown feet. Compared with specimens from the Hudson Bay and Athabaska regions, the skulls from western A1- berta are longer and relatively narrower across the zygomata. @Expl. in Far North, p. 248, 1898. 4’On Snow Shoes to Barren Grounds, pp. 124 and 298, 1896. € Monographs N. A. Rodentia, pp. 312-314, 1877. @Merriam, Proc. Washington Acad. Sci., II, p. 30, 1900. 206 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. In the early autumn of 1895, during his first trip from Edmonton, Alberta, west to the mountains, J. Alden Loring found these hares abundant, though somewhat local in distribution. Sometimes for days few were seen; then a district was reached where they were very abundant. In some places their runways were very common, and the young aspens and other tender shrubs had been cut down by them in great numbers, but the animals had departed. They were mainly found in the valleys and foothills, few being noted in the high mountains. In the summer of 1896, during his second trip to the same region, he found the hares much less common; in only one or two localities were they nearly as abundant as during the previous year. Lepus arcticus Ross. Baffin Land Arctic Hare. The Arctic hares of Melville Island and the adjacent islands are assumed to be referable to this species. In view of the fact that no specimens from that region are available for study, this assump- tion is of course somewhat arbitrary, and the consequent division of the published notes subject to revision. Under the name Lepus glacialis, Sabine stated that the species was very abundant on the North Georgia Islands, referring partic- wlarly to Melville Island, visited on Parry’s first voyage.* Fisher noted that hares killed near Winter Harbor, late in June, 1820, dur- ing the same voyage, were perfectly white excepline the tips a the ears, and weighed from 7 to 8 pounds.” J. C. Ross recorded this hare as abundant on the south shore of Barrow Strait, and as occur- ring at Port Bowen;¢ he later recorded it from Sheriff Harbor.? M’Clintock mentions that one shot about the middle of July, 1859, at Port Kennedy, had nearly shed its winter fur, and that the summer — coat of dull lead color was exposed.¢ Sutherland recorded the species from the southern end of Cornwallis Island, where tracks were rarely seen in the autumn of 1850;/ he stated also that some were shot by Goodsir in the spring of 1851 on the north shore of the same island On North Devon three were seen and one shot in August, 1850, near Cape Riley; the animal weighed 11 pounds.’ Another was seen on the shores of Baring Bay, May 15, 1851.' Armstrong states that a few Arctic hares were seen September 7, «Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cLxxxvu, 1824. > Journ. Voyage of Discovery, p. 234, 1821. c¢ Appendix Parry’s Third Voyage, p. 93, 1826. @ Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xv, 1835. € Voyage of Fox in Arctic Seas, p. 294, 1860. f Jour. Voyage to Baffin Bay, I, p. 362, 1850. 9 Ibid., II, p. 106, 1852. hTbid., I, p. 310, 1852. 4Tbid., II, p. 78, 1852, 1908.] MAMMALS. | 207 1850, near Nelson Head, the southern extremity of Baring Land.“ One was killed on Prince Albert Land near Princess Royal Islands, March 22, 1851; the species was common also on Baring Land near the same place on May 5.° He also records a large number seen at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, October 7, 1851;% and his tabular lst of game secured at that place shows that hares were killed during every month between October, 1851, and April, 1853.¢ Arctic hares, prob- ably of this species, were found by Rae to be common on Wollaston Land near Douglas Island in May, 1851./ Lepus arcticus canus Preble. Jeewatin Arctic Hare. The Arctic hares of the mainland of this region, so far as known, are referable to Z. a. canus, described from the Barren Grounds on the west coast of Hudson Bay, 75 miles north of Fort Churchill. A skin in summer pelage in the National Museum, said to be from Atha- baska (with no definite locality, but probably from the Barren Grounds northeast of Athabaska Lake), and one or two skulls from near (probably northeast of) Fort Rae, were compared with my specimens of ZL. a. canus when it was described, and found to belong to the same form. Some of these specimens were briefly referred to by Rhoads in 1896 as probably belonging to an undescribed species, but Jack of material prevented him from characterizing it. A young specimen in the National Museum, taken in June, 1853, during the voyage of the Hnterprise, and, therefore, from Cambridge Bay, Vic- toria Land, is apparently referable to Z. a. canus Pending further information, therefore, it seems safe to regard the published notes on Arctic hares from the mainland, at least, as referring to L. a. canus. King observed the species near the outlet of Lake McDougall, Back River, in the summer of 1834." Simpson noted it at Fort Confidence in the winter of 1837-38.' Richardson describes a winter specimen from Great Bear Lake, and records the occurrence of the animal near Cape Parry.’ Allen recorded specimens from Fort Rae, Fort Ander- son, and Great Bear Lake.” Warburton Pike noted the species on the upper part of Coppermine River to the eastward of Point Lake in September, 1889.’ James MacKinlay, who accompanied Pike to the @ Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 210, 1857. 6 Tbid., p. 304, 1857. eibid., p. 516, 1857. @d}bid., p. 474, 1857. € Tbid., p. 601, 1857. f Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc., XXII, p. 75, 1852. Proce. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1896, p. 354. t Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 302, 1836. ’ Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 216, 1843, J Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 222, 1829. k Monographs N. A. Rodentia, pp. 294, 295, 1877. Barren Ground of Northern Canada, p. 68, 1892. 208 | NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Barren Grounds in the summer of 1890, noted the first traces of this. animal on the shores of Lac du Mort, a short distance north of Great Slave Lake, near longitude 112°. These were winter signs; the ani- mals had since gone northward.“ Russell states that one was killed near the Indian camps about 150 miles: northeast of Fort Rae late in March, 1894, and brought to him as a specimen rare for the region.” It sometimes, however, occurs near Fort Rae in winter. In the re- gion to the eastward and northeastward of Athabaska Lake, ex- plored by him in 1893 and 1894, J. B. Tyrrell states that the Arctic hare “ was found to range everywhere throughout the Barren Lands trom the edge of the woods northward, but it was nowhere found in any abundance.” ¢ J. M. Bell informs me that during his explorations about Great Bear Lake in the summer of 1900, he found Arctic hares common between Great Bear Lake and the lower Coppermine, and on the eastern shore of the lake south to Eda Travers Bay. Hanbury states that the Arctic hare occurs on Thelon or Ark-i-linik River; 7? he also mentions two killed a short distance south of Ogden Bay, Arctic coast, on May 8, 1902;° and early in June of the same year he found the species common on Melville Sound, Arctic coast.£ One killed near the same place about June 10 contained five large embryos which would have been born in a fortnight.’ MacFarlane states that only a few Arctic hares were observed dur- ing his summer and winter journeys in the far north, and that but three specimens were secured during his five years’ residence at Fort Anderson.” In notes sent to the National Museum from Lac du Brochet post, Reindeer Lake, through Macfarlane, the Arctic hare is said to inhabit the country not far to the northward of Reindeer Lake. Felis hippolestes Merriam. Rocky Mountain Cougar. The * mountain lion ” is known to the Indians who visit Fort Liard and is called by them 4-wed-sie. They state that they seldom see the animal, but occasionally see its tracks, and that it has been known to kill moose. The species was reported to me also from the neighbor- hood of Fort Nelson. J. 5S. Edmonton reported seeing the tracks of one on two occasions near Boiler Rapid and Grand Rapid on the Athabaska, one winter during recent years, he thinks in 1897. J. W. Milne gives several @Ottawa Nat., VII, p. 108, 1898. 0 Expl. in Far North, p. 247, 1898. ¢ Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., IX (new ser.), p. 166I, 1898. @ Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 14, 1904. € Ipid., p. 186, 1904. ’ Tbid., p. 159, 1904. 9 Tbid., p. 161, 1904. Proce. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 739, 1905. 1908.] MAMMALS. 209 instances of the occurrence of the panther in the southern Canadian Rockies. One was seen by him in 1883 in the mountains in about latitude 51° 30’, and longitude 117. In 1884 a pair were reported near the junction of Bow and Cascade rivers, Alberta. Others were afterwards seen near the Kananaskis River, in the mountains south- west of Calgary.’ Lynx canadensis Kerr. Canada Lynx. Though this animal is found nearly throughout the wooded parts of the region, we observed it but once during the season of 1901, seeing one on the banks of Slave River, a few miles above its mouth, on August 1. During the season of 1903, though tracks were frequently seen, I actually observed the animal but once, noting one on the Mackenzie, a few miles below Blackwater River, on October 6. After the snow fell we frequently saw their tracks as we were ascending the Mackenzie. | The winter of 1903-4 was remarkable for the abundance of lynxes throughout the upper Mackenzie region. The fact that they usually increase coincidently with the hares, which form their chief food, probably accounts for their abundance that season. Hundreds of skins were traded at Fort Simpson during the winter. I obtained a pair of adults which were snared by James MacKinlay, 30 miles south of Fort Simpson, in November. The male of this pair measured: Total length 950, tail vertebre 100, hind foot 250; the female meas- ured 920, 105, 235. A female, partially albinistic, being of a nearly uniform light yellowish-brown, with eyes of a deep pink, was brought to me on April 16 from the mouth of Rabbitskin River, 20 miles above Fort Simpson, where it had been snared. It measured 840, 135, 260. A hunter’s skin of a young one, a month or two old, obtained at Fort Simpson, is rufous above, gradually shading into white beneath, breast and belly spotted with dusky; tail rufous above, lighter be- neath, and tipped with dusky. Besides these specimens, I obtained a large series of skulls from Fort Simpson. The Indians capture the lynx mainly by snaring, the noose being made of heavy twine or babiche. (Pl. XXII.) In setting the snare, a circular inclosure about 5 feet in diameter is made by sticking: pieces of brush into the crusted snow. One or more openings are left, in which the noose is placed at the proper height, so that the animal attempting to enter the pen will put its head into the loop. In the center of the inclosure is placed a split stick smeared with the contents of the musk glands of the beaver, sometimes mixed with perfumery of some sort, which serves to attract the animal. The snare is attached “ Biological Rey. of Ontario, I, pp. 81-83, 1894. 44131—No. 27—08——_14 210 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. NO. 27. to the middle of a stout stick 8 or 4 feet long, which acts as a drag’ when the animal is caught. It thus generally becomes entangled in the brush and after a few struggles remains passive, and if the weather is cold quickly freezes to death. The flesh of the lynx is said to be very palatable, and is eaten by the natives and to some extent by the white residents. During my trip down the Mackenzie in June, I frequently saw tracks between Fort Simpson and Fort Wrigley. A lynx was seen to cross Nahanni River as we were ascending it June 3. It swam readily in the swift current, and on reaching the shore bounded away into the forest, apparently little fatigued by its violent exertions. Though this animal extends its range nearly to the limit of trees, its preference for the Canadian zone is decided. At Fort Norman I ascertained that not over a dozen had been traded during the winter. I saw no skins at Fort Good Hope, and only about half a dozen had been brought in to Fort McPherson and its outpost, Arctic Red River, during the winter. Fort Anderson during the first year of its exist- ence (outfit 1861) received in trade only four skins of this species, and the same number were traded during the following year. These | notes. regarding lynxes within the confines of the Hudsonian zone probably refer to subspecies mollipilosus, but are included here to show the relative scarcity of the animal northward. Since 1904 the lynx has been declining in numbers in the Mackenzie region. A. F. Camsell reports it scarce at Fort Simpson in December, 1906, and December, 1907. Richardson states that this animal is found on the Mackenzie as far north as latitude 66°. Simpson observed the species on Clear- water River near the mouth of the Pembina.’ Richardson noted it at Isle & la Crosse Lake in June, 1848.° Ross, referring to the Mac- kenzie River region, states that the lynx “ ranges to the Arctic Coast in summer. In winter it does not leave the shelter of the woods.” 4 Allen records specimens from Fort Simpson, Liard River, and Peel River. Tyrrell, from observations made in 1892, states that the Canada lynx is moderately abundant in some seasons in the more southern part of the region between the eastern end of Athabaska Lake and Churchill River.’ In the early autumn of 1895, J. Alden Loring saw many tracks of lynxes about the base of the Rocky Mountains in western Alberta. In 1896 he reported the species common in the valleys and foothills 15 @Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 101, 1829. 6 Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 63, 1848. ¢ Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 106, 1851. @Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 137, 1862. € Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr., No. 4, Vol. II, p. 325, 1876. f Ann, Rept, Can. Geol. Surv., VIII (new ser.), p. 13D, 1896. PLATE XXII. Biological Survey. t. Agr. n Fauna No. 27, U. S. Dep orth America 0 N Fig. 1.—LYNX (LYNX CANADENSIS) CAPTURED IN SNARE. Mills.] [Photographed by J. W. Pa ne oe Ae ON i, a -_— eet exe mats hie at Sur 6 he ESE Ne Pag cae aan ea ~ 4% 7 ba Sid ~ % ae. Bet aw er! SO at SNARE SET FOR LYNX. Fic. 2. 1908.] MAMMALS. PA miles south of Henry House in July, and in similar situations be- tween Jasper House and Smoky River in the early autumn. He killed one on Grand Cache River, about 70 miles north of Jasper House, on September 3. It measured: Total length 841, tail vertebree 105, hind foot 227. Another was killed in Rodent Valley, 25 miles west of Henry House, on October 15. Its stomach contained remains of Microtus and Synaptomys. Its measurements were 872, 938, 222. In the Biological Survey collection are skulls from the following points in Alberta: Snake Lake, 20 miles west of Red Deer; McLeod River (near crossing west of Edmonton); Cache Pecotte; and 40 miles northeast of Jasper House. These skulls are not separable from specimens from eastern Canada. Lynx canadensis mollipilosus Stone. Northern Canada Lynx. A skull in the National Museum, taken by C. P. Gaudet at Peel River (Fort McPherson), as well as skulls from several points in northern Alaska, differs from skulls of typical LZ. canadensis from eastern Canada in some particulars, notably in having slender post- orbital processes, a character of subspecies mollipilosus. Another skull which I obtained at Fort McPherson does not have the slender postorbitals attributed to this form, and differs from ordinary skulls of L. canadensis only in having the bulle very much flattened. It is in all probability abnormal in this respect. No skins from this region being available for study, it 1s uncertain whether the skin characters attributed to mollipilosus are found in the Peel River animal, but it is highly probable that such is the case. Canis occidentalis Richardson. Gray Wolf. Gray or timber wolves are found throughout the wooded parts of the region, and are fairly abundant and apparently increasing in some sections. In 1901 we saw numerous skins at nearly all the posts visited, and found a skull at a trapper’s cabin on Slave River, 10 miles below the mouth of the Peace. Among a number of skins seen at Fort Rae, most of which were in the normal or-gray phase, was one the color of which was mainly dark bluish gray; the throat and back were nearly black, the latter flecked with a few white hairs; the chest had a white patch; the belly and tail were bluish gray, the latter blackish toward the tip. . During the season of 1903 we heard that wolves had been rather abundant for several years past in the region west of Smith Land- ing, in the Birch Mountains, and in the vicinity of Athabaska Land- ing. Tracks were seen at various points along Slave River and on my route between Fort Rae and Great Bear Lake. Late in August, on the large semibarren tract east of Leith Point, on the south shore of Great Bear Lake, my Indian canoeman wounded a large black Ns DALY NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. wolf, but the animal escaped to the shelter of the woods. While’ traveling westward along the southern shore of the lake in September, we saw tracks of wolves near Leith Point and near Manito Islands, and while ascending the Mackenzie in October, saw tracks at several points on its banks. During the early part of the winter of 1903-4 a band of three or four frequented the region about Fort Simpson. A large black male killed by poison early in December was obtained. It measured: Total length 1,680, tail vertebrae 480, hind foot 320. It is entirely black, with the exception of a few white hairs which underlie the longer black hair about the shoulders, and which can be seen only when the coat is rumpled. Another of the band, said to have been gray in color, was killed, but I was unable to procure it. The individuals of this band lived largely on rabbits, many of which were taken from the snares of the natives. When rabbits are scarce, much large game is destroyed by wolves, and even sledge dogs, indispensable to the northern resident, frequently fall victims. A young wolf, seen in late May in the possession of J. W. Mills, who obtained it from an Indian near Fort Providence, appeared to be 3 or 4 weeks old. The Indians of this region are superstitious about wolves and can scarcely be induced to Iall them, much less to skin or handle them, for fear of misfortune. They would not skin the one killed at Fort Simpson, but were persuaded to bring the body to the post. The death of a child soon afterwards was supposed to have been the result of this rash act, in which the father had participated. Another child who saw the dead wolf was taken sick, but finally recovered. As a result of this superstition the wolves are said to be increasing in certain localities. | While descending the Mackenzie in June, 1904, I saw tracks of wolves near the mouth of Nahanni River and at several points below, and saw skins at all the posts visited. Dusky or black wolves, as well as gray ones, are found all along the Mackenzie, but the dark phase seems to occur more frequently in the mountains. Skulls in the National Museum from Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Anderson, and Peel River are larger, and have less rounded audital bulle and larger teeth, than skulls of C. nubilus from Colorado. Richardson figured a dusky specimen killed near Fort Resolution, and states that many black ones were seen on the Mackenzie. Allen records skulls from Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Peel River.® Tyrrell gives this species as occurring in the country between Atha- baska Lake and Churchill River, but not plentifully.e In the early Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, pp. 69, 70, 1829. o Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr., No. 4, Vol. II, p. 314, 1876. ¢ Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., VIII (new ser.), p. 18D, 1896. 1908.] MAMMALS. PALE: autumn of 1896 J. Alden Loring occasionally saw tracks of timber wolves in the country between Jasper House and Smoky River, and heard one on Grand Cache River, September 5. They were reported to him to be of large size and frequently black. The following extract, showing the numbers of skins of woodland wolves collected by the Hudson’s Bay Company, is quoted from MacFarlane’s recent paper: @ From 1858 to 1884, Athabasca District contributed 2,119 skins of the wood- land (black, gray, and white) wolf to the London sales. For the outfits 1885 to 1889, it made a further addition of 339 skins. Between 1863 and 1884, in- clusive, the district of Mackenzie River supplied a total of 1,880 skins of this animal. Its quota in 1889 was only 49 skins. From 1862 to 1887, Fort Resolu- tion, Great Slave Lake, gave 193, and in 1884, 10 skins. The posts of the upper Peace River, with its lake stations transferred from Edmonton, sent in 48 wood- land wolves in 1889. Canis occidentalis albus Sabine. Barren Ground Wolf. No specimens of this supposed species are available for study, but the light color of the wolves of the Barren Grounds 1s probably suf- ficient to warrant their consideration as a separate form. The name Canis albus was based by Sabine on a very large light-colored in- dividual killed at Fort Enterprise during the winter of 1820-21.? Wolves nearly white in color, but considerably smaller than the Fort Enterprise’ specimen, were found to inhabit Melville Island by Parry’s party, and were seen almost daily during the winter.° J.C. Ross states that numbers were seen about the Isthmus of Boothia.? During Back’s expedition white wolves were seen near Artillery Lake.“ Simpson recorded two seen August 21, 1838, at Cape Frank- lin (Point Turnagain).’ Armstrong states that a wolf was seen near Princess Royal Islands in February, 185139 and that many were seen at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, during the winter of 1851-52." M’Dougall states that a pack of wolves was seen on Melville Island near Cape Russell in June, 1853;' one was seen on May 27, 1854, near Cape Hotham, Cornwallis Island;/ M’Clintock reports that wolves were observed in October, 1858, at Port Kennedy, and in May, 1859, by Lieutenant Hobson on King William Land.’ Kennedy records 4@Proc. U. S. Nat.’Mus., XXVIII, p. 694, 1905. 5 Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, Appendix, p. 655, 1823. € Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cLxxxv, 1824. d Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. x, 1835. Narrative Arctic Land Expedition to Great Fish River, Oral Ase, aleratey, f Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 294, 1843. I Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 300, 1857. hTbid., p. 484, 1857. 7 Voyage of the Resolute, p. 295, 1857. J Tbid., p. 402, 1857. k Voyage of the Fox, pp. 186, 309, 1860. IS en sie ee ne ee 914 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. (No. 27. one seen in the central part of Prince of Wales Land in April, 1852.¢ . While in the Barren Grounds to the northeast of Fort Rae in the early spring of 1894, Russell found wolves rather common. Of a band of six, two were snow white, the others a light gray.” During his exploring trip between Great Slave Lake and Hudson Bay in 1900, J. W. Tyrrell found large wolves on the east side of Artillery Lake. J. M. Bell informs me that during the same season he oc- casionally saw wolves near the site of Fort Confidence, near the eastern end of Great Bear Lake. Hanbury, while traveling overland between Baker Lake and the Arctic coast in the early spring of 1902, noted an occasional wolf.t. On April 30, when the party was near latitude 67°, between Lake Garry and Ogden Bay, Darrell, his com- panion, encountered a band of 16 large wolves.° Darrell writes me that of this band 13 were of the ordinary dirty white color, 2 were nearly black, and 1 pied. He states that though these wolves live largely on caribou, they are not very successful in killing these animals unless they can separate one from the herd, and that they always seem to be starving. Though of large size, he does not con- sider them dangerous, and states that only one instance of the death of a man by wolves was related by the natives, and in that case the victim was a cripple. The band of 16 was the largest pack seen, the animals usually being found singly or in pairs, though occasionally half a dozen were observed together. He claims to have seen tracks, made on a hard surface, which measured 74 by 84 inches. Skins of wolves from the Barren Grounds, some nearly pure white in color throughout, were seen at Fort Rae during my visit to that post. The wolf skins at Fort Good Hope also included a large pro- portion of very light examples, said to have been brought from the Barren Grounds to the northeastward. Fort Anderson, during the first year of its existence (outfit 1861), traded 5 wolves; during the following year it received 4 skins. Canis latrans Say. Coyote. In 1901 we heard several prairie wolves on the Athabaska Landing road, about 60 miles north of Edmonton, on the evening of May 3, and saw one on the bank of the Athabaska a few miles above Little Cascade Rapid on May 13. At Fort Smith I was told by Mr. Bra- bant that one was occasionally killed in the vicinity, and received the same information from an old Indian hunter residing there. A skull, without the lower jaw, was found near a native cabin on the east bank of the Slave, 8 miles below Fort Smith. @Narr. Second Voy. Prince Albert, p. 139, 1853. 6 Expl. in Far North, p. 241, 1898. ¢ Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada) for 1900-1901, p. 115, 1902. @ Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 110, 1904. € Ibid., p. 184, 1904. 1908.] MAMMALS. 915 In 1903, Merritt Cary was informed by William McLeod that two coyotes were killed near Fort Nelson, on Fort Nelson River, about the year 1898. During my stay at Fort Simpson I received con- firmatory information, from several persons who had formerly re- sided at Fort Nelson, regarding the occurrence of the coyote at that place. Tyrrell reports shooting a coyote on a small lake near the source of Foster River, about 200 miles southeast of Athabaska Lake, in the summer of 1892.4 J. Alden Loring reported this species common at Edmonton in September, 1894. In 1895 he found it abundant in the foothills of the Rockies in western Alberta, and shot one at Jasper House on August 30. In July, 1896, he occasionally heard coyotes in the moun- tains 15 miles south of Henry House, but the animal was less abun- dant there than in the foothills to the eastward. In the early autumn, while making a trip from Jasper House northward to Smoky River, he heard the animals nearly every night, and took a young one at Strawberry Creek, 14 miles north of Jasper House, on August 23. In October of the same year he saw coyote tracks in Caribou Basin and Rodent Valley, and obtained skulls at Prairie Creek and White- mud to the eastward of Jasper House. Vulpes alascensis Merriam. Alaska Red Fox. The foxes of the Mackenzie region to the northward of Great Slave Lake are referred to this form. We obtained a series of skulls, com- prising specimens from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Fort Norman. In addition, the collection of the National Mu- seum contains skulls from Fort Simpson, Fort Good Hope, Peel River (Fort McPherson), La Pierre House, and Fort Anderson. These agree in characters with a large series from the lower Yukon and the Becharof Lake region, representing typical V. alascensis. A fine hunter’s skin in full winter pelage from Fort Norman, and another from Fort McPherson, agree in most respects with a large series of skins of typical alascensis taken by A. G. Maddren at Becha- rof Lake, Alaska. The lower Mackenzie specimens have shghtly paler faces, thighs, and rumps, and the latter part is more flecked with yellowish white. An indistinct stripe on the front of the thigh, representing an extension of the black area on the feet, is dusky at base of fur, though it is tipped with reddish. The tails of the Mackenzie specimens differ decidedly in shape and color from those of this series of alascensis. They are much more heavily haired, especially near the base, and taper thence toward the tip, while in typical alascensis they are nearly cylindrical. The subapical zone of color is a grayish red, much less bright than in typical alascensis. “Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Sury., VIII (new ser.), p. 13D, 1896. 216 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27 An imperfect specimen in the National Museum from Fort Simp- . son, taken many years ago by R. MacDonald, differs from the skins from the lower Mackenzie mainly in the greater amount of black on the feet. The region about Fort Resolution furnishes a great many fox skins, all the color phases occurring. Owing to the rivalry among the different trading companies a very high price is sometimes paid for an unusually fine ‘silver’ or ‘black’ fox. Among the large number of skins seen at Fort Rae, the red and cross phases greatly predominated, but there were a few silver and black skins. During the winter of 1903-4, numbers of foxes, including several ‘ silvers,’ were traded at Forts Providence and Simpson. The red and cross phases are common at Fort Norman, but the dark phases seldom occur, and during the same winter none were traded at that post, while at Arctic Red River five ‘ silver’ foxes were secured. Ross gives a good general account of the foxes of the Mackenzie River region. The red and black phases are considered by him to represent different species or varieties, of which the cross phase repre- sents hybrids. He states that the numbers of red, cross, and silver foxes traded in the Mackenzie River district during a period of ten years were in the proportion of 6, 7, and 2. He states that the species is most numerous about the large lakes and on the Arctic coast, and is tolerably numerous on the Mackenzie, but is rare up the Liard toward the mountains.? MacFarlane in a recent paper expresses opinions in regard to the different phases similar to those of Ross, though these are contrary to the conclusions of the natives, and of most naturalists. He gives many interesting observations regarding the habits of the species in captivity and in a state of nature, and statistics regarding the num- bers of the various phases for a series of years, and to some extent for different tistricts. He states that the several phases were fairly abundant about Fort Anderson, and more so on the lower Anderson and along the Arctic coast between Herschel Island and Cape Bathurst.? Fort Anderson during the first year of its existence (outfit 1861) traded 115 skins of red foxes, 120 cross foxes, and 32 silver and black foxes. During the following year the returns were 220 red, 187 cross, and 66 silver and black. Among the skulls examined, a few from Fort Good Flo pe and Anderson River, and one taken by us on Slave River, have broader rostrums and heavier teeth than the remainder of the series. 24Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 18, 1861. ’Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, pp. 701—704, 1905. 1908.] MAMMALS. ALT Vulpes alascensis abietorum Merriam. British Columbia Red Fox. A series of skulls collected on the Athabaska at Little Buffalo River and Fort McMurray, and on Slave River 10 and 15 miles below the Peace and at Smith Landing, are referable to V. a. abietorum, agreeing well with skulls from Stuart Lake, British Co- lumbia, the type locality of this form. Skulls collected by J. Alden Loring in Alberta at Whitemud and Prairie Creek, and at Pierre Grey’s camp, 40 miles northeast of Jasper House, are also referable to abietorum. Foxes are rather common in the Athabaska and Slave River val- leys. We obtained no skins of adults, but took a young one on the lower Athabaska, May 30, 1903. It was one of a family iving among drift timber near the river bank. During the early winter the Peace- Athabaska delta is a favorite trapping ground. The foxes are said to be attracted by the large numbers of wounded ducks and geese which escape during the fall hunt. Upward of 50 black and silver foxes, in addition to large numbers of skins in the red and cross phases, a large proportion taken in the immediate region, have been traded at Fort Chipewyan during a single season. Early in June, 1901, we found a den in spruce woods on a large island near the head of Rocher River. Well-worn paths leading away in various directions showed where the mother fox made fre- quent excursions for food, and the numerous remains of rabbits, ducks, and grouse formed an index to the results of her labors. The same den was tenanted when we revisited the spot two years later. While descending Slave River in June, 1903, we found the homes of several families of foxes on the right bank about 100 miles below Fort Smith. The old ones eluded us, but a half-grown young one was secured. The various individuals seen were in the normal and cross phases. Owing to the lack of skins of foxes from this region I am unable to describe in detail the color of the normal or red phase. All imaginable shades of gradation occur, from the red phase through the various shades classed as ‘ cross’ to the ‘ silver,’ with white-tipped hairs, and the pure black, fine specimens of which sometimes bring several hundred dollars a skin. Vulpes lagopus innuitus Merriam. Continental Arctic Fox. This species occurs in summer throughout the Barren Grounds and the islands of the Arctic Sea. In winter many of the animals migrate southward in search of food, the extent of this wandering varying greatly with the amount of snow and from other causes. During the winter of 1900-1901, the snowfall being light, they pene- trated much farther south than for many years previously. We saw a number of skins which were taken during that winter in the vicinity of Fort Smith, where they had not appeared for several years. They 218 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO..27. were secured in numbers also near Fort Resolution and Fort Rae. At the former post about 200 were traded, the greater number prob- ably coming from the eastern part of the lake. During our summer explorations in the Mackenzie region we penetrated only slightly into the summer home of this animal. Tracks of small foxes were numerous on the sandy shores of Mac- Tavish Bay late in August, 1903, and quantities of discarded winter fur, then of a dirty white color and the testimony of the natives, proved this to be the species concerned. At Fort Norman I learned that usually about 100 skins are traded during a season, only the white phase being known there. These skins are taken mainly by the Great Bear Lake Indians. Many white skins are annually traded at Fort Good Hope, but the blue phase is rarely obtained there. White foxes were said to be rather common in the vicinity of the post during the winter of 1901-2. At Fort McPherson a great many are traded annually, mainly from the Eskimo, and in winter the species occurs rather commonly in the immediate vicinity. The blue phase is comparatively rare there, occurring probably in a proportion of less than 1 to 10. Skins in the blue phase seen at that post were of a nearly uniform color through- out—a rather dark plumbeous with a slight brownish tinge. . During Parry’s first voyage this animal was found to inhabit all the islands of the Polar Sea which were visited, and was ascertained to remain on Melville Island throughout the year.¢ One taken at Winter Harbor, October 29, 1819, is said by Fisher to have been perfectly white.2 The species was observed at Point Turnagain during Franklin’s first journey.° J. C. Ross recorded some taken at Port Bowen in the winter of 1824-25; one in the sooty phase was. taken in November.? He later stated that the species was common at Felix Harbor, and that the average weight of 20 males was 7 pounds 4 ounces.¢ Osborn occasionally saw the animals on the northern shores of Prince of Wales Land in the spring of 1851./ Sutherland mentions one taken on October 17, 1850, at Assistance Bay, Cornwallis Land. McCormick records a large male weighing 8 pounds, taken on December 2, 1852, at Beechey Island; tracks were seen on North Devon near Cape Osborn, and one of the animals was observed August 31 near Baring Bay." M’Clintock records the 4@Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cLxxxvil, 1824. 6 Journal Voyage of Discovery, p. 148, 1821. ¢ Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 387, 1823. @Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, pp. 92, 93, 1826. € Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. x1, 1835. f Arctic Journal, p. 220, 1852. 9 Journal Voyage to Baffin Bay, I, p. 411, 1852. ” McCormick’s Voyages, II, pp. 63, 120, 142, 1884. 1908.] MAMMALS. 219 animal from Port Kennedy, where three were trapped in December, 1858; others were shot in February and March, 1859, and the species appeared in greater numbers about the last of March.¢ Armstrong mentions that a few were taken in December, 1850, in Prince of Wales Strait, near Princess Royal Islands, during the voyage of the /nvestigator, and that a few others were noted later in the winter.2 Among the stomachs examined some were empty, others contained a few small pieces of dwarf willow, while one was distended with the hair and a portion of the hoof of a caribou.c A specimen taken near the same place May 15, 1851, had assumed its partially brown summer coat.? He reports a black fox seen near Prince Albert Cape, Banks Land, in September, 1851, probably an example of this species in the sooty phase.@ Allen records skulls of this animal from Fort Anderson, Fort Good Hope, and Peel River.’ Warburton Pike saw one at Lac du Rocher, north of Great Slave Lake, on September 13, 1889." Russell observed a family of Arctic foxes near Warren Point, east of Herschel Island, in the summer of 1894." MacFarlane states that this species was usually common in the Anderson River region, and that a few were traded at various posts in Cumberland and English River districts, Cumberland House hav- ing received 5 skins in 1876. Lac du Brochet, Reindeer Lake, ob- tained 785 skins in 1886, mainly from the inland Eskimo. In 1890 one was traded at Portage La Loche. He states that the species has been trapped on the south shore of Great Slave Lake, and that many years ago one was shot some distance up Peace River.’ In regard to the occurrence of the blue color phase, I extract the following notes from his account. Very few were obtained at Fort Anderson. Farther inland Ross, up to the year 1861, had known of only two examples being taken, both on the edge of the Barren Grounds near the eastern end of Great Slave Lake, but four were obtained from the same quarter a year or two later. A number were secured also in 1859 and 1862 from the region tributary to Fort Fond du Lac, Athabaska Lake, as well as others during succeeding years. In 1889 Lac du Brochet, Reindeer Lake, obtained seven from the inland Eskimo. The number of skins in the white phase obtained “Voyage of the For, pp. 195, 202, 215, 218, 1860. 5 Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 292, 1857. € Ibid., pp. 303, 304, 1857. dTbid., p. 324, 1857. € Ibid., p. 426, 1857. f Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr., No. 4, Vol. II, p. 325, 1876. ’ Barren Ground of Northern Canada, p. 37, 1892. h Expl. in Far North, p. 143, 1898. + Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 704, 1905. j Ibid., pp. 706, 707, 1905. 220 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. (No. 27 during the same year is not given, but probably ran into the - hundreds. Fort Anderson, during the first year of its existence (outfit 1861), traded 360 skins of this species, including 10 ‘blue’ foxes. During the following year its returns included 330 skins, of which 10 were in the blue phase. Hubert Darrell, who accompanied Hanbury through the Barren Grounds in 1901-2, writes me that a number were killed during the early spring of 1902 while the party was traveling northward from Aberdeen Lake to the Arctic coast. He states that they were much smaller than the individuals obtained about Fort Resolution, where he had become familiar with the species during the preceding winter. : Several imperfect skins in the National Museum from the Ander- son and Lower Mackenzie rivers show considerable variation in color, ranging from the normal to the sooty phase. Ursus americanus Pallas. Black bear. The black bear occurs more or less abundantly throughout the greater part of the region now under review, its range being practi- cally coextensive with the forest. In 1901 we saw a skull in a grove of Banksian pines a few miles south of Athabaska Landing, and the species was said by the resi- dents to be fairly common in the vicinity. The valley of the Atha- . baska is a favorite resort, and while descending that river early in May we saw a number on the fire-swept hills overlooking the river. Later in the month the fresh tracks of a small individual were noted hear our camp at Point La Brie, near Fort Chipewyan. Numerous skins were seen at Fort Smith, Fort Resolution, and Fort Rae, all representing the black phase. In August, while ascending the Atha- baska on our return trip, we saw a number between Fort McMurray and Athabaska Landing, noting 5 in a single day, but the necessity for rapid travel forbade hunting. At this season the bears lve largely on the ripening berries of cornel (Cornus stolonifera), high- bush cranberry (Viburnum opulus), few-flowered viburnum (V7bur- num paucifiorum), mountain cranberry (Vitisidwa vitisidea), rasp- berries (22ubus strié gosus), bearberries (Arctostaphylos uvaursi), and blueberries (Vaccinium canadense). They also pick up an occasional fish in the eddies. In the spring of 1903, when we again descended the Athabaska, we noted a few black hae along its banks. We saw tracks also at sev- eral points on Slave River between Fort Smith and Great Slave Lake in June. After the division of the party Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary observed bears at Hay River and at several points on the upper Mackenzie. While making the traverse between Fort Rae 1908. ] MAMMALS. 2 | 221 and Great Bear Lake in August I found them to be fairly common throughout the region. I noted tracks on nearly all the portages, but failed to see any of the animals. Im several places their well-worn and characteristic trails were very conspicuous. The animals were feeding largely on blueberries, which were ripening abundantly in the muskegs. Along the southern shores of Great Bear Lake in Sep- tember we frequently saw their tracks. They were then feeding on the ripe berries of Vaccinium uliginosum, Vitisidwa vitisidwa, and Empetrum nigrum. Several parties of Indians, whose camps were passed near the western end of the lake about the middle of Septem- - ber, had lately killed bears. When we ascended the Mackenzie in October the bears had mostly hibernated and we saw no recent tracks. About December 1, how- ever, James MacKinlay, while on his way to Great Slave Lake, saw a fresh track near the Head of the Line, 70 miles above Fort Simp- son. Three black bears were tracked and killed by Indians near Fort _ Providence about the same time. They were very thin and had not hibernated. The scarcity of berries during the autumn was given as the cause of the animals not being able to fatten and go into winter quarters as usual. While descending the Mackenzie in June, 1904, I saw tracks of bears at several points. Near the mouth of the Nahanni the animals apparently were quite common. Just after running the Sans Sault Rapid, 125 miles below Fort Norman, on June 19, we killed a bear. The animal proved to be a female about 3 years old. She had evi- dently never borne young. The stomach was distended with the shoots of Hyuisetwm, on which the animal was browsing when first seen. We ascertained that many skins are traded at Forts Norman and Good Hope, and a few at Fort McPherson. While we were ascending the Athabaska during August, on our homeward trip, a number of bears were seen and several were shot by natives accom- panying the transport. The cinnamon or brown phase of color, though of rather common occurrence in the mountains of Alberta, is rare throughout the greater part of the region east of the mountains. I have never seen a skin of this phase on the Athabaska or Slave rivers, but was told that a ‘ cinnamon’ bear was killed on the lower part of Little Buffalo River, near Fort Resolution, about the middle of June, 1903. The fur traders say that an occasional one is brought to Fort Resolution from the eastern end of Great Slave Lake. At Fort Simpson, also, a brown skin is occasionally traded. This phase was reported to be very rare at Fort Good Hope. Ross, writing on the bears of the Mackenzie River district about the year 1860, states that the brown variety of this species is very rare.” @Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 139, 1862. 929 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. While in the Jasper House region in the summers of 1895 and 1896. J. Alden Loring found these animals rather common, and secured several specimens. On one occasion in 1895, near Henry House, a female ‘cinnamon’ bear and her two cubs were observed in a tall dead tree. One of the cubs was black, while the other resembled the mother in color. The old one was wounded and disappeared, and although the young ones bleated loudly, she was with difficulty en- ticed near enough to be shot, but was finally secured, together with both the young ones. The stomachs of all were filled with blue- berries (Vaccinium). Another adult, in the black phase, was killed at Jasper House during the same summer. In 1896, while in the same region, Loring saw many tracks of black bears at various points in the mountains and foothills. Hood mentions seeing ‘brown’ bears, probably referring to the cinnamon phase of the black bear, on the Clearwater, during the spring of 1820. MacFarlane speaks of seeing several black bears on Lockhart River, a tributary of the Anderson, in the summer of 1857.? In a later paper he states that the species is not common within the Arctic portion of the [lower] Anderson River region, though fairly abundant on both sides of the valley in the forested country to the southward.° Ross gives the species as common throughout the Mac- kenzie River region north to beyond the Arctic Circle. J. B. Tyrrell, as the result of observations made in the country to the eastward of Athabaska Lake in the summers of 1892, 1893, and 1894, states that the black bear ranges throughout the wooded country. J. W. Tyr- rell records it from Wolverine (Chipman) River, a short distance northeast of the eastern extremity of Athabaska Lake, where he ob- served it in the summer of 1893. Russell states that only three bears were killed within 20 miles of Fort Rae during the winter of 1893- 94; that they are frequently seen along the Mackenzie, but are re- ported not to occur in the neighborhood of La Pierre Houses J. W. Tyrrell mentions black bears as occurring on the east side of Artillery Lake near latitude 63°. Hanbury states that they are found on the main Ark-i-linik, or Thelon, River.’ This is the most northeastern record and extends the known distribution of the species in this direction to the extreme limit of trees. 4 Franklin’s Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 191, 1823. 5 Canadian Record of Science, IV, p. 32, 1890. € Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 721, 1905. @Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 139, 1862. € Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., [X (new ser.), p. 166F, 1898. f Across the Sub-Arctics of Canada, p. 73, 1898. ° 9 Expl. in Far North, p. 246, 1898. ”% Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada) for 1900-1901, p. 115, 1902. i Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 14, 1904. 1908.] MAMMALS. 223 Ursus horribilis Ord. Grizzly Bear. Grizzly bears, probably referable to this species, occur throughout the Rocky Mountain range and its eastern spurs west of the Mac- kenzie, north to the Arctic coast. Specimens of grizzly bears from this region are very rare in museums, hence it is impossible to speak with assurance regarding the species. We were informed that grizzlies were often killed in the Nahanni Mountains, and that several had been shot near Fort Liard during recent years. A number of skins are traded annually at Forts Liard and Nelson. At Fort Norman I saw several skins which had been taken in the mountains to the westward. They were of course with- out skulls, and lacked also claws. They were in general of a nearly uniform dark yellowish-brown, the underfur frequently overlaid with long yellowish hair. From C. P. Gaudet, of Fort Good Hope, I obtained the claws of a large bear said to have been taken near the mouth of the Mackenzie. The fore claws are long and comparatively straight. An imperfect skin obtained at Arctic Red River is smaller, but has similar claws. It is provisionally referred to this species. The termination of the range west of the Mackenzie Delta, locally called Black Mountain, is inhabited by large grizzlies, which are said to be very savage when they come out of their dens in the spring. This bear was first recorded from the region by Mackenzie, who during his exploration of Peace River noted the species below the mouth of *‘ Sinew’ River, a southern tributary entering the Peace a short distance east of the mountains.*. Richardson states that the species “inhabits the Rocky Mountains and the plains lying to the eastward of them, as far as latitude 61°,” and that Drummond found it common in the wooded country skirting the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains and about the source of the Peace.’ Ross gives this species as “ not rare in the mountain ranges” of the Mackenzie River region.© About the last of June, 1894, Frank Russell killed a grizzly bear in the delta of the Mackenzie. Russell does not de- scribe its color, but states that it weighed about 700 pounds, and that its specific gravity was so great “ that it required considerable effort to raise the carcass to the surface.”* The skull, now in the collection of the University of Iowa, has been examined by Dr. C. Hart Mer- riam and pronounced to be a true grizzly. In the summer of 1895 J. Alden Loring found grizzly bears to be rather common in the mountains in the Jasper House region, where * Voyages to Frozen and Pacific Oceans, p. 160, 1801. 5Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, pp. 28, 29, 1829. (See Drummond’s itinerary, p. 60.) € Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 139, 1862. @¥xpl. in Far North, p. 246, 1898. DRA NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. three were killed by his party. These had been feeding on bluc-’ berries (Vaccintum). In many places the animals had been digging for roots and spermophiles, or overturning rotten logs in search of insects. In 1896 he found traces of the animals in Rodent Valley, and ascertained the fact of their occurrence in the higher parts of the mountains between Jasper House and Smoky River. Ursus richardsoni Swainson. Barren Ground Bear. This famous bear occurs in various parts of the Barren Grounds, but seems to be rare over the greater part of its range and is still very imperfectly known. Though constantly on the lookout for this species while traveling along the south shore of the great lake named for it, I failed-to see either bears or their tracks. The Indians, how- ever, informed me that many occur on the large eminence usually called Grizzly Bear Mountain, west of McVicar Bay, and that they are found less frequently about the outlet of the lake. Mr. Peter McCallum, who has spent some years about Great Bear Lake, in- formed me that the region of the Scented Grass Mountains, locally known as the ‘ Big Point,’ is a favorite locality for the animals. Skins from Great Bear Lake, seen at Fort Norman, were of a nearly uniform dark brown throughout. Others seen at Fort Good Hope, said to be from the Barren Grounds, were similar in color, but in some cases the underfur was overlaid with long yellowish hair. This species was first reported by Samuel Hearne, who saw the skin of an enormous grizzled bear at the tents of the Eskimo at the Bloody Fall, Coppermine River. During Franklin’s first northern journey this bear was several times observed, and is mentioned in the narrative from Grizzly Bear Lake, a short distance south of Fort Enterprise ;° from the Coppermine near Fairy Lake River and Bloody Fall; from the mouth of Hood River; and from several points on Bathurst Inlet. On one occasion a female with three cubs was seen.° In the stomach of one killed on the Arctic coast (near Gordon Bay, Bathurst Inlet) were the remains of a seal, a marmot, some roots of plants, some berries, and grass.t Richardson recognized this species as distinct from other American bears, but not being certain of its distinctness from Ursus arctos, on several occasions treated it under that name. Thomas Simpson observed a Barren Ground bear, accompanied by two cubs, on Barry Island, Bathurst Inlet, on August 3, 1838.¢ During the explorations conducted by J. W. Tyrrell in the region between Great Slave Lake and Hudson Bay in the summer of 1900, 4 Journey to the Northern Ocean, p. 372, 1795. ® Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 220, 1823. ¢Tbid., pp. 384, 342, 377, 378, 1823. 4¥Wauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 23, 1829. Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 281, 1843. 1908. ] MAMMALS. DORS tracks of a large bear, undoubtedly of this species, were seen on two occasions on the Thelon, and one was killed by Fairchild, a member of the party. This specimen, unfortunately, was lost in a canoe acci- dent. During the same season, J. M. Bell, while exploring in the Great Bear Lake region, met with this species. He writes me that he saw “ grizzly bears, large grayish-brown brutes, quite often along the west and north shore of Great Bear Lake.” Hanbury failed to meet with any of these bears during his long journey through the Barren Grounds in 1901-2.. On reaching the coast near Ogden Bay, early in May, 1902, he learned from the Eskimo that the animals occur all along the Arctic coast, though not numercusly, but that they do not emerge from their winter quarters until June. Proceeding westward, he noted tracks in several places between there and Great Bear Lake, but saw none of the animals. He saw the last fresh tracks on the north shore of Great Bear Lake, near the mouth of Haldane River, late in August.’ MacFarlane in his recent paper on northern mammals refers to a number of instances which occurred in his personal experience, illustrating the ferocity of this species. He met with it on several occasions in various parts of the Anderson River and Franklin Bay region. According to the Indians this bear brings forth one or two cubs every third year. The stomachs of the specimens examined by him were mostly full of various edible roots and one or two contained caribou meat.° He obtained both skins and skulls of this bear in the Anderson River region, and skulls from Anderson River, Franklin Bay, and the * Arctic Coast’ [probably to the northward of Fort Anderson | have been recorded by Merriam in his recent paper on the American bears.’ 7 A mounted specimen in the National Museum, taken by MacFarlane on the Barren Grounds to the eastward of Fort Anderson in June, 1864, is dull yellowish brown in color. It resembles closely some specimens of the grizzly bear, but the head is more yellowish. Thalarctos maritimus (Phipps). Polar Bear. This species occurs all along the northern coast and on the islands of the Arctic Sea. Sabine recorded it from Melville Island, where, however, it was not common, only two individuals being observed dur- ing the time (about a year) that the ships were detained there.* J.C. Ross reported it from Port Bowen; Batty Bay; Fury Beach; and Boothia Felix. In his narrative of the voyage of the /nvestigator 4Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada), for 1900-1901, p. 122, 1902. 5 Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, pp. 139, 199, 243, 1904. € Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, pp. 718-720, 1905. @Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., X, p. 78, 1896. € Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cLxxx1II, 1824. fAppendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. VII, 1835. 44131—No. 27—_08——15 296 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Armstrong records the species from Franklin Bay, where one was. seen swimming;* from Prince of Wales Strait, where one was seen March 29, 1851; and from near Prince Albert Cape, Banks Land, where it was common August 19, 1851.°. M’Dougall records it from near Cape Mecham, southern part of Prince Patrick Island, where two were seen in the spring of 1853.4 Two seen at Camden Bay in the autumn of the same year are recorded by Collinson.¢ Kennedy reported tracks of polar bears as numerous on the northern shore of North Somerset.‘ Sutherland recorded the species from the western coast of North Devon, where several were seen late in May, 1851, passing northward up the channel? He reported it also from Cape Martyr; Assistance Bay; Cape De Haven; and other points on Corn- wallis Island." M’Dougall found the animals numerous in the summer of 1853 in Melville Sound between Cape Cockburn and Baker Island.«. McCormick noted one August 10, 1852, at Beechey Island, and saw tracks later in the month on the shore of North Devon near Cape Osborn.’ Gilder reported three killed by the Es- kimo in October, 1879, on King William Land near Terror Bay." Russell reports the species from Herschel Island, where he obtained skins and skulls, and where the species was said sometimes to gather by scores. He was informed also that a few years since one of the animals penetrated inland as far as Fort McPherson, a very unusual circumstances for this maritime species.’ J. M. Bell writes me that during his explorations to the northeast of Great Bear Lake in August, 1900, one was seen near Dismal Lake. Hanbury, during his journey along the Arctic coast early in the summer of 1902, did not meet with any polar bears. According to the Eskimo, the animals were scarce near Ogden Bay, but were numerous on Corona- tion Gulf later in the season. They were stated to be numerous on | Lind Island during the winter.” Darrell writes me that the natives state that the animals do not come to the coast until the ice breaks up in August. MacFarlane states that during his residence at Fort Anderson he annually received a few skins of this bear from the @Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 202, 1857. bIbid., p. 304, 1857. ¢ Ibid., p. 3891, 1857. d Voyage of the Resolute to Arctic Regions, p. 292, 1857. € Journal of H. M. S. Enterprise, p. 302, 1889. f Narrative Second Voy. Prince Albert, p. 150, 1858. 9 Journ. Voy. to Baffin Bay, II, p. 88, 1852. h Thid., I, p. 397, II, 1388, 141, 127, ete., 1852. ca t Voyage of the Resolute, p. 266, 1857. Jj McCormick’s Voyages, II, pp. 49, 120, 1884. k Schwatka’s Search, p. 192, 1881. 1 ®xpl. in Far North, pp. 244, 245, 1898. m Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, pp. 189, 152, 1904. 1908.] MAMMALS. oe Eskimo, and that he sent three specimens, taken on Liverpool Bay and near the mouth of Wilmot Horton River, to Washington.? Mephitis hudsonica Richardson. Northern Plains Skunk. The skunk is rather common in the rolling country between Edmon- ton and Athabaska Landing, and occurs less abundantly northward to the vicinity of Fort Smith. Of its presence in central Alberta we obtained abundant evidence in 1901. Farther north J. S. Edmonton informed me that three were killed near the mouth of Peace River in 1898, and that he had seen the skins of two which were taken near Fort Smith. Mr. Brabant, of that post, told me that the animal was occasionally killed in the vicinity, and a specimen is included in a col- lection of skulls since received from there. During our second trip to the region, in 1903, my brother and Cary saw two skins at Fort Smith, and a live individual on Slave River near the mouth of the Peace. While ascending the Athabaska above Fort McMurray, and while on the road between Athabaska Landing and Edmonton, they often saw tracks. Skins were seen at Athabaska Landing and near Lily Lake. During my outward trip in the autumn of 1904 I saw the body of a skunk in the possession of some natives on the Athabaska below Grand Rapid, and obtained a hunter’s skin from W. E. Whiteley at Sandy Creek, 20 miles south of Athabaska Landing. He reported the animal fairly common there. A. F. Camsell writes me that two skunks were killed near Fort Simpson in the autumn of 1905. One of these was taken near the Mackenzie about 25 miles above Fort Simpson; the other near Liard River 10 miles from its mouth. The skins of both animals were traded at Fort Simpson. King records a skunk kilied beyond the sixty-first parallel on the route between Athabaska and Great Slave lakes.” Ross mentions finding the bones and part of the skin of one a short distance from the shores of Great Slave Lake.° J. Alden Loring took a specimen at Jasper House, August 25, 1895, but reported the animal as not common. He saw another at Henry House, October 9, 1896. The Jasper House specimen and a skull from Great Slave Lake have been recorded by Howell.@ MacFarlane gives data showing that this animal is fairly abun- dant in the Lesser Slave Lake and Isle a la Crosse regions. In 1889 Lesser Slave Lake sent out 62 skins; Sturgeon Lake, 3; Trout Lake, 2; Whitefish Lake, 20; and Portage la Loche, 11. English River #Proe. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVEIT, p. 723; 1905. 5 Narrative of Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 127, 1836. € Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 139, 1862. aN. A. Fauna, No. 20, p. 25, 1901. 298 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. district, comprising the posts in the Isle a la Crosse region, sent out ~ 461 skins in 1889, and 207 in 1890, mostly from Isle a la Crosse and Green Lake. He also mentions obtaining specimens at Fort Chipe- wyan.? Lutra canadensis (Schreber). Canadian Otter. The otter occurs throughout the wooded portion of the region, but is rare over most of this area. Skins were seen at all the posts visited, but although an occasional track was noted none of the animals were observed during our trips except in the region between Fort Rae and Great Bear Lake. While making this traverse in August, 1903, otters, sometimes in pairs, were observed on several of the lakes, and ‘otter sign’ indicated that the animals were fairly common along the rapids of most of the streams. On the lakes north of Lake Hardisty several were pursued, but we failed to secure specimens, with the exception of a skull picked up at a rapid near MacTavish Bay. When pursued they swam altogether beneath the surface, rising at intervals of a minute or two to breathe and reconnoiter. On first reaching the surface the animal raises its head about a foot above the water to survey the situation. After remaining a few seconds in this position it sinks until only the head remains in sight while it regains its breath, remaining quiescent for some seconds. It then dives again, especially if hard pressed, and swims for a distance of 200 yards or more before reappearing, usually in an unexpected direction. If the animal is wounded, it raises only the nose above the surface, and in this position usually escapes detection if there be ever so shght a ripple on the water. While ascending the Athabaska in August, 1903, Merritt Cary saw otter tracks near Brulé Rapid. Reports from the Liard indicate that a fair number are annually traded at Forts Nelson and Liard, and a few are received also at Fort Simpson. On the lower Mac- kenzie the animal is rare, only one or two being annually traded at Fort Good Hope. Fort Anderson also received comparatively few skins during the five years of its existence. In 1861 five were traded, and in 1862, three. At the time of Franklin’s second northern journey these animals were rather common about Fort Franklin and did considerable damage to fish nets; on one occasion six were seen in one day.’ Rich- ardson states that the otter inhabits the Mackenzie and other rivers nearly to the Arctic Sea.° J. B. Tyrrell states that in the region to the eastward of Athabaska Lake the otter occurs on all the streams @Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, pp. 7414, 715, 1905. 6 Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 72, 1828. ¢ Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 58, 1829. 1908.] es MAMMALS. 229 throughout the wooded country.t| Russell recorded it from Fort Rae, and was told that the animal was comparatively common near Fort. Nelson, on a southern tributary of the Liard.? MacFarlane records an otter seen on Lockhart River in the summer of 1857.° In a later paper he states that the animal was not common on the lower Ander- son, and that the young number from three to five.4 Taxidea taxus (Schreber). Badger. Concerning this species Richardson says: “ The J/eles Labradoria frequents the sandy plains or prairies which skirt the Rocky Moun- tains as far north as the banks of the Peace River, and sources of the River of the Mountains, in latitude 58°.”¢ Thomas Simpson, on January 28, 1837, saw a recently killed specimen in the possession of an Indian on the Athabaska below the mouth of the Clearwater./ I find no late records of its occurrence north of the Saskatchewan region, but as the animal is rapidly being extirpated throughout its range, it is not unlikely that it formerly extended farther north. MacFarlane states that in 1889 Isle a la Crosse and Green Lake each traded one badger skin.’ Lutreola vison energumenos (Bangs). Western Mink. The mink is rather common throughout the wooded portion of the region now under review. During the season of 1901 we fre- quently saw tracks along the muddy margins of the rivers, but failed to see any of the animals. Skulls were obtained at the fol- lowing localities: Athabaska River (near Brulé and Boiler rapids) ; Slave River (at points 10 and 15 miles below Peace River, and 30 and 100 miles below Fort Smith) ; Fort Resolution; and Fort Rae. During our trip northward to Great Slave Lake in 1903 we made few observations on this species, though we obtained a few skulls at trappers’ cabins along the route, and occasionally noted tracks on the river banks. In the region between Fort Rae and Great Bear Lake I found the mink rather common. Along the lower part of the rapid stream which we descended to MacTavish Bay it was especially abundant, and a number were observed and two adult males secured. One of these I trapped in an unusual manner. While making a portage to avoid a rapid I caught several large lake trout in the eddy at its foot. These I tossed among the bowlders on the shore as fast as I secured them. On gathering the fish I missed one, 4 Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., [X (new ser.), p. 166F, 1898. 6 Expl. in Far North, p. 239, 1898. © Canadian Record of Science, IV, p. 32, 1890. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 716, 1905. Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 38, 1829. f Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 64, 1843. ELOCME, 5. Nat. NUS XOX V LET ps 715;-1905. 930 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. and after a short search found it partially hidden beneath a bowlder, - where it had been dragged by a mink which was still engaged with it. T set a small steel trap, and while holding it by the chain with one hand I seized the fish by the tail and gently led the mink into the trap. IT saw no minks about Fort Franklin, where the species was said by the Indians to be rare. While ascending the Mackenzie to Fort Simpson in October I frequently noted tracks, and on one occasion saw a mink on the river bank. I found it to be rather common about Fort Simpson, where numbers are annually traded. Many are obtained also at Forts Norman and Good Hope. Skins and skulls from this region are not essentially different from specimens of L. energumenos from southern British Columbia, and it seems best to refer the interior mink to this form. are found in the narratives of various ex- peditions, the particular species is seldom indicated. Phoca hispida Schreber. Rough Seal. Referring to this species Richardson says: “ They form * * * the chief dependence of the Esquimaux that frequent the mouth of the Coppermine River in the months of March, April, May, and June.”* J. C. Ross reports this species from Port Bowen; and as occurring on both sides of the Isthmus of Boothia.© The common seal mentioned by Hanbury as observed on Melville Sound, Arctic coast, early in June, 1902, is probably referable to this species.” I saw a number of skins at the Hudson’s Bay posts at Arctic Red River and Fort McPherson in the summer of 1904. These had been traded by the Eskimo who frequent the mouth of the Mackenzie. In notes sent to the Smithsonian MacFarlane records a seal which was shot on Franklin Bay. It was called by the Eskimo ‘ natshuk,’ which identifies it as this species. Phoca groenlandica Fabr. Harp Seal. J. C. Ross states that skins of this seal were obtained from the natives of the west side of the Isthmus of Boothia.¢ Sutherland states that the ‘ ocean, or Greenland, seal’ was common in August, 1850, in the southern part of Wellington Channel./ Erignathus barbatus (Erxleben). Bearded Seal. Sutherland states that the bearded seal was common in August, 1850, in the southern part of Wellington Channel.’ M?’Clintock records it from Port Kennedy, where it was observed during the voyage of the Fou.9 Hanbury records the ‘ ugyuk’ (the Eskimo name for this species), as rather common early in June, 1902, on Melville Sound.’ It proba- bly occurs all along the Arctic coastline from Hudson Bay to that vicinity, and perhaps farther west. Sorex personatus I. Geoffroy. Common Eastern Shrew. This common species is quite generally distributed throughout the region north to the Arctic Sea. During our various trips we secured a series of over a hundred specimens, from the following localities: Thirty miles above Athabaska Landing; Athabaska Land- “Appendix to Parry’s Second Voyage, p. 334, 1825 (1827). 5Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 94, 1826. ¢ Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. x1x, 1835. @ Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 159, 1904. € Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxI, 1835. f Journ. Voyage to Baffin Bay, I, p. 293, 1852. I Voyage of the Fox, p. 168, 1860. ’ Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 161, 1904. 1908.) MAMMALS. 943 ing; Calling River; 25 and 50 miles above Pelican Rapid; Pelican Rapid; Cascade Rapid; Mountain Rapid; Fort Chipewyan; Slave River, 10 miles below Peace River; Smith Landing; Fort Smith; Slave River, 100 miles below Fort Smith; Fort Resolution; Trout Rock, 25 miles south of Fort Rae; Fort Rae; Grandin River; Lac St. Croix; Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake; Fort Providence; Fort Simp- son; mountains near mouth North Nahanni River; Fort Wrigley; and Fort Norman. We took specimens in nearly all kinds of situations, but found the animals most common in marshes and about the mar- gins of muskeg ponds. They enter the storehouses of the trading posts freely, especially in winter, and several were taken in such situations. Embryos were noted in only two instances, as follows: Fort Chipewyan; June 3, 1901, 10 embryos; mountains near mouth of Nahanni River, July 18, 1903, 6 embryos. The side glands, which apparently are to be found on all adult male shrews in the summer or breeding season, are small in this species, occupying a space only 2 or 3 mm. in length. They are covered with short stiff hair of about the same color as the surrounding fur. They are conspicuous only during the breeding season, probably serving a sexual purpose, are barely discernible in autumn, and can scarcely be detected, in this species, at least, in winter. The series taken at Fort Franklin late in September, 1903, com- prises specimens in both summer and winter pelages, showing the approximate date of the autumn molt in that region. At Fort Simp- son a small series in full winter pelage was taken in the late autumn and early winter of the same year. During the winter their tiny tracks and tunnels were often seen in the woods, and when the tem- perature stands at 40° below zero and constant motion is necessary to keep one from freezing, one can not help wondering that this tiny creature manages to sustain life. In addition to the large series collected by our party, I have ex- amined a collection of nearly a hundred specimens of shrews (skins and aleohohecs) sent to the Smithsonian Institution by various mem- bers of the Hudson’s Bay Company years ago, and which has never before been critically studied. As might be expected, the collection contains much interesting material, and supplements our series ad- mirably. It contains about 40 specimens of S. personatus from the following localities: Cumberland district, Saskatchewan; Fort Reso- lution; Fort Rae; Big Island, Great Slave Lake; Fort Simpson; Port Liard; Mackenzie River below Fort Good Hope; Fort McPher- son; mouth of Porcupine River; Fort Anderson; mouth of Ander- son River; and [south end of] Franklin Bay. Ten adult specimens from the Athabaska average in measurements: Total length 95.6, tail vertebrae 38.9, hind foot 12; ten from Great Slave Lake, 101.6, 38.8, 12; ten from Fort Franklin, 96.7, 38.1, 11.9. 244 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Specimens from Edmonton, St. Albert, and Island Lake, Alberta, taken by J. Alden Loring in 1894 and 1895, were recorded by Mer- riam;7 in 1896 the species was taken by the same collector at the following places: Stony River, 25 miles northwest of Jasper House; Smoky Valley; Muskeg Creek, at points 15 and 20 miles from its mouth; Smoky River trail, north of Baptiste River; and Rodent Val- ley, west of Jasper House. Allen has recently recorded specimens from Liard River [mouth of Black River] and Fort Norman.’ The specimen of Sorex forsteri, recorded by King from the mouth of Great Fish River,’ was in all probability referable to this species. Sorex obscurus Merriam. Rocky Mountain Shrew. During our first trip to the Great Slave Lake region in 1901 a single adult male was taken by Alfred E. Preble on Mission Island, near Fort Resolution, on July 21. The specimen calls for no special comment except that its tail is longer than is usual in typical obscurus. On our next visit to the region we further extended the range of © the species. While collecting on the mountains at the mouth of Nahanni River in July, 1903, my brother and Cary trapped one, and on their return trip they collected a number on the Athabaska at Swift Current and 30 miles above Athabaska Landing. During the | early part of the winter of 1903 I took 2 specimens at Fort Simp- | son. They were secured about the post buildings. Another was | taken at the same place on November 2, 1904, by J. W. Mills. The discovery of this species on Great Slave Lake and the upper | Mackenzie is somewhat of a surprise, since no shrew of the obscurus | type has hitherto been recorded from the interior of British Amer- | ica north of the Jasper House region in western Alberta. Five adults from the Athabaska average in measurements, total | length 114, tail vertebree 45, hind foot 13.3; the Fort Resolution speci- | men measured 124, 51, 13; two from Fort Simpson average 112.5, 47, 13.5; one from the mountains at the mouth of Nahanni River | measured 111, 45, 13. The side glands in this species are quite conspicuous, occupying a _ space about 6.5 mm. in length, or half the length of the hind foot. Two specimens taken by J. Alden Loring at Henry House, Alberta, in the autumn of 1895, have been recorded by Merriam.? In the season of 1896 Loring took the species at the following localities in | Alberta: Mountains 15 miles south of Henry House, July 8 and 9%. Stony River, 35 miles northwest of Jasper House, August 26; Smoky | aN. A. Fauna, No. 10, p. 62, 1895. 6 Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., XIX, p. 564, 1903. ¢ Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 17, 18386. aN. A. Fauna, No. 10, p. 73,.1895. 1908.] MAMMALS. 945 Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House, August 27; Sulphur Prairie, Grand Cache River, September 11 and 14; at several points on Mus- keg Creek, September 17 to 29; Rodent Valley, 25 miles west of Henry House, October 14. The specimens taken subsequent to Sep- tember 26 are mainly in the dark winter pelage. An alcoholic specimen in the collection of the National Museum (No. 11323) proves referable to this species. It was collected by Kennicott and is labeled simply ‘Arctic America, without definite locality, though probably taken somewhere in the Mackenzie region. Sorex richardsoni Bachman. Richardson Shrew. This is one of the less abundant of the shrews of this region, and extends northward to Fort Rae and the mouth of Bear River. In the summer of 1901 we first trapped this species at our camp on Slave River, 10 miles below the mouth of Peace River, where we took an adult male on June 10. A single specimen was secured 25 miles below the Peace three days later, and another at Fort Smith June 21. The species was next detected at Trout Rock, 25 miles south of Fort Rae, where I took 4 specimens, including adults and young, on July 17 and 18. Another was secured at Fort Rae, July 26. In 1903 my brother and Cary took specimens on the Athabaska at Pelican Rapid and near Athabaska Landing in the early autumn, and in the late autumn of the same year I trapped a few in the full winter pelage at Fort Simpson, finding it both in the woods and about the post buildings. During my trip down the Mackenzie in the summer of 1904 I took an adult male at Fort Norman, the most northerly point from which the species is known. The side glands in this species are conspicuous, occupying a space about 7 mm. in length, or half the length of the hind foot. They are covered with short, stiff hair, of the same color as the surrounding fur, but so glossy as to appear of a silvery color in certain lights. J. Alden Loring found this species common in central Alberta in 1894 and 1895, and specimens taken by him at Edmonton, St. Albert, and Island Lake (15 miles west of Ste. Anne), have been recorded by Merriam. They were taken mainly in tall grass bordering lakes. A comparison of the specimens taken by us in the Athabaska and Maekenzie region, with an extensive series from Alberta and Kee- watin, shows no important difference. Merriam (loc. cit.) gives the average measurements of 25 specimens from Edmonton as follows: Total length 113.2, tail vertebree 40.4, hind foot 13.9; two from Slave River average 120.5, 43, 14; four from near Fort Rae average 116.5, 40:7, 13.5; two from Fort Simpson, 113, 42.5, 13.7; one from Fort Norman measures 120, 45, 14. aN. A. Fauna, No. 10, p. 64, 1895. 946 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27, In the National Museum series of shrews I find a number of speci- mens of this species from the region now under review and will refer to them briefly. A skin taken at Portage La Loche by B. R. Ross, August 5, 1860, is chiefly interesting as from a locality now seldom visited. Several alcoholic specimens furnish a record for Fort Reso- lution, where we did not detect it. One was taken at Buffalo River, Great Slave Lake, July 5 (probably 1860), by B. R. Ross, who a!so collected one at Fort Simpson in December, 1860. Another was taken at Big Island, Great Slave Lake, by John Reid. Allen has recorded three specimens taken at Fort Norman by A. J. Stone, September 15 to 17, 1898.« Sorex sphagnicola, described by Coues from Fort Liard or vicin- | ity,’ and which has been more or less doubtfully referred to by authors in recent years as distinct from S. richardsoni, is beyond all doubt identical with this species. I have recently made a careful comparison between the type of S. sphagnicola and our large series of richardsoni, some of which are from the same general region, as shown above. The type of Sorex sphagnicola now consists merely of fragments of a skin, the head and nape and the hinder third, includ- ing the hind feet and tail. It was plainly taken in summer and was molting, a condition which probably accounts for the alleged peculiarities of the color pattern which have been supposed to charac- terize this species. When compared with summer skins of S. rich- ardsoni the agreement is very close. The color of the head and neck is exactly matched in some specimens of richardsoni from Great Slave Lake; the color of the hinder parts match almost equally well, the type of sphagnicola being just appreciably darker than ordinary summer specimens of richardsont. The feet and tail agree precisely in size, and, allowing a little for the fading of the type, in color. Doctor Merriam has compared this specimen and agrees with me that S. sphagnicola must be considered a synonym of S. richardsont. Sorex tundrensis Merriam. Tundra Shrew. In the collection of shrews in the National Museum I find about 25 specimens of this species from several localities in the lower Mac- kenzie region, thus materially extending its previously recorded range. A number of specimens were brought to MacFarlane by the | Eskimo from the mouth of the Anderson and the Arctic coast in that quarter in 1862, 1863, and the winter of 1865-66. There are several | also from Fort Anderson taken by MacFarlane, one from Peel River | (Fort McPherson) taken by C. P. Gaudet, and one or two from the mouth of Porcupine River collected by Kennicott. In addition to Bull Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., XGiX, p. 566, 1903: 6 Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr., III, No. 3, p. 650, 1877. 1908.] MAMMALS. 247 these, which are definitely labeled, there are a number of specimens labeled, in some cases doubtfully, ‘Arctic America.’ These were prob- ably taken by MacFarlane in the Anderson River region. They bear original numbers, but Mr. MacFarlane, in answer to a letter, though of the opinion that the specimens were collected by him, is not able to supply exact data, owing to the loss of some of his notebooks, but thinks from the numbers that they were collected by the Eskimo of the lower Anderson in 1862 and 1863, in which case they are from a locality already represented by authentically labeled material. The specimens from northern Mackenzie do not differ in marked degree from a large series in the Biological Survey collection from St. Michaels, the type locality, and other points in Alaska. Though this species has the same tooth characters and color pattern as S. richardsoni, and it has been thought that there might be intergrada- tion between them, the series now brought together affords no evi- dence that such is the case. Typical S. richardsom occurs at Fort Norman, and S. tundrensis at Fort Anderson, and it is hardly proba- ble that these widely different forms intergrade in the comparatively narrow intervening area over which practically uniform climatic and physiographic conditions prevail. Neosorex palustris (Richardson). Marsh Shrew. This species apparently is of rather rare occurrence in the region now under review, but occurs north at least to the region of Great Slave Lake. During my trip northward from Fort Rae in 1903 I took a female at the edge of a muskeg on the upper part of Grandin River on August 5. It is grayish beneath, resembling in this respect some summer specimens from southern Keewatin.* It presents no dis- tinctive characters except its rather small size, which is probably due to immaturity, though owing to the loss of the skull this can not be determined with certainty. It measures: Total length 137, tail verte- bree 61, hind foot 18. On September 23 of the same year, while on their homeward trip, Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary collected a skull of this species on the trail 35 miles south of Athabaska Land- ing. The specimen was picked up in the road. In the collection of the National Museum I find an alcoholic Veo- sorex (No. 6276), taken at Fort Rae by L. Clarke. The skull, which I have removed and cleaned, agrees well with a series of specimens from Alberta and Keewatin. The specimen measured: Total length 125, tail vertebree 64, hind foot 19. On account of the hardened con- dition of the specimen, the total length, by present measurement, is manifestly too small; the other measurements are approximately correct. CN UNAS INO 22, uD adie 1LOO2. 248 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Another specimen (No. 6275) from Fort Resolution, is catalogued, but I can not find it in the collection, unless a specimen labeled doubt- fully ‘Arctic America,’ without other data, is the same one— reentered in the catalogue because of mistake. At any rate, the specimen is in-nowise peculiar. It measures: Total length 150, tail vertebrae 67, hind foot 19. A specimen taken by J. Alden Loring at Edmonton, Alberta, Sep- tember 15, 1894, has been recorded by Merriam.“ It was taken in tall grass, and measured 157, 68, 20. Neosorex palustris navigator Baird. Rocky Mountain Marsh Shrew. A specimen taken by Loring near Henry House, September 6, 1895, has been recorded by Merriam.’ During the following season, Lor- ing took one in Smoky Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House, on August 27. It is a Rocky Mountain form of JV. palustris, and the specimens mentioned furnish all the information we have regarding its range within the region now under review. Microsorex eximius (Osgood). Alaska Microsorex. In the course of our collecting, a series of over a dozen shrews of this genus, hitherto unrecorded from this region, was obtained. It comprises specimens from Fort Chipewyan, Smith Landing, Fort Smith, Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Fort Franklin. They were usually taken in traps set in damp places, mainly in the runways of J/icrotus, and in situations similar to those inhabited by Sorex personatus, the two species being frequently captured in the same trap on successive days. On one or two occasions we took Microsorex in storehouses. Usually we trapped at least 10 S. per- sonatus to one Microsorex, but at Fort Smith we found the latter oc- cupying certain tracts almost to the exclusion of the common species, judging by the results of our trapping. The series thus brought to- gether fortunately shows both summer and winter pelages. The summer pelage is sepia brown above, shghtly paler beneath. The color, together with the short tail and small hind foot, usually suf- fices to distinguish the animals from S. personatus, without refer- ence to the skull. Compared with the two known specimens of Microsorex eximius (which differ somewhat from each other), the summer specimens of the present series average slightly darker above, but the difference is not important. In winter the upper parts are erayer than in summer and the lower parts are much lighter, being nearly pure white. The rostrum and tooth row average slightly broader in our specimens than in typical eximius from Alaska, but the difference is scarcely appreciable. @N. A. Fauna, No. 10, p. 92, 1895. 6b Ibid, p. 93, 1895. 1908.] MAMMALS. 949 Compared with a series of winter skins of JMJicrosorex hoyi from Elk River, Minnesota, specimens in corresponding pelage from Fort Simpson and Fort Franklin are slightly grayer above. Beneath they are grayish white, lacking entirely the rusty tinge of hoyz. I am unable to compare the summer pelages, the series of hoyi being deficient in this respect. The skull of J/. eximius ditfers from that of hoyt mainly in the shape of the brain case, which is more inflated in the former. In eximius, also, the unicuspids are more crowded, with the result that the minute third and fifth, especially the former, are scarcely visible when the crowns are viewed. The side glands of JZ/icrosorex are very conspicuous, occupying a space about 9 mm. in length, or nearly the length of the hind foot, being relatively larger than in any other shrew examined, and are covered with short stiff hair of a silvery color. They are conspicuous in all the males in our series taken in the summer months. A JMicrosorex taken on Muskeg Creek, Alberta, a tributary of Smoky River, September 26, 1896, by J. Alden Loring, is in the Bio- logical Survey collection. It closely resembles skins of J/icrosorex eximius in winter pelage. Its skull, however, can not be found and the specimen is therefore only provisionally referred to the present species. An adult male from Fort Chipewyan measured: Total length 90, tail vertebre 30, hind foot 10; five specimens of both sexes from Fort Smith average 92, 30.4, 102; one from Fort Simpson measured 85, 30, 10; one from Fort Franklin, 92, 34, 10. In the museum collection of alcoholic shrews I find 4 specimens of this species from Fort Resolution, one taken in December, 1862, by James Lockhart, the others collected about the same time by A. McKenzie. Another (No. 59621), labeled Great Slave Lake, and col- lected by John Reid, was in all probability taken at Big Island. Its skull is the smallest of the series. The skull of another (No. 59624) from Cumberland district, Saskatchewan, taken by MacFarlane, closely resembles that of J/. hoy7, and the specimen is perhaps prop- erly referable to that species. The type of Microsorex alnorum, described by me, from Robinson Portage, Keewatin, still remains unique, none of the large series now before me equaling it in the size of the skull, especially the brain case, or in the length of the hind foot. Myotis lucifugus (Le Conte). Little Brown Bat. A small bat which was dislodged from the loose bark of a poplar stub near our camp 10 miles below the mouth of the Peace on June 7, 1901, was probably of this species. It darted into the adjacent forest and cculd not be found. With the exception of one or two seen on 250 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. the Athabaska between Athabaska Landing and Grand Rapid early in May, it was the only bat seen during that season. During the evening of May 29, 1903, while we were floating down the Athabaska near the site of Pierre au Calumet, we saw a number of small bats, probably of this species, flying about over the river. During their outward trip in the autumn of the same year, my brother and Cary saw two, one of which was secured, at La Biche River, August 29. It proves to be of this species. Hubert Darrell, who accompanied Hanbury through the Barren Grounds in 1901-2, writes me that he saw small dark-brown bats at the Big Fall on Hanbury River in the summer of 1901. In the following summer he saw one among some cliffs on the Arctic coast 50 miles east of the mouth of the Coppermine. Since J/. lucifugus appears to be the most northern-ranging bat, it is probable, though by no means certain, that they were of this species. In spite of uncertainty as to the species, the occurrence of bats at these points on the Barren Grounds seems worthy of record. At least one species is said to be occasionally seen at Fort Simpson, but though constantly on the lookout for bats during the spring of 1904, I failed to observe any. I saw a small brown bat at Grand Rapid, Athabaska River, August 22, but was unable to secure it. Myotis subulatus (Say). Say Bat. Richardson records a specimen of Vespertilio subulatus procured on Back’s expedition. The locality is not stated definitely, but the con- text leaves it to be inferred that the specimen was taken at Great Slave Lake.* Ross notes this species as being found north to Salt River, but as very rare.” In view of the imperfect knowledge in former years regarding the species of bats, these records are quite as likely to refer to J/. lucifugus, which is probably the commoner species in this region, though it is highly probable that J/. swbulatus also occurs well northward. Miller records one taken near Red Deer. Alberta.¢ * Lasionycteris noctivagans (Le Conte). Silver-haired Bat. As we were ascending the Athabaska near the mouth of House River, August 24, 1904, a bat of this species was seen flying about near the boats. It was bright sunlight at the time. The crew began to throw stones at it, whereupon it took refuge on the awning of one of the boats and was secured. It proved to be a male. Another. a female, was secured 60 miles below Athabaska Landing on Au- gust 29. 1 Back’s Narrative Expedition to Great Fish River, Appendix, p. 485, 1836. 6 Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 142, 1862. EN. A. Fauna, No. 13; p. 76, 1897. 1908.] BIRDS. ASI Two specimens taken by J. Alden Loring at Henry House, Alberta, early in October, 1895, have been recorded by Miller.” Lasiurus cinereus (Beauvois). Hoary Bat. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary obtained a fine female of this large species on the Athabaska near the mouth of La Biche River, August 29, 1903. It was caught among shrubbery on the river bank. The species is evidently rare here, since none of the boatmen seemed to be acquainted with it. Miller has recorded a specimen taken near Red Deer, Alberta.” Richardson described a specimen taken at Cumberland House.° Though its size serves to distinguish this species from all other northern bats, it seems to have been seldom recorded and is probably rather rare, though doubtless of regular occurrence in Alberta and southern Mackenzie. BIRDS OF THE ATHABASKA-MACKENZIE REGION. The following list is believed to include all species of birds that have been authoritatively recorded from the region treated in the present report. In the account of each species our own observations are usually given first, in chronological order, the published records following. Of the published references relating to the various species only those have been utilized which best represent the dis- tribution, dates of migration, breeding, and other interesting features of their hfe history, preference usually being given to the notes earliest published. Notes not accompanied by reference to the place of publication are derived from manuscript records or verbal com- munications.? Colymbus holbelli (Reinh.). Holbcell Grebe. This handsome grebe is a fairly common breeder in suitable places throughout the wooded parts of the region. In 1903 a single in- dividual was seen on Lily Lake, Alberta, May 138, and several at Two Lakes, May 14. The species was next noted in the marshes near Rocher River, June 6 and 7, and a pair was seen on the lake near Fort Resolution, Mackenzie, June 20. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary noted it daily at Hay River, June 27 to July 1, and at Fort Providence, July 4. On their return trip they saw one on the =a. Pauna, No. 13, p. 86, 1897. ON. A. Fauna, No. 13, p. 114, 1897. Z Fauna Boreali-Americana, I, p. 1, 1829. 4@Canon 50 of the American Ornithologists’ Union Code of Nomenclature is here interpreted to mean that the authority for a name shail be inclosed in parentheses only when the specific name is now used in combination with a generic name not employed by the original describer. 952 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Athabaska at Athabaska Landing, Alberta, September 15. During’ my trip northward from Fort Rae I found it rather common and undoubtedly breeding in the small marshy lakes along iower Grandin River, August 1 to 4. An individual which had succumbed to the weather, probably having been wounded, was picked up on the Mackenzie 10 miles above the mouth of the Blackwater, October 8 In the spring of 1904 the species was first brought to my notice late in May, when a fine male, taken near Fort Providence, May 25, was brought to me at Fort Simpson. While descending the Macken- zie I observed a pair in a small lake near Nahanni River, June 4. The nest, a floating bunch of coarse grass, was anchored to a sub- merged log 15 feet from the shore. It appeared to be nearly finished, and was held in place by a limb which projected above the surface of the water, and around which the nest had been constructed. Numbers of the species were evidently breeding in the ponds which studded the valley of the Nahanni, and several were observed on the following day. I saw a pair ina small lake on Manito Island, near Fort Good Hope, June 23, and noted the species on the Mackenzie, 75 miles below Fort Good Hope, June 27, and near the mouth of Peel River, June 30. 1 observed one on lower Peel River, July 1, and found the species com- mon about the small lakes near Fort McPherson during the first half of July, seeing or hearing it nearly every day. The species was first recorded from this region by Richardson, who quotes from Sabine a description of “a mature individual, killed at Great Slave Lake, May, 1822.” Sabine, whose description ® Richardson quotes in part, apparently was not aware of the precise locahty of the specimen, but Richardson, probably from personal knowledge, was able to supply this information. Ross gives the species as being found north in the Mackenzie Valley to Peel River, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record its occurrence at Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Anderson, Peel River, and in the mountains west of the lower Mackenzie, and mention eggs from Fort Simpson and Peel River.? MacFarlane re- cords two nests, containing, respectively, 4 and 5 eggs, found 40 or 50 miles south of Fort Anderson.? More recently Frank Russell has recorded it from Fort Rae, where he took a specimen, which I have examined, August 22, 1893. MacFarlane, in notes recently sent me, states that this grebe was found breeding at Green Lake, Saskatche- wan, in June, 1880, by W. S. Simpson, and at Fond du Lac, Atha- baska Lake, in 1885, by J. Mercredi. @Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 411, 1831. 6 Franklin’s Narr. Journey to Polar Sea, Appendix, p. 692, 1825. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rey., II (second ser.), p. 290, 1862. d Water Birds N. A., II, p. 430, 1884. € Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 415, 1891. f Expl. in Far North, p. 254, 1898. 1908.] BIRDS. 25a Colymbus auritus Linn. Horned Grebe. - This species breeds threughout the region north nearly ai to the border of the forest, being especially common within the Canadian zone. In the spring of 1901 we first met with it on Athabaska: River near Fort McMurray, May 14, when a single bird was seen. » While encamped on a large island near the outlet of Lake Athabaska, June 1 to 4, we saw a pair daily in a small slough, where they doubtless intended nesting. The bird was noted in the marshes bordering Rocher River, June 5, and a number were seen in a slough near Slave River 25 miles below the mouth of the Peace, June 11 and 12; an adult male was collected on the latter date. At Fort Smith, Mac- kenzie, the species was seen in a marsh, June 22. On our return trip one was seen on the river at Smith Landing, August 6. In 1903 two horned grebes were seen on Lily Lake, Alberta, May 13, and several at Two Lakes, May 14. The species was next ob- ‘served in the marshes adjoining Rocher River, where it was common June 6 to 8, and where a nest containing six eggs was found by Merritt Cary on the latter date. It was noted near the mouth of Peace River, June 9; 50 miles below Fort Smith, Mackenzie, June 16, and at Fort Resolution, June 20. I saw one on Great Slave Lake, near the mouth of the Northern Arm, July 24, and next observed the species on the Mackenzie, 10 miles above the mouth of the Blackwater, October 8, noting two individuals. In the spring of 1904 this species was noted May 13 at Willow River, near Fort Providence, by J. W. Mills. It was not observed again during the season. This bird is quite generally distributed throughout the region. It was first recorded from there by Richardson, who described a speci- men killed at Great Slave Lake.* Ross, in 1862, recorded it as common north to La Pierre House, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.’ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record specimens obtained in the breeding season at Fort Resolution, Fort Simpson, Fort Rae, and Big Island, and on the Anderson and Lower Mackenzie rivers, mainly by various officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company.* Mac- Farlane secured the species near Lockhart River in June, 1861, and took a female with her nest and five eggs 60 miles southeast of Fort Anderson in June, 1866.7. Frank Russell took a specimen at Fort Rae, August 22, 1893, which I have had the opportunity of examin- ing. In some notes recently received from MacFarlane, he states that W. S. Simpson found a nest of this species at Green Tales Sas- katchewan, in June, 1880. “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 411, 1831. ® Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 290, 1862. ¢€Water Birds N. A., II, p. 434, 1884. 7Proc. U, S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p:; 415; 1891. 954 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Colymbus nigricollis californicus (Heerm.). American Eared Grebe, A specimen taken by Kennicott at Fort Resolution, Mackenzie, is in the National Museum. This seems to be the only authentic record for the region. A specimen recorded by Russell from Fort Rae, proves on examination to be referable to C. auritus. Podilymbus podiceps (Linn.). Pied-billed Grebe. In 1903, on May 14, we saw two individuals at Two Lakes, Alberta, about 50 miles north of Edmonton. Previously the species was known from this region only from the capture of a few individuals about Great Slave Lake, and apparently is rare. Richardson quoted from Sabine a description of a specimen which he said was killed at Great Slave Lake in May, 1822. Ross listed it as rare at Great Slave Lake.e Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record eggs from the same place;? and I find a specimen in the National Museum (No. 20756) taken by Kennicott at Fort Resolution, June 13 [1860], and marked “ with 4 eggs.” These are probably the eggs referred to by Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway. Gavia immer (Briinn.). Loon. The great northern diver occurs in summer throughout the region north to the Arctic islands, arriving with the breaking up of the ice. In 1901 we heard its notes at the mouth of Peace River, on the night of June 5, and on July 15 and 16 on the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake, near Yellowknife Bay. In 1903 we saw the species on Athabaska River, near Grand Rapid, May 20; at Fort Chipewyan, June 5; and on Rocher River, June 6. After leaving Fort Resolution for the Mackenzie, Alfred KE. Prebie and Merritt Cary observed two near Sulphur Point, Great Slave | Lake, June 27. They noted the species also near the mouth of Nahanni River, July 15 and 17; about 20 miles above Fort Wrigley, July 20; between Fort Wrigley and Fort Simpson, July 28; and on Great Slave Lake, near Fort Rae, July 28. On their return trip they saw several on Lily Lake, Alberta, 34 miles north of Edmonton. September 24. I noted the species at Fort Resolution, June 28, and near Gros Cape, Great Slave Lake, July 23. I found it breeding commonly during August on nearly all the lakes on the route fol- lowed between Fort Rae and MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake, and noted several pairs with young during the early part of the month. I saw a pair with young the size of green-winged teals on Lake Mazenod, near the head of Grandin River, August 6, and noted the @WXxpl. in Far North, p. 254, 1898. 6 Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 412, 1831. ¢ Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 155, 1862. @Water Birds N. A., II, p. 442, 1884. 1908.] BIRDS. 255 species almost daily on the various lakes: between there and Great Bear Lake during the remainder of the month. On Great Bear Lake I noted it at my camp east of Leith Point, September 2, and nearly every day while traveling westward along the south shore of the lake. I saw one at Fort Franklin, September 20, and one on lower Bear River, September 30. The last one was seen on the Mackenzie near Nahanni River, October 15. In the spring of 1904 I first observed this loon at Fort Simpson, Mackenzie, on May 23, noting two on the river near the post. Their notes, however. had been heard previously by the natives. While descending the Mackenzie I saw a few 50 miles below Fort Simpson, June 2, and near Nahanni River, June 6. I saw one near the mouth of Peel River, June 30, and at Fort McPherson obtained from Mr. W. H. Walker the skins of two which he had taken there late in May. On my return trip I noted the bird near the outlet of Atha- baska Lake, August 6. The natives, especially the Dogribs, relish the flesh of this bird, and frequently obtain it by concealing themselves on the margin of a lake and decoying the bird within range by means of a tin plate or other bright object, which they so manipulate as to attract its atten- tion and excite its curiosity. Richardson was the first to formally record this species, describing a specimen from Great Bear Lake.* Later he speaks of observing the birds migrating toward the southeast along the Arctic coast, near Darnley Bay, August 17, 1848.2 King recorded the species from Clinton-Colden Lake ;¢ and Ross, specimens from Fort Simpson and Peel River.? Armstrong recorded it under the name Colymbus glacialis from Mercy Bay, Banks Land, where 5 were killed July 13, 1852. Loons probably of this species were recorded by Parry from Winter Harbor, Melville Island,’ and by Sutherland from Assistance Bay.’ The catalogue in the National Museum shows that specimens were received from Fort Resolution, Fort Norman, and Big Island. Mac- Farlane found 9 nests, each with 2 eggs. in the Anderson River region ;" and the head of a female taken by him there in July, 1864, is still in the National Museum. Hanbury noted a common loon, the “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 474, 1831. > Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 282, 1851. € Narrative of Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 235, 1836. @©@an. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 444, 1861. © Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 536, 1857. f Journ. Parry’s First Voyage, p. 218, 1821. J Journ. Voy. to Baffin’s Bay and Barrow Strait, II, p. 209, 1852. Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 416, 1894. 256 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. first individual observed that season, on Melville Sound, Mackenzie, June 14, 1902.2 : J. Alden Loring reported seeing several on Spotted Lake, 15 miles west of Lake Ste. Anne, Alberta, in August, 1895. In the summer of 1896 he found it common in suitable places along the trail between Edmonton and the Rocky Mountains, and also noted it on the route between Jasper House and Smoky River, August 20 to October 8. Gavia adamsi (Gray). Yellow-billed Loon. This handsome loon breeds along the northern border of the region now under review, and occurs in migration on the larger bodies of water in the interior, from Athabaska Lake northward. I observed this species but once—on the Mackenzie, a few miles above the mouth of the Nahanni, October 15, 1903. During my stay at Fort McPherson in July, 1904, I was informed by an Indian, who spoke English and described the species accurately, that he had seen one on a lake near the post, July 8. At Hay River, Great Slave Lake, it is frequently shot in May, when the ice begins to break up, but it 1s less often seen at Fort Resolution. Two mounted specimens, taken at Fort Providence some years ago, are in the Hudson’s Bay Company museum at Fort Simpson. The first specific reference to this species as an inhabitant of the Mackenzie region, and one of the first appearances of the bird in lit- erature, is Franklin’s mention of it from Fort Enterprise, late in October, 1820, as follows: The last of the water fowl that quitted us was a species of diver, of the same size with the Colymbus arcticus, but differing from it in the arrangement of the white spots on its plumage, and in having a yellowish white bill. This bird was occasionally caught in our fishing nets.? Ross was the next to detect it in the region, shortly after the bird had been formally described, referring to it as abundant on Great Slave Lake, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.¢ Under the name Colymbus glacialis J. C. Ross records three loons, which his description shows were of this species, obtained about Boothia during John Ross’s second voyage.? Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record specimens from Fort Resolution, Big Island, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Norman, and Peel River,’ and MacFarlane says it abounds during the season of reproduction in Franklin and Liver- pool bays.’ He informs me that a fine example was killed by an @Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 162, 1904. 6 Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 247, 1823. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (Second series), p. 289, 1862. d Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XLII, 1835. € Water Birds N. A., II, p. 462, 1884. f Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 416, 1891. 1908.] BIRDS. TY Indian at Fond du Lac, Athabaska Lake, in the spring of 1885, and sent to J. J. Dalgleish. H. W. Jones (in letter) reports this loon on the Mackenzie above Fort Simpson, May 20, 1905. Gavia pacifica (Lawr.). Pacific Loon.‘ This species breeds commonly in the larger lakes throughout the region from Great Slave Lake northward. In 1901 we first saw it on Great Slave Lake, near Gros Cape, on July 15. It was common on the Northern Arm between Yellowknife Bay and Trout Rock, July 16, and about Trout Rock, July 17. In 1903 I first observed it on Great Slave Lake, near Gros Cape, on July 23, when it was abun- dant. During my trip northward to Great Bear Lake in August I found it to be a common breeder in most of the lakes along the route. I noted it daily along Grandin River, August 1 to 3; on Lake Mazenod, August 6; Sarahk Lake, August 7; Lake Rae, August 8; Lake St. Croix, August 9; Lake Hardisty, August 15, and at several points on the lakes between Lake Hardisty and MacTavish Bay on August 22, 23, and 26. On Great Bear Lake I observed it near McVicar Bay, September 9. . In 1904 I first observed the species at Fort McPherson early in July. It was fairly common on the lakes in the vicinity and was noted July 2, 3, and 11, one being obtained on July 2. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway first recorded the breeding of the species in the Anderson River region, where MacFarlane found over 100 nests, not more than 2 eggs being found in any instance. They state also that specimens of.the birds were obtained from Fort Ander- son, Fort Rae, Rendezvous Lake, Liverpool Bay, Franklin Bay, ‘Barren Grounds,’ and ‘Arctic Coast’ [east of Fort Anderson], and the Gens de Large Mountains.2 A specimen (No. 27899), collected at Fort Anderson by MacFarlane, is still in the National Museum. Seton records the species as common along the route from Fort “Gavia erctica, though several times reported. is of very doubtful occurrence in Mackenzie, as all the specimens of loons of this type available are referable to G. pacifica. MacFarlane records ‘“‘a well-authenticated set of eggs, obtained from Fort Anderson in 1865, and which are now in the odlogical collection of the U. S. National Museum.” (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 416, 1891.)- There are, however, no skins of G. arctica to bear out this identification. He states also, in a manuscript list recently sent me, that a set of 2 eggs, accompanied by the female parent, were brought in to Fort Chipewyan by a Chipewyan Indian {probably from the eastward] early in June, 1885. These were sent to J. J. Dalgleish. There are several other records, but as they were published before (, pacifica was known to be a common species in the region, they probably refer LOCKE, S Water Birds N. A., Il, p. 457, 1884. eh eo 44131—No. 27—_08—_17 958 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Resolution to Aylmer Lake in 1907, but as most abundant on Great Slave Lake.¢ Gavia stellata (Pontoppidan). Red-throated Loon. The red-throated loon is the commonest representative of its genus in this region. It breeds abundantly from Great Slave Lake north- ward and probably to some extent south of that latitude. In the summer of 1901 several loons, apparently of this species, were seen on Lily Lake, Alberta, May 2. Several were seen on Great Slave Lake near Stone Island, June 10. On a semibarren island about 50 miles north of Fort Resolution, where we were detained by high winds July 11 to 14, five pairs were found breed- Fig. 15. Nesting pond of red-throated loch (Gavia stellata), Loon Island, Great Slave sake, ing. Several shallow ponds, from 5 to 50 yards wide and connect- ing with the lake at times of high water, extend nearly across the central part of the island, and each was occupied by a pair of loons, together with their two young, a few days old (fig. 15). The age of the different broods varied but a day or two. The nests, rather weli made of dry grass, were placed at the margins of the ponds, usually | in a patch of grass, and in one or two cases still contained the | abandoned egg shells. When the nesting pond was approached, the | male usually flew away, but the female invariably refused to leave | her offspring, and if absent soon appeared and alighted beside them, | diving, swimming about, and encouraging them in their efforts to | Auk, XXV, p. 68, 1908. 1908.] BIRDS. 259 escape, and endeavoring to attract the attention of the intruder to herself. The old birds fished in the lake near by and were often seen carrying small fishes to the young. An adult. male and two of the downy young were taken. In 1903 a red-throated loon was seen on Athabaska Lake near Fort Chipewyan, June 2. The species was next observed near Gros Cape, on Great Slave Lake, where I saw several July 23. In the region north of Fort Rae I noted it on Sarahk Lake, August 7; Lake Faber, August 8; Lake Rae, August 9; near Lake St. Croix, August. 14; and nearly every day during the following week on the various lakes north of the latter point. On Great Bear Lake I noted the species on MacTavish Bay, August 27; at our camp near Leith Point, August 28; near McVicar Bay, September 9 and 10; and at Fort Franklin, September 22 and 27, this being the last date recorded. In the summer of 1904 I saw a pair on the Mackenzie near the mouth of Nahanni River, June 3; one below Fort Norman, June 17; and one near Rampart Rapid, June 19. The red-throated loon apparently was first recorded from the Mackenzie region by Richardson, who observed it on the Arctic coast west of Liverpool Bay, in the summer of 1848.7. Armstrong noted its arrival at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, about June 1, 1852, during the voyage of the /nvestigator, and specimens were afterwards taken.” M’Clintock noted several early.in July, 1859, at Port Kennedy; ° McCormick observed numbers in Wellington Channel, near Beechey Island, in August of 1852 and 1853.7. Ross spoke of two having been taken at Fort Good Hope.° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record that specimens of the bird were procured at Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Liard River, Anderson River, and Great Bear Lake; and eggs from Great Slave Lake and Anderson River.’ MacFarlane considered it the least abundant of the loons in the Anderson River region, finding about 40 nests, each usually with 2 eggs. Pike found it common in the Barren Grounds south of Lake Mackay June 11, 1890." Hubert Darrell, who accompanied Hanbury along the Arctic coast in 1902, writes me that the species was observed on Melville Sound on June 16. Oates records eggs taken by Collinson at Cambridge Bay, Victoria Land.‘ Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 251, 1851. ’ Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, pp. 522-529, 1857. € Voyage of the Fox, p. 292, 1860. 4 McCormick’s Voyages, II, pp. 89, 137, 1884. Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 444, 1861. / Water Birds N. A., II, p. 460, 1884. 7Proe. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 416, 1891. “Barren Ground of Northern Canada, p. 162, 1892. + Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., I, p. 139, 1901. 260 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Cepphus mandti (Licht.). Mandt Guillemot. This species is stated by J. C. Ross to be the only water bird which remains in the Arctic throughout the winter. It is extremely abun- dant about the large islands of the Arctic Sea to the northward of Mackenzie, having been noted at various points west to Melville Island. It has usually been recorded as Uria grylle. Parry was the first to record this guillemot from the region, noting one at Melville Island, August 8, 1820.7 J. C. Ross recorded it as abundant at Port Bowen;? and later from Fury Point, February, 1853, and as breeding abundantly between Fury Point and Batty Bay.© Armstrong states that 1t was abundant about Beechey Island in the summer of 1854.4 Walker records one taken in February, 1859, at Bellot Strait.¢ : Uria lomvia (Linn.). Briinnich Murre. Under the name Uria briinnichii, J. C. Ross recorded the occur- rence of this bird at Port Bowen, Prince Regent Inlet, where it arrived in early June,’ : Alle alle (Linn.). Dovekie. Richardson describes a specimen killed in August near Melville Island” The species is abundant in Baflin Bay, especially on the east side, but is rare to the westward of that region. Stercorarius pomarinus (Temm.). Pomarine Jaeger. Published reports indicate that this jaeger occurs nearly through- out the region, but probably breeds only along the Arctic coast. Sabine reported this species from Melville Island and Prince Re- gent Inlet;” and Ross recorded one from Fort Simpson.‘ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record specimens from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, and Fort Simpson./ MacFarlane speaks of a pair obtained by the Eskimo near the mouth of Anderson River, and of a male shot on Franklin Bay, July 11, 1865." A specimen collected by Ross at Fort Simpson, October 16, 1860, and one by Lockhart at Fort Resolution, are still in the National Museum. «Journal First Voyage, p._289, 1821. ’Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 107, 1826. ¢ Appendix Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XLiv, 1835. 4 Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 591, 1857. @ Proc. Roy. Soc. Dublin; iL ps 67 also: i Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 106, 1826. Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 479, 1831. ” Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. ccvi, 1824. + Can. Nat.-and Geol., VI, p. 443, 1861. j Water Birds N. A., II, p. 333, 1884. k Proce U.S. Nat. Mus. XaV,2p> 417, 189e 1908.] BIRDS. 261 Stercorarius parasiticus (Linn.). Parasitic Jaeger. This freebooter breeds rather commonly about the eastern and northern parts of Great Slave Lake, abundantly on the Barren Grounds, and probably to some extent on the lakes in the intermediate region. 3 In 1901 we first saw this species about some semibarren islands in Great Slave Lake, a few miles north of Stone Island, July 10, when several melanistic individuals were observed. During the evening of the same day a male and female, evidently a pair, were shot on Loon Island. Both were in the dark sooty plumage, the male being slightly lighter in color beneath, the female nearly uniform sooty throughout. Several, including one in the normal white-breasted plumage. were seen about Loon Island, July 11 to 14. While we were crossing from Loon Island to the north shore of the lake during the night of July 14, a number were seen and two females were collected. One of these is of a nearly uniform sooty color throughout. The other is white beneath, shghtly barred with dusky; lower tail coverts conspicuously barred with black and brownish; upper tail coverts slightly barred with dull fawn. The stomach of one of these contained various in- sects and the bones of a small bird, evidently a young tern; the other had eaten a dragon fly, various beetles, and a small fish. Several individuals were seen July 15 near the mouth of the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake, but the species was not afterwards noted. In 1903 I observed numbers of this species on the Northern Arm between Gros Cape and Trout Rock, July 23 and 24, and noted it near Fort Rae, July 28. In the summer of 1904, while descending the Mackenzie, I saw three individuals, exhibiting both the normal and melanistic plum- ages, near Roche Trempe-l’eau, June 8, and one near Fort Norman, - June 10. A specimen taken at Fort Providence is in the museum at Fort Simpson. Swainson and Richardson, under the name Lestris richardsoni, described a specimen killed at Fort Franklin. Fisher recorded four seen June 10, 1820, on Melville Island.2’. McCormick noted the species on Wellington Channel August 30, 1852.¢ King reported the para- sitic Jaeger from Clinton-Colden Lake.? Armstrong records the ar- rival of this species at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, May 31, 1852.¢ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway recorded specimens from Fort Resolu- tion, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Fort Anderson.’ MacFarlane “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 483, 1831. b Journ. Voy. of Discovery, p. 217, 1821. © McCormick’s. Voyages, II, p. 141, 1884. 4 Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 242, 1836. ° Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 521, 1857. f Water Birds N. A., II, p. 338, 1884. H 262 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. speaks of many nests being discovered on the Barren Grounds be- tween Fort Anderson and Franklin Bay, and of specimens being ob- tained from the Eskimo of the lower Anderson.“ A specimen from Big Island, Great Slave Lake, is still in the National Museum. Stercorarius longicaudus Vieill. Jong-tailed Jaeger. This is apparently the least abundant of the jaegers in this region. It has been observed at various points in the interior in migration, but seems to breed only in the far north. While descending the Mackenzie in 1904 I saw one near Sans Sault Rapid on June 19. It was flying northward over the tops of the trees which fringed the valley. Probably referring to the present species, Sabine records, under the name Lestris parasiticus, a jaeger which was abundant, though less so than the pomarine, in the islands of the Polar Sea. On Melville Island it was frequently met with, seeking its food along the water courses.’ Ross collected S. longicau- dus at Fort Simpson.° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that Mac- Farlane found it abundant at Fort Anderson and on Franklin Bay, and record a specimen taken at Peel River.“ I have recently exam- ined a specimen obtained at Fort Rae by Frank Russell, and recorded by him.e A specimen collected for MacFarlane by the Eskimo on Anderson River in July, 1865 (the label bearing the inscription “2 eggs”), is still in the National Museum. A mounted specimen 1» the Fort Simpson museum was taken some years ago at Fort Provi- dence. Seale states that this species was abundant along the Arctic coast from Icy Cape to Herschel Island, July to September, 1896./ Reed records two eggs from Baillie ilenal [ Arctic Sea], taken J aly 12, 1901, by H. H. Bodfish : Pagophila alba (Gunn.). Ivory Gull. Parry recorded the ivory gull from Winter Harbor, Melville Island, where the first were observed May 24, 1820." J. C. Ross re- cords it as breeding commonly at Port Bowen, but as rare west of Prince Regent Inlet.‘ Harting records a specimen taken at Assist- ance Harbor in 1851; 4 and McCormick noted the species in Welling- 4@Proc. U. S. Nat.-Mus., XIV, p. 417, 1891. 5 Suppl. to oe Parry’s First Voyage, p. ccvi, 1824. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 289, 1862. @ Water Birds N. A., II, pp. 342, 343, 1884. € Expl. in Far North, p. 255, 1898. f Proce. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1898, p. 131. IN. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 24, 1904. ht Journal First Voyage, p. 178, 1821. ¢ Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. Xxxv, 1835. J Proc. Zool. Soc, London, 1871, p, 122. 1908.] BIRDS. 263 ton Channel as late as September 5, 1852; Richardson reported it breeding on Darnley Bay on August 16, 1848, when the young were nearly fledged.? Rissa tridactyla (Linn.). Kittiwake. Concerning the breeding of this species on Franklin Bay, Richard- son states under date of July 22, 1826: “ The common kittiwake breeds in great numbers on the rocky ledges in this quarter, and their young were already fledged.”° Armstrong reported shooting the species on Prince Albert Land, near Princess Royal Islands, June 9, 1851.4 J.C. Ross states that the kittiwake breeds on the south shore of North Somerset ; © and in Prince Regent Inlet.’ McCormick noted the kitti- wake as common on September 2, 1852, in Wellington Channel.’ Larus hyperboreus Gunn. Glaucous Gull. This beautiful gull is abundant along the Arctic coast in summer, and occurs in small numbers in the interior during migration. In 1903 I saw one, a bird of the year, on the Mackenzie near Roche Trempe-l’eau, October 9. In 1904, while descending the Mackenzie, I saw one near the mouth of Blackwater River, June 9. It was flying northward along the Mackenzie. Parry recorded it first at Winter Harbor on June 3, 1820; and ob- served young in the nest on August 5." J.C. Ross noted the bird as common at Port Bowen in June, 1825, and as breeding commonly on the south shore of North Somerset in July, 1825.‘ Collinson recorded two seen May 31, 1852, near Walker Bay, Prince Albert Land.’ Sutherland records several seen June 6, 1851, near Cape Osborne, North Devon.” Armstrong, in his narrative of the voyage of the Investigator, mentions shooting glaucous gulls off the southern part of Baring Land September 13, 1850; on Prince Albert Land, near Princess Royal Islands, June 9, 1851; and at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, May 31, 1852.’ MacFarlane reported about 20 nests collected in Franklin and Liverpool bays and on islands in the lower part of An- derson River.” Frank Russell records a specimen taken at Herschel @McCormick’s Voyages, II, p. 151, 1884. 5 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 281, 1851. ¢ Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 237, 1828. @Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 347, 1857. €Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 105, 1826. f Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, xxxv, 1835. 9 McCormick’s Voyages, II, p. 146, 1884. Journal First Voyage, pp. 207, 235, 1821. ?Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 103. 1826. J Journ. H. M. S. Enterprise, p. 202. 1889. k Journ. Voy. to Baffin Bay, II, p. 88, 1852. ! Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, pp. 222, 347, 521, 1857. m Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 418, 1891, 2964 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Island August 4, 1894.° Another, taken by him at Fort Rae, Sep- tember 30, 1893, but not recorded, has been examined. Hubert Dar- rell informs me that he observed large gulls with wings entirely white near the base of Kent Peninsula, June, 1902. Ross’s notes on JL. glaucescens, Which he records as occurring on Great Slave Lake, and as having been procured at Fort Simpson,’ probably refer to the present species. Seale states that glaucous gulls were abundant al! along the Arctic coast east to Mackenzie Bay in the late summer of 1896.¢ Reed records a set of 3 eggs, taken on Herschel Island July 1, 1900, by I. O. Stringer.4 Larus leucopterus Faber. Iceland Gull. J. C. Ross states that this gull breeds at Felix Harbor, Boothia.¢ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it has been obtained at Mel- ville Island,’ and that “ MacFarlane procured several sets of the eggs of this species on the Arctic coast in July, 1863, and again in July, 1865.” 9 Reed records eggs taken at Mackenzie Bay, Arctic America, June 18, 1899." Three eggs, taken by Collinson at Cambridge Bay, Victoria Land, are in the British Museum.‘ These are the principal records regarding the occurrence of the bird within the region, and the more westerly of these seem open to question. Larus schistisagus Stejn. Slaty-backed Gull. An adult male taken at Franklin Bay, Mackenzie, June 9, 1901, was identified by Dr. A. K. Fisher, of the Biological Survey, in 1902. This appears to be the only record for the region. Larus argentatus Pontoppidan. Herring Gull. The widely distributed herring gull is abundant throughout the region now under review. In 1901 a few were seen on Athabaska River below the mouth of. La Biche River, May 7. The species was common on the lower river between the mouth of the Clearwater and. Athabaska Lake, May 15 and 16, and on Athabaska Lake in the vicinity of Fort Chipewyan, May 18 to 31, and was noted near the outlet, June 3. Several individuals were seen at Fort Smith, Mackenzie, June 27. It was common on Great Slave Lake about Fort Resolution, and between there and Fort Rae, during the month @ Expl. in Far North, p. 255, 1898. 5 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second series), p. 289, 1862. € Proc. Acad: Nat. Sci. Phila., 1898, p. 131. dN, A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 27, 1904. ¢ Appendix Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XXxXIv, 1835. f Water Birds N. A., Il, p. 218, 1884. 9 Tbid., p. 219, 1884: WN. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 28, 1904. ‘Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus.,. I, p. 221, 1901. 1908.] BIRDS. 265 of July. On July 13, while detained by wind on Loon Island, 50 miles north of Fort Resolution, I visited a breeding colony on a small island a quarter of a mile to the westward. The island was merely a rock about 50 yards in diameter and only 3 or 4 feet out ef water, and was bare except for small patches of grass growing in the crevices. Upon it were nesting about 100 pairs of herring and California gulls, the latter outnumbering the herring gulls two to one. Most of the nests of the two species, which were indistin- guishable after the eggs were hatched, contained young which varied in size from chicks just hatched to birds the size of a teal. Many of the larger young scrambled to the water and swam away, but the greater number sought to conceal themselves in the crevices or beneath tufts of grass. The entire company of old birds fiew about, keeping up a deafening clamor, the herring gulls being much more wary than their smaller relatives. An adult male was col- lected. While ascending Slave River from Fort Resolution to Fort Smith, Mackenzie, August 1 to 3, we noted an occasional bird. In 1903 we observed the herring gull on the Athabaska near Peli- ean River, May 18; between there and Grand Rapid, May 19 and 20; near Little Buffalo River, May 25;-and 50 miles below Fort McMurray, May 29. We saw a few on Athabaska Lake, June 2, 3, and 4; at Fort Smith, Mackenzie, June 15; and on Slave River 50 miles below Fort Smith, June 16, and near Limestone Point, June 17. The species was common on Great Slave Lake near Fort Reso- lution during the latter part of June. Alfred EK. Preble and Merritt Cary noted it commonly on Great Slave Lake between Fort Resolu- tion and Hay River, June 27, and saw a few at Fort Providence, June 2 and 3. They also observed it at Fort Simpson, July 10; found it abundant near the mouth of Nahanni River, July 11 and 19, and noted it near Fort Wrigley, July 20. On their return trip they saw it on the Mackenzie, above Fort Simpson, July 25; on Great Slave Lake, between its outlet and Fort Rae, July 27 and 28; found it common at the delta of the Athabaska, August 4; and noted one at Brulé Rapid, on the Athabaska, August 19. After the division of the party, I frequently observed the species near Fort Resolution during the early part of July, and while crossing the lake to Fort Rae, July 17 to 29. It was an abundant breeder on most of the lakes along the route traversed between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes in August, and greater or less numbers were seen almost daily. While traveling along the south shore of Great Bear Lake, August 28 to September 17, I observed the species nearly every day, and took an immature bird east of Leith Point on August 28. Two young which had not been long on the wing and were still attended by the mother were seen on McVicar Bay, September 266 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. 10. During my stay at Fort Franklin, September 18 to 27, I observed one or more nearly every day, and one was seen near the head of Bear River, September 28. While ascending the Mackenzie I saw one near the Blackwater, October 8; another 10 miles below Fort Wrigley, October 10; and a few daily between Fort Wrigley and Nahanni River, October 11 to 13. In the spring of 1904 large gulls, probably of this species, were first observed near Fort Providence by J. W. Mills, May 4. I did not see any at Fort Simpson until May 24. The species undoubtedly had arrived some time previously, but from its scarcity had been over- looked. It was several times observed during the latter part of the month. While descending the Mackenzie in June, I occasionally noted a few between Forts Simpson and Good Hope, taking one at the mouth of the Blackwater, about 50 miles below Fort Wrigley, June 9. Along the lower Mackenzie and Peel rivers, between Forts Good Hope and McPherson, I saw it daily, June 26 to July 1. While ascending the Mackenzie during the latter part of July, I occasionally observed the species, and it was common on Great Slave Lake, July 31 and August 1. Sabine recorded a specimen of this species killed on a cliff in the North Georgia Islands (Melville Island).* M’Clintock states that the silvery gull breeds at Bellot Strait, where it had eggs June 25, 1859." McCormick took it near Beechey Island, Wellington Channel, September 8, 1852, and July 21, 1853. Armstrong, in his narrative of the voyage of the Znvestigator, states that the species was shot on Prince Albert Land, June 9, 1851; 7% he also noted it at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, May 31, 1852. Saunders records two specimens taken by Doctor Anderson of the Hnterprise on Prince Albert Land./ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was found breeding at Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Anderson. and on the lower Anderson and Horton rivers. The National Muse- um catalogue shows that the species was received also from Great Bear Lake; and a specimen from Fort Resolution taken by Kennicott, June 16 [1860], and one from Big Island, are still in the collection. Hubert Darrell informs me that he observed a large gull with black on the wings, probably this species, on Bathurst Inlet, June 29, 1902. Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cciv, 1824. 6 Voyage of the Fox, p. 290, 1860. € McCormick’s Voyages, II, pp. 157, 84, 1884. @Narr. Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 347, 1857. CMDids sp. 2 elon. / Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XXV, p. 266, 1896. 9 Water Birds N. A., II, p. 238, 1884. 1908.} BIRDS. 267 Larus californicus Lawr. California Gull. This western gull is a common breeder about Great Slave Lake, and has been noted also from the lower Anderson. In 1901 we first noted it at Fort Resolution, Mackenzie, July 8, when several were seen flying about over the lake. They are usually easily distinguished from the herring gulls by their smaller size, dif- ferent cry, and by the greater amount of black on the primaries. The species was abundant about Loon Island, July 11 to 14, where 60 or 70 pairs were nesting on the small adjoining island before re- ferred to. They seemed to lay a little later than the herring gulls, as most of the unhatched eggs were of the present species. Three fine adults and a young one a few days old were collected July 13 and 14. A few were seen at Trout Rock, July 16, and at Fort Rae, July 294. While crossing Great Slave Lake by steamer from Fort Rae to Fort Resolution, July 30, many were observed near Hardisty Island. In 1903 I noted the California gull at Fort Resolution, July 7, and several times among the islands between Fort Resolution and Fort Rae, July 17 to 26. In 1904, while on my return trip, I found it rather common on Great Slave Lake, July 30 and 31. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record eggs taken near Fort Resolu- tion, and specimens of the birds from the same place, and from Fort Simpson and Big Island.*. MacFarlane reported nests found near Fort Anderson, and received specimens with eggs from lower Ander- son River.’ Larus delawarensis Ord. Ring-billed Gull. This species occurs in summer north to Great Slave Lake, where it is one of the rarest of the breeding gulls. While we were descending Athabaska River in 1901 a flock of these gulls was seen at the mouth of Pelican River, 100 miles below Athabaska Landing, on May 9. In 1903 we saw a few at a small slough near Sturgeon River, Alberta, May 12, and several on the Athabaska near Pelican River, May 18. While at Fort Chipewyan we noted a few, June 3 and 4, and we observed the species near Smith Landing, June 10. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary noted two near the Desmarais Islands, July 1, and one at Fort Providence a few days later. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record eggs of the ring-billed gull from Great Slave Lake.“ Russell has recorded specimens taken at Fort Chipewyan in the spring of 1893, and an adult taken by him there has been examined during the preparation of this report. “Water Birds N. A., II, p. 244, 1884. ’Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 418, 1891. € Water Birds N. A., II, p. 247, 1884, 2 Expl. in Far North, p. 255, 1898. 268 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Larus brachyrhynchus Rich. Short-billed Gull. This small gull, originally described from Great Bear Lake, is one of the commonest breeders of its genus from the lower part of Slave River northward to the Arctic coast. In 1901 we first met with this species on Slave River 75 miles below Fort Smith, July 1, when several individuals were seen and one was taken. During the next two days, while following the course of the river to its mouth, we observed the birds in considerable num- bers. We did not note it again until July 16, while sailing among the spruce-covered islands of the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake between Yellowknife Bay and Trout Rock, when we passed through the breeding ground of a large colony. The birds perched freely on the summits of the spruces, and were noisy and familiar. Many young ones, still unable to fly, left the small islands on our approach, and attempted to escape by swimming. to have been killed on Great Slave Lake, May 26, 1826. In his ac- count of his third Arctic journey, he states that this bird breeds on Bear Lake River, where it builds in colonies, sometimes placing 7 or 8 nests on a single tree.’ The following year large flocks arrived at Fort Franklin on May 18.° Kennicott mentions that one was shot by W. L. Hardisty at Fort Resolution, May 18, 1860.4 Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that specimens and eggs were procured at Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Good Hope, Peel River, Fort Anderson, and on the lower Anderson River.¢ Mac- Farlane records that 37 nests with eggs were found near Fort Anderson, and on the lower Anderson River, all being built on trees.f Hubert Darrell informs me that he observed small black-headed gulls, probably referable to this species, on Melville Sound, on the Arctic coast, June 15, 1902. Rhodostethia rosea (Macgil.). Rosy Gull. Though occurring, sometimes abundantly, in the Arctic regions to the eastward and westward, apparently the only record for the region now under review is that of J. C. Ross, who states, under the name- Larus rossii, that it was reported once at Felix Harbor, Boothia./ Although the rosy gull has been known for eighty years, its breed- ing grounds remained undiscovered until 1905. In June of that year the bird was found breeding commonly in the Kolyma Delta, eastern Siberia, by S. A. Buturlin, who describes for the first time its breed- ing habits, eggs, and young.” “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 425, 1831. ’ Arctic Searching Expedition, I, pp. 200, 201, 1851. ¢Tpid., EI, p. £06, [8biz @Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 171, 1869. € Water Birds N. A., II, p. 2638, 1884. fi Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 418, 1891. 9 Appendix Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XxxvI, 1855. ’ This, 1906, pp. 1381-1389; 333-837. | 1908.] BIRDS. ATE Xema sabini (Sab.). Sabine Gull. This small fork-tailed gull has been found breeding at several points on the Arctic coast of Mackenzie, but has not been detected in the interior. Sutherland recorded it from near Beechey *sland, where several were observed June 6, 1851.7 J. C. Ross recorded it from Felix Harbor, and states that it was reported to breed on the west side of Boothia.’ It was recorded from this region by Richard- son, who found it breeding on an island off Point Dalhousie, August 8. 1848. At this time the spotted young were accompanying their parents on the wing. The eggs had been deposited in hollows in the short and scanty mossy turf.° MacFarlane found it breeding on Franklin Bay in June, 1865, and Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway de- scribe eggs collected by him.? MacFarlane states that eggs were obtained by the Eskimo on Liverpool Bay.* Seale states that in 1896 this gull was first seen at Herschel Island on August 28. An egg taken by Collinson at Cambridge Bay, Victoria Land, is in the collection of the British Museum.’ Sterna caspia Pallas. Caspian Tern. The widely distributed Caspian tern occurs in summer in a few localities, notably the deltas of the larger rivers, north to the mouth of the Mackenzie. In 1901 we met with it but once, on July 9, when a single bird was seen flying over the shallow lagoons between the mouth of Slave River and Stone Island, Great Slave Lake. In 1903 we observed it first at the delta of the Athabaska, June 2, when several birds were seen. I frequently noted the species at Fort Resolution, June 20 to July 17, but seldom saw more than one or two at a time. I saw several among the islands of the Northern Arm, between Yellowknife River and Fort Rae, July 25 and 26, and one on Lake Marian, July 31. Richardson, undoubtedly referring to the present species, recorded the “ Great Tern Sterna cayana” from below Harrison Island, near the mouth of the Mackenzie, where he saw it on August 1, 1848." Ross, in 1862, noted the species as rare on Great Slave Lake.?- During the next few years the Smithsonian Institution received a number @ Journ. Voy. to Baffin Bay, II, p. 88, 1852. 5 Appendix Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxxvit, 1835. € Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 262, 1851. @Water Birds N. A., II, p. 272, 1884. € Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 419, 1891. f Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1898, p. 133. I Oates, Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., I, p. 203, 1901. h Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 231, 1851. t Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 289, 1862. Pe, NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. of specimens from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, and Big Island;< skins from these localities are still in the collection. Sterna hirundo Linn. (Common Tern. This widely distributed tern breeds in suitable places throughout the region. It is rather rare north of Great Slave Lake, being largely replaced by the Arctic tern, but occurs with that species in some localities. | In 1901 this species was first seen at the delta of the Athabaska the date of our arrival, May 17, when a number were observed. It was common at the mouth of the Quatre Fourches, near Fort Chipe- wyan, May 23, and a few were seen near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 2. In 1903 we noted it at the delta of the Athabaska, June 2, and saw a few on Rocher River, June 6. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary observed two near Hay River, Great Slave Lake, June 27, and on their return trip observed a few in company with Arctic terns at the mouth of the Athabaska, August 5. I saw a few, associated with Arctic terns, among the islands of the Northern Arm, July 24 and 26. Ross recorded the common tern as being very rare on Great Bear and Great Slave lakes, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.’ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record specimens from Fort Rae, Big Island, and the Arctic coast below Anderson River.¢ Sterna paradisea Briinn. Arctic Tern. This tern is a common breeder in suitable places from lower Slave River northward, replacing the common tern to a great extent north of Great Slave Lake. In 1901 we first observed this bird 50 miles below Fort Smith, June 80, when a number of individuals were seen flying over the river, and one was collected. During the next three days we noted the species frequently between that point and Great Slave Lake, and found it breeding on some low sandy islands in the lower part of the river, July 3. While crossing Great Slave Lake we found it common among the islands. On Loon Island, 50 miles north of Fort Reso- lution, where we were detained by wind, July 11 to 14, about 50 pairs were nesting. At this time most of the eggs were hatched, but the colony raised very few young. Many were killed by the cold storm which kept us from leaving the island, and the jaegers and gulls were frequently seen to swoop down and snatch a young one. A num- ber of the birds, including a young one a few days old which I picked up dead, were preserved. @Water Birds N. A., II, p. 283, 1884. b’ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 289, 1862. ¢ Water Birds N, A., II, p. 297, 1884. H ) 1908.] BIRDS. De > In 1903 we first observed this species on Slave River, 50 miles below Fort Smith, June 16. We found it common between there and Lime- stone Point, June 17: and near the mouth of the river, June 19; and noted several at Fort Resolution, June 20. While on the Mackenzie, Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary found the species common at Fort Providence, June 7 and 8; observed upward of 500 on the Little Lake, near Fort Providence, July 9; and several at Fort Simpson, July 10. On their return journey they noted it commonly between Fort Simpson and Fort. Providence, July 25 and 26; and observed about 50 near the mouth of the Athabaska, August 5. I found it common on Great Slave Lake, especially among the islands of the Northern Arm, when I crossed late in July, and it was abundant on Lake Marian on July 31. In 1904 J. W. Mills first noted this species near Fort Providence May 25. I did not observe the bird during the spring migration, but found it common at the head of the Mackenzie delta, June 30. On July 1, while ascending the Peel to Fort McPherson, I observed sev- eral nesting colonies on its grassy banks, finding about a dozen nests containing incomplete sets of eggs. Several families of Eskimo also traveling along the river were interesting themselves in these nests, doubtless corsidering the eggs an agreeable change from a diet of fish and putrid geese. While at Fort McPherson on July 11 and 16 I noted a few individuals, probably stragglers from these breeding colonies. | | Sabine recorded two immature birds which were killed July 8, probably at Winter Harbor, Melville Island.* Richardson gives a description of one killed at Great Bear Lake [probably at Fort Franklin] June 7, 1826.” J. C. Ross states that this species is rare on the east and west coasts of Boothia.© McCormick records it from _ Wellington Channel as late as August 28, 1852.7 Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that the species has been found occurring in abun- dance at Fort Resolution; Fort Rae; Big Island; Fort Simpson; Peel River; Fort Anderson; Franklin Bay; Rendezvous Lake; and other localities. Seale states that the species was abundant at Herschel Island on August 27, 1896.7 ; 4Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. ccr1I, 1824. 6 Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 414, 1831. _€ Appendix Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XXXIII, 1835. @ McCormick’s Voyages, II, p. 137, 1884. € Water Birds N. A., II, p. 300, 1884. : f Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1898, p. 133. 44131—No. 27—08——18 274 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Hydrochelidon nigra surinamensis (Gmel.). Black Tern. The black tern occurs commonly in suitable places north to Great Slave Lake. The marshes at the delta of Slave River appear to mark its northern limit of abundance in this region. In the spring of 1901 it was first met with on the lower part of Athabaska River May 17, when we saw large numbers flying to and from the numerous marshes which cover the face of the country back of the fringe of trees which borders the river. We next noted the species about 50 miles below Fort Smith July 30, and during the next three days found it numerous along the lower part of Slave River, where the many outlying marshes afford a congenial habitat. In 1903 we found this species common on the lower Athabaska, May 31 to June 2; and noted it on Slave River near the mouth of the. Peace, June 9; and between there and Smith Landing, June 10. Ross listed this tern as rare on Great Slave Lake.“ Baird, Brewer, | and Ridgway recorded specimens from Fort Resolution.?2 A skin | collected there by Kennicott is still in the National Museum. Fulmarus glacialis (Linn.). Fulmar. Armstrong noted the fulmar petrel near the southern extremity | of Baring Land, where it was observed September 7, 1850. M’Clin- | tock observed it at Brentford Bay August 10, 1859.4. McCormick | noted the species in Wellington Channel, September 2, 1852.° Phalacrocorax auritus (Lesson). Double-crested Cormorant. This cormorant breeds commonly on some of the lakes in the Saskatchewan and upper Churchill basins, and a few stragglers have been taken about Great Slave Lake. Ross recorded it as being rare on Great Slave Lake; and the catalogue of the birds in the National | Museum contains the record of a specimen (No. 20139) taken at Big | Island by John Reid. Macoun, on the authority of Dippie, records | it as breeding on Buffalo Lake, Alberta.’ Seton records it as breed- | ing in large numbers at Isle a la Crosse.” Capt. J. W. Mills informed me that one was shot at Willow River, near Fort Providence, about October 10, 1901. This was the | only instance of the occurrence of the species known to the natives” who saw the specimen. @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 289; 1862: 6 Water Birds N. A., II, p. 320, 1884. ¢ Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 213, 1857. °@ Voyage of the Fox, p. 300, 1860. € McCormick’s Voyages, II, p. 146, 1884. f Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 288, 1862. 9 Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 66, 1900. ’ Auk, XXV, p. 69, 1908. 1908.] BIRDS. 2975 Pelecanus erythrorhynchos Gmel. American White Pelican. In the spring of 1901 we saw about ten pairs at the mouth of Pelican River, 100 miles below Athabaska Landing, May 9. The birds are said to be usually found at this point and to nest among the rapids which occur on the lower part of Pelican River. @Bxpl. in Far North, p. 257, 1898... (Specimen probably from Yellowknife River. ) €N. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 79, 1904. f Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 106, 1826. 9 Journ. Voyage to Baffin Bay, II, p. 189, 1852. % Stray Leaves from Arctic Journal, p, 121, 1852. 1908.] BIRDS. 293 and had saved the specimen for me. Its occurrence was considered very unusual. On my return I obtained a second specimen, which had been killed near the post about June 30. Another, killed by a native near Fort Providence in the spring, was obtained from Joseph Hodg- son of that post. Another individual, a male, was observed on the Mackenzie near Fort Providence, on June 21, by J. W. Mills. This is the common eider on the Arctic coast of Mackenzie, replac- ing S. mollissima, according to Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway, as far east at least as the mouth of the Coppermine.¢ Richardson, on Au- gust 11, 1848, observed eider ducks, probably of this species, near Cape Bathurst. They were assembled in immense flocks and were migrating westward along the coast.’ Probably referring to the present bird, Armstrong speaks of seeing many eiders, which he sup- posed to belong to the common species, on Banks Land near Prince Alfred Cape, August 19, 1851.° MacFarlane found it breeding in immense numbers on Franklin Bay, and also notes it as abundant on Liverpool Bay.? Though essentially maritime, the Pacific eider has been taken in the interior on a few occasions previous to our visits. Ross, in 1862, summed up the evidence relating to this point as follows: “ A male specimen of this very rare bird was shot by me at Fort Resolution in 1858, and a female was obtained by Mr. Alex. McKenzie in 1861 at the same place.” ¢ A specimen collected at Fort Resolution by McKenzie, probably the one referred to by Ross, is still in the National Museum. Somateria spectabilis (Linn.). King Eider. This eider is rather common on the coast and islands of the Arctic Sea, and our observations show that it migrates through the interior in small numbers. On October 25, 1903, a few days after my arrival at Fort Simpson, a flock of 4 was seen on the Mackenzie, and a female was secured. The birds were quietly resting on the water and allow- ing themselves to be carried down stream by the ice-laden current. In the summer of 1904, on my return trip, I obtained the skin of an adult male from James MacKinley, of Fort Resolution. It had been killed by a native during the spring, somewhere on Great Slave Lake to the eastward of that post, and was considered a great rarity. These seem to be the first records of its occurrence in the interior of this region. Sabine stated that the king eider was abundant on the North Georgia Islands (referring more particularly to Melville Island), @Water Birds N. A., II, p. 81, 1884. 5 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 269, 1851. ¢ Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 391, 1857. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 422, 1891. €Nat. Hist. Rey., II (second ser.), p. 288, 1862. 294 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. where it nested on the ground in the neighborhood of fresh-water ponds. J: C. Ross recorded it from Port Bowen, where it arrived abundantly in early June, 1825.2 M’Clintock noted it at Port Ken- nedy;° M’Dougall from Winter Harbor;* and McCormick from Beechey Island. Armstrong observed many near Prince Alfred Cape, Banks Land, August 19, 1851, and noted the arrival of the bird at Mercy Bay about June 1, 1852.’ MacFarlane found it numerous on Franklin Bay, and also received eggs from the Eskimo of Liver- pool Bay. Hubert Darrell informs me that he observed king eiders on Melville Sound on June 10, 1902. Oidemia deglandi Bonap. White-winged Scoter. This species, the ‘big black duck’ of the residents, occurs on nearly all the lakes throughout the wooded portion of the region. In 1901 we saw a number on Athabaska Lake near Fort Chipewyan May 24, and found it common on the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake July 15 and 16. In 1903 we first noted this bird on Athabaska Lake June 2, and saw several on Rocher River June 6, and near Smith Landing June 10. Several were seen on Great Slave Lake near Fort Resolution, June 23. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary noted it on the way to Hay River June 27, and between there and Desmarais Islands July 1; saw a number between Desmarais Islands and Fort Providence July 2; and found it common below the mouth of Nahanni River July 19. On their return trip they noted it near Slave Point, Great Slave Lake, July 27, and saw one at Athabaska Landing September 4, and a few on Lily Lake September 24. While crossing Great Slave Lake to Fort Rae I found it common among the islands of the Northern Arm July 24 to 26. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted the species on lower Grandin River August 1, and on Sarahk Lake August 7. A few were seen on Great Bear Lake to the eastward of Leith Point August 28; I noted it also near McVicar Bay September 9; east of Manito Islands September 13 and 14, collecting one on the latter date; and near the outlet of Great Bear Lake September 17. While ascending the Mackenzie I noted the species 10 miles below Gravel River October 4; below Roche Trempe-l’eau October 8 and 9; near Fort Wrigley October 10; and several times between there and Nahanni River October 12 to 14. Some of these later birds were wounded individuals which could not @Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. ccvi, 1824. >Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 106, 1826. € Voyage of the Fox, p. 292, 1860. d Voyage of the Resolute, p. 259, 1857. € McCormick’s Voyages, II, p. 90, 1884. 7 Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, pp. 391, 522, 1857. 9 Proc, U. S, Nat. Mus., XIV, p, 422, 1891. Se — 1908.] BIRDS. 295 migrate, but some were strong on the wing aud evidently were re- maining voluntarily. In the spring of 1904 I first noted this bird at Fort Simpson May 18, when I saw a small flock on the river. The species was common the next day and was several times observed during the remainder of the month. It was most abundant in some small lakes near the post, where the natives reported that it breeds. While descending the Mackenzie in June I noted it nearly every day. Several were seen near Fort McPherson July 15, and a few on my return trip up the Mackenzie late in July. MacFarlane found the white-winged scoter breeding throughout the Anderson River region, both in the wooded country and on the ‘Barrens’.* Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was taken at Fort Resolution by Kennicott;’ and the bird catalogue of the Na- tional Museum shows that specimens were received also from Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Fort Norman. Salvadori records speci- mens from Big Island and Fort Simpson.° Macoun states that Spreadborough found it common on Lake Ste. Anne, near Edmon- ton, June 9, 1898.7 Seton records the species from Artillery Lake.¢ Oidemia perspicillata (Linn.). Surf Scoter. This widely distributed species, usually called ‘ black duck’ by the inhabitants, breeds commonly throughout the wooded portion of the region north of Athabaska Lake, and to some extent north of the limit of trees. In the spring of 1901 we first noted the surf scoter on the Atha- baska below Fort McMurray, where a few were seen on May 14. While we were coasting along the shore of the lake from Fort Chipewyan to Point La Brie, May 25, we saw numbers, and while returning, May 31, we again noted the species. The birds were rather common on the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake July 15 and 16, and a number were seen near Fort Rae July 22 In 1903 we first saw this scoter on the Athabaska, above Grand Rapid, May 20. We next noticed it near Smith Landing June. 10, and saw numbers on Slave River between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution, Mackenzie, June 16, 18, and 19. My brother and Cary noted the species at Hay River, June 28, and saw upward of 500 on the lake between Hay River and Desmarais Islands, July 1. On July 2 they saw immense flocks, aggregating thousands of individuals, on the upper part of Mackenzie River, between the lake and Fort Provi- dence. They noted the species also at Fort Providence, July 2 and 7, “Prec U.S. Nat. Mus; Srv, p. 422, 1891, b Water Birds N. A., II, p. 96, 1884. € Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., X XVII, p. 410, 1895. @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 110, 1900. € Auk, XXV, p. 69, 1908. 296 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. and on the way to Fort Simpson, July 9. On the return trip they again found it common near Fort Providence, July 26. After the division of the party I saw the bird daily on the lake near Fort Reso- lution during the latter part of June and the first half of July, and while crossing the lake to the northward noted it nearly every day, finding it especially common among the islands of the Northern Arm, July 23 to 26, and on Lake Marian, July 31. I next noted it among the small lakes north of Lake St. Croix, August 14, when the young were nearly full grown. On most of the lakes from this point north- ward to Great Bear Lake it was common, and numbers were noted nearly every day. A flock containing several hundred molting indi- viduals was seen on Lake Hardisty, August 15, but generally the species was observed in small flocks or family parties. While travel- ing along the southern shore of Great Bear Lake I saw several near MecVicar Bay, September 9 and 10, and noted the species almost daily between there and the outlet of the lake. I took a specimen near Manito Islands, September 14, and saw a few near Fort Franklin on September 17, the latest record for Great Bear Lake. While ascend- ing the Mackenzie I noted the species nearly every day between Fort Norman and Fort Wrigley, October 2 to 11, and saw a few between Fort Wrigley and a point about 50 miles below Fort Simpson, Octo- ber 12 to 16. By this time the ice had commenced to run in earnest and most of the ducks able to fly had departed, while nearly all the wounded ones had succumbed to the cold or their enemies. In the spring of 1904 I first saw this scoter at Fort Simpson, May 13, and on May 18 saw a large flock on the river. I found it common in the vicinity during the remainder of the month, and while descend- ing the Mackenzie noted it between Fort Simpson and Nahanni River, June 2 and 3; near the mouth of the Blackwater, June 9, collecting a male; and between Forts Good Hope and McPherson, June 25 to July 1, noting it daily on the latter stretch. At Fort McPherson I saw the species on July 5, 8, and 16; and on my return trip observed it 50 miles below Fort Good Hope, July 18; near Nahanni River, July 23; and near Fort Providence, July 28. I saw numbers on Great Slave Lake, between Desmarais Islands and Hardisty Island, July 30, and on the lower Slave, August 2. Richardson describes a male killed at Fort Franklin: st ches lists it as occurring abundantly throughout the Mackenzie River region north to Peel River, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson; ? Baird. Brewer, and Ridgway state that MacFarlane found it breed- ing at Fort Anderson; on the lower Anderson River; and on Frank- lin Yay; and that it was reported from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and La Pierre House.° ?Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 449, 1831. ONat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 288, 1862. ¢ Water Birds N. A., II, pp. 102, 103, 1884. 1908, } BIRDS. 297 Erismatura jamaicensis (Gmel.). Ruddy Duck. This is one of the rarest of the ducks in the Athabaska region, and has not been detected to the northward of Great Slave Lake. We did not observe it during our trips through the country. In the museum of the Hudson’s Bay Company at Fort Simpson are three specimens taken some years ago at Fort Providence. This species was first recorded from the region by Ross, who lists it as occurring north to Great Slave Lake, and as rare.t Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was found breeding near Fort Resolution by Kennicott in June, and at the same place by Lockhart, who took its eggs in July.” A male collected June 5, 1860, by Kenni- cott is now in the National Museum, and the bird catalogue records a specimen from Fort Rae. Macoun, on the authority of Dippie, says that it breeds on Buffalo Lake, Burnt Lake, and many other lakes in Alberta.¢ Chen hyperborea (Pall.). Lesser Snow Goose. The snow geese, universally called in the north ‘white wavies,’ pass through the region now under review in great numbers in spring and fall, while migrating to and from their summer homes on the shores and islands of the Arctic Sea. Since their breeding grounds are not ready for occupancy until well into the summer, their spring movement northward is correspondingly late in comparison with the Canada goose, which breeds at lower latitudes.?. During their semi- annual visits they are much sought after by the inhabitants, and, bemg killed with comparative ease, are procured in great numbers, to be frozen or salted for future use. The beauty of the birds and their importance as food to northern travelers have caused them to be frequently mentioned in narratives of Arctic journeys. The valleys of the Athabaska and the Mackenzie lie in the path of migration of great numbers of snow geese of both the eastern and western forms. The rivers themselves, however, are seldom followed by the birds, except for short distances, since their general courses trend somewhat toward the west, while the lines of flight of the geese are usually nearly due north and south. Flocks of snow geese, leaving in spring the marshes at the delta of the Peace and Atha- baska, a favorite stopping place, strike nearly due northward over the rocky hills, probably not again alighting until several hundred *Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 288, 1862. 5 Water Birds N. A., II, 108, 1884. €Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 113, 1900. 4 According to Ross, the three forms of snow geese pass through the Great Slave Lake region in the following order: First the lesser snow goose; then Chen rossi, and lastly the form now known as nivalis. Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p, 286, 1862. 298 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. miles nearer their breeding grounds. Thus they press onward, close on the heels of retreating winter, feeding, when suitable open water is denied them, on the various berries which have remained on the stems through the winter. Pursuing the course of the river northward, the next favorite goose ground is the delta of the Slave, where great numbers stop both spring and fall for rest and food. The low country about the outlet of Great Slave Lake is also a favorite resort. Leaving this point, the geese in spring take a general northerly course, which suggests that their breeding grounds are north of the east end of Great Bear Lake. Most of the specimens which I have examined were taken on this line of flight. Most of them prove referable to hyperborea, but | an occasional large specimen must be referred to névalis. It thus appears that this line of flight hes not far west of the imaginary line dividing the two races, which in this region may be roughly represented by the longitude of 118°. It must be understood that much more material is needed to settle definitely this question, but for present purposes the records may be divided in accordance with this plan. 3 | It seems desirable to place on record the measurements of a few | prepared specimens, as well as those of a number of birds which I was | able to examine hastily, but could not preserve. » An adult male taken | on Great Bear Lake, east of Leith Point, September 7, 1903, measured | as follows: Wing 422 mm., exposed culmen 60 mm. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus, XIV, p. 423: 180i. ¢ Expl. in Far North, p. 81, 1898. @Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 157, 1904. | { | 1908. ] BIRDS. 308 Mackenzie near Roche Trempe-l’eau, where a large flock was seen flying southward on October 9. An immature bird, taken at Willow River, near Fort Providence, about the last of September, 1903, and obtained at Fort Simpson in a frozen state, was preserved. In the spring of 1904 I first saw this species at Fort Simpson on May 11, noting five individuals. Several flocks were seen passing on the following day. While ascending the Mackenzie on my return trip I saw a smfll flock a short distance above Fort Wrigley, July 23. They were molting their wing quills and took to the woods on the approach of the steamer. In all probability they had nested in the vicinity. The white-fronted goose was apparently first recorded from the region by Richardson, who refers to a specimen taken at Fort Enter- prise May 17 [1821].* Thomas Simpson, during his journey along the Arctic coast, observed numbers breeding on the borders of the swamps and ponds near the mouth of Coppermine River.’ Doctor Rae shot the species on Point Lockyer, Coronation Gulf, May 31, 1851.° Ross listed it as occurring commonly in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.? Kennicott noted its arrival at Fort Resolution on May 7, 1860.¢ In notes sent to Professor Baird, MacFarlane noted its arrival at Fort Anderson on May 16, 1864, and May 17, 1865. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that MacFarlane found it breeding abundantly on the Lower Anderson, and on the coast and islands of the Arctic Sea [Franklin Bay];/ and MacFarlane records the same facts, with many additional particulars regarding the nesting. On July 5, 1864, while his party was returning across the ‘ Barrens’ from Franklin Bay to Fort Anderson, 30 molting ganders, most of which were captured, were observed on a small lake Salvadori lists a specimen taken on the Arctic coast east of Fort Anderson 3" and the bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Simpson; Franklin Bay; Fort. Anderson; Liver- pool Bay; and Fort Resolution; one from the latter locality, col- lected by Kennicott, May 24, 1860, is still in the collection. War- burton Pike observed the ‘grey wavey’ breeding in the marshes along Back River above Lake Beechey on July 18, 1890;* and “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 466, 1831. 5 Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 262, 1843. € Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc., XXII, p. 80, 1852. @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 286, 1862. € Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 170, 1869. if Water Birds N. A., I, p. 450, 1884. 7Proec. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 423, 1891. i Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., X XVII, p. 97, 1895. *Barren Ground of Northern Canada, p. 183, 1892. 304 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Macoun records that a specimen was shot on Red Deer River, Al- berta, September 12, 1896, by Dippie.t. Reed records eggs taken on an island in the delta of the Mackenzie June 10, 1899, by I. O. Stringer.” Seton noted the bird on Aylmer Lake, August 15, 1907.° Branta canadensis (Linn.). Canada Goose. This wide-ranging species breeds in: suitable places throughout the wooded portion of the region and constitutes an important article of food of the inhabitants. It is the earliest goose to arrive in spring, and its advent marks a welcome break in the monotonous winter bill of fare. Though associating with the smaller Hutchins goose during the latter part of the migrating season, it usually arrives before that form. The records of spring arrival of ‘ geese’ or ‘Canada geese’ refer almost exclusively to this species, the others being designated by different names. In 1901 we observed migrating flocks at Sturgeon River, Alberta, May 1; on the Athabaska, 50 miles below Athabaska Landing, May 7; and on the lower Athabaska May 17. While at our various camps in the vicinity of Fort Chipewyan, May 18 to June 5, we occasionally saw small flocks, and we started a very large one on the Quatre Fourches marsh May 23. While descending Slave River we saw a pair a short distance above Smith Landing June 13, and observed small flocks at Smith Landing June 16 and 17, and at Fort Smith June 19. While on our way to Great Slave Lake we saw several females with young the size of teals on the lower Slave on July 3. Later we saw small flocks at Fort Resolution July 8, and at the mouth of Slave River July 9. When we were ascending the Atha- baska on our return trip a small flock was seen below Grand Rapids August 20. | In the spring of 1903 we first noted the Canada goose on the Atha- baska, 50 miles below Athabaska Landing, on May 17, noting a small flock. We noted a few on the lower Athabaska May 31, and several near the mouth of the river June 1. We saw it next on Slave River, near Smith Landing, June 10. Small flocks were seen on lower Slave River on June 17 and 19, and a few at Fort Resolution June 22, 23, and 24. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I observed it on but one occasion, noting a small flock just south of MacTavish Bay on August 24. In the spring of 1904 the first goose was reported at Fort Simpson April 22, and the next April 26. The species was common by May 3, and large flocks passed northward daily from this date on. While @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 118, 1900. ON. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 84, 1904. ¢ Auk, XXV, p. 70, 1908. 1908.] BIRDS. | 305 we were descending the Mackenzie in June small flocks referred to this form were seen near Roche Trempe-l’eau June 8, and near Sans Sault Rapid June 19. From information mainly compiled from the journals of the traders Richardson gave the approximate dates of the arrival of this species at several points in the region as follows: Athabaska Lake, April 20 to 25; Great Slave Lake, May 1 to 6; Fort Enterprise, May 12 to 20.¢. Frankln recorded its arrival at Fort Chipewyan on April 8, 1820.2. At Fort Confidence Thomas Simpson noted the first Canada goose May 15, 1838,° while during the previous autumn the species had been last seen at the same place on September 25.4 Re- ferring mainly to this form, Richardson says: “ The most northern localities in which we observed them were the channels between the alluvial islands which form the delta of the Mackenzie.”¢ In the following spring (1849) he observed the first one near Fort Franklin on May 11./ Kennicott took its eggs at Fort Resolution May 19, 1860.2 Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was found breeding at Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and among the moun- tains west of the lower Mackenzie." MacFarlane speaks of it as follows: This well-known goose breeds throughout the entire wooded region of the Mackenzie Basin. Nests were discovered in the vicinity of Fort Anderson and to the borders of the forest on the east and west sides of the river of that name, but none were met with in the Barrens proper, nor on the Arctic coast. Sev- eral deserted hawks’ nests on trees were found occupied by incubating female birds of this species.? Tn notes sent to Professor Baird, MacFarlane noted its arrival at Fort Anderson on May 15, 1864, and May 17, 1865. At Fort Simpson McConnell noted its arrival on May 1, 1888.) Russell gives the dates of arrival at Fort Simpson from 1881 to 1894 (inclusive, excepting 1891). The average date is April 28." Macoun states that Spread- borough found the species breeding at Henry House, Athabaska Pass, in 1898.’ J. Alden Loring reported seeing several flocks on Fishing Lake, near Jasper House, Alberta, in the early autumn of 1895. In i896 he saw a pair at Whitemud Lake, about 135 miles west of Ed- 4 Appendix Parry’s Second Voyage, p. 363, 1825 (1827). 5 Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 144, 1823. © Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, }). 241, 1843. dThbid., p. 198, 1843. € Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 320, 1851. f Ibid., II, p. 106, 1851. 9 Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 171, 1869. hk Water Birds N. A., I, p. 464, 1884. * Proc. U. S: Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 424, 1891: j Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Sury., IV (new ser.), p. S6D, 1891. k Expl. in Far North, p. 258, 1898. ’ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 118, 1900. 44131— No. 27—_08——20 305 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [ No. 27. monten, on June 8, and while returning to Edmonton saw large flocks about Lake Ste. Anne on November 3, 4, and 5. A skin referable to this species, collected by B. R. Ross at ie Simpson, May 13, 1860, is now in the National Museum. It is labeled ‘Bernicla Barnstoni, and is in all probability the type of that nom- inal species. The spring dates of arrival of this species at Lac du Brochet Post, Reindeer Lake, as observed by J. Hourston for the years 1874 to 1889, inclusive, are incorporated in a table given on page 22. The spring dates of arrival at Fort Chipewyan, for a num- ber of years, appear in a table on page 23. Branta canadensis hutchinsi (Rich.). Hutchins Goose. This form breeds mainly in the Barren Grounds, associating in migration to a considerable extent with B. canadensis. A flock of about 30 was seen on the Athabaska, 50 miles below Fort McMurray, May 15, 1901. A number of small geese, probably referable to this form, were seen among flocks of Canada geese near Fort Chipewyan on May 23, and at Smith Landing on June 16 of the same year. In 1903 I first met with this species on the shores of Great Bear Lake east of Leith Point, where a few were noted August 29, and a large flock was seen August 30. They had alighted on the shore near our camp to feed on the berries of X'mpetrum nigrum, which grew there in great luxuriance. Two were shot, but were not preserved. One, a male, had 16 tail feathers and wings measuring 445 mm.; the other - was slightly smaller. Small flocks were seen near McVicar Bay on September 10 and 11. The species was last noted on the Mackenzie 20 miles above Fort Wrigley October 12, when a single bird, identified by its small size, was observed. In 1904, though it was probably present among flocks of Canada geese seen late in May, this form was positively identified only on the lower Mackenzie. A small flock, comprising two or three family parties, was seen a short distance below the site of old Fort Good Hope June 28, and an adult male and downy young were taken. Several adults referred to the same form were seen on the lower Mac- kenzie and Peel rivers June 30 and July 1. At Fort McPherson I was informed that the birds had arrived there on May 11. J. C. Ross recorded this goose from Felix Harbor, Boothia, where it arrived about the middle of June and bred commonly.* Thomas Simpson noted it at Fort Confidence on May 17, 1838;? the last had been seen near Cape McDonnel on September 25 of the previous year. Richardson states that many were seen near Bloody Fall, 4 App. to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xii, 1835. 5 Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 241, 1848. ¢ Ibid., p. 198, 1848. 1908. ] BIRDS. B07 Coppermine River, September 5, 1848." Baird, Brewer, and Ridg- way record specimens from Fort Resolution, Big Island, Fort Simp- son, Anderson River, and Franklin Bay.’ MacFarlane describes the nesting of this bird on the lower Anderson, and on the shores and islands of the Arctic Sea [Franklin Bay].° A skin taken by him on Franklin Bay, June 5, 1864, and labeled as having been taken with. three eggs, is still in the National Museum. King, probably referring to this form, records geese from Lake Pelly, Back River, where they commenced to migrate southward on September 4.7 J. W. Tyrrell noted many broods of a small gray goose, undoubtedly this form, on the upper Thelon River in July, 1900. Geese, undoubtedly referable to this form, were seen by Hubert Darrell on Melville Sound July 9, 1902. Oates records two eggs taken by Collinson at Cambridge Bay, Victoria Land.’ Branta bernicla glaucogastra (Brehm). White-bellied Brant. The eastern brant, as nearly as can be determined by migration and breeding records, inhabits the islands bordering the Gulf of Boothia, Prince Regent Inlet, and Wellington Channel, within this area apparently not breeding south of latitude 74°, and being the only goose which penetrates north to that point. There seems to be no definite record of brant west of Cornwallis Island until Melville Island is reached, the birds of which seem properly referable to the western form. | J. C. Ross states that the brent goose was abundant at Felix “Harbor in migration, but did not breed, and that it was common, probably breeding, at Fury Point.2 Sutherland recorded it as com- mon and probably breeding at Assistance Bay, July 7, 1851." M’Dougall reported it from Beechey Island, June 17, 1854;' and there are many other records for Wellington Channel. Belcher found brent geese common June 19, 1853, near the extreme northern part of North Devon, near latitude 77°, longitude 95°./ Branta nigricans (Lawr.). Black Brant. The black brant inhabits the Arctic coast east at least to Franklin Bay, and northeastwardly on the islands. Judging by what has 4 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 318, 1851. 6 Water Birds N. A., I, p. 466, 1884. © Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 424, 1891. @Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 77, 1836. ¢ Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada) for 1900-1901, p. 122, 1902. i Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., II, p. 152, 1902. 9 App. Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xu, 1835. ’ Journ. Voyage to Baffin Bay, p. 203, 1835. 7 Voyage of the Resolute, p. 421, 1857. j Last of Arctic Voyages, I, p. 315, 1855. 308 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. been recorded concerning their migration route, it is reasonably cer- tain that the brent geese which visit Banks Land and Melville Islands are of this species. Though keeping strictly to the seacoast east of the Mackenzie during migration, many of the flocks (probably all the eastern breeding birds) strike across Alaska from near the mouth of the Mackenzie to the north Pacific. Very little is known regarding the boundaries of the breeding ranges of this and the preceding species, but it is probable that the following records refer to B. nigricans. Sabine states that brent geese breed in great numbers on the islands of the Polar Sea,* referring particularly to Melville Island, since Fisher in his account of the same expedition states that many were seen near Liddon Gulf (and elsewhere) in June, 1820.2 Armstrong records large numbers of brent geese seen on Banks Land, near Prince Alfred Cape, August 19, 1851.¢ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that— Mr. MacFarlane found it breeding in abundance on islands northeast of the mouth of Anderson River, in Liverpool Bay, on the Arctic coast, on Franklin Bay, on various other parts of the coast, and especially in regions west of Anderson River.‘ Salvadori records a skin from Liverpool Bay, collected by Mac- Farlane.e Reed records eggs from Cape Bathurst, taken June 22, 1901, by H. H. Bodfish./ 7 Richardson observed * brent geese’, undoubtedly of this species, near Cape Bathurst on August 11, 1848, and refers to the circum; stances as follows: The eider ducks had now assembled in immense fiocks and with the brent geese were migrating to the westward. Both these waterfowl follow the coast line in their migrations. * * * The brents are not seen inland to the east- ward of Peel’s River.9 In the same work Richardson published extracts from a letter from Mr. Murray, describing a black goose which regularly passed through the Yukon Valley in migration, the description plainly referring to this species. A few of the birds were said to pass down Peel River, “but they are more abundant on the Yukon.” ” 4 Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. ccvil, 1824. ’ Journal Voyage of Discovery, p. 223, 1821. ¢ Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 391, 1857. d Water Birds N. A., I, p. 474, 1884. These records are mainly from Eskimo collecting, since MacFarlane visited the coast in summer only at Franklin Bay. € Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XX VII, p. 124, 1895. iN. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 86, 1904. 9 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 269, 1851. hTbid., II, p. 111, 1851. : 1908.] BIRDS. 309 As confirming this evidence that the bird uses a portion of the valley of the Yukon as a migration route, the following paragraph by Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway is of interest : Mr. Kennicott, in a note dated Fort Yukon, May 19, refers to procuring three specimens of this bird, known in that region as the ‘Eskimo Goose’. He states that it arrives there the latest of all the birds, and after nearly all the other Geese have passed. It flies in large flocks, and very rapidly. The three specimens were the first noticed that season, and the only ones killed, although two dozen or more ficcks of from 25 to 50 were seen in all; but in no comparison, in point of numbers, with the other four species. This bird is said to pass La Pierre House in immense numbers both in spring and fall. While at Fort McPherson in the summer of 1904, I learned that large numbers of ‘husky or black geese’ had passed down Peel River during the latter part of May, the first having been observed about May 17. Olor columbianus (Ord). Whistling Swan. Formerly abundant, this species now passes through the region in spring and fall in small numbers, apparently breeding only in the far north. While we were crossing Athabaska Lake from the delta of the Athabaska to Fort Chipewyan during the night of May 17, 1901, we several times heard the loud whistling notes of these birds. They were again heard near Fort Chipewyan during the nights of May 21 and 26. In 1903 I first noted this fine species on Great Bear Lake, near Manito Islands, September 15, when its soft notes were heard from a group of low islands at some distance offshore, and a few tracks on the sandy beach showed where the great birds had been feeding. Its notes were again heard among some sandy islands in the Mackenzie, 15 miles above Gravel River, on October 6. In the spring of 1904 two individuals were seen on the Mackenzie near Fort Simpson early on the morning of May 5. While the birds were still abundant swan skins formed an impor- tant article of trade. I was told that sixty or seventy years ago about 500 were annually traded at the Hudson’s Bay Company post at Isle a la Crosse, and that an annual average of 300 skins was obtained at Fort Anderson during the five years of its existence. MacFarlane states that between 1853 and 1877 the Hudson’s Bay Company sold a total of 17,671 swan skins. The number sold an- nually ranged from 1,312 in 1854 to 122 in 1877. From 1858 to 1884, inclusive, Athabasca district turned out 2,705 swan skins, nearly all of them from Fort Chipewyan. Mackenzie River district, according to a statement in my possession, supplied 2,500 skins from 1863 to 1883. From 1862 to 1877 Fort Resolution, Great Slave Lake, contributed 795 thereof. For 4@Water Birds N. A., I, p. 473, 1884. 310 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. 1889 Athabasca traded but 33, as against 251 skins in 1853. In 1889 and 1890 Isle 4 la Crosse, headquarters of English River district, sent out two skins for each outfit. The rapid decrease in numbers of this magnificent bird is well illustrated by these figures. Under the name Anas cygnus, Sabine, probably referring to the whistling swan, says: “ Breeds in the North Georgia Islands, but is by no means numerous, and a single specimen only was obtained.” ® Ross listed the species as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast and as having been collected at Fort Simp- son.° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that MacFarlane found it breeding in considerable numbers in the vicinity of Fort Anderson, where eggs were found from the middle of June to the last of July. Nests were found also on islands in Franklin Bay and in. other parts of the Arctic Sea. The above authors also record specimens taken at Big Island, and on Porcupine, Anderson, and Swan rivers, and islands in Franklin Bay.“ Hanbury noted the first swan of the sea- son on June 5, 1902, near the base of Kent Peninsula.e Reed records a nest found on an island near the mouth of the Mackenzie by I. O. Stringer.’ Oates records an egg taken by Collinson at Cambridge Bay.9 Olor buccinator (Rich.). Trumpeter Swan. A more southern breeder than QO. columbianus, this species also nests far to the north. Richardson states that Rae shot one on Frank- ln Bay in the summer of 1848." Ross listed it as having been col- lected at Fort Simpson; ° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record speci- mens from Fort Rae and Big Island, and state that MacFarlane found it breeding on the lower Anderson River, in the Barren Grounds, and on islands in Franklin Bay.’ The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that the species was received also from Fort Resolu- tion; Kennicott took it at that place on May 23, 1860.’ Oates lists an ego in the collection of the British Museum from Fort Rae.” “Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XXVIII, p. 754, 1905. Both species of swans are prob- ably included in these statements. ’ Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. ccvi1, 1824. © Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 286, 1862. @ Water Birds N. A., I, pp. 429, 480, 1884. € Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 158, 1904. iN. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 88, 1904. 9 Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., II, p. 189, 1902. hk Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 275, 1851. 4 Water Birds N. A., I, p. 433, 1884. j Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 172, 1869. k Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., II, p. 140, 1902. 1908.] - 5 BIRDS. Set Botaurus lentiginosus (Montag.). American Bittern. This is a rather common summer inhabitant of the marshes of this region north to Great Slave Lake. We saw one at the mouth of the Athabaska May 17, 1901, and found the species common on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipewyan, May 23 and 24. Its notes were heard a few miles west of Fort Chipewyan, May 31, and 25 miles below Peace River, June 12 and 13. A single bird was seen near Smith Landing June 17, and another in the marsh near Fort Smith June 20. In 1903 we heard the notes of this bird on many occasions while passing the marshes of the lower Athabaska, May 31 and June 1, and we again noted the bird on Rocher River, June 6 to 8. The species was reported common in the marshes near Hay River, where my brother and Cary saw one on June 28. On their return trip they saw one at Pelican Portage, August 25, and one at Lily Lake, Sep- tember 24. On May 6, 1904, the notes of this species were heard at Willow River, near Fort Providence, by H. W. Jones. He reported the bird common there, and on May 18 shot 2 males. An examina- tion of their stomachs showed that they had been feeding on frogs and large beetles. While descending the Mackenzie I saw a single bird 15 miles below Fort Norman on June 16. H. W. Jones reports its occurrence near Fort Providence on May 12,1905. Ross listed this species as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast, but as being rare northward.* The National Museum bird catalogue records specimens from Big Island and Fort Rae. Ardea herodias Linn. Great Blue Heron. J. Alden Loring reported seeing one at Spotted Lake, 60 miles west of Edmonton, May 27, 1896. Grus americana (Linn.). Whooping Crane. _ This fine species formerly bred in considerable numbers in suitable places throughout the region north to the Barren Grounds. It has now become almost extinct in the north, and was not observed during our journeys. King mentions seeing a large flock of these birds at Fort Chip- ewyan.” Ross lists the species as rare in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Simpson, where it had been collected. Coues de- scribes eggs collected by J. Lockhart at Great Slave Lake. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record specimens of the birds taken at Fort @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (Second ser.), p. 284, 1862. 4 Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 212, 1836. € Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second series), p. 284, 1862. 4 Birds of the Northwest, p. 531, 1874, ag NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Resolution, Big Island, Fort Rae, and Salt River, and describe a set of eggs taken at the latter place in 1864.7 Concerning the status of. the species in the Anderson River region, MacFarlane says: We never succeeded in finding a nest of this crane, which undoubtedly breeds in Arctic America as well as in the country to the southward, as a few flocks were observed fiying past Fort Anderson both in spring and autumn.? In notes sent to the Smithsonian he records three white cranes seen at Fort Anderson on May 25, 1865. A specimen taken at Willow River, near Fort Providence, is in the museum at Fort Simpson. H. W. Jones reports the occurrence of the species at the same place on May 13, 1905. Grus canadensis (Linn.). Little Brown Crane. This species is common throughout the region, breeding to the northward. I was unable to identify satisfactorily many of the cranes seen; but as our records from the more southern portions of the district were made in spring or fall, when the birds were migrat- ing to or from their breeding grounds in the north, I have referred all the birds observed to @. canadensis. In the spring of 1901 migrating flocks were seen near Edmonton May 1; on the Athabaska 40 miles below Athabaska Landing, May 7; and below Fort McMurray May 15. Birds of the Northwest, p. 485, 1874. ¢ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, pp. 426, 427, 1891. @Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., II, p. 55, 1902. €N. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 115, 1904. f Auk, XXV, p. 70, 1908. 1908. ] BIRDS. 323 eral were seen and one was taken about 50 miles north of Edmonton May 14. On May 17, in the spring of 1904, at Fort Simpson, I took a soli- tary individual, the first one observed. The species was next seen May 22, was common May 27, and was several times noted during the latter-days of May. I usually saw them in company with the larger sandpipers about the grassy margin of a small pond. On my return trip I saw a small flock on the Athabaska below Brulé Rapid Au- gust 19. On May 15, 1905, J. W. Mills took three specimens, all of which proved to be males, at Fort Providence. First recorded from this region by Ross, who took it at Fort Simpson;? and the bird cata- logue of the National Museum shows that specimens were afterwards received from Isle a la Crosse, Fort Resolution, Big Island, and Great Bear Lake. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was found breeding abundantly at Fort Anderson; on the Barren Grounds | to the eastward]; at Rendezvous Lake; and near the Arctic coast | Frank- lin Bay]; and that nests were found between June 21 and July 3; a set of eggs are described.’ A skin from Big Island; one from Fort Resolution, taken May 19, 1860, by Kennicott; and one from near Rendezvous Lake, taken in June, 1864, by MacFarlane, and labeled as having been collected “ with 3 eggs,” are now in the National Museum. Three eggs taken by Collinson at Cambridge Bay, Victoria Land, are in the British Museum.° Pelidna alpina sakhalina (Vieill.). Red-backed Sandpiper. This bird was recorded by Edward Sabine, under the name 7'ringa variabilis, as being rare in the islands of the Polar Sea, Melville Island being referred to particularly.?. Reed records eggs taken at Peel River, Arctic America, June 30, 1899, by I. O. Stringer.e J. C. Ross recorded the species as breeding abundantly at Felix Harbor./ Walker noted a few breeding at Port Kennedy in July, 1859.9 Ereunetes pusillus (Linn.). Semipalmated Sandpiper. This tiny sandpiper, closely resembling the least sandpiper super- ficially, but readily distinguished from it by the slight webbing of the toes, is a rather common migrant through the region. It breeds on the Barren Grounds. In the spring of 1901 a few were seen on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipewyan, May 24. The species was not again *Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. 6 Water Birds N. A., I, p. 240, 1884. ¢ Oates, Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., II, p. 53, 1902. @ Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cc, 1824. €N. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 116, 1904. f Appendix Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxx1I, 1835. 9 Proc. Roy. Soc., Dublin, III, p. 63, 1860. 324 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. noted until July 24, when a small flock was seen, and a male taken. on the shore of the lake at Fort Rae. In 1903 we did not detect this species during the spring migration, but the advance guard of the southward movement made its appear- ance at Fort Resolution on July 13. Single birds were noted on Grandin River August 3 and 5. In the spring of 1904 I first saw this species at Fort Simpson May 26 and took a single specimen. I took another on the following day, when the species was common, and noted the bird nearly every day up to June 1. First recorded from the region by Richardson, who described a specimen taken at Great Bear Lake on May 24, 1826.* Ross listed it as having been taken at Fort Simpson, but as being rare.” Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that MacFarlane found it nesting on Franklin Bay and on the Barren Grounds between there and Fort Anderson, where nests were found between June 20 and July 10.° Specimens were sent to the Smithsonian Institution from Big Island and Fort Good Hope. Sharpe records specimens in the British Museum from Franklin Bay and Fort Simpson.? Calidris leucophea (Pallas). Sanderling. This cosmopolitan species migrates through the region now under review in spring and fall. It passes northward in early summer, breeds sparingly on the Arctic coast, but more commonly on the islands of the Arctic Sea, and in autumn lingers in flocks on the - storm-swept shores of the larger lakes after most of the other sand- pipers have departed. When seen running along the sandy margins of lake or river its singular stiff-legged gait, taken together with its size and light color, serves to distinguish it even at a distance from any of its allies. In 1903 I first noted this species at our camp on Great Bear Lake, east of Leith Point, August 31, when several flocks were observed. Numbers were seen there nearly every day to September 4, and several specimens were taken. Three individuals were seen on the shore 40 miles east of MceVicar Bay September 13, and a few were noted west of Manito Islands September 15, and near Fort Franklin September 16. In the spring of 1904 I first saw the sanderling at Fort Simpson on May 29, when a small flock was observed feeding along the river shore, and one was shot. A few more were seen near the same place *@Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 386, 1831. 6 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. “Water Birds N. A., I, p. 209, 1884. 4Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XXIV, p. 518, 1896. { 1908. ] BIRDS. 325 June 1. The species was last noted near Fort Wrigley June 7, when a single individual was observed. This species apparently was first recorded from the Mackenzie River region by Ross, who mentions a specimen taken at Big Island, Great Slave Lake.* It had been recorded previously from the North Georgia Islands by Edward Sabine, who, probably referring par- ticularly to Melville Island, states that it was found breeding in con- siderable numbers and that several specimens were taken.? Arm- strong, in his narrative of the voyage of the /nvestigator, states that a few were shot in Prince of Wales Strait, near Princess Royal Islands, June 7, 1851,° and that it was frequently shot early in June, 1852, at Mercy Bay, Banks Land.? On June 29, 1863, Mac- Farlane discovered a nest of this species, “ the only one at that time known to naturalists,” on the Barren Grounds, about 10 miles west of Franklin Bay. The bird was rare in this region, and no other nests were found.? Frank Russell took it at Fort Chipewyan June 7, 1893.7 Limosa hemastica (Linn.). Hudsonian Godwit. Richardson described a specimen taken at Fort Frankln, Great Bear Lake, but otherwise the species apparently was unknown from the region until the officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company began to collect birds, when specimens were received by the Smithsonian Institution from Fort Rae, Big Island, and Anderson River. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that MacFarlane found it breed- ing near Fort Anderson on June 9, and that other nests were found on the lower Anderson, and describes eggs taken by him in that region.’ Reed records eggs from the |mouth of| Mackenzie River, collected by I. O. Stringer.’ Totanus melanoleucus (Gmel.). Greater Yellow-legs. The large yellow-legs occurs very sparingly in migration north to the Great Slave Lake region. Its breeding grounds are practically unknown, except inferentially, but the best information at hand in- dicates that numbers nest in the region between Great Slave Lake and Hudson Bay. In 1903 we saw one at a small pond near Sandy Creek, 20 miles south of Athabaska Landing, May 14. Another was seen on the lower Athabaska May 31. @Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 443, 1861. 6’ Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cxcrx, 1824. © Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 346, 1857. Enbid., p. 525, 1857. CEO Uns. Nai. MUS. KEV, pe 427, 1891, f Expl. in Far North, p. 259, 1898. 9Water Birds N. A., I, p. 2638, 1884. AN, A, Birds’ Eggs, p. 119, 1904, Se 326 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. In the spring of 1904 I observed this species but once, taking a male from among a flock of lesser yellow-legs at Fort Simpson, May 16. Ross recorded this yellow-legs as occurring in the Mackenzie River region as far north as Fort Simpson, where it had been taken, but as being rare. A skin (No. 19934) taken by Ross at Fort Simpson May 23, 1860, is now in the National Museum, and the catalogue shows that specimens were received also from Big Island and Fort Reso- lution. Totanus flavipes (Gmel.). Yellow-legs. This small tattler breeds in suitable places throughout the region north to the Barren Grounds. We saw two individuals at a prairie slough about 15 miles north of Edmonton May 1, 1901. A pair seen almost daily at a marsh near Fort Smith, June 19 to 28, were un- doubtedly breeding. I saw one at Fort Rae July 20 and on July 22, while exploring about some marshy ponds several miles to the east- ward of the post, observed a number. While we were ascending the Athabaska a number were seen at Grand Rapid August 21. In the spring of 1903 we first saw this yellow-legs about some small ponds near Sturgeon River, Alberta, May 12, noting about 50 in- dividuals, and between there and Athabaska Landing we observed a few daily May 138 to 15. Several were seen on the lower Athabaska. May 30. Next noted at Hay River, where my brother and Cary saw one June 30. While at Smith Landing during the night of August 2 they heard this species migrating, and they found it common on the bars at the mouth of the Athabaska August 4. During my trip north- ward from Fort Rae I found it common along Grandin River, August Ito 3. In the spring of 1904 I took a specimen, the only one seen at the time, at Fort Simpson May 9. The species was seen also May 10, was common by May 13, and was seen nearly every day during the remain- der of May. At Willow River, near Fort Providence, several speci- mens were taken May 9 to 11 by Messrs. Mills and Jones. The latter observer also noted the species at the same place on May 3, 1905. Richardson first recorded this species from the region, describing a male killed at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, May 16, 1826; ° Ross listed it as abundant in the Mackenzie River region north to La Pierre Fouse, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson ;¢ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was met with at Fort Resolution May 5, 1860, by Kennicott; at Fort Simpson May 15, by Ross; at Big Island | by Reid; and in great abundance at Fort Anderson, on Anderson and © | Horton [MacFarlane] rivers, and at Rendezvous Lake by Mac- @ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. + Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 390, 1831. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. 1908. ] BIRDS. 827 Farlane. Nests were taken at Fort Anderson as early as June 1.* A male (No. 19946), taken ** with four eggs ” at Fort Resolution June 1, 1860, by Kennicott, and labeled as having been “ shot sitting on nest,” is now in the National Museum. In the Anderson River region Mac- Farlane found it one of the earliest and probably the most abundant of the waders, and discovered upward of 30 nests.’ In notes sent to the Smithsonian he records its arrival at Fort Anderson on May 27, 1865. Macoun states that Spreadborough found it at Edmonton, Al- berta, in June, 1897, and that Dippie found it apparently breeding at Buffalo Lake, Alberta, in July, 1896.° Seton records the bird from Casba Lake, where it was observed August 8, 1907.7 Helodromas solitarius cinnamomeus (Brewst.). Western Solitary Sandpiper. This sandpiper occurs rather commonly in the Athabaska and Mackenzie region, where its breeding range is probably nearly coex- tensive with the forest, though its eggs are still practically unknown. Since our specimens from the Athabaska and Mackenzie region are referable to the western form, I have assumed that the various references to /7. solitarius in this region belong here. It is likely that the eastern form occurs in eastern Saskatchewan and Mac- kenzie, but definite records from this region are lacking. In the spring of 1901, a single individual was seen at a deserted beaver pond near Athabaska Landing May 5. The species was next noted at a marsh near Slave River, 25 miles below the mouth of the Peace, where we saw a pair daily June 11 to 13, and we saw another pair while crossing Smith Portage June 18. We saw one bird at Fort Smith June 19, and several on Slave River a few miles below there June 29. In 1903 we first noted this species at Edmonton on May 10. Sev- eral were seen near Sturgeon River May 12, and 50 miles north of Edmonton May 14, one being taken on the latter occasion. Next observed at Fort Resolution June 22, when I saw a pair on a small marsh near the post. My brother and Cary saw a pair in a tamarack muskeg at Fort Providence July 6 and took the male. On their return trip they heard solitary sandpipers on the night of August 11 at Fort McMurray. During my trip northward from Fort Rae, I saw one on Grandin River August 3. On May 10, in the spring of 1904, I observed two at Fort Simpson, securing one, and while descending the Mackenzie saw one near the mouth of Nahanni River June 3. On May 14, 1905, H. W. Jones took a male at. Willow River, near Fort Providence. ¢Water Birds N. A., Il, pp. 276, 277, 1884. 6 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 428, 1891. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, pp. 173, 174, 1900. d Auk, XXV, p. 70, 1908. 328 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Richardson gives a description of one killed at Great Bear Lake May 14, 1826; ° Ross listed the species as occurring commonly in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Simpson, where he had taken ~ it.2 A specimen (No. 19952) collected by him at Fort Simpson May 30, 1860, is still in the National Museum. Baird, Brewer, and Ridg- way record the capture of the species at Fort Rae and Big Island.¢ Macoun, under the name solitarius, states that Spreadborough saw numbers in the spring of 1897 at Edmonton, where he believed they were breeding, and found the birds breeding at Jasper Lake, Al- berta, in July, 1898.“ Raine has recently recorded the discovery of © three sets of eggs of the solitary sandpiper in northern [now central] Alberta in the summers of 1903 and 1904.¢ While collecting in the mountains 15 miles south of Henry House, Alberta, July 19, 1896, J. Alden Loring took a young bird of this form. It was accompanied by the female parent, which was not secured, but the male was taken on the following day. The birds were in a meadow which had formerly been a beaver pond. Catoptrophorus semipalmatus inornatus (Brewster). Western Willet. This bird, a plains species, reaches the district now under review only in Alberta. Merritt Cary heard its notes at Edmonton, May 9, 1903. Macoun records young found by Dippie at Buffalo Lake, July 4, 1895, and specimens taken by Spreadborough at Edmonton in the spring of 1897./ Bartramia longicauda (Bechst.). Bartramian Sandpiper. The upland plover occurs in small numbers in suitable places over nearly the-entire region and evidently breeds throughout its Cana- dian range. In 1901 we met with it only in the vicinity of Fort Smith. Here I secured a female in a field on June 21, and while hunting on the ‘ prairies’ several miles to the westward of the post June 24 collected a male. He was first observed on the top of a dead tree at some distance away, but soon left his perch and circled past me, whistling loudly. His gullet was filled with grasshoppers. In 1903 we heard the notes of this bird a few miles north of Ed- monton May 12, and saw 4 individuals in the valley of Sturgeon River May 13. During their return trip my brother and Cary noted the species at Athabaska Landing, where it was migrating abun- @Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 393, 1831. b Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. ¢ Water Birds N. A., I, p. 280, 1884. @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 173, 1900. € Ottawa Naturalist, XVIII, pp. 1385-138, 1904. f Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 176, 1900. 1908. ] BIRDS. 329 dantly, August 31 to September 3. Concerning this species Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway say: Mr. R. MacDonald noticed it breeding among the mountains west of the lower Mackenzie, and Mr. J. M’Dougall met with it in the Gens de Large Mountains, 200 miles northeast of the Yukon.? Macoun says: This species is an abundant summer resident in the whole prairie region * * * from the International Boundary to latitude 54° in the eastern part of the region, and northwesterly to far north of the open prairies of the Peace River. He also records a specimen taken at Edmonton by Spreadborough and a set of eggs obtained by J. B. Tyrrell in northern | now central | Alberta July 1, 1886.? Tryngites subruficollis (Vieill.). Buff-breasted Sandpiper. This beautiful sandpiper migrates through the wooded portion of the region and breeds on the Barren Grounds. During our investi- gations we met with it but once, noting several on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipewyan, May 24, 1901. A mounted specimen in the museum at Fort Simpson was procured some years ago at Fort Rae. Ross noted the species as having been collected at Fort Simpson; ° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that MacFarlane found upward of 20 nests on the Barren Grounds between Horton River and the Arctic coast between June 26 and July 9 and describe eggs taken by him.’ A specimen (No. 19954) taken by Ross at Fort Simpson, May 29, 1860, is still in the National Museum, and the bird catalogue shows that skins were received also from Fort Rae and Big Island. Frank Russell took one at Herschel Island, August 13, 1894.° Actitis macularia (Linn.). Spotted Sandpiper. Abundant and generally distributed throughout the region as far north as the limit of trees. In the season of 1901 we first saw it near Athabaska Landing May 6, and noted it almost daily while descending the river to Athabaska Lake May 6 to 17. We observed it near Fort Chipewyan May 23, and near the outlet. of Athabaska Lake June 2 to 4. While collecting along the Rocher and Slave rivers between Athabaska Lake and Smith Landing, June 5 to 18, we saw numbers daily. The first nests were seen on a sandy island 25 miles below the Peace June 8. We found it common at Fort Smith June 19 to 28 and saw several nests on the shelving banks of the a4Water Birds N. A., I, p. 297, 1884. 6 Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 178, 1900. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. @Water Birds N. A., I, p. 308, 1884. € Expl. in Far North, p. 259, 1898. 330 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. river. We saw numbers daily, the old birds now usually accompanied by young, along Slave River between Fort Smith and Fort Resolu-— tion June 29 to July 4. The species was noted by my brother several times at Fort Resolution during July, and I saw a few individuals on islets in Great Slave Lake near Loon Island July 10. While ascend- ing Slave and Athabaska rivers by steamer we seldom saw the bird, but while traveling by boats up the Athabaska between Fort MeMurray and Athabaska Landing, August 10 to 29, we observed the species nearly every day. In 1903 we found spotted sandpipers abundant on 1 the Athabaska, noting them nearly every day between Athabaska Landing and Fort Chipewyan May 16 to June 2. They were abundant also along our route to Fort Resolution. The first nest, containing four eggs, was found at Smith Landing June 10. The species was occasionally seen at Fort Resolution during the latter part of June. My brother and Cary found it common at Hay River June 28 to July 1, at Fort Providence July 3 to 8, and near the mouth of Nahanni River July 11 to 19, noting young birds about a week old on the former date. They observed the species also near Fort Wrigley July 20. On their return trip they saw several flocks near Nahanni River July 23 and frequently observed it on the Slave and Athabaska. It was abun- dant at Red River August 6, Fort McMurray August 8 to 11, and Brulé Rapid August 18, and was last observed at Athabaska Land- ing September 3. During my trip northward from Fort Rae, after the division of the party, I observed the species on Lake Marian July 30, Grandin River August 2, 3, and 4, Sarahk Lake August 6 and 7, and a few miles south of MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake, August 25. While ascending the Mackenzie I saw a single bird about Gravel River October 5, and another, or perhaps the same individual, a few miles farther on, October 6. | In the spring of 1904 the spotted sandpiper was first observed at Willow River, near Fort Providence, May 17, by J. W. Mills. At Fort Simpson I first saw the species May 19, noting it about a small pond in the woods. It was next seen May 21 and 23, and was ob- served nearly every day during the remainder of the month. While descending the Mackenzie during June I noted numbers nearly every day. The first nest, not quite finished, was seen near Fort Norman June 10. The species was common at Fort McPherson during the first half of July, and eggs were collected July 7. While I was as- cending the Mackenzie during the latter part of July the species was common along its entire course, and it was observed nearly every day along the Athabaska between Fort McMurray and La Biche River August 10 to 31. 1908. ] BIRDS. ool Although this widely distributed species is found in suitable locali- ties throughout the wooded portion of the region, Richardson, for some reason, did not note it, at least during his earlier journeys. Ross found it abundant along the Mackenzie, collecting it at Fort Simpson.* MacFarlane found it abundant along Anderson and Lockhart rivers.’ Seton records the bird from Chnton-Colden and Aylmer lakes, where it was observed in mid-August, 1907.° The catalogue of the birds in the National Museum records specimens from Peace River, Slave River, Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Norman, Great Bear Lake, and Peel River. Eggs were sent to the Smithsonian from Lesser Slave Lake by Strachan Jones in 1868, and from Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, by H. MacKay, who took them there in J une, 1891. In 1896 J. Alden Loring found the species common and breeding during the early summer all along the trail from Edmonton to Jas- per House, on July 15 discovered a nest containing four eggs 15 miles south of Henry House, and during the late summer and early autumn found the bird common on all the streams and lakes between Jasper House and Smoky River. Numenius americanus Bechstein. Long-billed Curlew. A mounted specimen, catalogued as having been taken at Fort Simpson some years ago, is in the museum of the Hudson’s Bay Com- pany at Fort Simpson. This curlew inhabits the northern plains and seldom wanders north of their borders. Numenius hudsonicus Lath. Hudsonian Curlew. A male was taken at my camp on Great Bear Lake east of Leith ‘Point September 30, 1903. This bird, the only one observed, had been feeding on the berries of Empetrum nigrum. Ross recorded this species from Great Slave Lake, where he regarded it as rare;? and the bird catalogue of the National Museum records a specimen from Big Island. Eggs were brought to MacFarlane by the Eskimo from the Barren Grounds to the westward of the lower Anderson River, and have been described by Coues.* In notes sent to the Smithsonian MacFarlane records one seen at Fort Anderson May 29, 1865. A mounted specimen taken at Fort Simpson some years ago is in the museum at that place. 4Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. 5 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 428, 1891. ¢ Auk, XXV, p. 70, 1908. 4Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 290, 1862. € Birds of the Northwest, p, 494, 1874, 332 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Numenius borealis (Forst.). Eskimo Curlew. A melancholy interest attaches to this species, which evidently has become practically exterminated within the past few years, although formerly enormously abundant and fairly common up to about 1890. It was first recorded from this region by Richardson, who says: “On the 13th of June, 1822 [1821]. I discovered one of these curlews hatching on three eggs on the shore of Point Lake.”* He met with the birds also at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, late in May, 1849, when they were feeding on large ants.’ Kennicott mentions taking one at Fort Resolution May 26, 1860.° MacFarlane found the species breeding abundantly on the Barren Grounds to the eastward of Fort Anderson, where some thirty sets of eggs were taken.’ In notes sent to the Smithsonian he states that the species arrived at Fort Ander- son on May 27, 1865. The bird catalogue of the National Museum records skins from Fort Resolution, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Ander- son River, and Rendezvous Lake. Sharpe records a specimen from Fort Good Hope.° Squatarola squatarola (Linn.). Black-bellied Plover. This handsome plover migrates through the Athabaska and Mac- kenzie region and associates to some extent with the golden plover, but 1s much less common than that species. It breeds on the Barren Grounds. In the spring of 1901 we noted the black-bellied plover only on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipewyan, where a small flock was seen May 23. In 1903 we observed a flock of about 25 near Sturgeon River May 12. The species was not again seen until September 5, when I took a female on the shore of Great Bear Lake east of Leith Point. It was 1n company with a small flock of golden plovers and had been feeding on E’'mpetrum berries. In the museum at Fort Simpson is a specimen obtained at that place some years ago. J. C. Ross recorded this bird as breeding near Somerset House (Fury Point), and as taken near Felix Harbor.’ B. R. Ross recorded it from the Mackenzie River region, where he regarded it as rare.’ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that MacFarlane found it breed- ing on islands in Franklin Bay, where he took eggs on July 4 and 5, @Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 378, 1831. + Arctic Searching Expedition, II, p. 108, 1851. ¢ Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 172, 1869. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 429, 1891. Cat. Birds Brit. Mus, Xav.-p. 370; 1896: f Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XXX, 1835. 9 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 285, 1862. 1908. ] BIRDS. aao 1864, and in 1865. Sharpe records specimens taken at Fort Stmpson and Fort Resolution.” The bird catalogue of the National Museum records a specimen from Fort Rae; another from Fort Resolution, taken June 2, 1860, by Kennicott; and one taken on the Arctic coast east of Fort Anderson July 8, 1865, by MacFarlane, and labeled as the parent of four eggs, are still in the collection. Russell took one June 8, 1893, at Fort Chipewyan;° Macoun records one taken at Ed- monton in May, 1897.¢ Charadrius dominicus Mill. American Golden Plover. In 1903 I first saw this species on Great Bear Lake east of Leith Point August 28. Here it was common until September 6, and a number of specimens were collected. The birds kept in small flocks, sometimes frequenting the sandy beach, but usually frequenting the semibarren rocky areas, where they fattened on berries. After leav- ing this place I noted the species 40 miles east of McVicar Bay September 12, and lastly near Manito Islands September 14. In the spring of 1904 I first noted golden plovers at Fort Simpson on May 19, when two or three flocks, aggregating about 50 indt- viduals, were seen flying northward along the Mackenzie. On Mav 21 a flock of 9, comprising both sexes, made its appearance on the fields about the post and remained during the rest of the month. A female from this flock was collected May 23, and others of both sexes were taken on May 25 and 30. A. F. Camsell informed me that a flock almost invariably lingered about the fields for a week or so during each spring. Edward Sabine, probably referring particularly to Melville Island, states that this species breeds in considerable abundance in swampy parts of the North Georgia Islands.¢ J. C. Ross states that this species arrived at Port Bowen, Prince Regent Inlet, about the middle of May, 1825;/ he later reports it as breeding abundantly at Felix Harbor.’ Walker records eggs taken at Port Kennedy in June, 1859." Armstrong mentions that the species was shot near Princess Royal Islands, Prince of Wales Strait, June 7, 1851; * and that it was frequently taken at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, early in June, 1852.7 Doctor Rae saw golden plovers near Admiralty @Water Birds N. A., I, pp. 136, 137, 1884. 6Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XXIV, p. 190, 1896. €Wxpl. in Far North, p. 259, 1898. @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 185, 1900. €Suppi. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cxcix, 1824. fParry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 102, 1826. 9 Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. Xxx, 1835. 4Proc. Roy. Soc. Dublin, III, pp. 63, 1860. *Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 346, 1857. sipid- p. 020, 18d. 334 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Island, Albert Edward Bay, Victoria Land, August 15, 1851, when they were migrating toward the southeast. Kennicott noted the species arriving in large flocks at Fort Resolution May 23, 1860." Ross listed it as abundant in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.’ Mac- Farlane found it abundant throughout the Barren Grounds in the Anderson River region, discovering upward of 170 nests.? Russell records two specimens, one taken at Fort Chipewyan June 1, 1893, and one at Herschel Island August 13, 1894, on which date the species arrived from the northwest.“ Macoun records two specimens taken at Edmonton in May, 1897, by Spreadborough;‘ and J. Alden Loring reported that he saw three at the same place September 23, 1894, and took one. The bird catalogue of the National Museum records speci- mens from Fort Rae, Fort Resolution, Big Island, Fort Halkett, La Pierre House, and Fort Simpson, one from the latter locality having been taken September 10, 1860. Two specimens, one from Big Island, and another, a male, taken at Fort Simpson May 26, 1860, are still in the collection. Reed records eggs taken at Peel River, Arctic America, June 1, 1898, by C. E. Whittaker? Oxyechus vociferus (Linn.). WKulldeer. This widely distributed species occurs regularly; though not com- monly, north to the region of Great Slave Lake and in all proba- bility farther. We saw three individuals about a marshy spot on the plains 15 miles north of Edmonton May 1, 1901. In 1903 we noted the killdeer near Edmonton May 12, found it common along our route a few miles north of Sturgeon River May 13, and saw a few 60 miles north of Edmonton May 14. It was next observed at Smith Landing June 12, three being seen on the flat near the post. Two or three, the last individuals noted, were seen at Fort Resolution June 25. Specimens of both birds and eggs were received by the Smith- sonian from Lesser Slave Lake, where Strachan Jones collected them in 1868. Macoun records specimens of the birds from Edmonton, as well as eggs taken by Spreadborough at the same place, May 19, 1890? “Journ. Royal Geog. Soe., p. 91, 1852. ‘Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 171, 1869. © Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 284, 1862. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 429, 1891. €Expl. in Far North, p. 259, 1898. /Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 187, 1900. IN. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 127, 1904. *Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 189, 1900. 1908. ] BIRDS. 335 Egialitis semipalmata Bonap. Semipalmated Plover. First noted May 23, 1901, when a number were seen on the shore of the lake near Fort Chipewyan. The species was next met with on some low, sandy islands in the lower part of Slave River, where several pairs, undoubtedly breeding, were seen July 3. It was not again noted until we were ascending the Athabaska, where several migrants were seen at Middle Rapid, 40 miles below Grand Rapid, on August 15, and several above Pelican Rapid August 24. J. C. Ross reports this species as abundant in summer on Boothia* Walker records several taken in June and July, 1859, at Port Kennedy.’ Kennicott mentions taking this species at Fort Resolution on May 23, 1860.° Ross listed it as common in the Mac- kenzie River region and as having been collected at Fort Simpson; 4 MacFarlane found it quite common on the Arctic coast | Franklin Bay], along Anderson and Lockhart rivers, and between Fort Ander- son and Fort Good Hope.’ Sharpe records specimens from Fort Simpson and Horton River.’ The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that specimens were received from Slave River, Big Island, Fort Resolution, Fort Simpson, and Franklin Bay. Russell records two specimens taken June 2 and 12, 1893, at Fort Chipewyan, where he regarded it as not common.’ Seton records the bird as breeding on Artillery Lake in 1907." #igialitis hiaticula (Linn.). Ring Plover. This wide-ranging plover, a regular breeder about Greenland, Cumberland Gulf, and other localities in that region, is included among the birds of the Mackenzie region on the authority of Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway, who state: “An undoubted specimen of it has been taken at great Slave Lake.” ' Arenaria interpres morinella (Linn.). Ruddy Turnstone. This showy species occurs in the Mackenzie apparently only in spring, as 1t is migrating to its breeding grounds on the shores and islands of the Arctic Sea. While we were coasting along the north shore of Athabaska Lake, about 10 miles northeast of Fort Chipewyan, May 25, 1901, we saw 4 Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxx, 1835, ’Proc. Roy. Soc. Dublin, III, p. 63, 1860. ¢Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 171, 1869. @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 284, 1862. SProe U.S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p.430, 1801. fCat. Birds Brit. Mus., XXIV, p. 253, 1896. 9Expl. in Far North, p. 260, 1898. h Auk, XXV, pv. 70, 1908. +Water Birds: N. A, I, p. 252, 1884. 336 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. two or three small companies, aggregating about 20 individuals, feed- ing on the fioating fields of ice. Two males and a female in fresh spring plumage were taken. Their stomachs were filled with insects, mainly beetles, which they had evidently picked up on the ice. In the spring of 1904 I first observed the turnstone at Fort Simp- son, May 29, when a solitary female was secured. Snow was falling, and several inches had already accumulated on the river shore, but the bird did not seem to be much troubled by these conditions. I next noted the species June 7, observing a flock of about 50 near Fort Wrigley. They were feeding on a broad stretch of muddy shore. Under the name Strepsilas collaris, Edward Sabine recorded speci- mens from the North Georgia Islands [probably Melville Island], where the species was stated to breed.t | Doctor Rae, while traveling along the southern coast of Victoria Land, in August, 1851, observed old and young birds, indicating that the species breeds on that coast.® J. C. Ross states that one was seen at Felix Harbor in early July, and others between Victoria Harbor and Fury Point, Boothia, in June. MacFarlane refers to the species in the Anderson River region as follows: In June, 1864, a dozen birds were observed at Fort Anderson, and one was shot. The species breeds on the shores of Liverpool and Franklin bays, and on the lower Anderson River. Several nests were secured in the latter region; but none were met with in the Barren Grounds.@ Under the name Strepsilas interpres, Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record specimens received from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Anderson, and the lower Anderson River. A specimen from Fort Anderson collected June 10, 1864, one from Fort Resolution taken June 1, 1860, by Kennicott, and one from Big Island, are still in the National Museum. | Dendragapus obscurus richardsoni (Dougl.). Richardson Grouse. This large and handsome grouse inhabits the Rocky Mountains and reaches the vicinity of the Mackenzie only among the spurs of that range. Our records are the most northerly for this region, though the species may exist still farther to the northward among the unexplored ranges. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary, while collecting on Mount Tha-on’-tha, near the mouth of Nahanni River, July 16, 1903, took an adult male and female and two young birds. They were found near the summit of the mountain, where the timber “Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cc, 1824. ®Canadian Record of Science, III, p. 135, 1888. ¢ Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XXXI, 18385. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 480, 1891. €Water Birds N. A., I, p. 123, 1884. 1908. ] | BIRDS. Bat was dwarfed and scrubby. The Indian guide reported the species common on the foothills west of Fort Simpson and on all the moun- tains along Liard River. On June 4, 1904, while collecting near the summit of the same ~ mountain, I dashed and killed an adult male. Its crop was filled with leaves of low willows (Salix myrtillifolia), berries of mountain eranberry (V7tisidwa vitisid@a), and berries and flowers of bearberry (Arctostaphylos uvaurst). | This well-marked form was first described by David Douglas under the name Zetrao richardsoni, from specimens collected by him in the Rocky Mountains near the sources of the Athabaska.* Two years later Richardson described ‘a male taken by Drummond “on the Rocky Mountains,” probably not far from where Douglas collected his specimens.” The next important note on the species which I find is also by Richardson, who refers to the bird under the name ‘Tetrao Sayi, stating that it “ has not been killed farther north than the Nohhané Bute.”° Ross listed 7. richardsoni as being found north to Fort Halkett “ only in the mountains.”* Specimens from Fort Halkett are still in the National Museum. Ogilvie-Grant lists specimens in the British Museum from the same place and from Fort Simpson ; ° and the National Museum bird catalogue shows that skins were received also from Fort Liard and the mountains west of Fort Simpson. The British Museum specimens also, sted by Ogilvie- Grant from Fort Simpson, in all probability were taken in the moun- tains to the westward. | J. Alden Loring collected a pair near Jasper House, Alberta, Au- Sust 27, 1895. In 1896 he reported seeing a female with young 15 miles south of Henry House in July, and speaks of shooting four individuals near the head of Grand Cache River, 60 miles north of Jasper House, late in August. He collected a female 15 miles west of Henry House on October 12. MacFarlane writes me that a Richardson grouse was shot at Fort Providence on March 20, 1885. Canachites canadensis (Linn.). Hudsonian Spruce Grouse. Though found throughout the region, this species was not noted during our 1901 trip until we reached Fort Chipewyan, where a female was taken May 21. It was uncommon in the immediate vicinity of that post, but at Point La Brie, on the north shore of the @Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XVI, p. 141, 1829. 6Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 345, 1831. ¢ Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 179, 1851. ¢Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 283, 1862. € Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XXII, p. 77,1893. 44131 338 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. lake 12 miles to the northeastward, we found it abundant in the spruce woods May 25 to 30, and took several specimens. The crop of one killed May 29 was filled with berries of Arctostaphylos uva- ursi. We next met with the species 25 miles below Peace River June 12. At Fort Smith females with young a few days old were seen June 24 and 25. At Fort Resolution my brother noted it July 20 and 22, While we were ascending the Athabaska we saw one at Big Cascade Rapid August 18, and a brood at Grand Rapid August 22. In 1903 we did not observe the spruce partridge until June 22, when several were seen at Fort Resolution. The stomach of one contained, besides a small quantity of gravel, only spruce leaves. My brother and Cary noted the species at Fort Providence July 6, and on the mountain near the mouth of Nahanni River July 18, taking one on the latter date. While crossing Great Slave Lake I took a female, with young just ready to fly, on one of the islands of the Simpson Group, July 20. Its crop contained leaves of fern (Cryptogramma acrostichoides) and berries of a blueberry (Vaccinium uliginosum), and of the mountain cranberry (Vitistdwa vitisidwa). Other fe- males, also with young, were noted near Gros Cape on July 23 and 24, During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted the species on Lake St. Croix, August 11, and on Lake Hardisty, August 18, noting a single bird on each occasion. One was observed near our camp east of Leith Point on September 5. At Fort Franklin I took a male, the only one seen there, September 22. It had just risen from the margin of a small inlet, and its crop contained several mollusks (Lymnea palustris), which it had just picked up. I saw several | birds in the possession of a hunter encamped near the rapid on Bear River, where the species was reported common, on September 29. While ascending the Mackenzie the species was observed above Na- | hanni River, October 15, and a short distance below Fort Simpson, | October 19 and 20. The crops of three shot near Nahanni River, | October 15, contained nothing but leaves of spruce (Picea canadensis). | At Fort Simpson I occasionally observed the species during November | and December, usually in spruce or pine woods. A pair taken on | October 25, and a single one on November 14, had filled their crops | with the lear: of Banksian pine (Pinus iin ecata) ." During the first three months of 1904 this bird was seldom ob- served, but several were taken early in April. Their crops Contant | nothing but leaves of Pinus divaricata. The birds were always found | singly or in twos, and were very tame. As a result, by this time they | were practically exterminated in the vicinity of the post, and were | not observed during the remainder of the spring. | Six eggs, perhaps an incomplete set, taken at Fort Simpson, May 29, 1905, have recently been received on J. W. Mills. He writes that | 4 Fort Simpson and Fort Chipewyan specimens are referable to C. ¢. GeguOdL. 1908. ] BIRDS. 339 the nest was a small hollow at the base of a clump of willows, and that the eggs were fresh. | This species occurs throughout the region nearly to the limits of the forest, and figures frequently in the narratives of northern travel. Franklin noted it about Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, about the last of October, 1825;% Douglas stated that occasionally a solitary individual was seen near the sources of the Athabaska, and that the species abounded about Lesser Slave Lake;” Richardson described a male “killed on the eastern declivity of the Rocky Mountains” [probably in the Jasper House region], and figured the head of a female from Great Bear Lake;° Ross lsted the species as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson;? Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway de- scribe eggs from Fort Resolution, collected by Kennicott; ¢ MacFar- lane frequently observed the species in the forested country to the southward of Fort Anderson.’ The bird catalogue of the National Museum records skins sent by various officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company about forty years ago from Methye Portage, Fort Resolu- tion, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, mountains west of Fort Simpson, Fort Liard, and Fort Halkett; skins from Fort Rae, Fort Resolution, and Liard River are still in the collection. Bendire records eggs taken by Ross near Fort Simpson as early as May 23; 9 eggs taken by H. MacKay at the Hudson’s Bay Post on Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, in June; 1891, were received by the National Museum through MacFarlane. During his trip to western Alberta in 1895 J. Alden Loring took a male about 40 miles west of Henry House October 1. In this region the range of the Hudsonian spruce grouse overlaps that of the_ Franklin grouse, a closely related species. In 1896 he took speci- mens of the former 100 miles west of Edmonton about May 30, re- ported the species as common in the foothills and valleys between Jasper House and Smoky River August 20 to October 8, and took a male and female in the Blueberry Hills, on the Jasper House trail, about 100 miles west of Edmonton, on October 29. Canachites franklini (Dougl.). Franklin Grouse. The Franklin grouse occurs within the area now under review only about the headwaters of the Athabaska, where its range overlaps slightly that of the spruce grouse. It was first described by Douglas 4Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 60, 1828. 6Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XVI, p. 147, 1829. ¢ Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 347, 348, 1831. @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 283, 1862. € Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 418, 1874. i Proc. U. S, Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 430, 1891. 7 tite Hist, N, A. Birds [I], p. 56, 1892. 340 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. from specimens taken by him in the Rocky Mountains near the sources of Columbia River. Two years later Richardson described | a male taken by Drummond near the sources of the Athabaska, in the same region.” J. Alden Loring took males at Banff, Alberta, August 26 and 28, 1894. He took a female about 40 miles west of Henry House on October 1, 1895, and a male 15 miles west of Henry House on October 18, 1896. Macoun states that Spreadborough reported the species common about Jasper House in the summer of 1898.°¢ Bonasa umbellus umbelloides (Dougl.). Gray Ruffed Grouse. The ruffed grouse occurs commonly in the wooded parts of the region north to Great Slave Lake, and to about latitude 63° on the Mackenzie. In 1901 it was seen or heard nearly every day along the road between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing April 29 to May 5, and along the Athabaska between the Landing and the mouth of the river, May 6 to 17. The birds were especially abundant along the Athabaska from the mouth of Red River to within a short distance of Athabaska Lake, and their drumming was heard almost con- stantly, several being frequently noted at once. On the evening of May 15 several females were seen hurriedly gathering a supper of the buds of the balsam poplar. They had probably left their nests to fill their crops with the food most readily available. At our several camps near Fort Chipewyan we found the species fairly abundant May 18 to June 5. On May 25 and 26 I observed a male in the act of drumming. He had several drumming stands within a distance of 25 yards in rather heavy mixed woods. If dis- turbed at one place he was soon heard at another, but owing to the - surrounding vegetation I was able to observe him plainly at but one of these stands, and there only after a careful and tedious ap- proach through a mosquito-infested muskeg. While drumming he stood erect on the log, and his wings, not extended to their full length, but held about half open, were raised above the back and brought downward against the body, at the end of the stroke apparently oc- cupying the same position that they ordinarily do when closed. During the intervals between the drummings he walked slowly back and forth on the log, holding himself erect, with his feathers closely compressed to the body. He was oblivious of my presence, and I watched him from a distance of 20 yards until the mosquitoes over- came my enthusiasm. The species was noted near the mouth of Peace River June 5, and | was fairly common, June 7 to 11, at our camp 10 miles below the |~ “Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XVI, p. 189, 1829. ’ Fauna*Boreali-Americana. II, p. 349, 1831. “Cat. Canadian Birds, Pa1t I, p. 201, 1900, 1908. ] BIRDS. Saul mouth of Peace River, where two males were taken. At this place we pitched our camp within 5 yards of the stand of an old drummer. Soon after sunset he came to drum, but not relishing the proximity of our camp, walked away after clucking a protest. He was so loath to forsake his accustomed stand, however, that next evening, after all was quiet, he again visited the place, and this time ventured to drum several times, and he came back on the third evening also. The drum- ming of one was heard 25 miles below the Peace June 12, and females with young were seen at Smith Landing June 15, and at Fort Smith June 28. The species was next noted near Fort Resolution, where one was heard drumming July 3. We saw broods of well-grown young on the Athabaska near Big Mouth Brook, 65 miles below Atha- baska Landing, August 25; and near La Biche River August 27. Several individuals were seen on the road 40 miles north of Edmon- ton September 3. In 1903 we noted the ruffed grouse on several occasions between Ed- monton and Athabaska Landing May 11 to 15, and between Atha- baska Landing and Pelican Rapid May 17 to 18. Its drumming was heard near Stony Rapid May 26, and a number of individuals were seen or heard on the lower Athabaska on May 29 and 31 and June 1. The crops of two taken June 1 contained only the catkins and young leaves of willows. We found the species common on Rocher River, where, on June 6, we took ‘one whose crop contained willow catkins and fertile heads of Hquisetum. We noted it also on Slave River, below Fort Smith, June 15 to 17, usually detecting it by its drumming. My brother and Cary noted females with fledged young at Fort Providence on July 6 and 8. On their return trip they noted one at Swift Current Rapid late in August, and found it common between Athabaska Landing and Lily Lake September 21 to 24. During the same season I did not observe the species during my journey between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes, and on my fall trip up the Mackenzie first saw it near Roche Trempe-l’eau October 9. During October, November, and December I occasionally observed it at Fort Simpson, and collected a few specimens. The crop of one shot November 7 contained rose hips, buds of Salix and Lepargyrea, and seeds of a species of grass. Though the birds usually were soli- tary, three were seen together on December 5. The pectinations on the toes were fully developed, nearly 5 millimeters in length, early in November. In 1904 I occasionally noted the species at Fort Simpson during the latter part of the winter and during the spring, and took several specimens. A fine male shot April 14 has 20 rectrices. Drumming was first heard on April 26. By the latter part of April nearly all the pectinations had been shed. I examined the crops of several and 842 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. noted the contents as follows: Male, April 14, buds of Populus bal- samifera, Salix, and Lepargyrewa canadensis, and leaves of Pyrola; male, April 21, buds of Salix and Lepargyrwa, and young shoots of Equisetum; male, April 28, catkins of Salix; male, May 16, young leaves of Populus tremuloides. While descending the Mackenzie I saw one near Roche Trempe-l’eau June 8. This point is near the northern limit of the bird’s range on the Mackenzie. This form was first described by Douglas, who stated that it in- habited the Rocky Mountains in latitude 54° north, and near the sources of Peace River.t. Ross listed the species as common in the Mackenzie River region as far north as La Pierre House, and as hav- ing been collected at Fort Simpson.? The bird catalogue of the National Museum records skins from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Liard, and Big Island, specimens from the last three localities being still in the collection. While collecting in Alberta in 1894, J. Alden Loring reported the species common at Edmonton September 7 to 26, taking one speci- men. In 1896, he took a male at Henry House October 12, and a female at Jasper House October 22. Macoun states that Spread- borough reported the species common between Edmonton and Jasper House in 1898.° Lagopus lagopus (Linn.). Willow Ptarmigan. This species occurs throughout the region, breeding mainly in the Barren Grounds, and to some extent southward along the mountains, and in winter migrating more or less regularly to the Saskatchewan region. In 1903, the willow ptarmigan was first noted at Fort Resolution June 28, when an Indian brought me a female which he had shot near the post. It was, of course, merely a straggler and was the only one the native had ever seen at this season. Its crop contained young leaves of Populus balsamifera. My Indian canoeman re- ported seeing ptarmigan in the mountains south of MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake, on August 25 and 26. At our camp on the shore of Great Bear Lake east of Leith Point the species was first seen | August 29, several broods of nearly grown birds being observed. | Three old males, two of which were secured, were seen August 31. | The crop of one contained leaves of dwarf willow (Salia reticulata), || wild rosemary (Andromeda polifolia), and a small vetch (Aragal- | lus), catkins of dwarf birch (Betula nana), and berries of blueberry ! @'Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XVI, p. 148, 1829. ® Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 283, 1862. If this record for La Pierre | House is well founded, the bird must reach there from the Yukon or along the | mountains, since it is certainly absent from the lower Mackenzie. © Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 203, 1900. 1908.1 BIRDS. 348 (Vaccinium uliginosum) and crowberry (E'mpetrum nigrum). Sev eral broods and small companies were seen September 3 and 4, and a number were collected, including old and young birds of both sexes. The crops of two adult males killed September 3 contained mushrooms (95 per cent), a few leaves of dwarf willow (Salix reticulata), and fruit of Andromeda polifolia. Their stomachs were filled with the seeds of Empetrum nigrum, and the Lnings and to some extent the muscular tissue of the gizzards were stained with the purple juice of this fruit. Among the contents of the crops of other individuals taken on these dates were found the tops and seeds of grass, seeds of Hedysarum americanum, and berries of alpine bear- berry (Wairania alpina). The old birds at this date had acquired many of the feathers of the winter plumage, and the young were just beginning to show the same change. These feathers, especially when first acquired, show a delicate pink tinge, like the breast feath- ers of certain gulls. The birds undoubtedly breed all along this part of the shore in considerable numbers, and were usually in small com- panies, evidently family groups, though a large flock was seen near MecVicar Bay September 9. One taken near the same place Septem- ber 10 had been eating the leaves of Betula nana, Salix reticulata, and a vetch, and the berries of /'mpetrum and Vitisidea. A few in- dividuals were seen to the westward of McVicar Bay September 10, 11, and 12, and a single adult bird showing much white was seen at Fort Franklin September 22. A few seen in the possession of Indians at the same place, September 28, had nearly completed the change to the winter plumage. While ascending the Mackenzie a few miles above Fort Norman, October 2, I noted two in complete winter plumage; and I saw another near Gravel River October 5; near Roche Trempe-l’eau October 8; and a short distance below Fort Simpson October 20. One that was pursued by a goshawk flew high and straight out over the river, and soon distanced its pursuer, which gave up the chase. The ptarmigan then descended nearly to the surface of the river and regained the shore by a long, circuitous flight. During the winter of 1903-4, the willow ptarmigan was not com- mon in the vicinity of Fort Simpson, but occasionally was observed in twos and threes, and a number were collected. Their crops inva- riably contained buds and twigs of willows, mainly Salix bebbiana, usually to the exclusion of other food, though in one instance a few buds of Populus balsamifera were found. The last ptarmigan ob- served, still in complete winter plumage, was taken March 192. While at Fort McPherson I was informed that these birds breed among the mountains a few miles to the westward. J. W. Mill! informs me that on one occasion late in September some years ago, while the brigade of York boats was traversing Great Slave Lake, - 344 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. large numbers of ptarmigan appeared on Deadman Island, on the south side of the lake west of Little Buffalo River, evidently having crossed the lake from the northern shore. All of them were ex- hausted, and many, unable to fly farther, fell into the water before reaching the island. As was stated by Richardson, the willow ptarmigan undoubtedly breeds in the Rocky Mountains, south to the Jasper and Henry House region. While collecting in that region in 1895, J. Alden Loring found the species abundant at a point about 50 miles west of Henry House during the latter part of September. The camp was close to the timber line, and a heavy snow had driven the birds down into the open parks, where they were feeding on the seeds of grasses. Four specimens were taken at Henry House, September 26. They had commenced to assume the winter plumage, most of the lower parts being white, and white feathers appearing also on the back, head, and throat. In the case of the female the molt is shghtly more advanced than in either of the three males taken. In 1896, Loring reported taking one in Smoky Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House, on August 27, and on October 18 collected three from a flock of nine in Caribou Basin, 15 miles west of Henry House. In these specimens the winter plumage is complete, except for a few scattering feathers about the heads, and on the back of one. These specimens from the Henry House region are considerably smaller than birds from Hudson Bay and the Mackenzie. Five adult males from Great Bear Lake and Fort Simpson have an average wing measurement of 194; six adult females from the same locali- ties average 188. Adult males from Fort Churchill and the ‘ Bar- rens’ south of there have a wing measurement of 203, and females from 190 to 203, while males from near Henry House measure about 190 and females about 171. Since no specimens in summer plumage from the latter region are available, no satisfactory color comparisons can be made, but it is probable that the willow ptarmigans breeding in the southern Canadian Rockies will be found to be separable from those inhabiting the Barren Grounds and now included under the name L. lagopus. The dates of the arrival of willow ptarmigan at Lac du Brochet Post, Reindeer Lake, during the autumnal movement southward, as observed during a series of years, are incorporated in a table given on page 22. Corresponding dates for Fort Chipewyan appear in tabu- lar form on page 23. Franklin enumerated ‘ptarmigan,’ doubtless referring mainly to the present species, as one of the four birds which still re- mained about Fort Enterprise at the latter end of October, 1820. * Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 247, 1828. 1908.] BIRDS. 345 On his second northern journey he noted the *‘ willow partridge’ at Fort Franklin the last of October, 1825. Richardson, under the name 7etrao saliceti, made many general observations on the habits and other characteristics of the species, and gave a description of a male killed in July in the Rocky Mountains in latitude 56°.2. Dur- ing his third northern trip he recorded the species from Fort Frank- lin, where it commenced to assume the summer plumage toward the end of April.© In the winter of 1833-34 King noted the presence of willow ptarmigan at Fort Reliance, at the eastern end of Great Slave Lake, where they arrived about December 7.7 Thomas Simp- son, probably referring to this species, stated that ptarmigan had become perfectly white on September 24, 1837, on Dease Bay, Great Bear Lake:* and he found them numerous and mating at Dease River on June 8, 1838.7 While crossing Great Bear Lake between Cape McDonnell and the Scented Grass Hills in the autumn of 1839, he observed many white partridges which had been drowned in cross- ing the lake.% Under the name Lagopus albus, Ross listed the species as having been collected at Fort Simpson.” Willow ptarmigan have been re- corded, under various names, from a number of points on the Arctic islands. J.C. Ross states that they were seen at Port Bowen every month except January during the winter of 1824-25;' and that one pair was seen on the east side of Boothia in latitude 71°, and a few at Felix Harbor.6 Walker records the species from Port Kennedy.* Armstrong states that willow grouse were tolerably common in Prince of Wales Strait near Princess Royal Islands, May 31, 1851.! He also states, referring to the willow grouse (since he elsewhere states that no rock ptarmigan were killed there), that ptarmigan were killed at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, every month between Octo- ber, 1851, and April, 1853.” In the early sixties MacFarlane found the willow ptarmigan ex- eeedingly abundant in the neighborhood of Fort Anderson and in the wooded country to the eastward, and found many nests. The “ Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea. p. 60, 1828. +Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 358, 1831. © Arctic Searching Expedition, I], p. 254, 1851. @ Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 161, 1836. € Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 198, 1843. f Ibid., p. 248, 1843. 9 Tbid., p. 396, 1843. h Nat. Hist. Rey., II (second ser.), p. 284, 1862. 7 Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 101, 1826. j Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. XXVIII, 1835. k Proc. Roy. Soc. Dublin, III, p. 63, 1860. Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 337, 1857. mTbid., p. 601, 1857. 346 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. birds commenced to lay their eggs about the last of May, the molt to the summer plumage beginning a week or two earlier. They assem- bled in large flocks in autumn, but during the winter only small num- bers remained in that neighborhood, though the species was numerous at that season at Fort Good Hope and other posts on the Mackenzie.“ Eggs taken by MacFarlane near Fort Anderson have been described by Bendire.” Ogilvie-Grant has recorded specimens from Fort Reso- lution and Fort Simpson:° and the Smithsonian Institution received skins from Big Island, Anderson River, and La Pierre House. War- burton Pike found ptarmigan, undoubtedly this species, to be numer- ous about Lake Camsell, 75 miles north of the narrows of Great Slave Lake, on September 15, 1899.7. During the following year James MacKinlay, who accompanied Pike, found the birds numerous about Lac du Mort, south of Lake Mackay, on June 2, and noted that the necks of the birds were dark brown, though the rest of the plumage still remained white. On June 20 he noted that the female birds had acquired their summer plumage, but that the males were still white, with brown necks.’ Russell observed the species at Fort Rae in the winter of 1893-4, where he took specimens from October 2 to May 7. They arrived there on the Ist of October, and, having already begun to assume their winter plumage, were very conspicuous. They were much preyed upon by goshawks. A male taken May 7 had commenced to acquire the summer plumage.’ During his jour- ney down Telzoa River in the summer of 1893 J. B. Tyrrell first saw ptarmigan at a rapid, which he named from the circumstance, below Hinde Lake, in about latitude 61° 30’.9 J. W. Tyrrell records eggs found on Artillery Lake on May 30, 1900,’ and states that the birds were common on the eastern shore of that lake in latitude 63°, June 8 to 11 of the same year.‘ Hanbury noted that ptarmigan had com- menced to assume their summer plumage on May 21, 1902, at White Bear Point, near Ogden Bay;/ he found them common on Melville Sound early in June;” and noted fledgelings near the mouth of Ken- dall River July 30.! @Proe. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, pp. 430, 431, 1891. > Life Hist; N. A. Birds [1], p: 745 1892. “Cat. Birds Brio Muss Soa ps 4334593. 4Barren Ground of Northern Canada, p. 41, 1892. € Dowling (from MacKinlay’s notes), Ottawa Nat., VII, p. 109, 1898. f Expl. in Far North, pp. 86, 260, 1898. 9 Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., [X (new ser.), p. 46F, 1897. ’ Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada), 1900-1901, p. 137, 1902. 4 Tbid., p. 115, 1902. j Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 149, 1904. k Thid., p. 162, 1904. ‘ Ibid., p. 209, 1904. 1908.] BIRDS. 347 Lagopus rupestris (Gmel.). Rock Ptarmigan. The distribution of this species is similar to that of the willow ptarmigan, but in general it is a more northern bird than L. lagopus and is much less migratory. Edward Sabine states that during Parry’s first voyage it was found in great abundance on Melville Island, where it arrived on May 12, still in its winter plumage. The females completed their summer plumage by the end of the first week in June, but some of the males had not begun to change by the middle of the month. During Franklin’s second overland journey the species was noted at Fort Franklin late in October, 1825; % and Rich- ardson described a winter specimen from the same place and a female taken in summer on the Rocky Mountains in latitude 55°.¢ This last record indicates that Z. rwpestris breeds in the higher parts of the Rockies to the southward of its generally recognized range. The record has not been confirmed by later investigations, but it is not improbable. King noted the occurrence of the rock ptarmigan in the winter of 1833-34 at Fort Reliance, at the eastern end of Great Slave Lake;? and Richardson observed it in the summer of 1848 at Point Maitland, Liverpool Bay.e J. C. Ross records it from Port Bowen in October, 1824, where it was also seen from March to May, 1825. Armstrong states that it was common on Prince of Wales Strait. Harting records a specimen from Wellington Channel.” M’Dougall states that ptarmigan (probably of this species) were shot near Cape Hay, Prince Patrick Island (latitude 76°), and also on Eglinton Island, in the summer of 1853.‘ Ross recorded a specimen taken at Fort Good Hope. In the early sixties of the last century MacFar- lane found this species to be far less plentiful in the Anderson River region than ZL. /agopus, and met with it in numbers only between Wil-. mot Horton River and the shores of Franklin Bay. He intimates, however, that a few breed near the lower Anderson. In winter many were found in the forested country to the eastward of Fort Anderson.* Bendire records eggs taken in Gens de Large or Romanzoff Moun- tains, northeast of Fort Yukon, Alaska, in May, 1869, by James Mc- Dougall.’ Russell states that one was killed in the Barren Grounds 4Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, pp. cxcv, cxcvi, 1824. 5 Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 60, 1828. ¢€ Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 355, 356, 1831. . @ Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 166, 1836. € Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 264, 1851. f Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 99, 1826. 9 Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 521, 1857. 4 Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1871, p. 117. 7 Voyage of Resolute to Arctic Regions, pp. 291, 298, 1857. j Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 443, 1861. k Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, pp. 431, 482, 1891. ‘Life Hist. N. A. Birds [I], p. 78, 1892. 848 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. northeast of Fort Rae, over 100 miles from the edge of the woods, in April, 1894.¢ James MacKinlay, who accompanied Pike to the Bar- ren Grounds in 1890, first noted the bird on Lockhart River, between Mackay and Aylmer lakes, on June 25. At this time the males were still white, but the females had assumed the brown summer plumage.? In the National Museum are specimens from Fort Anderson taken in February, 1863; from Fort Rae, January 28, 1863; and from the Arctic coast east of Fort Anderson, taken by the Eskimo in. July, 1865. The bird catalogue records also skins from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, and Anderson River. Specimens from Cape Bathurst and Baillie Island, taken in June and July, 1901, probably by a whaler, were identified by Dr. A. K. Fisher, of the Biological Survey, in March, 1902. Lagopus leucurus Swains. and Rich. White-tailed Ptarmigan. The white-tailed ptarmigan occurs on the alpine summits of the Rocky Mountains throughout nearly their entire length. A young man who passed the winter of 1903-4 on Liard River a few miles above its mouth told me that among some ptarmigan brought in by the natives he noticed a very small one that was entirely white. This must have been a white-tailed ptarmigan. This species was first described from specimens taken by Drum- mond ‘on the Rocky Mountains in the fifty-fourth parallel,’ prob- ably in the Jasper House region. Four specimens from this region are mentioned, and another is said to have been taken on the same chain 9 degrees farther north.© Ross listed the species as occurring in the mountains of the Mackenzie River region north to La Pierre House, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.? A specimen in winter plumage, taken in the Nahanni Mountains to the westward of Fort Simpson, and which is probably the one alluded to, is still in the National Museum. Ross recorded also one collected at La Pierre House. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway describe one in winter plumage from Fort Halkett, on Liard River.’ Pediecetes phasianallus (Linn.). Sharp-tailed Grouse. The distribution of this grouse in the region now under considera- tion is nearly coextensive with the forest, though the bird is absent or very rare on its northern border. It breeds throughout this range, but to some extent is migratory. @Eixpl. in Far North, p. 261, 1898. 6 Dowling, from MacKinlay’s notes, Ottawa Nat., VII, p. 109, 1893. Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 356, 357, 1831. dNat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 284, 1862. €Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 448, 1861. f Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 464, 1874. - 1908.] BIRDS. 349 During the summer of 1901 we observed the first sharp-tailed grouse referred to this form near Poplar Point, 90 miles below Fort McMurray, May 16, when we saw one flying across the Athabaska. We saw several and took one near Fort Chipewyan Junel. After this we did not again see the bird until we reached Fort Smith, where we found it common and observed it daily June 19 to 28. An adult was taken on June 24 and a young one a few days old on June 27. The birds were abundant at Trout Rock July 16 and 17. Several broods of young were seen at Fort Rae July 19 to 29, and two were taken July 19. On our return trip a few old birds were seen on Smith Portage August 5. In 1903 this species was reported to occur at Hay River, and eggs taken about June 1 were shown in,support of the assertion. It was reported common on the upper reaches of Hay River. I first ob- served it on the eastern shore of the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake, 40 miles south ot Trout Rock, July 24. At Fort Rae a brood of young, accompanied by the parents, was seen July 28. One bird was noted on the lower part of Grandin River August 1. The species was not again detected until we reached the rapid on Bear River, September 29, where it was common. It was abundant and appar- ently migrating at Fort Norman October 1, and between there and Gravel River October 2 and 3. A few were noted near Fort Wrigley October 11, and above Nahanni River October 15. During the autumn of 1903 the species was occasionally observed at Fort Simp- son, and a number were collected. Their crops and stomachs usually contained nothing but the catkins of alders (Alnus alnobetula and incana), but one shot November 7 had eaten also a few berries of Viburnum poucifiorum. During January and February, 1904, I did not observe the species at Fort Simpson. I saw two on March 12, and others during the latter part of the month, noting 10 in a flock on March 24. During April the birds are said to dance on the crusted snow, but by that time they again had become rare in the vicinity, probably having moved northward, and I had no opportunity to observe the habit. During my voyage down the Mackenzie I failed to note the species, though it is said to occur at all the posts north to Fort McPherson. This bird was first recorded from the region by Richardson, who gave a description of a male killed at Great Slave Lake in November, 1826.* He afterwards traced the species as far north as the delta of the Mackenzie.” Ross listed it as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Good Hope, and as wintering in the region.° @Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 362, 1831. 6 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 179, 1851. € Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 283, 1862. 350 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Suckley, comparing specimens from Great Slave Lake with examples of one of the southern forms, renamed the species Pediocewtes kenni- cottii in 1862, recording specimens from Fort Rae and Big Island.¢ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway describe a specimen from Fort Resolu- tion,’ and the catalogues of the National Museum show that skins were received also from Fort Simpson, mountains west of Fort Simp- son, Fort Good Hope, and Fort Rae, as well as eggs from the latter place. MacFarlane found the species breeding in the forests on both sides of the Lockhart and upper Anderson rivers, and found a few nests.© Russell observed it near Prospect Lake, near the headwaters of Yellowknife River, late in July, 1893, and took specimens at Fort Rae October 4 to 7; referring to the bird as rather common there dur- ing the autumnal migration.? Pedicecetes phasianellus columbianus (Ord). Columbian Sharp-tailed | Grouse. This southern form of sharp-tailed grouse was abundant on the © road between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing April 29 to May 5, | 1901. They were found in small companies and when flushed usually _ alighted on poplars at a little distance away and excitedly resented | our intrusion. They were especially abundant in the farming lands near Edmonton. On our return trip several small flocks were seen in the fields near Sturgeon River September 3. In 1903 we noted a small flock near Sturgeon River May 12. The crop of a female collected there contained barley (60 per cent), small green leaves, myriapods, ants, and two species of beetles. Another small flock was noted 50 miles north of Edmonton May 14. During their return trip my brother and Cary found this grouse rather com- mon in the open country and cultivated fields between Athabaska Landing and Edmonton September 1 to 26. During my trip from Athabaska Landing to Edmonton, Septem- | ber 2 to 4, 1904, I observed this bird daily in small numbers. J. Alden Loring reported the birds common at Edmonton Sep- tember 7 to 26, 1894. They were found in flocks frequenting the grain fields, plowed land, and edges of thickets. In 1895, while re- turning from the mountains, he saw six individuals at Whitemud, on McLeod River, 135 miles in a direct line west of Edmonton, about | the middle of October. Macoun reports that in the summer of 1898 | Spreadborough (presumably while on his way to the mountains) saw the last birds of this species about 25 miles west of Edmonton.? | @Proc.: Acad. Nat: Sci. Phila. [EX1V{sp) so2 tsar ‘Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 434, 1874. ¢ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 432, 1891. @®xpl, in Far North, pp. 76, 261, 1898. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part I, p. 212, 1900. 1908.] - BIRDS. 351 Ectopistes migratorius (Linn.). Passenger Pigeon. This famous species formerly reached the Mackenzie River Valley, but apparently only in small numbers. Alexander Mackenzie, dur- ing his voyage of exploration to the mouth of the river in the summer of 1789, mentions seeing it in the- Hare Indian country—that is, in the Fort Good Hope region.¢. Hood mentions pigeons as occurring at Isle a la Crosse about the last of June, 1820, during Frankhn’s first northern journey.” Thomas Simpson noted the occurrence of the species at Fort Simpson in the summer of 1837, referring to it as follows: The fields here looked well, but had a troublesome enemy in the passenger pigeons. Except one at Salt River, we saw none of these graceful birds else- where throughout our journey.° Ross recorded it as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Norman, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson, but as being uncommon.’ I find no later records of the occurrence of the species anywhere in the region. Cathartes aura septentrionalis (Wied). Northern Turkey Vulture. Macoun states that three individuals were seen at different times at Edmonton, Alberta, during May, 1897.¢ Circus hudsonius (Linn.). Marsh Hawk. This harrier is apparently quite generally distributed throughout the wooded region, but is not common. A few were seen almost daily on the road between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, April 29 to May 5, 1901. After this, single individuals were seen at the mouth of the Athabaska, May 17; at Smith Landing, June 14; at Fort Smith, June 20, and 50 miles below Fort Smith, June 30. On our return trip one was seen near the mouth of La Biche River August 27, and one at Athabaska Landing August 31. In the spring of 1903 we saw half a dozen migrating individuals between Edmonton and Sturgeon River May 12, and four a short distance north of there May 13. We next saw the species at Fort Resolution June 22, and noted one bird on lower Grandin River August 1. During their return trip Alfred EK. Preble and Merritt Cary noted the species at Grand Rapid August 20, ahd near House River August 22. In 1904 I first noted this bird at Fort Simpson on April 23, and next recorded iton June 1. On June 11, while collecting in a muskeg 4 Voyages to Frozen and Pacific Oceans, p. 81, 1801. 6 Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 186, 1823. © Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 93, 1848. @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 283, 1862. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 220, 1903. 3D2 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. (NO. 27 at Fort Norman, I saw a pair and collected the male. Another bird was seen near the same place June 14. During my return trip single birds were observed near Little Red River, August 9; near Fort McMurray, August 10; and above Little Buffalo River, August 21. It was noted also below Athabaska Landing, September 1, and near Lily Lake, September 3. Richardson noted the marsh hawk as being found on Great Bear Lake.* Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was found breed- ing at Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, La Pierre House, and on lower Anderson River.? Concerning the latter record Mac- Farlane says: In June, 1865, an Esquimau snared a female bird on her nest on a willow bush along the lower Anderson River. It contained five eggs. In June, 1866, a nest composed of twigs and grasses, etc., was found in a similar position; there were six eggs, but they were unfortunately among those lost that season.¢ Bendire records an egg from this locality, probably one of the first set mentioned, stating that it is the largest specimen in the series examined.’ Besides specimens from the localities mentioned by Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway, the bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Good Hope and Fort Halkett; and an adult from the latter locality, taken by Lock- hart in May, 1863, is still in the colleen Russell records one taken near Fort Rae, Naren: 22, 1893.¢ Macoun records eggs taken by Spreadborough at Edmonton, Abeer June 2, 1897./ J. Alden Loring reported the species common at Edmonton, Sep- tember 7 to 26, 1894, and along the trail between Jasper House and Smoky River in the early autumn of 1896. Accipiter velox (Wils.). Sharp-shinned Hawk. In 1901 this species was first met with at our camp on Slave River, 10 miles below the Peace, where one was seen June 9, and where a specimen, perhaps the same individual, was taken the next day. Single birds were afterwards seen on Slave River, at points 25 miles — below the Peace June 12, and 100 miles below Fort Smith July 2. On our return trip one was seen on Smith Portage August 5, and ~ several on the Athabaska, between Grand Rapid and Athabaska ; Landing, August 92 to 29. | In 1903 we first noted the sharp-shinned hawk at Edmonton May | 10. We saw several between Athabaska Landing and Pelican Rapid | May 17 and 18, and next noted it on Slave River, 100 miles below | “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 57, 1831. 6 Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 220, 1874. eProe, Us s: ae Mus., XIV, p. 432, 1891. ; @Life Hist. N. A. Birds [I], p. 186, 1892. € Expl. in a North, p. 261, 1898. fCat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 224, 1903. 1908. ] BIRDS. 308 Fort Smith, June 17. On their return trip my brother and Cary noted one near Boiler Rapid August 17, and another at Athabaska Landing September 5, A pair with their nest, which contained young about to fly, was seen by myself in an open forest of pine and spruce on upper Grandin River, a short distance south of Lake Mazenod, August 5. The species was seen also on a small lake north of Lake Hardisty August 19. | In the spring of 1904, I first observed this bird at Fort Simpson May 20, taking a male specimen. Other individuals were noted on May 28 and 30. While descending the Mackenzie, I saw one below the site of old Fort Good Hope June 28. During my return trip I noted it at Fort McMurray August 12, near Mountain Rapid August 15, and near Grand Rapid August 22. Ross listed this species as occurring north to Fort Simpson, where he collected it;* Ridgway recorded specimens from Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, La Pierre House, and Fort Resolution, the latter locality represented by a specimen taken April 26 [1860], by Kennicott.? Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was found breeding on the upper Slave River by Ross, and at Fort Resolution by Kennicott; ¢ eggs taken at Fort Resolution June 16, 1860, by the last-named nat- uralist, are recorded by Bendire.? Russell took a specimen at Fort Rae August 17, 1893.¢ Accipiter cooperi (Bonap.). Cooper Hawk. While we were ascending the Athabaska in the autumn of 1901, one was seen at close range and satisfactorily identified near the mouth of La Biche River, August 27. This is apparently the only record for this region. Astur atricapillus (Wils.). Goshawk. This beautiful hawk breeds throughout the wooded parts of the region, and to some extent is migratory. A fine male was taken in a trap June 8, 1901, at our camp on Slave River 10 miles below the Peace. While we were on our way to Great Slave Lake, another was seen 150 miles below Fort Smith. He was feeding on a full-grown varying hare, and on our approach flew away with his quarry. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary, during their return journey in the autumn of 1903, noted single birds at Swift Current Rapid August 27, La Biche River August 28, and Athabaska Landing September 5 and 12. They saw several also between Athabaska @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 276, 1862. 6 Bull. 2, U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. Terr., II, pp. 114, 115, 1876. ebist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, 111, p..229, 1874. eeate Hist. N: A. Birds [1],. p. 187, 1892. €Expl. in Far North, p. 261, 1898. 44131 —No. 27—_08——23 354 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. Landing and Lily Lake September 21 to 24. One seen a few miles north of the latter point on September 24 had a freshly killed: ruffed grouse in its talons. It was flying through the pine woods with its quarry, and, becoming startled by suddenly perceiving the party, dropped the grouse, which fell into the midst of the company, then at breakfast. While ascending Grandin River on August 3, I found a nest of this species from which the young had just flown, and col- lected one of the young birds near by. The nest was bulky and was built in a medium-sized birch 15 feet from the ground. I noted one individual on the shore of Great Bear Lake 40 miles west of McVicar Bay September 12, and several near Manito Islands September 15. A bird of the year shot at the latter place had been eating a ptar- migan. I noted another at Fort Franklin September 18. While ascending the Mackenzie, I saw the species near Roche Trempe- — Veau October 9, and daily between Nahanni River and Fort Simpson October 13 to 20. The birds observed appeared to be mostly young of the year, though a few were adults. During the latter part of October and the first part of November I found the species rather common at Fort Simpson, but during December I noted it but twice— __ on the 2d and 27th. | During January, 1904, I saw only a single bird—on January 14— | and during February saw none. On March 24 I observed two pairs | evidently newly arrived from the south. During the early part of | April I noted goshawks, usually in pairs, on several occasions. In | one instance I surprised one in the act of eating a varying hare which | it had taken from a snare. A pair were evidently contemplating | nesting in a tract of poplar woods near the banks of Liard River to | the southward of the post, but the breaking up of the ice late in April | put a stop to my excursions in that direction. I failed to observe | the bird during the summer. While ascending the Athabaska on my return trip I saw one a short distance below Athabaska Landing, | Alberta, September 1, and I observed another a short distance south of that place September | Under the name Astur palumbarius, Richardson mentions a speci- | men killed near Jasper House.*. Ross lsted this species as being i found in the Mackenzie Valley north to Fort Good Hope, but as‘ rare.2 A specimen from Fort Simpson, taken by R. MacDonald, is | in the National Museum, and the catalogue of the birds shows thet ! skins were received also from Big Island and Fort Good Hope. | | MacFarlane believed that the species bred in small numbers in the wooded country between Fort Good Hope and Anderson River.’ | “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p, 48, 1831. bNat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 276, 1862. ©Proc._U. S. Nat:-Mus:, XclV, ps 4024cs ore 1908.] BIRDS. 355 Russell took a number of specimens in the late summer and the autumn of 1893 at Fort Rae, where he reported it the commonest representative of the order. After the arrival of the ptarmigan from the north about the 1st of October, the goshawks preyed principally upon them.? Macoun states that Spreadborough found the species not uncommon and evidently breeding at Edmonton, Alberta, in June, 1897;? and records, on the authority of Raine, a set of three eggs taken by Doctor George in northern [now central] Alberta, May 10, 1894.¢ Eggs, collected with the female parent at the Hudson’s Bay Com- pany post on Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, in April, 1891, by Daniel Thomas, were received by the National Museum through MacFarlane. J. Alden Loring reported the species common in the foothills of the Rockies west of Edmonton, Alberta, in the early autumn of 1895. Buteo borealis calurus Cass. Western Red-tailed Hawk. This powerful hawk occurs throughout the region north to the limit of trees. _In the spring of 1901 one was seen on the road near Sturgeon River May 1. The species was next noted near the outlet of Athabaska Lake June 2, when a pair was observed, and another pair was seen near the mouth of the Peace June 6. Single birds were observed 10 miles below the Peace June 6, 25 miles below June 13, and near Fort Smith June 24. At a point on Slave River 100 miles below Fort Smith a pair was seen July 1, and their nest, which contained young, was discovered in a large balsam poplar near the river. One or two single birds were observed not far below here on the following day. On our return trip, single birds were seen at Fort McMurray August 12, below Pelican Rapid August 23, near La Biche River August 27, and 50 miles north of Edmon- ton September 2. In 1903 we first noted this species near Athabaska Landing May 14, and again near that place May 15. We next saw it on the Atha- baska 50 miles below the Landing May 17, and observed a melanistic individual a few miles farther down on the following day. We saw a pair near the outlet of Athabaska Lake June 5, and a single one near the mouth of the Peace June 9. A nest was found on an island a few miles below Fort Smith June 15, and the male, a melanistic bird, secured. The female was seen to be normally colored. The species was noted between there and Fort Resolution on June 16, 18, and 19. My brother and Cary observed it at Fort Simpson July 10 and at Nahanni River July 12. On their return trip they fre- @Expl. in Far North, pp. 86, 261, 1898. 6 Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 227, 1903. ¢Tbid., p. 229, 1903. 356 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. quently noted the bird while ascending the Athabaska, and found it common near Athabaska Landing August 31 to September 21, observing two melanistic birds September 5. Several individuals were seen at Lily Lake September 24. During my trip northward from Fort Rae, I observed the species on Grandin River August 1 and 3 and on Lake Faber August 8. I next noted it while descend- ing Bear River September 30, when I saw several a few miles above Fort Norman. They seemed to be hunting varying hares, which were abundant. In the spring of 1904 I saw the first redtail at Fort Simpson May 7, and others on May 15 and 22. While descending the Mackenzie I saw the species nearly every day between Fort Simpson and Fort Norman June 2 to 10. The melanistic and normal phases seemed to be about equally represented. I saw one near the head of the Ramparts June 20 and another below Fort Good Hope June 25. On my return trip I observed a melanistic individual a short distance below Fort Norman July 25, and birds of the normal coloration below Fort Smith August 3, near Poplar Point August 8, near Grand Rapid August 22, near House River August 24, and near Pelican Rapid August 26, "collecting the last one. J. Alden Loring saw red eaticd hawks at Edmonton, Alberta, on September 13 and 20, 1894, and reported the species common on the Jasper House trail between Edmonton and the Rocky Mountains in the summers of 1895 and 1896. Macoun records a nest of two eggs, probably belonging to the west- ern form, taken at Edmonton May 17, 1897, by Spreadborough.* Buteo swainsoni Bonap. Swainson Hawk. This western hawk is rare over most of the region now under con- sideration, but has been reported from a few localities. On May 18, 1903, we saw a single bird, apparently a male, a few miles north of Sturgeon River, Alberta. This species was taken by MacFarlane in the Anderson River country and referred to as follows: In July, 1861, we discovered a nest of this species, which was built on a spruce tree along Onion River, the principal tributary of the Lockhart. It contained two well-grown birds. Both parents were about and made a great ado in endeavoring to protect their offspring. The male was shot. In June, 1865, another nest was found on the top crotch of a tall pine in a ravine some | 20 miles southeast of Fort Anderson. In composition it was similar to the nest of an Archibuteo. The female was shot as she got off her nest, which | contained but one egg in a well-developed stage. The male was not seen.?® The male obtained by MacFarlane, a melanistic specimen, was described by Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway, who state that the species @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part Ii; p. 231903: ® Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 432, 1891. i | | 1908.] BIRDS. SO was obtained also by Ross on the Mackenzie. Ross, however, does not appear to have taken specimens.and may have been mistaken as to the species. Buteo platypterus (Vieill.). Broad-winged Hawk. Apparently a regular summer inhabitant of the southern part of the Athabaska region. On May 8, 1903, we saw one in the wooded valley of the Saskatchewan near Edmonton. It was im suspicious proximity to an old nest and possibly imtended to reoccupy it. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary saw one on the Athabaska a few miles above Athabaska Landing on September 5 of the same year. J. Alden Loring found a nest of this species on the Jasper House trail 12 miles west of Ste. Anne, Alberta, May 27, 1896. It was in the crotch of a poplar about 40 feet from the ground, was loosely con- structed of dry twigs, with a lining of green leaves, and contained two eggs. The female was shot as she left the nest and is now in the Biological Survey collection. Archibuteo lagopus sancti-johannis (Gmel.). American Rough-legged Hawk. ; This Arctic species has peen recorded from various points in the region now under consideration. It probably breeds throughout this area, though most abundantly in its northern portion. In the spring of 1901 single birds were seen 10 miles north of Edmonton, May 1; on the Athabaska below Fort McMurray, May 14; and on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipewyan, May 24. The species was noted near Sturgeon River May 12, 1903, when two birds were seen. It was next observed on Great Bear Lake to the eastward of McVicar Bay, where I saw two individuals on Sep- tember 8. I observed several while descending Bear River, Sep- tember 29 and 30, and while ascending the Mackenzie from Tort Norman noted these birds daily, October 1 to 16, moving southward along the valley. The latter date, when the cold had increased so that the ice had begun to drift freely in the river, seemed to mark the de- parture of this and several other species, and the bird was last noted at this time, 50 miles north of Fort Simpson. While ascending the Athabaska the same autumn, my brother and Cary saw several be- tween Quito River and La Biche River, August 27 to 29. They found it common about Athabaska Landing, September 1 to 15, and on the Edmonton trail between the Landing and Lily Lake, Septem- ber 21 to 24, noting many immature birds. Though so common in the valley of the Mackenzie in autumn, this species must perform its spring migration by some other route, since during the spring of 1904 only two individuals were seen, on April 28 and May 3. at Fort Simpson. OAEISt, No AL Birds, Land Birds, III, pp. 264, 269, 1874. 8358 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. : [No. 27. Richardson mentions a specimen killed by Drummond on ‘ Smoking River.’* Ross listed A. lagopus as common throughout the Macken- zie River region north to La Pierre House, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson;? and the bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from these localities and from Fort Resolution, Kennicott noted the species at Fort Resolution on May 7, 1860.¢ MacFarlane found the bird abundant in the Anderson River region, both in the forested country and on the Arctic coast, and saw upward of 70 nests during the several seasons. The majority were built on trees, but 15 were on cliffs or banks.? Bendire records eggs taken by Maclarlane on Anderson River on May 23 and June 16, 1863.¢ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway describe an adult male in the normal plumage taken at Fort Resolution by Lockhart.’ Russell records a specimen taken at Herschel Island August 4, 1894.2 Ma- coun, on the authority of Raine, records eggs taken by Stringer at Mackenzie Bay; he also mentions a nest with 3 eggs found by Bishop Lofthouse on Artillery Lake, June 4, 1900.". In the summer of 1896 J. Alden Loring reported seeing several in the foothills of the Rocky Mountains in western Alberta, and took a male on the Smoky River trail between Muskeg Creek and Baptiste River, September 30. Aquila chrysaétos (Linn.). Golden Eagle. This cosmopolitan species is found throughout the wooded region, but occurs more commonly in the vicinity of mountains, probably on account of the advantages they afford for nesting. It is migratory to some extent, though many individuals brave the winter in high latitudes. In 1901 one was seen a short distance below Athabaska Landing May 6. The species were not again noted until we were crossing Great Slave Lake July 10, when I observed one about an island 50 miles north of Fort Resolution. In 1903 I noted the first individual of this species near Gros Cape, Great Slave Lake, July 24. Several were seen in the range of moun- tains south of MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake, August 26. Hyries were common on the cliffs here, but as the bald and golden eagles were equally common, particular nests could not be attributed to either species with certainty. The species was next noted on the Mac- kenzie near Gravel River October 6, and a fine individual was seen “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 52, 1831. 5 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 276, 1862. Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 170, 1869. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, pp. 432, 433, 1891. € Life Hist. N. A. Birds [I], p. 259, 1892. i Hist. N. A. Birds, Wand Birds, Lil) py 304 sie 9 Expl. in Far North, p. 262, 1898. ; “Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 241, 1903. 1908.] BIRDS. 359 sailing about over Roche Trempe-l’eau, a fitting resort for this ma- jestic bird, on October 9. Another was noted 20 miles below Nahanni River October 13. While ascending the Athabaska, Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary saw two flying about the sandstone cliffs near Brulé Rapid August 19. , While descending the Mackenzie in June, 1904, I saw a fine adult flying about some steep cliffs on Mount Tha-on’-tha on July 4, and another near the same place two days later. They were probably nesting in the vicinity, as ideal sites were plentiful. Later I saw one near the site of old Fort Good Hope, July 18, and on my return trip noted another at Spence River, 35 miles above Fort Simpson, July 28. While ascending the Athabaska in August I collected a female at Crooked Rapid, August 17. It had just eaten a woodchuck (Marmota m. canadensis), leaving only the skin and head. Perceiv- ing the eagle perched on a limestone ledge, I approached stealthily under cover of its overhanging edge, and not having a gun, bowled her over with a stone. I observed another near Athabaska Landing September 2. Richardson described a specimen killed by Drummond on the east- ern side of the Rocky Mountains in latitude 55°.* Ross recorded the species as rare in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.? About the same time MacFarlane found about a dozen nests in the Anderson River Valley, and on the banks of Horton River. Most of these were on the faces of steep banks, and contained two eggs.° The bird cata- logue of the National Museum records skins received from Fort Resolution; Fort Simpson; Fort Liard; Fort Anderson; Anderson River; Arctic coast; and Cape Bathurst, the latter specimen collected by the Eskimo. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway describe eggs taken by R. MacDonald in the mountains west of the lower Mackenzie.? J. B. Tyrrell mentions that a large golden eagle was shot beside its nest on a rocky cliff overlooking Stone River, just east of Athabaska Lake, in the summer of 1892.¢ In the early autumn of 1895 J. Alden Loring found the golden eagle common along the trail between Edmonton, Alberta, and the Jasper House region, four being seen together on one occasion in the mountains. The stomach of a female shot near Jasper House con- tained the remains of young varying hares. In 1896 Loring reported the species quite common in the high mountains near Henry House “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 138, 1831. b Nat. Hist. Rev. II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. © Proce. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 433, 1891. 4Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 320, 1874. € Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., VIII (new ser.), p. 14D, 1896. 360 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. July 8 to 21, as well as above timber line in the mountains to the northward of Jasper House in the late summer and early autumn. Halixetus leucocephalus alascanus Townsend. Bald Eagle. The bald eagle is quite generally distributed over the wooded por- tion of the region and breeds throughout this area. Though the birds usually migrate, some remain in winter as far north at least as Great Slave Lake. While descending the Athabaska in the spring of 1901 we saw a single bird near Brulé Rapid May 11. This was the only one seen during the season. In 1903 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary noted the species at Fort Providence on July 2 and 8. I saw one individual among the Simpson Islands, about 50 miles northeast of Fort Resolution, July 21. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I found this a com- mon species in the mountainous country south of Great Bear Lake. It was first noted on Lake Hardisty August 18, when a nest, near which the birds still lingered, was seen on a cliff near the water. It was also noted almost daily in the mountains immediately south of MacTavish Bay August 22 to 27. In 1904 I saw the species but once, noting a fine adult near the junction of the Peel and the Mackenzie June 30. The ‘nonne’ or bald eagle is enumerated among the birds of Great Bear Lake by George Keith, a trader of the Northwest Com- pany, in a letter written from there in 1812, containing the earliest account of the fauna of that region.* Richardson stated that it was common in the country between Lake Superior and Great Slave Lake; and King noted it on the Athabaska below the mouth of the Clearwater in the summer of 1833.¢ During Richardson’s third journey to the Arctic Sea he found it nesting on Great Bear River.? | Ross listed it as occurring commonly in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast, and as having been collected at Fort Simp- | son. MacFarlane found several nests in high trees on Anderson | and Lockhart rivers, where, however, the species was not numerous.’ | Besides specimens from these two localities, the bird catalogue of the National Museum records skins from Fort Resolution, Big Island, and Fort Rae, the last accompanied by eggs. In the summer of 1892, while engaged in exploring the country between Athabaska Lake and Churchill River, J. B. Tyrrell observed a few bald eagles.7 Rus- sell mentions seeing one in the lake country to the north of Fort Rae “@ Masson, Les Bourgeois, II, p. 102, 1890. ® Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 15, 1831. ¢ Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 95, 1886. @ Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 202, 1851. € Nat, Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. f Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 434, 1891. 9 Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., VIII (new ser.), p. 14D, 1896. 1908. ] BIRDS. 361 early in November, 1893; and several near the mouth of Peel River June 25, 1894. Macoun, on the authority of Raine, records eggs taken in northern (now central) Alberta.© In the early autumn of 1895 J. Alden Loring saw one near Jasper House, Alberta. Falco rusticolus gyrfalco Linn. Gyrfalcon. On August 29, 1903, I saw a gyrfalcon on the ‘ barrens’ near our camp east of Leith Point, Great Bear Lake. Another was seen near the same place August 31. It appeared to be in pursuit of a wounded ptarmigan, which had towered and finally fallen, and which it had evidently seen from a distance. Though loath to leave its prospective prey, the hawk was shy and eluded my efforts to approach, and after a few short flights from tree to tree flew away to. the southward. A species of gyrfalcon to which this name is supposed to apply was found by MacFarlane to be common in the wooded country on both sides of Anderson River, where over 20 nests were found, most of which were in trees. The earliest nest was found May 10. A speci- men (No. 43139, “ 9 and two eggs”), taken by MacFarlane at Fort Anderson May 25, 1864, which served as the type of Ridgway’s de- seription of Falco g. sacer® and another taken at Fort Anderson May 27, 1864, are now in the National Museum. Bendire records that eggs were taken by MacFarlane near Anderson River; ¢ and various other published records are based on the same specimens. Under the name Falco islandicus Richardson speaks of finding a nest about the middle of June (1821) on a lofty precipice on the shore of Point Lake.’ This record probably refers to the present form. Armstrong, under the name of Hierofalco candicans, states that an individual was shot near Prince Alfred Cape, Banks Land, September 5, 1851, and that several others were seen later.’ J.C. Ross, under the name Falco islandicus, records several seen at Victoria Harbor in August and September, 1832, and states that the species breeds at Felix Harbor.” These records may also refer to the present species. Falco peregrinus anatum Bonap. Duck Hawk. This powerful falcon is distributed in summer throughout the wooded portion of the region. Since it requires cliffs or cut banks for nesting, it is necessarily of somewhat local distribution, but 1s fairly common along the larger rivers and in mountainous districts. @Wxpl. in Far North, p. 90, 1898. 6 Tbid., p. 138, 1898. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 247, 1903. dist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 115, 1874: €Life Hist. N. A. Birds [I], p. 285, 1892. _f Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 28, 1831. 9 Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 426, 1857. h Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxv, 1835. 362 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. In 1901 we saw a pair about a high bank beside the Athabaska near Brulé Rapid May 11, and a single bird on the Quatre Fourches marsh May 23. We next noted the species 25 miles below Fort. Smith June 30, when we saw a pair and discovered their nest on the brink of the river bank, at this poimt about 40 feet in height and nearly perpendicular. The nest was merely a slight hollow beneath the drooping branches of a white spruce, and contained two young, 10 or 12 days old, and shghtly clothed with white down. ‘Their stom- achs contained the remains of small birds, of which I could identify only one species, the Louisiana tanager. The duck hawk was not again noted until we were ascending the Athabaska August 17, when we saw several immature birds near Boiler Rapid. We noted single birds above Grand Rapid August 22, and above La Biche River August 27. In 1903 we noted single birds on the Athabaska, 50 miles below Athabaska Landing, May 17, and below Grand Rapid May 25, and on Slave River, near Smith Landing, June 10. My brother and Cary saw a pair about a high cliff on Mount Tha-on’-tha July 13, and an- other pair near the base of the mountain on July 14 and 16. On their return trip they frequently observed duck hawks about the high banks along the Athabaska during August. Near House River on August 21 one swooped down at a drake mallard which was flying up the river, and was seen to pursue it until a sharp bend hid the birds. While ascending Grandin River August 2 I passed through a gorge where the stream was bordered by precipitous granitic cliffs. On one of these I discovered a nest of this species, evidently contain- ing young, and secured the male bird. I noted the species also on upper Grandin River August 4, and saw a pair which had a nest on a cliff a few miles south of MacTavish Bay August 22. They were very solicitous when the nesting site was approached, evidently be- cause the young had not yet flown. I noted a single bird still lnger- ing in the vicinity of a nesting site on the shore of Great Bear Lake, east of Leith Point, August 28, and observed migrants at Fort Frank- lin September 21 and 28. I noted the species also on Bear River near Fort Norman September 30, and lastly on the Mackenzie above Gravel River October 6. In the spring of 1904 I did not detect this species during migra- tion, and noted it first a few miles below Fort Norman on June 16, when I saw a male bird flying about a cliff close to the shore. At Wolverene Rock I observed a nesting pair June 18. On the evening of June 25, as we were paddling down the Mackenzie a few miles below Fort Good Hope, I noticed a pair whose suspicious actions made me certain that a nest was hidden somewhere on the face of the sloping clay bank. Accordingly, we went ashore, and after a short search found it. It was merely a slight hollow on the brink of 1908.1 BIRDS. 363 a steep portion of the bank beneath a small white spruce, the fallen needles of which covered the ground and lined the nest. The female and the three eggs, which were about half incubated, were collected. While ascending the Mackenzie by steamer between the lower Ram- parts and Sans Sault Rapid July 17 to 19, I observed several pairs along the high banks. Their loud cries and suspicious actions indi- cated that they had young broods. While ascending the Athabaska I noted the species near Boiler Rapid August 18. MacFarlane found this species breeding in the country to the south- ward of Fort Anderson, and thinks it does not breed much north of that post.* Eggs taken by him on Lockhart River June 5, 1866, are recorded by Bendire.” Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway describe a specimen from Fort Resolution, and mention others from La Pierre House, Peel River, Fort Anderson, and Fort Good Hope.° Russell took a female at Herschel Island August 16, 1894.4 Macoun records a specimen taken by Spreadborough at Edmonton, Alberta, May 15, 1897.° Walker records specimens taken at Port Kennedy in 1859./ Falco columbarius Linn. Pigeon Hawk. In 1901 we first noted this bird at Smith Landing, where we took a male June 15. I did not see the species again until July 15, when I landed on the north shore of Great Slave Lake, near the Northern Arm, where I saw a pair and found their nest, apparently a deserted crow’s nest, which was in a white spruce 20 feet from the ground. It held five half-grown young, two of which were preserved. Their stomachs contained the remains of an unidentified species of sparrow. I saw another pigeon hawk, which evidently had a nest near by, on a wooded island 60 miles south of Fort Rae July 16, and shot a male at Trout Rock on the evening of the same day. p.436. @soie f Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 170, 1869. 9Hxpl. in Far North, p. 262, 1898. Nuk) XEXGV pi a 1S 08: 1908.] BIRDS. 367 were still there. In 1896 he saw one on Miette River, near Henry House, July 23. Asio wilsonianus (Less.). - Long-eared Owl. On May 10, 1904, I secured a male in a thicket of mixed woods at Fort Simpson. The species was unknown to the inhabitants and is undoubtedly rare so far north. The stomach contents of my speci- men comprised seven individuals of A/icrotus drummondi (two adults and five naked young), and one red-backed vole (Hvotomys dawsont). Sharpe records a specimen taken by Ross at Fort Simpson; it is probably the same one previously recorded from that place by Ross, who gives the species as rare.” An egg taken at Fort Simpson by Ross on May 1 (year not stated) is in the British Museum.° Mac- Farlane, in a manuscript list, states that two eggs, together with the female parent, were taken by an Indian at Fort Providence April 14, 1885. The specimens were identified by J. J. Dalgleish. An- other female was obtained at Fond du Lac, Athabaska Lake, the same season. ‘These seem to be the only previous instances of the capture of the species in the Mackenzie Valley. Macoun states that Spreadborough found it not uncommon in the woods about Edmonton in May, 1897, and that he took a set of eggs there on May 15.7 J. Alden Loring took one and saw another at Edmonton September 11, 1894. Asio flammeus (Pontoppidan). Short-eared Owl.¢ This cosmopolitan species occurs in summer throughout the Atha- baska-Mackenzie region north to the Arctic coast, and breeds in suit- able places over this area. Several individuals were seen on the road north of Edmonton on the afternoon of April 30, 1901. They were usually flying in pairs, and the males frequently swooped down toward their mates from a considerable height, holding their wings high above the back and uttering peculiar quavering cries. The species was next noted on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipewyan, May 24, when a single bird was observed. Another was seen on a semibarren island near the mouth of the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake *Cat. Birds Brit. Mus:, II, p. 230, 1875. ’ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. € Oates, Cat. Birds’ Eggs Brit. Mus., II, p. 319, 1902. 4Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, pp. 264, 265, 1903. “Ross lists (Canadian Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 442, 1861) one specimen of Scops asio as having been taken at Fort Simpson. In his subsequent more extended article (Ibid., VII, pp. 187-155, 1862) he does not mention Scops asio, but adds to his first list two species of small owls, one of which probably he had previously incorrectly identified as a screech owl. 368 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. July 15. Et was being vigorously assailed by barn swallows, which were nesting on the precipitous sides of the island. In 1903 we saw several at Edmonton May 10, and while on our way to Athabaska Landing May 11 to 15 noted a number nearly every day. On their return trip in the fall my brother and Cary observed single birds near Athabaska Landing on September 2 and 20. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I saw one on Lake Faber on August 7. On Great Bear Lake I saw one near McVicar Bay September 9, and another 40 miles west of that place Septem- ber 12. In the spring of 1904 I first recorded the bird at Fort Simpson April 28, noting one. A pair, both of which had been eating meadow voles (Microtus drummondi), were collected May 5. Another speci- men was taken May 12, and one bird was seen May 14. At Willow River, near Fort Providence, J. W. Miils collected a male on May 1. The series collected exhibits considerable variation in color. Richardson describes a female bird, which contained eggs nearly ready for exclusion, killed at Fort Franklin May 20 [1826].* King noted the species at Fort Reliance, at the eastern end of Great Slave Lake, in the spring of 1835.2 Ross recorded it as common in the Mackenzie River region, and as having been collected at Fort Simp- son.° MacFarlane found it fairly common in the Anderson River region, in both the wooded country and Barren Grounds;? Bendire records eggs taken by MacFarlane near Fort Anderson June 30, 1865.° The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, and Lesser Slave Lake. J. Alden Loring took a specimen at Edmon- ton September 18, 1894, this being the only one he noted there during the last three weeks of September. Scotiaptex nebulosum (Forst.). Great Gray Owl. Though apparently quite generally distributed throughout the wooded portions of the region, this species seems nowhere to be very common and is seldom observed. One was seen by James MacKinlay near Liard River, to the south- ward of Fort Simpson, about the middle of November, 1903, and another by A. F. Camsell on the Liard-Mackenzie portage on Feb- ruary 26, 1904. On April 22, 1904, a fine adult female was taken in a steel trap which I had set on the summit of a pole. The species was next met with a short distance below the mouth of the Nahanni 4Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 75, 76, 1831. 6 Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 135, 1886. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 436, 1891. € Life Hist. N. A. Birds [I], p. 335, 1892. 1908. ] BIRDS. 369 during my trip down the Mackenzie. While passing an extensive ‘brulé’ on the left bank during the afternoon of June 6 I noticed a large nest on a tree about a hundred yards up the side of the valley from the river. On a nearer approach a large gray head became vis- ible over the edge of the nest, and I realized that I had discovered a nest of the great gray owl. Making a landing, I made my way through the tangled mass of fallen timber to the base of the tree and by a few raps with the ax induced the sitting bird to leave the nest. She darted with a rapid swooping flight toward the nearest woods, but as I desired her for a specimen, I shot her before she gained its shelter. The nest was about 50 feet up in a large dead and leaning spruce; and as I did not dare to climb it, I felled the tree to secure the young birds which I felt sure the nest contained. They proved to be two in number, evidently 2 or 3 weeks old, and were clothed with grayish down. In the nest were the partially eaten remains of three young rabbits about the size of red squirrels. The nest was a plat- form of sticks, nearly flat and practically without lining, and meas- ured about 2 feet in diameter. Both this bird and the Fort Simpson specimen had deep straw-colored irises. A roughly mounted specimen was obtained from Pere Ducot, of Fort Good Hope, later in the season. Two eggs collected by Baptiste Bouvier from a nest in a tamarack near Fort Providence in April measure 59 by 49 and 57.8 by 474 mm. The set contained three eggs, one of which was broken. J. W. Mills collected an adult at Willow River, near Fort Providence, May 20, 1904. Richardson first recorded the species, stating that it was common on the shores of Great Bear Lake, giving a description of a specimen killed there | probably at Fort Franklin], and mentioning a nest found May 23, evidently near the same locality. King noted the species at Fort Resolution in May, 1835.2 In the Anderson River country MacFarlane found but one nest during several seasons spent there. This was found July 19, 1862, near Lockhart River, on the route between Fort Anderson and Fort Good Hope.° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record specimens from Fort Resolution, Big Island, and La Pierre House;? and the bird catalogue in the National Mu- seum shows that skins were received also from Fort Rae, Peel River, and Lockhart River. Russell records one taken at Fort Rae May 4, 1894.° Macoun,on the authority of Raine,records eggs taken by Dippie in the Red Deer River district, Alberta,in the spring of 1896,and states “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 77, 78, 1831. 5 Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 196, 1836. €Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 436, 1891. @ Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p 33, 1874. € Expl. in Far North, p. 262, 1898. 44131—No. 2708-24 370 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No 27. on the same authority that it breeds at the mouth of the Mackenzie." In the summer of 1896 J. Alden Loring found a dead one in the Blueberry Hills, about 100 miles in a direct line west of Edmonton, May 29, and saw one at Whitemud Lake, about 35 miles farther west. on June 6. He killed another on Stony River, about 25 miles north of Jasper House, August 25. On October 20 he shot another at Henry House. The day being cloudy, the bird was hunting by day- light and was easily approached. Its stomach contained a number of shrews. MacFarlane, in a manuscript list, records a nest containing two fresh eggs, taken, together with one of the parent birds, near Fort Chipewyan on April 20, 1880. Glaux funerea richardsoni (Bonap.). Richardson Owl. This fine owl is quite generally distributed throughout the wooded portion of the region in summer, but retires in winter from about the northern half of this area. It is usually rather rare and is seldom observed, though it is to a considerable extent diurnal in habits. A pair of these owls was seen in heavy mixed woods beside the Athabaska, 75 miles below Fort McMurray, on the evening of May 15, 1901. I was attracted to them by their notes, which suggested those of the saw-whet owl, but were more varied. I obtained several glimpses of the birds as they darted back and forth among the sum- | mits of the lofty spruces. in the deep twilight, but was unable to ob- tain one. The species was next met with at our camp on Slave River, 10 miles below the Peace, June 7, when a nest containing three nearly fledged young was discovered. It was in a deserted hole of a flicker, about 20 feet from the ground in a large balsam poplar stub, in deep woods. The young were collected. Neither of the old birds was seen about the nest, but during the night the female was taken in a trap placed on a pole near by for that purpose. The stomachs of the | young birds contained the remains of white-footed mice (Peromyscus arcticus), meadow voles (Microtus drummondi), and red-backed voles | (Evotomys g. athabasce), and a matted layer an inch and a half in thickness, composed of the bones and hair of these species, filled the . bottom of the cavity. Two of the young are males, the other, so . much larger that it must have been older than the rest of the brood, . is a female. They vary but little in coloration, being dark brown | above, and without spots, excepting a few on the wings and tail; | sides of head dusky brown; white on face confined to the region about gape and to a few feathers on forehead; breast and belly brown, mixed with dull white posteriorly. At our camp 25 miles | below the mouth of the Peace, on June 12, my brother shot an adult | @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 271, 1903. 1908.] BIRDS. Sill male in a dense thicket of small spruces. The species was not else- where detected during that season. In the spring of 1903 this species was first noted about 20 miles south of Athabaska Landing on the evening of May 14. ‘During my trip northward from Fort Rae to Great Bear Lake I saw single birds on Lake Hardisty August 18, and a few miles north of there on the following day. I saw one at Fort Franklin September 20, and one near the head of Bear River September 28, both during the mid- dle of the day. The species was last seen on the Mackenzie, 10 miles above Gravel River, October 4, when a single bird was seen perched on a dead tree beside the river. In a small collection recently received from J. W. Mills are two specimens, both males, taken at Fort Simpson February 18 and in April, 1905. Under the name Strix tengmalmz, Richardson mentions two speci- mens of this owl taken in the Rocky Mountains near the source of Peace River.* Ross listed it as being rather rare in the Mackenzie River region, where it wintered, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.’ Eggs taken by Ross at Fort Simpson in 1861, after being several times recorded, are referred to by Bendire, as late as 1892, as follows: “ The only genuine eggs of Richardson’s Owl in the U. S. National Museum collection are three collected by Mr. Ross at Fort Simpson * * * on May 4, 1861.’¢ Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record skins from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, and Fort Simpson.? MacFarlane did not take the species in the Anderson River region, but thinks that he observed it in the country between Fort Good Hope and the Anderson.? In some notes recently sent me he states that one was shot at Fond du Lac, Atha- baska Lake, in May, 1885. Glaux acadica (Gmel.). Saw-whet Owl. We heard the notes of several of these birds a few miles north of Edmonton during the evening of May 30, 1901. On our return trip, while encamped on the Athabaska near Big Mouth Brook, on the night of August 26, we again heard the notes of this species several times. Macoun records specimens taken at Edmonton, Alberta, by Spreadborough.’ “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 96, 1831. 5 Nat. Hist. Rey., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. € Life Hist. N. A. Birds [I], p. 349, 1892. d Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 42, 1874. €Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 487, 1891. f Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 274, 1903. ——— ns 372 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Bubo virginianus subarcticus Hoy. Arctic Horned Owl. This species occurs rather commonly in summer throughout the region north to the limit of trees. It is to some extent migratory, retiring in winter from the northern portion of its range, and then becoming much more abundant than in summer over the region southward from Great Slave Lake. In the spring of 1901 the notes of great horned owls, probably this form, were heard near Vermilion Creek, 40 miles north of Ed- monton, May 3; on the Athabaska 60 miles below Fort McMurray, May 15; and near Fort Chipewyan May 23. The species was next noted on Slave River about 100 miles below Fort Smith, July 1, when we saw a pair with four nearly grown young. The old birds: immediately flew away, but two of the young, one of which is con- siderably lighter in color than the other, were obtained. While we were ascending the Athabaska we saw an adult near La Biche River August 27. In 1903 the notes of this owl were heard 50 miles north of Edmon- ton on the night of May 13. One was seen sitting at the mouth of a cavity in a large balsam poplar 50 miles below Athabaska Landing May 17, and several were heard hooting near the outlet of Athabaska Lake June 8. The species was next noted by my brother and Cary on the mountain at the mouth of Nahanni River, where one was seen July 14, and the notes of one were heard on the night of July 17. On the return trip in the fall the species was heard nightly in the heavy spruce woods near Athabaska Landing September 4 to 15. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I saw one on Lake Faber on the evening of August 6. I heard the notes of great horned owls on Bear River September 29; and on the Mackenzie 20 miles h ww Gravel River October 3; near Roche Trempe-l’eau October | 8; and 50 miles below Fort Simpson October 16. Great horned owls |} were common during the autumn and early winter at Fort Simpson, | and a large series was taken by trapping. The greater number are referable to B. v. subarcticus. Most of these are very light colored, typical birds, but some are darker, inclining toward saturatus. Most of these birds probably were migrants, since the species was too abundant to be considered as represented only by residents, and, furthermore, the breeding birds taken are all referable to B. subarcti- J cus. One taken November 21 had eaten a small shrew (Sorex per-_| sonatus) ; one November 23, a red squirrel (Sciurus hudsonicus) ; one | December 1, several meadow voles (Microtus drummondi), white- footed mice (Peromyscus arcticus), and shrews (Sorex personatus). During January and February, 1904, I occasionally heard the notes | of great horned owls, and I heard them frequently during March. On March 14 I saw a pair in the vicinity of a prospective nest in a | North American Fauna No. 27, U. S. Dept. Agr. Biological Survey. PLATE XXill. Fic. 1.—NEST AND EGGs OF ARCTIC GREAT HORNED OWL (BUBO V. SUBARCTICUS). FORT SIMPSON, APRIL 22, 1904. Fic. 2.—CLUSTERED NESTS OF CLIFF SWALLOW (PETROCHELIDON LUNIFRONS) NEAR LAKE HARDISTY (NORTH OF FORT RAE), LATITUDE 65° 1908.] - BIRDS. aa high Banksian pine on the hills southwest of the post. The place was again visited Aprii 1 and the female found on the nest. It was left for further developments, but later in the day the tree was cut down by an Indian, and the nest and contents, two fresh eggs, destroyed. On April 17 I found another nest near the banks of the Liard, a few miles distant from the post. It was in the crotch of a large aspen poplar, 50 feet from the ground, and held a single egg. It was visited again on April 22, and the two eggs (see Pl. X XITI, fig. 1) and the male bird secured. The eggs measure, respectively, 54.2 by 47, and 53.4 by 45.7. This bird, lke all those taken during the spring, was very light colored and typical of subarcticus, proving the resident bird to be of this form. Its stomach contained the fur of varying hares (Lepus americanus) and the remains of several large water beetles (Dytiscus dauricus). H. W. Jones took a fine light bird near Fort Providence April 30, which had eaten several similar beetles, and another which ft trapped May 11 had taken seven beetles of the same species. One seen flying low over the river on the evening of May 16 was probably in pursuit of the same prey. On June 18, while descending the Mackenzie, I saw a very light-colored female with her brood of half-grown young in a nest on the face of the cliff at Wolverene Rock, 100 miles below Fort Norman. The old bird escaped, but I collected one of the young ones, all of which were very light colored. At Fort McPherson I heard the notes of a great horned owl on the evening of July 7, and saw one of the birds on the following day. While ascending the Mackenzie I heard one above Fort Norman July 18, and another near Nahanni River July 23. H. W. Jones writes me that great horned owls were very numerous at Fort Simpson during the autumn of 1904, but that they were scarce after the last of December. Richardson described a specimen taken at Fort Chipewyan; ? thirty years later Ross recorded the species as wintering in the Mac- kenzie Valley north to the Arctic Circle, and as having been col- lected at Fort Simpson.? Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that Ross found it abundant about Great Slave Lake, especially in the “marshy country about Fort Resolution, where it preyed on shrews and voles. The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Good Hope, Fort Liard, Fort Halkett, Big Island, and Fort Resolution, one taken at the last place by Kennicott being still in the collection. Russell took one at Salt River, 16 miles below Fort Smith, June 28, 1893.4 ¢¥Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 84, 1831. 56 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. ¢ Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, III, p. 66, 1874. @Expl. in Far North, p. 262, 1898. 874 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. In the summer of 1895 J. Alden Loring reported the species quite common in the country west of Edmonton. In 1896 he heard several along the route between Edmonton and Jasper House, and reported it not rare along the trail between Jasper House and Smoky River, and more frequently noted in the foothills than in the high moun- tains. The bird of western Alberta may not be typical subarcticus, but it seems best to include these notes under this heading, since a summer specimen from Edmonton is nearly typical of the present form. Bubo virginianus saturatus Ridgway. Dusky Horned Owl. Four specimens, all females, taken at Fort Simpson, November 25 to December 10, 1903, are doubtfully referred to this race. They un- doubtedly were migrants, very probably from the region of the upper Liard. The contrast in color between these specimens and the lighter specimens of B. v. subarcticus, taken at the same time, is very notice- able. The stomach of one taken November 28 contained remains of a varying hare (Lepus americanus), and voles (Aicrotus drummondt) ; another taken November 30 had eaten portions of a hare. Nyctea nyctea (Linn.). Snowy Owl. This circumpolar species ranges throughout the region now under review. Its summer home is mainly north of the tree limit. It be- gins to move southward about the time of the first heavy snows, and usually is common over the southern portion of the region during the winter, when it preys chiefly on varying hares. In the autumn of 1903, while ascending the Mackenzie, I saw the first snowy owl at the mouth of Blackwater River October 7, and observed one or two nearly every day until I reached Fort Simpson, October 20. The birds were usually observed at the mouth of streams, where the broad gravel bars, dotted with the trunks and stumps of drift logs, seemed to attract them. At Fort Simpson I found the species common during the latter part of November, and especially so in December, when most of my specimens were taken. t secured them by means of steel traps, set on the upturned roots of drift logs which had become grounded on the batture near the post. This place was a favorite resort of snowy owls, and to a less extent of great horned owls, and any perch above the general level was sure to be utilized, this habit making their capture easy. While the great horned owls when caught were invariably found perched upright on the stump, the snowy owls were always hanging head downward. In my series of eighteen specimens the difference in col- oration is found to be sexual, the dark barring in only one male equal- ing in extent the same markings of the lightest female. The dark bars on the sides of the breast in the darkest females measure over 1908. ] oe BIRDS. 3765 5 millimeters in width, nearly equaling in extent the white spaces. In the lightest males the same markings measure oly about 2 milli- meters in width. On January 1, 1904, I noted six individuals in sight at one time, but during the remainder of the month seldom observed the species at Fort Simpson. None were observed during a three days’ snowshoe trip down the Mackenzie about the middle of January. Mr. Thomas Anderson, hewever, while on his way to Fort Liard early in the month, observed a number on Lake Brochet, 20 miles southwest of Fort Simpson. They were feeding upon the varying hares (Lepus americanus) that ventured from the shelter of the woods. On his return late in January he noted several at the same place. During February I occasionally observed the birds and took the last one on February 29. The stomachs of those collected almost invariably contained the remains of varying hares, and I often saw signs on the snow where owls had pursued and captured these animals. The only sound I heard the birds utter was a tremulous scredm, sometimes emitted when they were perching, but usually when on the wing. At Fort Norman the species was reported by Mr. C. Harding to have been common during the winter, but at Fort Good Hope I was in- formed that it is rarely seen. In a letter received from H. W. Jones he informs me that snowy owls were numerous at Fort Simpson during the autumn of 1904, but were not noticed after the last of December. The snowy owl was first reported from the islands of the Polar Sea by Edward Sabine, who states, referring particularly to Melville Island, that several pairs were seen during the summer months, and that a large white bird seen by a sailor in February was probably of this species.* Swainson and Richardson describe a specimen killed at Great Bear Lake in May, 1826.2. King records one shot near McLeod Bay, Great Slave Lake, September 14, 1833.¢ During the voyage of the /nvestigator Armstrong noted the first one near Princess Royal Islands, Prince of Wales Strait, about May 10, 1851; 4 he saw the species at Prince Alfred Cape, Banks Land, September 13, 1851;¢ and again at Mercy Bay, Banks Land, March. 1, 1852.7 J. C. Ross recorded the snowy owl from Port Bowen, where it was rare’ He later recorded it from Victoria Harbor, where it bred, and @Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, pp. CxcIlI, cxciv, 1824. 6¥Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 89, 1831. ¢ Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 125, 1886. @Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 321, 1857. €Tbid., p. 434, 1857. f Ibid., p. 504, 1857. 9Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 97, 1826. 376 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. where a few remained in winter.t. M’Clintock recorded specimens taken in January and August, 1859, at Port Kennedy.? Belcher notes one observed on June 2, 1853, on the north side of Grinnell Peninsula, in about latitude 77° N., longitude 95° W.¢ Doctor Rae reported the species as occurring along the coast of Victoria Land in the summer of 1851.7 Ross listed it as occurring in the Mackenzie River region, and as wintering, but as being rare. Specimens were received by the Smithsonian Institution from Fort Resolution and Big Island. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that the species had been shot in February at Fort Norman.’ It was reported by Mac- Farlane as not plentiful in the Anderson River region’ J. B. Tyr- rell reports seeing a few birds of this species while exploring the country between Athabaska Lake and Churchill River in the summer of 1892." Macoun records sets of eggs taken at Herschel Island by Mr. Young, on the authority of Raine; and a specimen collected at Great Bear Lake by Max Bell.‘ Hanbury noted one near Ogden Bay, on the Arctic coast, May 18, 1902./ Seton records the white owl from Clinton-Colden Lake.” Surnia ulula caparoch (Miull.). American Hawk Owl. This day owl occurs throughout the wooded portion of the region and probably breeds throughout this area. It begins to move south- ward from the northern part of its range in early autumn and re- turns in early spring. Though rather conspicuous on account of its diurnal habits, it is seldom seen in numbers except during migrations, when it is sometimes fairly common. During the season of 1901 we noted this bird but once—about 100 miles below Fort Smith July 1, when we saw one pursuing a red- tailed hawk high above the forest. It soon abandoned the chase and returned to the woods. In 1903 we first noted this species below Limestone Point, on lower Slave River, June 17, when one was shot from a spruce beside the river. It had in its talons part of a young varying hare. While on - their return trip Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary observed three hawk owls near Lily Lake, Alberta, on September 24, a dark, foggy day. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted this species 4 Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxv, 1835. 4 Voyage of the Fox, pp. 200, 296, 1860. ¢ Last of Arctic Voyages, I, p. 295, 1855. @ Journ. Royal Geog. Soc. for 1852, p. 89, 1852. € Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. i Hist. N. A; Birds, Land Birds, [Ll, p. 72; 1874 7 Proce. U.S. Nat. Mus!) XV. 43 sore ” Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., VIII (new ser.), p. 14D, 1896. + Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 284, 1903. J Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 147, 1904. k Auk, XXV, p. 71, 1908. 1908.] TAURI Bt on two occasions, taking a bird of the year near Sarahk Lake August 6, and noting one on Lake Hardisty August 19. While ascending the Mackenzie I saw one at Roche Trempe-l’eau October 9. It had in its talons the remains of a ruffed grouse, freshly killed and partly eaten, which it seemed to carry without difficulty. At Fort Simpson on October 24 I took a female bird, the last one observed that season. During the coldest months of the winter this bird was not observed, and it was next seen at Fort Simpson on March 28, 1904, when I col- lected a female. This bird swooped upon a flock of redpolls, but failed to secure one, and alighted for an instant on the summit of a small dead tree. I observed single birds on April 5, 14, and 21, securing the last-mentioned individual. = IN i ET « 378 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Simpson, Fort Liard, Fort Good Hope, Peel River, La Pierre House, and Anderson River; one from Fort Anderson, taken May 5, 1863, and labeled as having been collected with five eggs, is still in the col- lection. Russell records one taken at Fort Rae October 2, 1893.4 Macoun records one taken at Jasper House, Alberta, June 14, 1908, by Spreadborough.? In a manuscript list MacFarlane records eggs taken at Fort Providence, on April 14, 1885, and near Fond du Lac, Athabaska Lake, in May, 1885. At Edmonton J. Alden Loring obtained one which had been shot on September 19, 1894. In 1905 he took specimens on the Jasper House trail about 35 miles west of Lake Ste. Anne August 13, and at the crossing of McLeod River August 16 and 18. In 1896 he re- ported the species common all along the route between Jasper House and Smoky River in the early autumn, and took a male at Henry House on October 20. Ceryle aleyon (Linn.). Belted Kingfisher. The kingfisher occurs in summer over most of the region now under consideration. It follows the Mackenzie and Anderson rivers to their mouths, but apparently is absent from the more elevated country be- tween Great Slave and Great Bear lakes, and from the main area of the Barren Grounds. Within its range it is usually fairly abundant wherever there are suitable banks for nesting. In 1901 one was noted at Athabaska Landing May 5, and another about 40 miles below the Landing on May 7. Between Fort McMur- ray and Athabaska Lake the species was seen daily May 15 to 17. None were noted during our stay in the vicinity of Fort Chipewyan, probably because of the absence of banks suitable for nesting, and the species was next noted 10 miles below the mouth of the Peace, where a pair or two were seen on June 11. While descending Slave River between Fort Smith and Great Slave Lake June 29 to July 4, we observed it daily and took a male 50 miles below Fort Smith June 30. This bird was attempting to swallow an eel-pout (Lota maculosa) T inches in length, which it had just captured. While ascending the Athabaska we noted the species at Fort McMurray August 10, below Grand Rapid August 20, and near La Biche River August 27. In 1903 we first noted the kingfisher at Sandy Creek, 20 miles south of Athabaska Landing, where we saw one May 14. While descending the Athabaska we saw several between Athabaska Land- ing and Pelican Rapid May-17 and 18, one at Grand Rapid May 23. one at Little Buffalo River May 26, and several on the lower part of @Hxpl. in Far North, p. 262, 1898. ’Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 288, 1903. 1908.] BIRDS. 379 the Athabaska May 30 and 31. We noted it on Smith Portage June 14, and found it common on Slave River between Fort Smith and Limestone Point June 15 and 16. My brother and Cary noted it at Fort Providence July 8, Fort Simpson July 10, near the mouth of Nahanni River July 11, and near Fort Wrigley July 19, 20, and 22. On their return trip they observed the bird above Fort Simpson July 25, near Fort Rae July 28, and at Athabaska Landing, where they saw single birds on September 2 and 3. In early June, 1904, I observed the bird at several points on the Mackenzie north to near Fort Norman. The kingfisher was first recorded from this region by Richardson, who described a specimen killed on Slave River. In the summer of 1848 the same naturalist observed it below Harrison Island, near the mouth of the Mackenzie.” In 1862 Ross recorded it as occurring commonly in the Mackenzie River region north to Peel River, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.¢ MacFarlane noted it on sey- eral occasions on Anderson River, and received skins, probably ob- tained on the lower Anderson, from the Eskimo.? The bird cata- logue of the National Museum records specimens received from Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Halkett, Fort McPherson, and Fort An- derson. Macoun states that Spreadborough found it abundant on the upper Athabaska in 1898, and that J. M. Macoun, in the summer of 1888, found it common along the Lesser Slave and Athabaska rivers, between Lesser Slave Lake and Fort McMurray, and along the Clearwater and the route to Isle 4 la Crosse.¢ J. Alden Loring saw one at Edmonton September 13, 1894, and one at Jasper House in the early autumn of 1895, and reported the species rare 15 miles south of Henry House July 3 to 21, 1896. H. W. Jones observed the species near Fort Providence May 7, 1905. Dryobates villosus leucomelas (Bodd.). Northern Hairy Woodpecker. The hairy woodpecker is of regular occurrence north to the region of Great Slave Lake and Fort Simpson and perhaps farther, since it is rather rare and may have been overlooked. It retires from the northern part of its habitat in severe winters, but may remain during mild seasons. In 1901 this bird was first noted on the lower Athabaska near Poplar Point, 90 miles below Fort McMurray, May 16, one being seen. A pair was seen and the male taken at Smith Landing June 18, and one was noted the same day on Smith Portage. Single birds @¥Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 340, 1831. 6 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 231, 1851. € Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. @Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 437, 1891. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, pp. 295, 296, 1903. eee n 380 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. were afterwards seen on Lower Slave River July 3, and on the Atha- baska, below Grand Rapid, August 20. In 1903 it was first observed near Sturgeon River May 13. While we were descending the Athabaska single birds were seen near Pelican Rapid May 19, and near Poplar Point May 30 and 31. One was seen on Rocher River June 8, one on Smith Portage June 13, and one on the lower Slave June 18; a specimen was taken at Fort Resolution June 22. My brother and Cary noted the species at Fort Providence July 4, 6, and 7, taking one specimen on July 4. On their return trip they recorded the species as follows: Fort McMurray, August 8, several; Boiler Rapid, August 17, 2; Brulé Rapid, August 18, 1; Brulé Rapid to Athabaska Landing, August 18 to 31, common; near Athabaska Landing, September 3 to 15, common. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I saw one near Lake Hardisty on August 19. During the early part of the winter I observed the bird but once at Fort Simpson, taking a female on November 5. In the spring of 1904 I first observed the species at Fort Simpson on April 5, noting one drumming on a dead spruce, and I took a pair in poplar woods on May 19. During my trip down the Mackenzie I saw a pair near the mouth of Nahanni River June 5. On my return journey I saw one below Athabaska Landing, Alberta, Sep- tember 1. A male, taken at Fort Simpson November 5, 1904, has recently been received from J. W. Mills. Ross recorded Picus villosus, referring to the present form, as occurring commonly in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Simpson, and as wintering. The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Resolution, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Liard, and Fort Halkett. Specimens taken at Fort Liard February 28, 1869; at Fort Simpson December 29, 1860; and on Liard River September 28, probably in the same year, are still in the collection, and confirm the statement of Ross that the bird winters in this region, though probably it does so only in mild seasons. MacFarlane, in a list recently sent me, states that eggs of this species were taken at Fort Providence by Reid on May 6, 1885. In the summer of 1896 J. Alden Loring found this form common on the route from Edmonton to Jasper House, and took a specimen on Grand Cache River, 70 miles north of Jasper House, on September 4, and another near the junction of Grand Cache and Smoky rivers on September 22. Dryobates pubescens nelsoni Oberh. Nelson Downy Woodpecker. During the season of 1901 this bird was noted only in a few local- ities, though it probably occurs throughout the region traversed. It was first seen at our camp 10 miles below Peace River, where speci- ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p: 277, 1862. 1908. ] BIRDS. 381 mens were taken June 7, 8, and 10. The species was next noted at Smith Portage June 18; several were seen and one was taken at Fort Smith June 20. _ In 1903 we noted it on the lower Athabaska May 31 and June 1. My brother and Cary saw it at Fort Providence July 7, and at Fort McMurray August 11. While ascending the Mackenzie I saw one a short distance below Nahanni River October 13. At Fort Simp- son I took single birds November 24 and December 3. In the spring of 1904 I did not detect this bird, but H. W. Jones took one at Wiliow River, near Fort Providence, May 7. Under the name Picus pubescens, Ross recorded it as being not rare in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Liard, and as win- tering.* A specimen in the National Museum, taken at Fort Resolu- tion October 1, 1862, by J. Lockhart, has been referred by Oberholser to this form,” and the catalogue of the birds in that collection records another specimen from Fort Liard. Macoun states that J. M. Macoun noted a few along the Athabaska, and reported it rare between Methye Lake and Isle 4 la Crosse, in the summer of 1888.¢ In the summer of 1896, while on his way to Jasper House, J. Alden Loring reported seeing several in the valleys of the foothills about 80 miles east of the Rocky Mountains. Picoides arcticus (Swains.). Arctic Three-toed Woodpecker. The black-backed three-toed woodpecker is of regular occurrence in the region north at least to about latitude 63° on the Mackenzie, but is the less common of the two species of Picoides. During the season of 1901 it was noted but once—a male being taken on the Athabaska about 25 miles below Athabaska Landing, Au- gust 28. In 1903 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary saw one about 20 miles above Fort Wrigley July 19. On their outward trip they observed one at House River August 22, and collected a pair on an island above Athabaska Landing September 14. During the same season I saw the species but once, taking a male at Fort Simpson October 24. In 1904 I observed single birds at Fort Simpson on March 8, 22, and 28, taking specimens on the last two dates. While descending the Mackenzie I saw one near Fort Wrigley June 7, and on my return trip observed one in a pine forest near Lily Lake, Alberta, Sep- tember 3. Two specimens, taken at Fort Simpson by J. W. Mills on October 15, 1904, and March 12, 1905, respectively, have been received by the Biological Survey. @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p.- 277, 1862. 6Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVIII, p. 549, 1896. ¢ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 304, 1908. es ee 382 ; NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. This bird was first described by Swainson from a male “ killed near the sources of the Athabaska River.” * It was recorded by King from. Fort Reliance, at the eastern end of Great Slave Lake, where it oc- curred in winter.’ Ross listed it as rare in the Mackenzie River dis- trict north to Fort Simpson, where it had been collected, and as win- tering in the region.” Bendire records specimens from Fort Rae, Fort Providence, and Fort Chipewyan; and the Smithsonian Insti- tution received it also from Fort Resolution. Bangs has recorded a specimen from Red Deer, Alberta. Macoun states that J. M. Ma- coun took a specimen at Athabaska Landing May 25, 1888, and found it common on Methye Portage and between Methye Lake and Isle a la Crosse during the same summer.’ J. Alden Loring collected a male at Henry House October 4, 1895, and another specimen at Sul- phur Prairie, about 70 miles north of Jasper House, September 6, 1896. Picoides americanus fasciatus Baird. Banded-backed Three-toed Woodpecker. | This bird is of regular and fairly common occurrence throughout the wooded portion of the region now under review. It breeds through this area, but retires from the northern half during the colder months, at least in severe seasons. Most of the specimens from the Athabaska and Mackenzie region are plainly referable to the form characterized by Baird from specimens collected at Fort Simpson.’ There seems to be much individual variation in this form, and the specimens available are not sufficient to determine the exact _ ranges of this race and of Picoides a. dorsalis. In 1901 we took a female specimen on Slave River near the mouth of the Peace, June 6, and another at Fort Smith, June 26. They are in worn breeding plumage. On May 14, 1903, we first noted this bird near Sandy Creek, Alberta, where we saw two. My brother and Cary took a male near Athabaska Landing, September 14. This specimen possesses some of the characters of dorsalis, but is intermediate, and may be referred to fasciatus. During my trip northward from Fort Rae to Great Bear Lake I noted the bird but once, taking one on Lake Hardisty, August 19. On Great Bear Lake I first noted it near Leith Point on September 9, when I shot a male, and I took a female near Manito Islands, September 14. While encamped at Fort Franklin I noted the species several times, and took specimens, including both sexes, @Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 318, 1831. ’ Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 166, 1836. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. 4 Life Hist. N. A. Birds [II], p. 74, 1896. (Dated 1895, published 1896.) é Auk, XVII, p. 130, 1900. f Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 306, 1903. 9 Cooper’s Ornithology of Calif., I, pp. 385, 286, 1870. 1908.] BIRDS. —— 888 on September 18, 19, 20, and 27. While ascending the Mackenzie I saw one near the mouth of the Blackwater, October 6. At Fort Simpson I collected a number during the latter part of October, November, and the early part of December, noting the species last on December 5. . In 1904 I failed to observe this bird at Fort Simpson during Jan- uary, February, and March, and first noted it April 1, when T found three individuals in a tract of burnt woods and heard their spring drumming. It was a continuous tattoo, somewhat resembling that of Dryobates, but becoming very faint at the end. A male and a female were collected. Another individual was seen April 6. I failed to observe any during my trip down the Mackenzie, but saw one at Grand Rapid on August 23, during my return trip. J. W. Mills took a male at Fort Simpson, March 18, 1905. Richardson, under the name Picus tridactylus, first recorded this species from the region, describing a male killed near the sources of the Athabaska.* Ross listed it as Picoides hirsutus, stating that it was found in the Mackenzie River district north to Fort Good Hope, that it wintered in the region, and that it had been collected at Fort Simpson.’ MacFarlane found it near Fort Anderson, where he dis- covered nests on June 5 and 21, 1864.° The bird catalogue of the National Museum records specimens from Fort Chipewyan, Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Liard, Fort Halkett, Fort Good Hope, and Fort Anderson. The following are still in that collection: Two from Fort Liard, March, and February 23, 1860, A. McKenzie; two from Fort Anderson, one June 3, 1864, the other not dated, but probably taken at the same time; two from Fort Liard without exact dates; and two from Fort Simpson, one taken December 12 [1859], by Kennicott, and the other (the type of P. a. fasciatus) September 2, 1861, by Ross. Most of these specimens, as well as one from Red Deer, Alberta, have been recorded by Bangs.’ Hargitt records a specimen from Great Bear Lake.? During his trips to the Rocky Mountains in western Alberta in 1895 and 1896, J. Alden Loring found this woodpecker fairly common and collected a number of specimens. In 1895 he took one at Henry House October 4. In 1896 he took a pair 15 miles south of Henry House on July 13. Their nest was in a dry spruce 4 feet from the ground, on a mountain, about 500 feet below timber line. Other speci- mens were taken on Stony River, a short distance north of Jasper House, August 25; in Grand Cache valley, Smoky River, about 120 @¥Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 312, 1831. b’Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 277, 1862. € Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 488, 1891. @Auk, XVII, p. 132, 1900. € Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XVIII, p. 281, 1890. B84 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. miles north of Jasper House, September 19 and 20; on the Smoky River trail, between Muskeg Creek and Baptiste River, south of Smoky River, September 30; at Jasper House in the early part of October; and in the mountains 15 miles west of Henry House, October 12. These specimens vary considerably, some of the fall specimens, which have recently assumed the winter plumage, having more white on the back than others; but I would refer them all to the same form, to which, according to the ruling of the American Ornithologists’ Union, the name fasciatus is applicable. Sphyrapicus varius (Linn.). Yellow-bellied Sapsucker. This handsome woodpecker occurs in summer north at least to Great Slave Lake and the Fort Simpson region. It is one of the com- monest woodpeckers during the breeding season, when it is readily detected by its characteristic notes and drumming. Strictly migra- tory, it leaves in early fall and does not return until April or May. In 1901 numbers were seen or heard daily along the road between Sturgeon River and Athabaska Landing May 38 to 5. While we were descending the Athabaska, May 6 to 17, the bird was noted nearly every day, and a pair was taken near Fort Chipewyan June 2, At our camp on Slave River 10 miles below the Peace, one was taken June 7 and another was seen June 11. The species was next noted on Smith Portage June 18, when a nest containing young was found in a live aspen poplar, and a female was taken at Fort Smith June 24. Single birds were afterwards noted on Slave River, 100 miles below Fort Smith, July 2; near the mouth of the Slave July 3; and at Fort Resolution July 5. In 1903 we first saw the bird at Edmonton May 8, noting a pair; and we observed the species daily on the way to Athabaska Landing May 11 to 15, taking one 50 miles north of Edmonton on May 14. While descending the Athabaska, May 16 to June 2, we noted the bird nearly every day, and we took a specimen at Grand Rapid May 22. We noted it on Rocher River June 8, and near Smith Landing June 10; and found it common at the latter place and on Smith Portage June 12 and 13. We found it common also along Slave River between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution, and observed it daily June 15 to 19. While ascending the Athabaska in the fall my brother and Cary noted the species on August 10 at Fort McMur- ray, where they saw a pair with fledged young, and on August 18 at Brulé Rapid, where they observed a female with her 3 young © ones. They found the species common between the latter place and Athabaska Landing and in that vicinity up to September 15. In the spring of 1904 I first heard the characteristic broken tattoo | of this species at Fort Simpson on May 11, and following up the © sound found a male among a group of tall balsam poplars, evidently iN, 1908. ] BERS | 385 a favorite nesting place. I saw another on May 12, and 4 on May 14. During the remainder of the month I frequently observed the species. At Willow River, near Fort Providence, J. W. Mills and H. W. Jones collected a series of specimens during the same month, taking the first on May 12, and noting the first female on May 17. On June 2 and 3, while descending the Mackenzie by canoe, I found the bird common along its banks between Fort Simpson and Nahanni River, and | again noted it near the latter place on June 5. On my return trip I observed it on Smith Portage August 4, and found both old and young common at Fort McMurray August 11 to 14, and 25 miles above Pelican Portage August 28. A specimen taken at Fort Rae some years ago is in the museum at Fort Simpson. Several specimens, taken by Mills and Jones near Fort Providence May 13 to 19, 1905, have been received by the Bio- logical Survey. Ross recorded this species as common in the Mackenzie River re- gion north to Fort Simpson, and as having been taken at that post.* About the same time many were sent to the Smithsonian Institution by various officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company. The following specimens, representing both sexes, are still in the collection: Two from Fort Simpson, May 21, 1860,and June, 1861, Ross; and one from each of the following localities, the dates not given—Nahanni Moun- tains, 100 miles northwest of Fort Simpson; Fort Rae; Fort Resolu- tion; and Big Island. Macoun states that J. M. Macoun, in the sum- mer of 1888, found this species common along the Lesser Slave and Athabaska rivers between Lesser Slave Lake and Fort McMurray, ° and along the Clearwater, and that Spreadborough noted its arrival at Edmonton on May 3 | probably in 1897 ].? In 1896 J. Alden Loring reported yellow-bellied woodpeckers com- mon along the trail between Edmonton and the foothills, but did not observe any after entering the mountains. Phieotomus pileatus abieticola (Bangs). Northern Pileated Wood- pecker. This woodpecker inhabits the heavy forests along the Athabaska and Slave rivers, and in the vicinity of the Rocky Mountains ranges as far north at least as Liard River. In the spring of 1901 I heard the unmistakable notes of this bird below Pelican River May 9, and again below Little Red River May 15, while we were descending the Athabaska. William Gullion, one of my canoemen, who knew the bird well, saw one near our camp at @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. 6 Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 311, 1903. 44131—No. 27—08 20 386 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [ No. 27. Fort Smith late in June, and on our return trip I heard one on the Athabaska near Big Mouth Brock August 27. In 1903 we noted this species May 30 near Poplar Point on the lower Athabaska, where we heard its loud and characteristic notes in the dense spruce forest. On their return trip Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary heard one near Brulé Rapid August 19, and saw another in poplar woods near Vermilion Creek, Alberta, Septem- ber 23. In 1904 I noted this species on but one occasion, observing a single bird on the Athabaska 20 miles below Athabaska Landing Septem- ber 1 Richardson described a specimen killed near the Rocky Mountains, presumably by Drummond, and says: This great woodpecker is resident all the year in the interior of the fur coun- tries up to the sixty-second and sixty-third parallels, rarely appearing near Hudson's Bay, but frequenting the gloomiest recesses of the forests that skirt the Rocky Mountains.4 Ross records it as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Liard, but as rare.” Bendire records specimens from Fort Liard and Big Island.© Macoun states that J. M. Macoun found the bird rare on the Clearwater River in the summer of 1888.4 Colaptes auratus luteus Bangs. Northern Flicker. This widely distributed woodpecker occurs abundantly north to Great Slave Lake and the upper Mackenzie, and less commonly northward to the limit of trees. It is replaced along the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains in Alberta by the form Colaptes c. col- laris, Whose range it overlaps to some extent. In 1901 we saw this species daily between Edmonton and Atha- baska Landing, April 29 to May 5. For two or three days after we left Edmonton it was less abundant than the red-shafted flicker, but the relative number of (. a. luteus increased as we approached — Athabaska Landing. Near Sturgeon River, on May 1, we saw a pair _ excavating a nesting cavity. While we were descending the Atha- © baska we noted the species at Brulé Rapid May 11 and 12, and on _ the lower part of the river May 15 and 16. While encamped at various places near Fort Chipewyan, May 18 to June 5, we found it — common and collected several specimens. We noted the species on Rocher River June 5, and at our camp on Slave River, 10 miles below the mouth of the Peace, we observed it daily, June 7 to 10, finding a nest containing fresh eggs on the former date. We found it | 2Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 304, 1831. oNat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. ¢ Life Hist. N. A. Birds fils p. 103 asso: @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 311, 1903. 1908.] BIRDS. 387 common at Smith Landing June 13 to 17, at Fort Smith June 19> to 29, and on Slave River between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution June 29 to July +. At Fort Resolution my brother often saw the bird during July, and while crossing Great Slave Lake I observed a brood of young just from the nest on an island near the mouth of the Northern Arm on July 15. I took an immature bird at Fort Rae July 26, and noted other individuals there on July 27 and 29. On our return trip we noted the bird at Smith Portage August 5, above Pelican Rapid August 24, and near La Biche River August 27, and saw several at Athabaska Landing August 30 and 31. In 1903 we first noted the species at Edmonton May 8, when we saw several individuals, one of which was excavating a nesting cavity. It was common and was observed nearly every day on the road to Athabaska Landing May 11 to 15. Along the Athabaska and Slave rivers also it was common and was noted almost daily- A nest containing eggs was found near Smith Landing June 13. The bird was seen only once at Fort Resolution—on June 22. On the Mackenzie my brother and Cary noted the species at Fort Providence July 4, 6, 7, and 8, taking one on the last date; at Fort Simpson July 10; Nahanni Mountains July 13 (one taken), 14, 16, 17, and 18; and at Fort Wrigley July 22. While ascending the Athabaska they frequently observed the species between Red River and Grand Rapid August 6 to 20, and in the vicinity of Athabaska Landing during the first half of September. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted the bird on lower Grandin River August 1. The number of nesting holes seen along the southern shore of Great Bear Lake showed that this species must be a fairly common breeder there, but the birds had evidently migrated before my arrival. The only one seen was taken near McVicar Bay September 10. It was in company with a large flock of robins and was very fat. In the spring of 1904 this bird arrived at Fort Simpson on May 4, when two were observed. On May 6 two more were seen, and a few were observed daily until May 10, when the species became common. During the remainder of the month it was frequently observed and several specimens were taken. At Willow River, near Fort Provi- dence, J. W. Mills took a male May 13, but did not record the date of arrival. While descending the Mackenzie in June I found it rather common between Fort Simpson and Nahanni River June 2 and 8, and again noted it near the latter place on June 6. North of this point the species seems to be uncommon along the Mackenzie, as I saw it but twice. I took one at Fort Good Hope June 20, and saw another at Fort McPherson July 8. On my return trip I noted it on the lower Slave August 2; on Smith Portage August 4; near Fort McMurray August 10 and 14; and near Quito or Calling River — ne i’ 388 . NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. August 31. I found it common on the Athabaska near La Biche River on the morning of September 1, and between Athabaska Land-- ing and Edmonton September 2 and 4. King observed the flicker at Fort Reliance, Great Slave Lake, May 2, 1834, noting a common feeding habit as follows: “At that time its crop was full of ants, collected from the loose bark and stems of de- cayed pines.” He saw it also at Fort Resolution on May 24 of the next year.* Richardson noted the bird on Bear Lake River in the summer of 1848.2 Ross recorded it as common in the Mackenzie River region north to Peel River, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.¢ MacFarlane considered it by no means scarce in the val- ley of the Anderson.? In a letter to Baird he mentions a nest which contained eleven eggs, found near Fort Anderson [on June 16, 1863]. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that it was found breeding at Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Fort Anderson; ° in addition to specimens from these localities, the bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Big Island, Fort Halkett, Fort Norman, Fort Good Hope, and Peel River. Eggs were collected at Lesser Slave Lake by Strachan Jones in 1868. In 1896 J. Alden Loring found a pair nesting at Whitemud, on McLeod River, 135 miles directly west of Edmonton, early in June; reported it breeding, but not common, 15 miles south of Henry House, July 3 to 21; and found it common on the trail between Jasper House and Smoky River in August and September. Ina male taken by him at Banff, Alberta, August 29, 1894, the yellow of wings and tail is very deep, and a few red feathers border the black cheek patches, in- dicating an approach toward C. c. collaris. Colaptes cafer collaris (Vigors). Red-shafted Flicker. This form occurs in western Alberta, extending northward for an undetermined distance, and occurring together with C. luteus in migration, and in the breeding season, over the western portion of this area, where 1t gradually replaces the eastern form. In 1901 this bird was common about Edmonton, and during the first two or three days of our journey to Athabaska Landing, April 29 to May 5, but the relative proportion of flickers of this form decreased rapidly, and during the last day we saw none, nor did we note it after leaving Athabaska Landing. While traveling over the same ground in 1903 we saw none, owing probably to the late date. 4Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 200, 1836. 6 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 202, 1851. ¢ Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. @Proe. U. S. Nat. Mus X1Ve pp, 43Se soils ¢ Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, II, p. 576, 1874. 1908.] BIRDS. 389 Russell reports seeing a red-shafted flicker at Fort Chipewyan May 21, 1893.2 This was probably only a strageler. In the summer of 1896 J. Alden Loring noted it on the trail be- tween Edmonton and Jasper House, but it was less common than C. a. luteus; he saw several 15 miles south of Henry House July 3 to 21, and observed several ‘ hybrids’ on the trail between Jasper House and Smoky River in the early autumn. Chordeiles virginianus (Gmel.). Nighthawk. The nighthawk is of regular occurrence in the Mackenzie Valley north to the region of Fort Good Hope. It is a late arrival in spring and moves southward again in August. In 1901 the species was first noted on the evening of May 23 at Fort Chipewyan and was again seen on the following day. Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cxctv, 1824. ¢Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 338, 1881. @Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 442, 1861. 390 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. north to that post, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.? Ben- dire records a skin obtained near Fort Good Hope,’ and the bird cata- logue of the National Museum shows that specimens were received also from Fort Resolution and Fort Simpson. MacFarlane, proba- bly referring to the Anderson River region, states that a few strag- gling birds have been observed in the far north. He mentions a nest found in the Clearwater Valley late in June, 1873." Russell took a specimen at Fort Chipewyan, June 12, 1893, and reported it not un- common.? Macoun states that in the summer of 1888, J. M. Macoun observed this species along the Athabaska from the mouth of Lesser Slave Ri¥er to the Clearwater, as well as on Methye Portage, and be- tween Methye Lake and Isle a la Crosse.? J. Alden Loring reported the species common on the trail between Edmonton and Jasper House in the summer of 1896. Chetura pelagica (Linn.). Chimney Swift. The chimney swift has not been reported farther north than Edmonton, Alberta, where Macoun states that Spreadborough saw two individuals on May 17, 1897./ Aeronautes melanoleucus (Baird). White-throated Swift. J. Alden Loring reported seeing a single bird of this species 15 miles south of Henry House about July 2, 1896. This is probably near the northern limit of its range. Trochilus colubris (Linn.). Ruby-throated Hummingbird. Macoun, concerning this species, says: “I have noticed the hum- ming bird as far north as lat. 59°, in the vicinity of: Lake Atha- baska.”’ 9 Richardson states: “ Trochilus colubris ranges, In sum- mer, to the fifty-seventh parallel, perhaps even still farther north. We obtained specimens on the plains of the Saskatchewan, and Mr. Drummond found one of its nests near the sources of the Elk [ Atha- baska] River.” * While the Saskatchewan bird is undoubtedly properly identified, the nest found by Drummond almost certainly belonged to the rufous hummingbird. * OR ¢Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. bTife Hist. N. A. Birds [11]; p: 16371896: ¢ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 4388, 1891. @Wxpl. in Far North, p. 264, 1898. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 326, 1903. f Ibid., p. 330, 1903. 9 Manitoba and Great North-West, p. 359, 1881. ”Pauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 323, 1831. 1908. ] BIRDS. 391 Selasphorus rufus (Gmel.). Rufous Hummingbird. Alexander Mackenzie, in June, 1793, while on the extreme south- ern headwaters of Peace River, just before crossing the divide to the source of the Fraser, saw a hummingbird which was almost certainly of this species. He speaks of it as the only hummingbird seen by him in the Northwest.* J. Alden Loring reported seeing several hummingbirds at his eamp 15 miles south of Henry House, July 8 to 21, 1896. The species was not identified, but since S. rufus is a common breeder at Banff, Alberta,’ and other points in that general region, these obser- vations, as well as Drummond’s note already mentioned, probably refer to the present species. Tyrannus tyrannus (Linn.). Kingbird. The kingbird is of regular occurrence north to the region of Great Slave Lake. In 1901 we first saw it on an island near the outlet of Athabaska Lake June 1, noting a single bird. On the next day we saw several and collected two at the same place, and on June 3 secured another, all of which proved to be females. We noted no others until July 5, when we saw a single bird at Fort Resolution, and I observed another at Fort Rae July 19. While we were ascending the Atha- baska, we saw several below Big Mouth Brook, 65 miles below Atha- baska Landing, August 26, and others between there and La Biche River on August 27. In 1903 we first noted this bird at Fort Chipewyan June 4, and we saw several near the outlet of the lake on June 5. We next ob- served it near the mouth of Slave River June 19. My brother and Cary saw one at Hay River June 30, and on their return trip ob- served two at Crooked Rapid, Athabaska River, August 15, and two at Grand Rapid August 20. I observed the species at Fort Resolu- tion on July 10 and 15. In the spring of 1904 I saw a kingbird at Fort Simpson on June 1. I did not again note the species until I reached Fort McMurray on my return trip. Here I observed one or two on August 11, and I found the bird rather common at Grand Rapid August 22 and 23. Ross considered this species rare in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Simpson, where it had been collected.°. Eggs taken at Lesser Slave Lake in 1868 were received by the Smithsonian Insti- tution from Strachan Jones. Loring reported seeing one individual at Banff, Alberta, August 30, 1894. Macoun states that during the 4 Voyages to Frozen and Pacific Oceans, p. 216, 1801. 6’ Macoun, Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 334, 1903. € Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. 392 ‘NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. season of 1897 Spreadborough first observed it at Edmonton on May 17, and found a nest on June 10; and that J. M. Macoun [in the summer of 1888] saw one at Grand Raped and a few at aye Portage.? Sayornis phebe (Lath.). Pheebe. In the spring of 1901 we saw a pair at the bridge spanning Ver- milion Creek, 42 miles north of Edmonton, May 2 and 3. We next met with the species near Fort Chipewyan May 29, when we saw a pair and took a specimen, and we collected another 10 miles below | Peace River on June 10. We next noticed it on Slave River, 25 miles below Fort Smith, June 30, when we discovered a nest contain- ing nearly fledged young on the face of a steep bank. We observed the species on lower Slave River July 3, and I saw one along the limestone ridge at Fort Rae on July 20, and collected an immature female near the post July 27. In 1903 we first saw this species at Edmonton May 9, and we found it common between Sturgeon River and Athabaska Landing May 13 to 15. While descending the Athabaska we saw the species 60 miles below Athabaska Landing May 18 and near Little Buffalo River May 26. We next noted it at Smith Landing June 12, and found it common June 18 and 19 on the lower part of Slave River, where many were nesting beneath the overhanging clay banks. Dur- ing my trip northward from Fort Rae I found it rather common along Grandin River August 1 to 4, discovering a nest with nearly fledged young on the latter date, and took a bird of the year near Lake St. Croix August 14. In the spring of 1904 this bird was first noted at Fort Simpson May 14, three being observed. Others were seen May 16, and the species was common May 19, when a pair was taken. It was next seen a few miles below Fort Simpson on June 2. On my return trip several were observed at Fort McMurray August 11. | Ross first recorded this flycatcher from the Mackenzie River region, considering it rare north to Fort Simpson, where he had taken it.? Bendire, in 1896, summarized its northern and western limits of distribution as follows: Longitude 100° (west of Greenwich) marks about the western limits of its breeding range in the United States, but in the Northwest Territory it reaches west to nearly 122° at Fort Simpson, on the Mackenzie River, in latitude 62° 12’ N., where Mr. B. R. Ross, of the Hudson’s Bay Company, obtained a female, No. 22613, in May, 1861, which is now in the United States National Museum collection. This point, as far as yet known, marks both the western and northernmost limits of its range. Its nests and eggs have also been taken on Lesser Slave Lake, scuthern Athabaska, by Mr. S. Jones; and near Fort Rae, Great Slave Lake, by Mr. R. MacFarlane; it has also been obtained by Mr. “Catalogue Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 338, 1903. o Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. 1908. ] _ BIRDS. . 898 James Lockhart, at Fort Resolution; and Mr. A, McKay found the phcebe common about Pelican Narrows, Keewatin, in June, 1891, sending several sets of eggs from there to the United States National Museum collection.? Russell took a specimen May 20, 1893, at Fort Chipewyan, where he found the species abundant at the time of his arrival, May 18. Macoun states that Spreadborough first observed it April 19, 1897, at Edmonton, Alberta, and found a nest there on May 7. In 1888 JeeMe Macoun found it the commonest bird along the Athabaska between Athabaska Landing and Lesser Slave River. Eggs found June 1 had been incubated about a week. It was noted by him also on the Clear- water, on Methye Portage, and between Methye Lake and Isle a la Crosse. Seton records this species from the narrows of Great Slave Lake, where he observed it in the summer of 1907.2 Sayornis saya (Bonap.). Say Phebe. This species occurs sparingly in the Athabaska Valley and along the Mackenzie north at least to the region of Fort Simpson, and probably to its mouth. In 1901 we saw two individuals on a hillside near Athabaska Landing May 5, and while descending the Athabaska noted single birds near Pelican Rapid May 9, above Fort McMurray May 14, and a short distance below that point May 15. In 1903 we saw several at Edmonton, Alberta, May 9 and 10; aad on the way to Athabaska Landing noted it deal between Edmonton and Sandy Creek May 12 to 14, and collected one on the latter date. We last observed it on the Athabaska 60 miles below Athabaska Landing May 18. In the spring of 1904 I saw the first one at Fort Simpson on May 4. I next noted it May 13, collecting a male, and saw others May 21, 25, and 28, noting one or two on each date. After leaving Fort Simpson I did not again note the bird until July 7, when I saw one perched on one of the buildings at Fort McPherson. Ross first recorded this species from the Mackenzie River region, considering it as rare north to Fort Simpson, where he had collected A. specimen (No. 27172) taken by him at Fort Simpson in July, 1861, is still in the National Museum: Nuttallornis borealis (Swains.). Olive-sided Flycatcher. This boreal flycatcher occurs generally, though not commonly, throughout the region north at least to the upper Mackenzie. In * Life Hist. N. A. Birds [II], p. 272, 1896. (Pelican Narrows, the locality here referred i is not in Keewatin, but is the Hudson’s Bay Company post on Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, about 90 miles north of Cumberland House.) b Expl. in Far North, p. 264, 1898. © Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 344, 1908. 4 Auk, XXV, p. 71, 1908. € Nat. Hist. Rey., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. . ee eee 394 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. 1901 we collected a female at Point la Brie, near Fort Chipewyan, on May 29, and saw another individual near the outlet of Athabaska | Lake on June 2. In 1903 we first noted this species at Fort Chipewyan June 4, and saw a pair and took a specimen near the outlet of the lake June 5. We next saw it on Slave River, between Fort Smith and Fort Resolu- tion, noting it daily. June 16 to 19, and we observed a single bird at Fort Resolution June 22. On their return trip Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary observed the species at Fort McMurray August 11 and 12, and at Boiler Rapid August 17. In 1904 I saw one in the mountains near the mouth of Nahanni River on June 4, and another, ube last one observed that season, near Fort Wrigley June 7. This bird was first recorded from the Mackenzie River region by Ross, who considered it rare north to Fort Simpson, where it had been collected. A male (No. 19441) taken at Fort Resolution June 20, 1860, by Kennicott, has been several times recorded, and is still in the National Museum collection. Macoun records that one was taken on the Athabaska, near Grand Rapid, in June, 1888, by J. M. Macoun.” In 1896 J. Alden Loring reported the species common along the trail between Edmonton and Jasper House in the early summer and frequently noted it in the valleys 15 miles south of Henry House July 3 to 21. Myiochanes richardsoni (Swains.). Western Wood Pewee. This species, originally described from the Saskatchewan, was ob- served at various points along our route north to the vicinity of Fort Simpson, though we failed to secure specimens. In the spring of 1903 we first observed this bird in a large tract of pine forest a few miles south of Sandy Creek, Alberta, where we saw — four individuals on May 14. We noted another among the tall spruce woods on the lower Slave River on June 19. My brother and Cary noted one at Fort Providence July 6, and another on Liard River, 5 miles above its mouth, on July 25. While at Fort McMurray, August 8 to 10, on their return trip, they saw six individuals, but were unable to secure specimens. The birds evidently departed for the south on the night of August 10, as no more were seen or heard auine the fol- lowing two days that they remained there. J. Alden Loring reported the species common along ie trail be- tween Edmonton and the mountains in the early summer of 1896, and found a nest near Whitemud Lake, 135 miles west of Edmonton, on June 7. He took a specimen at Banff, Alberta, late in August, 1894. *@Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 278, 1862. ®Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 347, 1903. 1908. ] BIRDS. 395 Empidonax flaviventris Baird. Yellow-bellied Flycatcher. In 1901 we took one in low mixed woods near the outlet of Atha- baska Lake on June 3, and another at Smith Landing on June 16, both of which proved to be males. The species was not elsewhere noted, and these seem to be the only records from the region. Empidonax trailli alnorum Brewst. Alder Flycatcher. This flycatcher occurs abundantly over nearly the entire wooded part of the region, following the Mackenzie to its mouth and being the only representative of the genus on the lower part of that stream. In 1901 we noted the alder flycatcher at our camp 10 miles below Peace River on June 11, and on the following day we again heard its notes 25 miles below the Peace. We found it rather common at Smith Landing, June 13 to 16, and took two males on June 15. ‘The birds usually perched on small dead trees standing among lower shrubbery, and, though easily seen and heard, were extremely wary, diving into the thickets at the shghtest cause for alarm. We saw the bird at Fort Smith June 22, my brother noted it at Fort Resolution July 25, and I took one at Fort Rae July 29. In the spring of 1903 we first observed the bird on the lower Atha- baska, about 20 miles above the delta, on the morning of June 1, when several were seen and heard. We noted it also near the outlet of Athabaska Lake June 5, on Rocher River June 9, and at Smith Landing June 11. On Slave River, between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution, June 15 to 19, we found the bird abundant, and were con- stantly greeted by its characteristic energetic note. My brother and Cary observed it at Hay River June 30 and July 1, at Fort Provi- dence July 4+ and 6, and near the mouth of Nahanni River July 11 and 12. They noted several on Mount Tha-on’-tha at various alti- tudes up to 2,000 feet July 13 to 18, and took one on the former date. They reported it common near Fort Wrigley July 20 to 22. On their return trip they noted it above Fort Simpson July 25, at Fort Rae July 28, and at Fort McMurray August 10. After the divi- sion of the party I observed it frequently at Fort Resolution during the latter part of June and the first half of July. On July 10 I took a nest containing four fresh eggs, securing also the female. The nest was in an alder bush 3 feet from the ground on the lake shore near the edge of the post clearing. In the spring of 1904 this species evidently had not arrived when I left Fort Simpson June 1, and was first observed at Fort Norman, where I saw several daily in the willow thickets June 12 to 14, taking one on June 13. It was next noted a few miles below Fort Norman June 16, and it was common in a broad stretch of low country border- ing the Mackenzie at the Long View, between Bear Rock and Sans 396 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Sault Rapid, where many were heard as we paddled along during the early morning hours of June 18. It was noted also near Sans Sault. Rapid June 19. At Fort Good Hope it was rather common in the willow and alder thickets June 21 to 24, and several specimens, includ- ing both sexes, were taken. After leaving this place I noted it below Fort Good Hope June 25, and found it rather common on the lower Peel July 1. At Fort McPherson I noted it nearly every day during the early part of July, and took a nest, together with the female parent, on July 8. The nest was built in a low bush and contained four fresh eggs. It 1s rather bulky, being 4 inches in diameter by 3 inches high, and is rather loosely constructed of coarse grass and ‘some white cottony substance, and lined with fine grass. While | ascending the Mackenzie on my return trip I saw an individual at Birch Island, about 90 miles below Fort Wrigley, July 21. All specimens from this region being referable to the eastern race (2. t. alnorum), early references to pusillus and trailli are assumed to refer to this form. Richardson recorded Tyrannula pusilla from Fort Simpson.? This species was afterwards taken at that place by Ross, who considered it rare.? Under the name L’mpidonax pusillus traillii, then apphed to the eastern form, Bendire records eggs taken, together with the parent birds, at Fort Resolution.© A skin from the latter place, collected June 30, 1865, and one from Fort Simpson, taken in June, 1861, are still in the National Museum. Catalogue Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 356, 1903. ¢ Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, II, p. 384, 1874. : 4 Brewer's record of a set of eggs of Empidonax hammondi from Anderson River (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., II, p 1, 1879), and MacKFarlane’s consequent inclusion of the species in his list of Arctic birds, is probably based on an error. 1908.] BIRDS. 399 May 17, 18 (first females), 20, and 30, was secured from the large flocks which paused here on their northward migration. Horned larks, undoubtedly of this form, have been observed on two occasions on the Arctic islands, but the bird is rare there. J. C. Ross recorded three seen near Felix Harbor, Boothia;* and Walker observed one at Port Kennedy in July, 1859, during M’Clintock’s expedition.’ Richardson observed the species on its breeding grounds on the Arctic coast near Liverpool Bay, August 4, 1848, when young birds were seen running about.¢ Under the name “vemophila cornuta, Ross recorded a specimen from Fort Simpson.? MacFarlane found nests on the Barren Grounds and on the coast of Franklin Bay, and received eggs from the Eskimo, presumably from the lower Anderson or from Liverpool Bay.? Bendire gives the earliest breeding record for the lower Anderson as June 14, but nearly all the nests taken by MacFarlane were found during the first week in July.’ Specimens from Big Island, Franklin Bay, and the Arctic coast east of Fort Anderson are referred by Overholser to this form;/’ and the bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that horned larks, also undoubtedly referable to the present form, were received from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, and Fort Good Hope. Under the name Otocoris a. leucoloema, Russell records five specimens taken at Fort Chipewyan May 20 to 25, 1893." Some of these have been examined by Ridgway and prove referable to hoyti. Macoun records eggs, undoubtedly be- longing to this form, taken by Bishop Lofthouse on Artillery Lake, June 9, 1900.‘ Hubert Darrell informs me that he observed horned larks near the base of Kent Peninsula on June 1, 1902. Otocoris alpestris arcticola Oberholser. Alaskan Horned Lark. In the spring of 1904 the first horned larks observed at Fort Simp- son were males taken on April 28 and 29, which prove referable to this form. They were seen only in small numbers at first. Other males were taken on May 9 and 14. Among the large series of horned larks taken later in May are two females (May 18 and 30), which are also best referred to arcticola, though somewhat inclining toward hoyti. 4 Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxvi, 1835. 6 Proc. Roy. Soc. Dublin, III, p. 62, 1860. € Arctic Searchifg Expedition, I, p. 251, 1851. @Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 442, 1861. €Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 488, 1891. i Life Hist. N. A. Birds [II], p. 333, 1896. SProc, U. S. Nat. Mus., XXIV, pp. 812, 813; June, 1902. hk Expl. in Far North, p. 264, 1898. ‘Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 364, 1903. 400 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. ' [No. 27. Pica pica hudsonia (Sab.). American Magpie. While we were descending the Athabaska in 1901 some of the - voyagers. remarked on the absence of magpies, stating that a few were usually noticed along the river about Fort McMurray. Two specimens (Nos. 61215 and 61216), received from Strachan Jones, and recorded with a collection from Lesser Slave Lake, were proba- bly taken at this place. Richardson says: “The American magpie has not been seen to the north of the River of the Mountains, and is rare even there.” ¢ Cyanocitta cristata (Linn.). Blue Jay. This jay is of regular occurrence along the Athabaska, which seems to be its northern limit. It was first noted near the mouth of Little Red River on May 15, 1901, a single bird being seen. The species was not again noted until we were ascending the Athabaska on our return, when we saw small companies near Big Cascade Rapid, August 13, and between Grand Rapid and Pelican Rapid, August 22 and 23. While on their outward trip in 1903, Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary heard the notes of several at Fort McMurray on August 11. In 1904, while ascending the Athabaska on my return trip, I saw and heard several near Pelican Rapid, August 25. Macoun says: Not rare around Athabasca Landing, May 22, 1888, and up the Athabasca to Lesser Slave River; one specimen was taken three miles up the Clearwater River from Fort McMurray in latitude 56° 30’; said to be quite common ~ about Isle a la Crosse Lake and to winter there (J. M. Mavoun). One ob- served June 8, 1897, at Edmonton, Alta., eating a young bird; the only one seen (Spreadborough) 2 Perisoreus canadensis (Linn.). Canada Jay. The ‘ whisky jack’ is common and generally distributed through- out the wooded region. It is one of the few winterers, but its scarcity during the more severe months indicates that it is to some extent migratory. In 1901 we first noted the Canada jay in the groves of Banksian pine between Vermilion Creek and Towatinnow River, where it was common May 3 and 4. While descending the Athabaska we saw the species several times between Grand Rapid and Little Red River, May 11 to 15. We saw several in the willow thickets on the Quatre Fourches marsh, May 24, several on a wooded island near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 2, and noted the species on Rocher River, June 5. We collected a pair in worn breeding plumage, with molting tail feathers, together with a young bird, at the mouth of Peace River, @Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 179, 1851. 6 Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 374, 1903. 1908. ] BIRDS. 401 June 6. At our camps 10 and 25 miles below Peace River we found the species common, June 7 to 18, and collected adult birds at the for- mer place on June 7 and 9. We noted the species several times at Fort Smith, June 19 to 28, and while descending Slave River to Great Slave Lake noted it at a point about 100 miles below Fort Smith on July 2. While crossing Great Slave Lake to Fort Rae I saw many on the north shore of the lake and among the islands of the Northern Arm, July 15 to 18, and my brother often observed it at Fort Reso- lution during July. At Fort Rae I found the species abundant, July 19 to 29, and on July 23 collected several immature birds which were molting from the juvenal to the winter plumage. In 1903 we saw a pair, accompanied by young not long from the nest, at Edmonton on May 8. A young one just flying was taken 50 miles north of Edmonton, May 14. Along Athabaska and Slave rivers the bird was common and was noted nearly every day. I occasionally saw it at Fort Resolution during the latter part of June and the first part of July, and my brother and Cary frequently saw it during their trip between Hay River and Fort Wrigley, July 1 to 20. On their return trip they often observed it at their camps, especially while ascending the Athabaska. They last noted it near Lily Lake, September 24. While crossing Great Slave Lake to Fort Rae, after the division of the party, I saw this jay at Gros Cape, July 23, and at Fort Rae, July 27. Throughout the lake region between Fort Rae and Great Bear Lake I found it common, and noted it almost daily during August. During my voyage along the south shore of Great Bear Lake, August 27 to September 17, I found it abundant, and col- lected several at my camp east of Leith Point and at Fort Franklin. During September the jays fed largely on the berries of L’mpetrum nigrum, and some individuals were badly stained about the head and breast with its purple juice. I frequently observed the species while ascending the Mackenzie in October. During the latter part of October and during November I found it rather common at Fort Simpson, but did not observe it during December. In January and February, 1904, unusually cold months, this bird was seldom observed at Fort Simpson, but during March it became common and was seen nearly every time I visited the woods. On March 24 I observed birds apparently mating, but I was unsuccess- ful in attempts to locate the nests. I frequently observed the species during April and occasionally during May. While voyaging down the Mackenzie in June I seldom observed the species, but noted a pair with young not long from the nest near Wolverene Rock, 100 miles below Fort Norman, June 18. I saw several on Peel River, near Fort McPherson, July 16, and while ascending the Mackenzie noted the species near the mouth of Nahanni River, July 24. I saw _ 44131—No. 27—_08——26 402 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. a few on Smith Portage, August 4, and on the Athabaska near House River, August 24, and noted it daily between Athabaska Landing and Edmonton, September 2 to 4. | During Frankln’s first journey to the Arctic Sea, the Canada jay was observed at Fort Enterprise, and was noted as one of the four birds which still remained there at the end of October, 1820.° In the following spring some young birds made their appearance about the house on June 11.2. On Franklin’s second northern journey it was noted at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, about the last of October, 1825,° and was seen by Richardson on the lower Coppermine late in the following summer.? A young bird taken at Fort Frank- lin, May 26, 1826, was the basis of the name Garrulus brachyrhyn- chus.¢ Jing noted the species at Fort Reliance, at the eastern end | of Great Slave Lake, in the winter of 1833-34; and Simpson recorded it from Fort Confidence, Great Bear Lake, in the winter of 1837-88.9 Ross recorded the bird as being abundant in the Mackenzie River region north to La Pierre House, as wintering, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.” In the-Anderson River region, MacFarlane found the species tolerably numerous throughout the wooded coun- try, and obtained its eggs. A nest found May 11, 1863, contained two young birds a few days old and a fresh egg. Another nest con- tained four eggs, the contents of which were in different stages of development.’ In notes sent to the Smithsonian, he speaks of seeing the species at the crossing of Horton River, near the head of Frank- lin Bay, during one of his summer trips. The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Liard, and Fort Anderson; and Strachan Jones sent both skins and eggs from Lesser Slave Lake. Eggs collected, together with the female parent, at Pelican Narrows, eastern Saskatchewan, by H. MacKay in March, 1891, were re- ceived by the National Museum through MacFarlane.’ In a manu- script list recently sent me, he records a nest containing five fresh eggs, found at Green Lake, Saskatchewan, March 28, 1880, by W. S. Simpson. Another nest containing four eggs, which were advanced in incubation, was discovered at Fort Providence on April 15, 1885. A set of eggs taken by G. A. Ball at Athabaska Landing, Alberta, *Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 247, 1823. 5 Ibid., p. 315, 1823. © Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 60, 1828. @Tpbid., p. 271, 1828. € Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 297, 1831. ’ Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 166, 1836. 9 Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 216, 1843. "Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 288, 1862. +Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 439, 1891. j Life Hist. N, A. Birds [II], p, 888, 1896. 1908. ] BIRDS. 403 March 25, 1902, is in the collection of the National Museum. In a letter received from James MacKinlay in the spring of 1905, he reports that a nest containing eggs was found in a muskeg near the Athabaska, 30 miles below Athabaska Landing, March 22, 1905. The nest was in a willow bush, at a height which allowed a person standing beside it to view its contents. Late in August, 1894, J. Alden Loring reported seeing several at Banff, Alberta, taking one on August 28, and he saw several at Ed- monton, September 7 to 26. In the early autumn of 1895 he found it common along the trail between Edmonton and Jasper House. In 1896 also it was abundant along the same trail during the early summer. He took young birds 12 miles west of Ste. Anne, Alberta, May 27, and about 120 miles west of Edmonton, May 29. The tail feathers of these specimens are fully grown. He found the species common in the mountains near Henry House in July, and all along the trail between Jasper House and Smoky River in the early autumn, collecting several at Grand Cache, about 120 miles north of Jasper House, September 25. These are in fresh fall plumage, and are shghtly darker than spring specimens. Corvus corax principalis Ridgw. Northern Raven. The raven, almost universally called ‘crow’ in the north, occurs throughout the region the year round, though less commonly during the more severe months. It has been known to brave out the long Arctic night as far north as latitude 73°. In 1901 we saw one at Grand Rapid, May 10; another below Fort McMurray, May 15; and several near Fort Chipewyan, May 18 to June 5. We next noted the species on Slave River 50 miles below Fort Smith, June 30, when we saw a family of old and young, and collected one. We noted several near the mouth of Slave River, July 4, and several on islands in the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake, July 16 and 17. While we were ascending the Athabaska on our return trip we saw a number between Pelican Rapid and Big Mouth Brook, August 25 and 26. In 1903 we occasionally saw the raven along the Athabaska, noted it a few times on Rocher River, and found it common along Slave River, noting numbers nearly every day between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution. My brother and Cary found it common at Hay River and along the Mackenzie as far down as Fort Wrigley. On their return trip they noted it at Brulé Rapid, August 19; at House River, August 22; and 50 miles south of Athabaska Landing, September 23. I saw a few among the Simpson Islands and on the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake in July, and noted a few deserted nests on cliffs. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted the raven on Grandin River, August 1, 3, and 4, and on Lake Mazenod, August 6. North of 404 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. the height of land I noted it nearly every day on the various lakes traversed during the remainder of the month. The species was com-, mon also along the southern shore of Great Bear Lake and on Bear River during September, and a few were seen nearly every day as we ascended the Mackenzie to Fort Simpson, October 2 to 20. At Fort Simpson I found it fairly common during October and November, and occasionally observed one or two during December. During January and February, 1904, one or two were occasionally observed, and the species became fairly common during March. On March 28, a warm, still day, I saw a flock of 10 high in the air, soar- ing about in intersecting circles. During April and May I noted the species nearly every day. A pair was observed carrying nesting ma- terial on April 8, but I was unable to locate the nesting site. While descending the Mackenzie I noted the species near Nahanni River, June 4, and near Fort Wrigley, June 7, and a nest in a cavity on the face of a cliff containing well-grown young attracted my attention at Roche Trempe-l’eau, June 8. On June 10, a short distance above Fort Norman, I saw a brood of young which had recently left the nest, and observed similar broods, usually accompanied by their parents, below Fort Norman, June 16, and at Wolverene Rock, June 18. On June 12, near Fort Norman, I saw a pair, which evidently had a nest on the south side of Bear Rock. I saw a few on the lower Mackenzie, June 28, and on the lower Peel, July 1. On my return trip I noticed the species below Fort Norman, July 20; near Pelican Rapid, Athabaska River, August 25; 25 miles above Pelican Portage, August 28; and near Swift Current Rapid, August 29. Edward Sabine recorded the raven from Melville Island, where several pairs were seen;“ and Fisher noted its arrival at the same place, May 15, 1820. J.C. Ross states that a pair remained at Port Bowen throughout the winter of 1824—25.° John Ross noted one at Felix Harbor on October 22, 1829, and states that two arrived there on March 18, 1830.4. M’Clintock observed a few at Port Kennedy in early November, 1858.2 McCormitk noted the bird at Beechey Island on November 23, 1852, and June 21, 1853.f On Franklin’s first Journey the raven was noted about the last of October, 1820, as one of the four birds which still remained about Fort Enterprise: / in the following spring young appeared around the post about June @Suppl. to Appendix Parry’s First Voyage, p. cxcrv, 1824. ’ Journal Voyage of Discovery, p. 191, 1821. ¢Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 97, 1826. 4 Narrative Ross’s Second Voyage, pp. 206, 295, 1835. € Voyage of the Fox, p. 188, 1860. ! McCormick’s Voyages, II, pp. 62, 81, 1884. I Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 247, 1823. 1908.1] BIRDS. 405 11 On Franklin’s second northern journey the bird was noted at Fort Franklin about the last of October, 1825.2 Simpson noted its presence at Fort Confidence in the winter of 1837-38." Armstrong relates that a pair of ravens passed the winter of 1850-51, in spite of the weeks of darkness, near the winter quarters of the /nvestigator, in Prince of Wales Strait. They were several times seen during the winter, but toward spring one of the birds disappeared, probably having been killed by some animal.“ He mentions also seeing a raven near Prince Alfred Cape, Banks Land, September 10, 1851.¢ During the voyage of the Hnterprise, Collinson noted two ravens November 13, 1852, at Cambridge Bay, Victoria Land.f Ross recorded the species as being abundant in the Mackenzie River region north to the Arctic coast, as wintering, and as having been taken at Fort Simp- son. MacFarlane found it abundant on Anderson and Lockhart rivers, and discovered a number of nests, usually built in trees. In February and March, 1865, a raven became semidomesticated at Fort Anderson.”. Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway state that the species was obtained at Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, and Fort Simp- son; a specimen was received also from Fort Liard. Russell took the species at Fort Smith and Fort Rae, finding it a rare winter resident at the latter place, and observed it on the Arctic coast be- tween the mouth of the Mackenzie and Herschel Island.’ Macoun records 5 eggs taken on Artillery Lake, May 24, 1900, by C. Fair- echild;* and J. W. Tyrrell mentions a nest of young found at the same place on May 26.! In the early autumn of 1895, J. Alden Loring saw several pairs in the Rocky Mountains of western Alberta. During the summer of 1896, he saw several in the foothills of the Rockies in the same region. He observed the species also in the mountains between Jasper House and Smoky River in the early autumn, and about the middle of October saw two individuals above timberline in the mountains west of Henry House. 4@Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 315, 1823. b Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 60, 1828. ¢ Narrative Discoveries cn North Coast of America, p. 216, 1848. @Narrative Discovery Northwest Passage, p. 290, 1857. €Tbid., p. 427, 1857. ee f Journal of H. M. S. Enterprise, p. 247, 1889. I Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 283, 1862. i Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 439, 1891. Moist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, Il, p.-236, 1874. J xpl. in Far North, p. 265, 1898. k Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 385, 1903. ! Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada) for 1900-1901, p. 137, 1902. 406 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Corvus brachyrhynchos ©. L. Brehm. Crow. This bird, called ‘ barking crow’ in the north, occurs rather com- - monly throughout the region north to Great Slave Lake. It is very common in the vicinity of Fort Providence, which is near its northern limit, but seldom reaches Fort Simpson.¢ In the spring of 1901, the crow was noted almost daily between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, April 29 to May 5, and was seen on the Athabaska near Fort McMurray, May 15, and at its mouth, May 17. It was noted almost daily near Fort Chipewyan, May 18 to June 5; and was seen on Rocher River, June 5; at the mouth of Peace River, June 6; and 25 miles below the Peace, June 12 and 13. At Fort Resolution my brother noted it almost daily, July 5 to 292; and I saw a number among the islands of the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake, July 15 to 18. In 1903 we first saw the bird at Edmonton, May 10, and we found it common on the way to Athabaska Landing, May 11 to 15. We next observed it on the lower Athabaska, May 31, and we saw a few at Fort Chipewyan, June 3 and 4. The species was common on Rocher River, June 6 to 8. A noisy flock of about fifty, probably merely a temporary gathering for some social or predatory purpose, was seen June 6, and several nests apparently just finished were found in high willow bushes, June 8. The bird was noted near the mouth of the Peace, June 9, and on lower Slave River, June 19, and was occa- sionally noted at Fort Resolution during the latter part of June. My brother and Cary found it common at Hay River, June 30 and July 1, and saw a few daily at Fort Providence, July 4 to 8. While tra- versing the Northern Arm between Gros Cape and Fort Rae, July 23 to 26, I saw a few daily. On my trip northward I last noted it on Grandin River, August 1 and 5. In 1904 I did not see the crow at Fort Simpson, Face it is said to reach that point occasionally. J. W. Mills reported it common at Willow River, near Fort Providence, April 25, and on May 12 found a nest containing two eggs, which he afterwards collected. On my return trip IT found the bird common about Fort Providence and the Desmarais Islands, July 29, and saw several at Fort Chipewyan August 7. Specimens were received by the Smithsonian Institution from Fort Rae and Big Island. McConnell states that the species arrived at Fort Providence April 20, 1888." Macoun states that J. M. Macoun [in 4MacFarlane’s record of the nesting of this species in the Anderson River region (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 489, 1891), is doubtless a case of mis- identification. Eggs taken near Fort Anderson, May 5, 1866, referred by him to C. americanus and now in the U. S. National Museum, have been examined recently and prove to be those of the raven. ’ Ann, Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., IV (new ser.), p. 160D, 1891. 1908.] BIRDS. 407 1888] saw a few between Red Deer and Athabaska Landing, Alberta, and found the species very numerous near Methye Portage and at Isle & la Crosse.* J. Alden Loring reported two seen at Edmonton, September 10, 1894. Observations made at Lac du Brochet Post, Reindeer Lake, from 1874 to 1889, show that the date of arrival of this bird ranged from April 6 to April 28, the average date being April 16. The detailed dates appear in a table given on page 22. Similar dates for Fort Chipewyan are given in tabular form on page 23. H. W. Jones reports seeing the bird on the Mackenzie above Fort Simpson, April 22, 1905. Nucifraga columbiana (Wils.). Clark Nutcracker. J. Alden Loring noted this species near Banff, Alberta, August 30, 1894, and in the autumn of 1895 saw two small flocks near Jasper House. As the bird ranges to Alaska, it is doubtless a regular in- habitant of the Rocky Mountains in western Alberta and north- eastern British Columbia. Molothrus ater (Bodd.). Cowbird. This bird, usually called ‘ buffalo-bird’ in Alberta and the Peace River Valley, where it 1s common, occurs northward at least to Fort Simpson. In the spring of 1903 we first observed the cowbird near Sturgeon River, May 12, noting three, and we found it common between there and Athabaska Landing, May 13 to 15. We saw a few at Grand Rapid, May 22 and 24, and at Little Buffalo River, May 26. We next saw the bird at Fort Resolution, June 22, when two or three were observed about the post buildings, and two specimens were taken. In the spring of 1904, at Fort Simpson, I saw the first one on May 14, and three more on May 20. ‘The latter were closely attending the herd of cattle in a field near the post. ‘They were the last seen that season. J. W. Mills collected a female specimen at Fort Providence, May 18, 1905. H. W. Jones reports the bird common at Hay River in the spring of 1907. Ross listed the species as very rare in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Simpson, where he had collected it.2 I find in the catalogue of the birds-in the National Museum the records of a speci- men (No. 22803) taken by Ross at Fort Simpson, May 27, 1861, and of one from Peace River. These specimens seem to have disap- peared, and evidently the records have been ignored or overlooked. Bendire records eggs taken by Strachan Jones at Lesser Slave Lake @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 387, 1903. b Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser), p. 282, 1862. 408 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. in 1868.¢ J. Alden Loring reported this species as rather common in the valleys in the vicinity of Henry House in July, 1896. Xanthocephalus xanthocephalus (Bonap.). Yellow-headed Blackbird. This blackbird is an inhabitant of the prairie sloughs, and is only locally found north of the plains. While I was collecting on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipewyan, May 24, 1901,a small company of these birds flew past, and I shot a male in rather dull plumage. The species was not elsewhere noted. Ross reported having observed this bird on one occasion at Fort Simpson.’ Eggs are recorded in the catalogue of the National Mu- seum as having been received from Strachan Jones from Lesser Slave Lake, but they are not mentioned by Bendire. A skin recorded by him as coming from Du Brochet, Reindeer Lake,’ is entered in the catalogue of birds as from Pelican Narrows [on Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan], which is probably the correct locality. Russell re- ports seeing one at Fort Chipewyan in the summer of 1893.2 H. W. Jones reports a female taken at Hay River, Great Slave Lake. Agelaius pheniceus arctolegus Oberholser. Northern Redwing. Agelaius phaniceus arctolegus Oberholser, Auk, XXIV, p. 332, July, 1907. (Type from Fort Simpson, Mackenzie.) The redwing blackbird breeds abundantly in suitable places throughout the region north to Great Slave Lake and the upper Mackenzie and less commonly to the northward of these points. In the summer of 1901 flocks containing hundreds were seen a few miles north of Edmonton, April 30 and May 1. A few were noted near Athabaska Landing, May 5; many at-the mouth of the Athabaska, May 17; and a number on the Quatre Fourches marsh, May 24. In a small marsh near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, near which we camped June 1 to 4, the species was common and a male was taken June 4. It was abundant in the swamps bordering Rocher River, and one was collected there June 5. At a point about 25 miles below the mouth of Peace River the species was common in a small marsh - near the Slave, June 12 and 13; several specimens were collected here on June 13, and nests found on the same date contained young a few days old. On Smith Portage the bird was common June 18, and it was seen daily at Fort Smith, June 19 to 28, a pair being taken June 21. It was noted near Fort Resolution, July 6 and 9. Several were seen at Fort Rae, July 29, and an immature male was taken. On our return trip we saw numbers near Sturgeon River, September 3. “V,ife Hist. N. A. Birds [II], p. 435, 1896. > Nat. Hist. Rey., II (second ser.), p. 282, 1862. ¢ Life Hist. N. A. Birds [II], p. 447, 1896. @Expl. in Far North, p. 265, 1898. 1908. ] BIRDS. 409 In the spring of 1903 we first observed this bird a few miles north of Edmonton, May 11. It was then common, and we observed it in numbers daily to May 15, while on our way to Athabaska Landing. It was next seen on the lower Athabaska, where we found it common May 31 and June 1; and it was common also on Rocher River, June 6 to 8. It was next noted on Slave River below Fort Smith, June 15. Great numbers breed in the marshes in the delta of Slave River, but the species was seldom seen in the immediate vicinity of Fort Resolu- tion until July 15, when a number of old and young birds were ob- served. Great numbers of old and young were seen at the delta when I passed there on July 17. On their return trip in the fall Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary noted a few at Fort McMurray, August 10, and found the species common and migrating at the same place on August 11. During my trip northward from Fort Rae, I observed the species on Grandin River, August 1 and 4, and on Lake Faber, August 7, noting a number on each occasion. In the spring of 1904 the arrival of the redwing was noted at Wil- low River, near Fort Providence, on May 9, by H. W. Jones. He took a male May 14, and saw the first females on May 22. At Fort Simp- son I noted the first one May 16, saw another May 17, and found the species common May 18, when a specimen was taken. The species was noted nearly every day during the remainder of the month, females first appearing on May 26, when the type of arctolegus was taken. On my return trip I saw a few migrants on the Athabaska near the mouth of La Biche River on the morning of September 1. King recorded the redwing blackbird from Methye Portage.*_ Ross listed it as common in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Nor- man, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.’ In addition to skins from the latter locality, the bird catalogue of the National Museum records specimens from Fort Resolution, Big Island, Fort Rae, Fort Liard, and Lesser Slave Lake, all undoubtedly belonging to the present form. Specimens from the first two localities are still in the collection. At Fort Resolution, in 1860, Kennicott first noted red- wings on May 14.° Macoun records eggs taken by Spreadborough at Edmonton, Alberta, May 27, 1897.4 In July, 1896, J. Alden Loring found redwings, undoubtedly of this form, common in the vicinity of Henry House. Hubert Dar- rell informs me that he saw redwing blackbirds on the divide between the Coppermine and the head of Dease River early in Au- gust, 1902. MacFarlane, in notes recently received, records a female taken at Fond du Lac, Athabaska Lake. 4Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 216, 1836. b Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 282, 1862. € Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 170, 1869. @Cat, Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 400, 1903. 410 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. {wo. 27. Sturnella neglecta Aud. Western Meadowlark. This bird is common on the plains of Alberta, and apparently has not been previously recorded to the northward of the Saskatchewan watershed. It was common in the fields between Edmonton and Sturgeon River, May 1, 1901, and a few were seen in a ‘ prairie’ 50 miles north of Edmonton, May 8. In the spring of 1903 we observed this bird at Edmonton, May 10 to 12, noting several daily, and while on our way to Athabaska Land- ing saw one near Sandy Creek, May 14, and another near Athabaska Landing, May 15. On the morning of May 20, 1904, I secured a fine male in a field back of the post buildings at Fort Simpson, Mackenzie. When shown the specimen, one of the ladies reported seeing two others on the same morning. The species had never been seen before at that place by any of the inhabitants. Euphagus carolinus (Miill.). Rusty Blackbird. This abundant and widely distributed blackbird breeds commonly throughout the region north to the mit of trees. It is the earliest blackbird to arrive in spring, and in autumn many of the birds, now in rusty garb, delay their departure for the south until forced to leave by the severity of the climate and the scarcity of food. In 1901 this bird was first noted on Loon Island, 50 miles north of Fort Resolution, July 11, when a few were seen and a female was collected. A few were seen at Fort Rae, July 26 to 29, and while we were ascending the Athabaska a number were observed a few miles above Fort McMurray on August 12. In 1903 we first detected this bird on the lower Athabaska, June 1, noting several, and next observed it on the lower Slave, June 18. My brother and Cary saw a few individuals at Fort Providence, July 6 and 7, and took three specimens on the former date. On their return trip they found the species migrating commonly at Athabaska Landing, August 31 to September 4. After the division of the party I noted the species at Fort Rae, July 28, and while on my trip north- ward from Fort Rae observed it on Grandin River, August 1 to 4, and saw a small flock on Lake Hardisty, August 17, taking two specimens. I noted it also on the route between there and MacTavish Bay on August 20 and 23. While traveling along the southern shore of Great Bear Lake I saw a few daily at our camp east of Leith Point, August 29 to September 3, taking one on the latter date; noted a few 40 miles west of McVicar Bay September 13, and near Manito Islands, September 15; and observed it several times at Fort Franklin, September 17 to 23, taking two specimens, which proved to be very fat. I next observed the species on the Mackenzie, where I noted a few nearly every day between Fort Norman and a point about 50 1908.] BIRDS. Att miles below Fort Simpson, October.1 to 16. They were generally seen seeking for food along the icy margin of the river, and the last one noted was found dead on the bank. In the spring of 1904 the first male of this species was taken at Wil- low River, near Fort Providence, on May 2, by J. W. Mills, and the first female on May 3. During the next few days the species became common, and several specimens were taken by Messrs. Mills and Jones. At Fort Simpson I first observed it on May 4, noting two. On May 10 I saw three, and I noted it also on May 14 and 15, but the species was not common until May 16. During the remainder of the month it was seen occasionally. During my trip down the Macken- zie I found it breeding abundantly about some marshy ponds on Manito Island, near Fort Good Hope, June 23, taking several, and also saw it near that post, June 24. While ascending the Peel, July 1, I saw a flock near the mouth of the river. During my return trip I found it common at Fort Chipewyan August 7, and noted a few near Quito River August 30. Specimens were taken by J. W. Mills at Fort Providence on May 7 and 8, 1905, and the bird was first noted there on April 29. Richardson states that this species arrives at Great Bear Lake by May 3, and describes one taken at Fort Franklin, May 15, 1826. King took it at Fort Reliance, where, in the autumn of 1833, a flock of about 30 remained feeding on the offal from the fishery until December.’ Richardson noted the species in flocks in the delta of the Mackenzie below Harrison Island in the summer of 1848.° Ross reported it as common in the Mackenzie tiver region, and as having been collected at Fort Simpson.? Mac- Farlane found it fairly abundant throughout the wooded country in the Anderson River region, and found many nests.° Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway record it from Fort Simpson, Fort Rae, Anderson River, and Peel River;/ and skins were received also from Fort Resolution and Big Island. Skins recorded in the catalogue of the birds in the National Museum, taken at Fort Simpson, May 5 and 7, 1861, prob- ably represent about the earliest arrivals. Macoun states that Spread- borough found this bird abundant in the spring of 1897 at Edmon- ton, where, on June 10, he found a nest with young; and that J. M. Macoun found it abundant between Methye Portage and Isle a la Crosse in the summer of 1888.2. Hubert Darrell tells me that he saw “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 286, 287, 1831. b Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 279, 1836. ¢ Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 231, 1851. dNat. Hist. Rey., II (second ser.), p. 282, 1862. € Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 440, 1891. f Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, II, pp. 205, 206, 1874. J Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, pp. 407, 408, 1903, 4192 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27 blackbirds, undoubtedly of this species, near the head of Dease River, on the divide between the Coppermine and Great Bear Lake, early in August, 1902. Euphagus cyanocephalus (Wagl.). Brewer Blackbird. This species appears not to occur, at least on our route, north of Athabaska Landing, Alberta, where it 1s common. In 1901 we found it occurring in large flocks along the route between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, April 29 to May After leaving the latter point we did not note the bird until we again arrived there on August 30, when we observed numbers about the buildings. We found it common also near Sturgeon River on September 3. In the spring of 1903 we first noted it at Edmonton, May 8, when we saw a few, and found it abundant between there and ehabacka Landing, May 11 to 15. On their return trip Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary noted one at Athabaska Landing, September 16, and found it fairly common in the open country between that place and Edmonton, September 16 to 21. They found it abundant also be- tween Edmonton and Calgary on September 28. In 1904 I found it very common along the road between Athabaska Landing and Edmonton, September 2 to 4. In September, 1894, J. Alden Loring observed immense flocks feed- ing in every grainfield near Edmonton. In 1896 he found them common along the Jasper House trail in the early part.of the sum- mer, and noted several small flocks near the junction of Grand Cache and Smoky rivers late in September. Macoun records eggs taken by Spreadborough at Edmonton, Al- berta, May 22, 1897.° Quiscalus quiscula eneus Ridgw. Bronzed Grackle. The bronzed grackle occurs abundantly in certain marshy localities, notably the deltas of the larger rivers, north to Great Slave Lake. In 1901 we found this bird common a few miles north of Edmonton, May 1. We next noted the species in the Quatre Fourches marsh, May 24, observing a number. We found it abundant in the swamps bordering Rocher River on June 5, and also 25 miles below Peace River, ane 12 and 18, where we took a male. We next observed it on Smith Portage, June 18, and saw numbers daily at Fort Smith, June 19 to 28. Here we took a young bird just from the nest on June 19, and during our stay collected several adults. We saw a few on Slave River below Fort Smith, June 30 and July 1, and at Fort “ Russell records one taken at Fort Chipewyan, May 23, 1893 (Expl. in Far North, p. 266, 1898). The reputed specimen has been examined and proves referable to Quiscalus q. ceneus. ® Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II, p. 411, 1903. 1908.] BIRDS. 4138 Resolution, July 9 and 11. On our return trip we observed a number on Smith Portage, August 5. In 1903 we first noted the bronzed grackle at Edmonton on May 10, when we saw four individuals, and we observed it daily between Edmonton and Sandy Creek, Alberta, May 11 to 14. We next met with it on the lower Athabaska June 1; found it common on Rocher River, June 6 to 8: and noted it near the mouth of the Peace on June 9. We observed a few near the mouth of Slave River, June 19, and at Fort Resolution, June 20 and 21. I did not again see the species at Fort Resolution, but found it common near Stone Island on July 18, when I noted the species for the last time that season. In the spring of 1904 the arrival of this species was noted by H. W. Jones at Willow River, near Fort Providence, on May 2, and males were collected there on May 4+ and 10. On my return trip I saw the bird on Smith Portage, noting a number on August 4. Ross recorded this species, under the name Quiscalus versicolor, as being rare in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Simpson, where he took it.1 The bird catalogue of the National Museum records specimens from Fort Resolution, Big Island, and Fort Simpson, the one taken at the latter place May 3, 1861, probably representing about the earliest arrival of the species. Both skins and eggs, collected by Strachan Jones probably in 1868, were received also from Lesser Slave Lake. Bendire records eggs taken by Lock- hart at Fort Resolution as early as May 17, 1863.2 Macoun records egos taken by Spreadborough at Edmonton, Alberta, May 31, 1897.° Hesperiphona vespertina (Coop.). Evening Grosbeak. A flock of four was seen at Grand Rapid, Athabaska River, May 21,1903. The birds were feeding among the willows and alders near the head of the island and a fine male was taken. At the report of the pistol the remaining birds flew wildly toward the foot of the rapid, and could not again be found. Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary, while on their return trip, collected an immature male on the Athabaska a few miles above Athabaska Landing, September 4. J. Alden Loring reported seeing a pair at St. Albert, Alberta, May 25, 1896, and observed four individuals near Spotted Lake, on the Jasper House trail about 50 miles west of Edmonton. on November 3 of the same year. Bonaparte records two specimens * shot early in the spring on the Athepescow Lake near the Rocky Mountains.”¢ Later he figured and described one of these specimens, this time giving the locality as a Nat. Te Rey., II (second ser.), p. 283, 1862. bjjife Hist: N. A. Birds [II], p. 502, 1896. ¢€ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II; p. 413, 1903. 4 Zool. Journ., III, p. 49, 1827. 414 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. } [No. 27. “ Athabasca Lake.”* These specimens, which formed the basis of the earliest published records of the species, with the exception of - the original description, he found in the collection of Mr. Lead- beater.” Richardson, evidently referring to the same record, states that the species “frequents the * * * eastern declivity of the Rocky Mountains, in latitude 56°.” ¢ Concerning the species Macoun says: Not uncommon at Edmonton, Alberta, between April 16th and May 14th, 1897, when they disappeared. Two specimens were seen on the trail between Lesser Slave Lake and Peace River Landing, Atha., in June, and a pair with young just able to fly at Dunvegan, latitude 56°, July 26, 1903. (Spreadborough. ) He records also three specimens taken at Edmonton, Alberta, May 14, 1898.4 > Pinicola enucleator leucura (Miill.). Eastern Pine Grosbeak. Pine grosbeaks occur throughout the greater part of the wooded region in summer, but in winter mainly withdraw from at least its northern half, and become very abundant southward. A male taken on a large lake a few miles south of MacTavish Bay, on August 25, 1903, and another taken on the south shore of Great Bear Lake a few miles east of Manito Islands, on September 14, prove referable to the eastern race. In each case only a single bird was seen. King recorded pine grosbeaks, probably referable to this race, from Fort Reliance, Great Slave Lake, and from Artillery Lake.“ Speci- mens from Fort Rae and Fort Resolution, recorded in the bird cata- logue of the National Museum, were also probably of this form. Pinicola enucleator montana Ridgw. Rocky Mountain Pine Grosbeak. Macoun mentions that two were seen by Spreadborough on a moun- tain on the north side of Miette River, near Jasper House, August: 29, 1898s J. Alden Loring saw several pine grosbeaks in the mountains between Jasper House and Smoky River, Alberta, in the late summer of 1896, which probably were referable to this form. Pinicola enucleator alascensis Ridgw. Alaska Pine Grosbeak. During our investigations in this region, the first pine grosbeaks referable to this form were seen at Fort Franklin, September 20, 1903, when two specimens were taken from a small flock which was feeding on the seeds of dwarf birch (Betula nana) near the shore of the lake. @Am. Orn., II, pl. 15, fig. 1, dese. pp. 76, 78, 1828. ’ Regarding probable source of these specimens, see p. 61. © Fauna Boreali-Americana, IT, p. 269, 1831. @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 416, 1904. € Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, I, p. 149, 1836. f Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 418, 1904. . 1908.] BIRDS. 415 While we were ascending the Mackenzie a large flock was seen near Gravel River on October 5, and many other flocks, proceeding lei- surely southward along the river and feeding as they traveled, were seen between that place and Blackwater River, October 6 and 7; near Roche Trempe-l’eau, October 9; and near Fort Wrigley, October 11 and 12. The last migrating flock was noted about 40 miles below Fort Simpson on October 17. During the early part of the winter the birds were noted only once at Fort Simpson. This was on December 2, when I found a small flock feeding on the seeds of Alnus alnobetula, and secured individuals representing both sexes. These specimens, as well as those from Fort Franklin, prove on comparison to be nearly typical of the Alaskan form. In 1904 I saw the bird but once, noting a single bird at Fort Simp- son on April 2. It was flying northward along the valley. The following records of the occurrence of pine grosbeaks are placed under the present form in accordance with the evidence derived from my specimens. Ross recorded P. canadensis as having been collected at Fort Simpson.*. MacFarlane mentions a nest found in the spring of 1861, 60 miles south of Fort Anderson.? Sharpe records specimens from Bear Lake (probably from near Fort Frank- lin) and Fort Simpson.¢ The bird catalogue in the National Museum records specimens from Big Island, Fort Simpson, and Fort Liard. J. Alden Loring frequently saw pine grosbeaks during his return irip from the mountains to Edmonton, Alberta, in the autumn of 1896. As these birds were probably migrants from the north, I have referred the note to this form. Carpodacus purpureus (Gmel.). Purple Finch. The purple finch is a fairly common breeder in the Athabaska and lower Peace River valleys. Purple finches were seen several times between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, April 29 to May 5, 1901. Several were observed on the Athabaska below Little Cascade Rapid on the morning of May 14, and the species was noted near the mouth of the river on May 17. Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 281, 1892. €Proe. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 441, 1891. @ Expl. in Far North, p. 266, 1898. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 449, 450, 1904. f Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 135, 1904. I Auk, XXV, p. 72, 1908. 494 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. The records have been divided in accordance with this view, most of them falling under (. lapponicus. Two intermediate specimens from Fort Resolution, taken by Kennicott, are nearer to alascensis, but it is probable that a large series from there would prove mainly referable to C. lapponicus. On May 1, 1901, we saw immense flocks of Lapland longspurs in the fields between Edmonton and Sturgeon River. We found the species common at the mouth of the Athabaska, May 17, and took 8 specimens. I found a few still lingering on the Quatre Fourches marsh, May 23, and took a pair. The specimens collected are in full breeding plumage and are referable to C. lapponicus. In the spring of 1903 we first observed this bird at Edmonton, May 10, noting about 75 individuals. We saw a large flock a few miles to the northward on May 11, and found the species common between there and Sandy Creek, May 12 to 14, taking a male on May 12. The species was next noted on the shore of Great Bear Lake near Leith Point, August 29, when a few were seen and one was taken. A few more were seen and another collected near the same place on September 3. The species was last observed at Fort Frank- lin, September 21, when one was shot on the ‘ barrens’ near the lake. The specimens taken on Great Bear Lake are referable to the typical form. On their return trip in the fall Alfred EK. Preble and Merritt Cary found the species migrating abundantly at Athabaska Landing, September 1 to 21, and along the road to Edmonton, September 21 to 26. In the spring of 1904 this species made its appearance at Fort Simpson, April 25. Nine out of the series of 34 specimens of Lap- land longspurs taken at this place prove referable to this form. Of these, three were collected April 25 and 28, thus being from the earliest flocks, and the remaining six between May 11 and 17. Under the name Plectrophanes lapponica, Richardson described a specimen killed May 20 at Fort Franklin, where the species was said to arrive in the beginning of May.* During his third northern jour- ney he observed numbers of young birds on the Arctic coast west of Liverpool bay in the summer of 1848.2 J.C. Ross recorded the Lap- land longspur from Port Bowen, where it arrived later and left earlier than the snow-bunting.° John Ross reported it from near Felix Harbor, where it had eggs July 12, 1831.4 Walker noted its arrival at Port Kennedy on May 20, 1859, and stated that it breeds there. MacFarlane found the bird breeding abundantly in the — *Fauna Boreali-Americana, IT, p. 249, 1881. ® Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 251, 1851. ¢Parry’s Third Voyage, Appendix, p. 97, 1826. @Narrative Ross’s Second Voyage, p. 580, 1835. € Proc. Roy. Soc. Dublin, ITI, p. 62, 1860. 1908.] BIRDS. 495 Barren Grounds east of Anderson River and on the shores of Franklin Bay;* Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway describe eggs from that region.” In notes sent to the Smithsonian Institution Mac- Farlane states that the species arrived at Fort Anderson on May 27, 1865. Sharpe records specimens from Franklin Bay and Fort Anderson.‘ The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Anderson and Fort Rae. J. Alden Loring reported longspurs common at Edmonton, Alberta, in September, 1894, and specimens taken by him there are referable to C. lapponicus. Hubert Darrell informs me that while traveling along the Arctic coast in 1902 he first saw longspurs near the base of Kent Peninsula on June 1. Calcarius lapponicus alascensis Ridgw. Alaska Longspur. Of the series of thirty-three specimens of Lapland longspurs taken at Fort Simpson in the spring of 1904, twenty-four are referable to this form. Most of the earlier birds taken, including most of those collected April 25, were of this form; it far outnumbered the other during the first three weeks of May, and one individual was taken as late as May 27. The mixed flocks arrived on April 25, the birds were common by May 1, and were last noted June 1. They fre- quented the fields near the post, occasionally, when disturbed, settling in trees or on fences, but after inaking a few long circuitous flights usually alighting on the ground in the same field, sometimes near the place from which they had been startled. They were tame and were surprisingly inconspicuous when motionless on the ground, especially if it had been burned over. A large series of longspurs, including adults and young, taken by Frank Russell at Herschel Island, July 13 to August 13, 1894,7 and now in the collection of the University of Iowa, has been examined, and all of them prove referable to (. /. alascensis. Specimens recorded in the bird catalogue of the National Museum from Fort Liard, Big Island, Fort Simpson, and Fort Good Hope may best be referred to this form. Calcarius pictus (Swains.). Painted Longspur. This showy longspur passes northward through the Mackenzie Valley in May, breeds abundantly in certain sections of the Barren Grounds, and moves southward again in September. In 1903 I noted this bird only near our camp on Great Bear Lake to the eastward of Leith Point, where I observed two or three indi- 2@Proec. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 441, 1891. > Hist. N. A. Birds, Land Birds, I, p. 516, 1874. € Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XII, p. 583, 1888. @®xpl. in Far North, p. 267, 1898. 496 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. viduals August 29. My attention was first attracted to them by their characteristic notes, several sharp ‘ chips’ uttered in quick succession. . They were shy and none were secured. In the spring of 1904 I noted the arrival of this species at Fort Simpson on May 18, when I collected a single male. On May 20 I found a flock of about 25 in the fields back of the post, and secured 10 specimens, including both sexes. When disturbed, the birds flew in a loose flock, not nearly so fast as the Lapland longspurs, and usually only a short distance. When feeding they were very difficult to detect. Their characteristic note was heard only a few times. The species was last seen May 21, when a pair was collected. A specimen taken some years ago at Fort Rae was in the museum at Fort Simpson. Ross recorded this species from Fort Simpson; specimens taken by him at that place May 21 to 25, 1860, and May 25, 1862, as well as a pair taken by Kennicott at Fort Good Hope, May 31, 1862, and a female, with nest and five eggs, from Fort Anderson, are still in the National Museum. The catalogue shows that skins were received also from Fort Resolution, Fort Anderson, and Anderson River. In the latter region MacFarlane found it breeding abundantly.’ In notes sent to the Smithsonian Institution he states that it arrived at Fort Anderson on May 27, 1865. From the notes of Spreadborough, Macoun records that a few were seen at Ege Lake, Peace River (latitude 56°), August 30, and others at Lesser Slave Lake, Septem- ber 5, 1903. On the authority of Raine, he states that the species breeds abundantly on the Caribou Hills, 80 miles south of the Arctic coast, to the west of the Mackenzie Delta, where I. O. Stringer found several nests in June, 1897.° Reed records eggs taken at Herschel Island, June 10, 1901, by the same collector. Seton has recently recorded the painted longspur from Aylmer Lake, where one was seen August 13, 1907.° Rhynchophanes mecowni (Lawr.). McCown Longspur. This longspur is an abundant inhabitant of the northern plains, and reaches only the southern part of the region now under considera- tion. «Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 281, 1862. > Proc. U. S. Nat.-Mus., XIV, p. 441, 1891. Coues (Birds of the Northwest, p. 121, 1874) mentions eggs from Great Slave Lake, but there is evidently some mistake in connection with them. The only egg in the U. S. National Museum alleged to be from that region is No. 7415, one of two labeled as taken by J. Lockhart at Fort Resolution, but entered in the catalogue by Baird as ‘“‘Plec- trophanes pictus?”’ It is thus probably incorrectly identified, and in all prob- ability the bird does not breed south of the Barren Grounds. ¢ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 456, 1904. aN. A. Birds’ Eggs, p. 252, 1904. ¢ Auk, XXV, p. 72, 1908. 1908.] BIRDS. SAO" On May 14, 1903, a male was secured by Merritt Cary on the road near Sandy Creek, Alberta, 20 miles south of Athabaska Landing. Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborough, records that one was seen on the shore of an island in Lesser Slave Lake on May 31, 1903.2 _ Pocecetes gramineus confinis Baird. Western Vesper Sparrow. The vesper sparrow, here represented by the western subspecies, ranges over the semiprairie country of the upper Athabaska and Peace River regions north at least to Fort Smith.’ In 1901 it was common and was seen daily at Edmonton and between that point and Athabaska Landing, April 29 to May 5. Several were observed on the island at Grand Rapid, May 10. It was not again noted until we reached Fort Smith, where one or two were seen June 21. While I was collecting on the prairie-like tracts a few miles west of Fort Smith, June 24, several were seen and heard and a male was col- lected. The species was next observed when we reached Athabaska Landing on our return trip. Here we found it common August 30 and 31, and we observed it almost daily between that point and Edmonton, August 31 to September 3. In 1903 we first observed this bird at Edmonton May 10, when the species was rather common in some extensive fields near the river. Along our route to Athabaska Landing, May 11 to 15, we found it common. In 1904 I met with the vesper sparrow only along the road between Athabaska Landing and Sandy Creek, Alberta, where it was common September 2. Eges of the vesper sparrow taken at Lesser Slave Lake by Strachan Jones, probably in 1868, were received by the Smithsonian Institu- tion, and presumably are still in the collection. A skin taken by J. Alden Loring at Edmonton, Alberta, September 9, 1894, is in the collection of the Biological Survey. Macoun states, on the authority of Spreadborough, that this bird was common along the trail on all the dry grass land from Edmonton to Jasper House in 1898; also common [in 1903] on all the small prairies throughout the Peace River country between latitude 55° and 57°.¢ Passerculus sandwichensis alaudinus Bonap. Western Savanna Sparrow. This is one of the most abundant sparrows in summer throughout the region north at least to the hmit of trees. In 1901 several were “Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 460, 1904. bMacFarlane’s record of the breeding of the vesper sparrow in the Fort Anderson region (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 441, 1891) was, as he suspects, founded on a case of misidentification, the species being Anthus rubescens, which see. ¢ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 462, 1904. 428 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. tno. 27. seen and one was collected at Fort Chipewyan on May 23. The species was common at Fort Resolution and was seen daily, July 5 to 8. At Fort Rae it was noted July 24, and one was taken July 29. In the spring of 1903 we first observed this species at Edmonton on May 10, noting about 25 individuals. We next detected it on lower Slave River, June 19. It was abundant at Fort Resolution, and was noted daily during the latter part of June, several being collected. My brother and Cary noted it at Hay River on June 30, and daily at Fort Providence, July 2 to 8, and on the latter date observed young just able to fly. I observed it daily at Fort Resolution during the first half of July; noted it near Stone Island July 18; and found it common at Fort Rae, July 26 to 29, and on Lake Marian, July 30. I took an immature bird on Lake St. Croix, August 10, and last saw the species on Lake Hardisty, August 17, taking one specimen. In the spring of 1904 J. W. Mills and H. W. Jones collected a small series of savanna sparrows at Wiflow River, near Fort Provi- dence, in May, taking the first one on May 12. At Fort Simpson I first observed it May 17, taking one. I found it rather common May 21 an4 during the remainder of the month noted it nearly every day, and collected a small series. While descending the Mackenzie, I noted a few at Fort Norman, June 12, and at Fort McPherson, July 14. On my return trip I saw several a short distance north of Edmonton, September 4. J. W. Mills took males at Fort Provi- dence, May 14, 1905. : Under the name Passerculus savanna, Ross gave this bird as abun- dant about Great Slave Lake, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.*. MacFarlane found it abundant in the Anderson River region, and discovered a large number of nests.’ The bird catalogue of the National Museum records skins from Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Good Hope, Fort Liard, and Great Bear Lake. Russell took specimens at Herschel Island in the summer of 1894.° Macoun records specimens of this form from Edmonton, Alberta, and Peace River Landing; as well as eggs from Edmonton, taken on May 27 and June 3, 1897.4 J. Alden Loring took one of these sparrows at Banff, Alberta, August 29, 1894, and several at Edmonton during September of the same year, finding them common. In the summer of 1896 he found the species common on the trail between Edmonton and Jasper House, and during the early autumn of the same year observed it frequently between Jasper House and Smoky River. a@Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 281, 1862. 6 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 442, 1891. ¢ Expl. in Far North, p. 267, 1898. @ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 470, 1904. 1908.1 | BIRDS. 429 Ammodramus lecontei (Aud.). Leconte Sparrow. While collecting on the Quatre Fourches marsh, near Fort Chipe- wyan, May 24, 1901, I flushed several of these sparrows from the rank growth of grass which covered the drier portions. They flew with a weak, quivering flight, going but a short distance and usually pitching into the withered grass. A faint twittering song, usually given while the bird was on the wing, but occasionally delivered from the summit of a grass stem, was the only sound I heard from them. Two speci- mens, a male and a female in fresh breeding plumage, were secured. In the summer of 1903 this sparrow was found to be fairly common in the marsh at Hay River, where my brother and Cary noted it daily, June 29 to July 1, taking two specimens. The males were singing and undoubtedly the species was breeding, but no nests could be found. While ascending the Athabaska on their return trip they saw two individuals in rank grass near Brulé Rapid, August 18. Another was seen in a similar place near House River on August 22. In 1904 I saw the species only once—noting one on some low ground, 10 miles north of Edmonton, September 4. An immature bird was taken by J. Alden Loring at’ Edmonton, September 16, 1894, and is now in the Biological Survey collection. Macoun records specimens taken at Edmonton in May and June, 1897.2 Ammodramus nelsoni (Allen). Nelson Sparrow. In 1901 we noted this bird at but one locality—a small meadow surrounded by woods, near the banks of Slave River, about 25 miles below the mouth of the Peace, where we took a male on June 12. Several others were seen at the same time in the dense tangle of with- On May 13, 1903, we observed a marsh sparrow, apparently of this species, about some small sloughs near Sturgeon River. The species was next seen in the extensive marsh at the mouth of Hay River, where my brother and Cary collected 3 specimens June 30. The males delivered their simple songs, consisting of * a short preliminary note, quite sharp, followed by a husky or broken note of much longer duration,” from the tops of the low bushes. While ascending the Athabaska on their return trip the boys saw one in a patch of rank grass bordering the river near Brulé Rapid, August 18. During the preparation of this report I have examined a specimen taken by Spreadborough at Peace River Landing, Alberta, June 26, 1903. @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 474, 1904. (On page 733 Macoun states that his records for both Edmonton and Peace River Landing refer to the Net- son sparrow. ‘These specimens, however, have been examined by the Biological Survey, and while the specimens from Peace River Landing are A. nelsoni, one taken at Edmonton, May 26, 1897, proves referable to A. lecontei. ) 430 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Chondestes grammacus strigatus Swains. Western Lark Sparrow. A lark sparrow referred to this race was seen in a dooryard at’ Fort McMurray, August 12, 1904. Before I could secure the bird it flew into an adjoining field, but careful search failed to disclose it. Zonotrichia querula (Nutt.). Harris Sparrow. This handsome species, sometimes called the hooded sparrow, passes northward in spring through the eastern part of the region in considerable numbers, to return, accompanied by its young, in the autumn. Its breeding ground was long a matter of conjecture. On our trip to Hudson Bay in 1900, we found it abundant late in July in the thickets of stunted spruce at Fort Churchill, accompa- nied by barely fledged young and manifestly on its breeding ground; during the present investigation we found old and young common along the southern shore of Great Bear Lake, in a habitat precisely similar to its chosen nesting ground on Hudson Bay. AII indica- tions therefore point to the conclusion that its principal breeding grounds are in the strip of stunted timber extending for 800 miles between Hudson Bay and Great Bear Lake, along the northern border of the transcontinental forest. In the region thus indicated, which has been visited in summer by so few naturalists that the species may easily have been overlooked, there is ample room for the hordes that pass northward each spring through the northern portion of the Mississippi Valley and the adjoining parts of Canada. In 1901 we noted the hooded sparrow but once—near Fort Chipe- wyan on the morning of May 23, when several were observed among 2 large company of migrating sparrows. During my trip northward from Fort Rae, in 1903, I first observed this species a few miles south of MacTavish Bay, August 23, noting several and securing one. I next noted it on the southern shore of Great Bear Lake just west of MacTavish Bay, on August 27. Both old and young, associated in small loose flocks, were common among the stunted spruces of this exposed shore, which afforded a habitat almost precisely similar to that frequented by the species on Hudson Bay during the breeding season. Numbers were observed daily in this vicinity up to September 7, the species being especially common at our camp east of Leith Point, where I took nearly a dozen speci- mens between August 27 and September 7. After several cold nights early in September the species became less common, but was seen in small numbers near McVicar Bay, September 10; 40 miles west of there, September 13; and near Manito Islands, September 14. It was next noted at Fort Franklin, September 26, when a single bird, @ Since the above was written a nest of this species (the first well-authenti- cated one yet reported) has been found by- E. T. Seton at the tree limit on Artillery Lake, (Auk, XXV, p. 72, 1908.) | } | J ‘ } | { | | 1908.] BIRDS. 431 the last one of the season, was seen and taken. During their return ‘trip in the fall Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary saw one near Athabaska Landing, Alberta, September 14; another at the same place, September 21; and three in a willow ESE near Lily Lake, September 24. Seton records the hooded sparrow as nesting abundantly from the islands in the eastern part of Great Slave Lake to the last woods on Artillery Lake. At the latter locality he found a nest containing three young nearly ready to fly on August 5, 1907.4 H. W. Jones took a male, the only one observed, at Willow River, near Fort Providence, on May 24, 1904. He also reports the species from Hay River, where a large flock was observed to linger about from May 26 to June 15, when they disappeared. Zonotrichia leucophrys (Forst.). White-crowned Sparrow. A specimen in the collection of the National Museum (No. 19725, male), taken at Fort Resolution, June 14, 1860, by Kennicott, seems referable to typical Z. Jeucophrys. It is probable that the birds of eastern Mackenzie and Saskatchewan are mainly referable to this form. Zonotrichia leucophrys gambeli (Nutt.). Intermediate Sparrow. This is the common form of white-crowned sparrow throughout the Mackenzie and Anderson River valleys. It is especially abun- dant and familiar at all the trading posts north of Great Slave Lake, chanting its simple song at all hours from the palings of the stock- ades and rearing its young in the post clearings. It arrives early in May and remains in autumn until forced to depart by the severity of the weather. According to Ross, the Crees call this sparrow “Wah- sipis-chan-tillee. tillee”—that is, “little river murmuring (¢i/ee, tillee.” In the spring of 1901 we observed a few white-crowned sparrows of this form on the road about 60 miles north of Edmonton, May 4. We next noted the species at Fort Resolution, where I found it com- mon July 5 to 8, and where Alfred E. Preble observed it almost daily during the remainder of the month. While crossing from Fort Reso- lution to Fort Rae, July 9 to 18, I found it rather common on the islands in Great Slave Lake, and collected a pair on Loon Island, July 12. A nest found on the north shore of the lake near the mouth of the Northern Arm, July 15, held eggs just hatching. At Fort Rae I observed the bird daily, July 19 to 29. In the spring of 1903 we first observed this species at Edmonton, May 8, noting a single bird. A few more were seen May 10, and the species was observed nearly every day during our trip to Athabaska @ Auk, XXV, p. 72, 1908. 432 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Landing, May 11 to 15, and along the Athabaska between the Landing and Grand Rapid. It was noted also at Grand Rapid, May 22, and. a short distance above Fort McMurray, May 28. A male, apparently breeding, was taken at Smith Landing, June 11. The species was next observed at Fort Resolution, where it was found to be abundant on June 20, and was noted daily during the remainder of June. During their trip to the Mackenzie my brother and Cary observed it daily at Fort Providence, July 2 to 8, noting fledged young, the first of the season, on the former date. They noted the species also near the mouth of Nahanni River, July 12, and at Fort Simpson, July 24. After the division of the party I noted the bird daily at Fort Reso- lution up to the time I left there, July 17. I first saw fledged young on July 11, and found a nest containing three fresh eggs, undoubtedly a second clutch, on July 15. The nest was placed in a tuft of short grass beside a much frequented path in the field in front of the post. While crossing Great Slave Lake I observed the bird near Stone Island, July 18, and nearly every day among the islands between there and Fort Rae, where it was a common species. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted it on Grandin River, August 5 and 6; Sarahk Lake, August 7; Lake Faber, August 8; Lake Rae, August 9; Lake St. Croix, August 10 and 12; and Lake Hardisty, August 18. The species was still fairly common when I reached the southern shore of Great Bear Lake, and was noted in considerable numbers to the eastward of Leith Point, August 28, and at our camp near there on August 29 and 30 and on September 2, 38, and 5. Sev- eral cold nights in succession after the last date, when ice formed for the first time, seemed to help the birds to a decision respecting migra- tion, and none were seen afterwards. In the spring of 1904 this species was first noted near Fort Provi- dence by H. W. Jones on May 9, when he took a male. Another was collected by J. W. Mills, May 11. At Fort Simpson I first observed it May 20, and found it common during the remainder of the month. During my voyage down the Mackenzie in June I frequently observed it, finding it especially common in the vicinity of the posts. I found a nest with four eggs at the lower Ramparts, June 30, and first saw fledged young at Fort McPherson on July 6. On my return trip I noted the bird at Fort Good Hope, July 19; at Birch Island, July 91; and at the Desmarais Islands, July 30. Specimens were col- lected at Willow River near Fort Providence, Fort Simpson, Fort Norman, Fort Good Hope, and Fort McPherson. Under the name Fringilla leucophrys, Richardson described a specimen referable to this form from Fort Franklin, giving a figure of the head; ¢ later he recorded a specimen, presumably of the present “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 255, 256, 1831, 1908.] BIRDS. 433 form, from Fort Simpson.” Ross listed Z. gambeli as abundant in the Mackenzie River region north to La Pierre House.’ Mac- Farlane found it breeding 1 in great numbers in the wooded parts of the Anderson River region, recording it under the name of Z. J. intermedia.© In notes sent to the Smithsonian he states that the birds were numerous at Fort Anderson, May 28, 1865. Skins from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, lower Anderson River, and Peel River | Fort McPherson], the latter taken July 15, 1892, by Miss Elizabeth Taylor, are in the National Museum. The catalogue of the birds shows that skins were received also from Big Island; Fort Simpson (May 22, 1860; May 20, 1861); Fort Liard; Fort Norman; Fort Good Hope; Great Bear Lake; and La Pierre House (May 25, 1863). Macoun states on the authority of Spreadborough that this bird was common from Prairie Creek (on the Jasper House trail west of Edmonton) to Henry House, Alberta, in the summer of 1898.4 J. Alden Loring reported this form common at Edmonton, Alberta, September 7 to 26, 1894, collecting one specimen. Zonotrichia coronata (Pall.). Golden-crowned Sparrow. In the early autumn of 1896 J. Alden Loring found the golden- crowned sparrow frequenting willow thickets near water on the route between Jasper House and Smokv River, and took a specimen near the head of Grand Cache River, August 31. The species prob- ably occurs in that region only during migration. | | Zonotrichia albicollis (Gmel.). White-throated Sparrow. This widely distributed species occurs in summer throughout. the region north to Great Slave Lake and along the Mackenzie to Fort . Good Hope, but apparently is absent or rare in the more elevated country to the northward of Fort Rae. In 1901 a few white-throated sparrows were seen near Sturgeon River, 25 miles north of Edmonton, May 1, and the species was noted a short distance below Athabaska Landing, May 6. It was common also and was noted daily along the Athabaska between Cascade Rapid and Athabaska Lake, May 13 to 17. It was several times noted near Fort Chipewyan, May 23 to June 5, and was seen 10 miles below the Peace, June 10; at Smith Landing, June 14; on Smith Portage, June 18; at Fort Smith, June 20; 60 miles below Fort Smith, June 30; and on lower Slave River, July 2 and 3. At Fort Resolution it was noted by myself, July 5, 7, and 8, and almost @ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XI, p. 484, 18438. 5Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 281, 1862. €Proe. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 442, 1891. @ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 480, 1904. 44131—No. 27—08—28 434 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. daily by Alfred EK. Preble, July 12 to 27. On the return trip it was seen near Pelican Rapid, August 24, and near Vermilion Creek, 42: miles north of Edmonton, September 3. A female taken at Fort Chipewyan on May 23 has the throat-patch grayish, concolor with the upper part of the chest, the feathers of the throat tipped with dusky, and a conspicuous dusky spot on the center of chest. Two other specimens, both females, taken respectively on lower Slave River, July 2, and at Fort Resolution, July 5, are similar, but the throats are not so dark and the chest, spots are less conspicuous. In the spring of 1903 we first observed the white-throat near Stur- geon River, May 13, noting upward of 25 individuals, and found it common between there and Athabaska Landing, May 14 and 15. While descending the Athabaska we noted the species below Pelican Rapid, May 19; at Grand Rapid, May 21 and 22; and nearly every day along the Athabaska between Little Buffalo River and Athabaska Lake, May 26 to June 1. We observed it also at Fort Chipewyan, June 3; on Rocher River, June 6; and at Fort Smith, June 14. Along Slave River, between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution, we found the species common, noting numbers nearly every day. It was com- mon also at Fort Resolution during the latter part of June, and several specimens were taken. During their trip to the Mackenzie my brother and Cary noted the species at Hay River, June 28 to July 1, and daily at Fort Providence, July 5 to 8. Several were observed also at Fort Simpson, July 10, and at the mouth of the Nahanni River, July 11. On July 13 and 17 they heard a few sing- ing on the Nahanni Mountains at about 500 feet altitude. On their return to the mouth of Nahanni River, July 19, they found the species common there, as it was also between there and Fort Wrigley, July 19 and 20. On their return trip in the fall they found the bird’ abundant on the Athabaska between Fort McMurray and La Biche River, August 8 to 29; near Athabaska Landing, August 31 to Sep- tember 21; and along the road to Edmonton, September 21 to 26. In the spring of 1904 I first observed this bird at Fort Simpson on May 16, taking one. I next saw it May 17, and found it common on May 18 and during the remainder of the month. During my trip down the Mackenzie I noted it daily in small numbers at Fort Nor- man, June 11 to 15, taking a nest with four eggs on the latter date. The nest was placed on the ground in a thicket of willows and alders, and was composed outwardly of coarse grass, strips of bark, and moss (some of which had earth adhering to the roots), and was lined with fine grass and hair. Below this point the bird became much rarer, but was noted near Sans Sault Rapid June 19, and at Fort Good Hope June 21. It was last recorded a short distance above the lower Ramparts on June 29, when I heard its song. On my return trip I saw the bird at Little Red River, August 9; at Fort McMur- | 1908.] BIRDS. 435 ray, August 11 to 13; and daily between Athabaska Landing and Edmonton, September 1 to 4. Richardson, under the name Fringilla pennsylvanica, mentions a nest found at Great Bear Lake;7 he later recorded the species under the same name from Fort Simpson.’ During the period of ornitho- logical activity following the visit of Robert Kennicott to the Mac- kenzie Valley, specimens were sent to the Smithsonian Institution from Fort Resolution, Buffalo River, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Norman, Fort Good Hope, and Lesser Slave Lake, eggs accompany- ing the specimens from the last locality. Eggs taken at the trading post on Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, in June, 1891, by H. MacKay, were received by the National Museum. Skins from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, and Fort Simpson are still in the collection. Macoun, on the authority of J. M. Macoun, states that in 1888 the white-throated sparrow was first seen on May 7, near Calgary, and was common thence to Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, along the Athabaska from Lesser Slave River to the Clearwater, along that river to Methye Portage, and from there to Isle a la Crosse. He also’ states, from the notes of Spreadborough, that it was first seen at Ed- monton May 6, 1897; was noted from Edmonton westward to Pem- bina River in June, 1898; and was abundant from Lesser Slave Lake to Peace River Landing in June, 1903.° J. Alden Loring found this sparrow abundant at Edmonton, Sep- tember 7 to 26, 1894, taking a specimen September 19. In the early autumn of 1895 he reported it common in the mountains in western Alberta. He reported it breeding commonly in the high mountains near Henry House, July 3 to 21, 1896. Spizella monticola (Gmel.). Tree Sparrow. Tree sparrows, including the eastern and western forms, occur at some season of the year over the entire region north to the extreme limit of trees. They breed only in the Hudsonian zone, the region of more or less stunted timber which terminates to the northward the great transcontinental coniferous forest. In 1901 I first saw this bird on an island in the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake 45 miles southeast of Fort Rae, July 16, when I collected an adult male anda young bird not long from the nest. Later in the day I found it rather common at Trout Rock, 25 miles south of Fort Rae, and collected an adult female. Comparison shows that these specimens are referable to S. monticola. During my trip northward from Fort Rae in 1903 I found this form rather common on Lake St. Croix, August 10, and observed it “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 256, 1831. b Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XI, p. 484, 1843. ¢ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 486, 1904, 436 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. almost daily on the way to Great Bear Lake between that date and August 27. It was abundant and a number were taken at our camp on the shore of Great Bear Lake east of Leith Point during the last days of August, but after the frosty nights of the opening days of September it became much less common. As we approached the east- ern end of the lake, however, and entered a milder region, the birds again became conspicuous and were seen daily. One taken from a large flock near the outlet of Great Bear Lake, September 16, still re- tained traces’ of the juvenal plumage on the chest and throat. A few were seen nearly every day during my stay at Fort Franklin, Sep- tember 18 to 27, and several specimens were taken. . In the series collected at Fort Simpson in May, 1904, and mainly referable to S. m. ochracea, are two specimens, taken respectively May 7 and 10, which must be referred to S. monticola. Four specimens taken at Willow River, near Fort Providence, May 7 and 8, and com- prising a majority of the series collected there, are referable to S. mon- ticola. These two points, therefore, seem to he on opposite sides of the line dividing the two forms during migration. Seton records this species as nesting abundantly from the eastern end of Great Slave Lake to the limit of the forest toward the north- east in the summer of 1907.¢ Spizella monticola ochracea Brewst. Western Tree Sparrow. In the spring of 1903 we first noted this form near Sturgeon River May 12, when we saw several birds and collected two. We next ob- served it at Grand Rapid, May 22, noting several and collecting one. The next birds referred to this form were observed at Fort Norman on the Mackenzie, when I reached that stream from Great Bear Lake on October 1. Here the birds were abundant and evidently were migrating southward along the valley of the Mackenzie from their breeding grounds about its mouth. Numbers were observed a few miles above Fort Norman, October 2 and 3. At this date the species was becoming less conspicuous, but a few birds were noted above Gravel River, October 6; near Roche Trempe-l’eau, October 8 and 9, near Fort Wrigley, October 10 and 11; and between there and Na- hanni River, October 13 to 15. The species was last seen 50 miles below Fort Simpson on October 16. On their return trip in the fall Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary first observed it at Athabaska Landing, September 20, and found it rather common between there and Lily Lake September 22 to 24. At Fort Simpson in the spring of 1904 I saw a single tree sparrow on April 30, and the birds arrived in numbers May 7. Of six speci- mens taken on this date, five prove to be referable to the present form; another was taken May 10. The birds were noted nearly — ¢ Auk, XXV, p. 72, 1908. —— | | 1908.] BIRDS. 437 every day up to May 17, when the species was recorded for the last time. It was next seen at Fort McPherson, where it was breeding, early in July. Here I collected adults on July 4 and 7. Two speci- mens taken by H. W. Jones at Willow River, near Fort Providence, May 6 and 9, are also referable to this form. J. W. Mills took a female at Willow River on April 30, and males on May 1, 1905. Throughout most of the Mackenzie Valley, the Anderson River country, and westward, this is the prevailing form. MacFarlane found it very abundant in the Anderson River region, where he dis- covered a large number of nests, recording it under the name S. monticola.. In notes sent to the Smithsonian he states that it was tolerably numerous at Fort Anderson on May 28, 1865. Specimens referable to ochracea from the following localities are in the National Museum, all being labeled as having been collected with eggs: Three females, Fort Anderson, June 2, 5, and 11, 1862; one from the Ander- son River region “near Barren Grounds,’ June 20; one from La Pierre House, June, 1862. Another taken at Fort Simpson, May 15, 1860, was apparently a migrant. Macoun states, on the authority of Spreadborough, that it was rare at Edmonton, Alberta, in April, 1897, the bulk of the migration having passed; common from the crossing of McLeod River, October 6, 1898, to Edmonton; a few observed at Lesser Slave Lake, and one at Peace River Landing, in June, 1903. On the authority of Raine, he records a nest and five | eggs found by C. KE. Whittaker, June 18, 1900, at Peel River; a nest with five eggs found on the foothills of the Black Mountains (west of the Mackenzie delta) by Stringer, June 13, 1899; and another from the same region taken on June 8 of the same year. The nests were placed on the ground and were built of dried grass and lined with feathers.’ Spizella passerina arizone Coues. Western Chipping Sparrow. The familiar chipping sparrow, here represented by the western subspecies, occurs in summer in the Mackenzie Valley north to Fort Good Hope, but is rare in the northern portion of its range. In the more elevated country to the eastward of the Mackenzie it is rare or absent north of Great Slave Lake. oe In 1901 we first noted this bird at Fort Chipewyan on May 21, and saw it nearly every day in the vicinity of that post until June 5, collecting several specimens. After leaving the vicinity of Fort Chipewyan we did not again note the bird until we reached Fort Smith, where we found it common June 20 to 28, and took several. A nest found June 25 contained four shghtly incubated eggs. While @Proc. U. S.-Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 442, 1891. 4 Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 489, 1904. ¢ Ibid., p. 490, 1904. 438 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. descending Slave River to Great Slave Lake, June 30 to July 2, we noted a number. I saw the species at Fort Resolution, June 6, 7, and 8, and Alfred E. Preble noted several July 9 to 12. Whuile crossing Great Slave Lake I saw it on Stone Island, July 10, and found it rather common on Loon Island, 50 miles north of Fort Resolution, July 11 to 14, taking one specimen on July 12. I saw a few at Fort Rae, July 20 to 29, collecting one on the latter date, and on our re- turn trip noted the species at Smith Landing, August 6. In the spring of 1903 this bird was first noted at Grand Rapid, May 22. It was next observed at Fort Chipewyan, June 3 and 4, and one was seen building on the former date. Several were seen near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 5; on Rocher River, June 8; and at Smith Landing, June 11. The first nest with eggs was found on Smith Portage, June 13. The species was noted also at Fort Smith, June 14; on the river below there, June 15; and below Limestone Point, June 17. Several birds were seen at Fort Resolution, June 22 and 23. At Fort Providence my brother and Cary found the species common, July 2 to 8, observing numbers daily. They noted it also at Fort Simpson, July 10, and found it common on Mount Tha-on’-tha, July 13 to 18, where it was breeding in dwarfed spruce (Picea canadensis) and mountain alder (Alnus alnobetula). At an altitude of about 1,500 feet, on July 13, they noted a pair with young about to leave the nest. On their return trip, on the Athabaska near House River, they saw two, August 22, one of which they collected. In the spring of 1904 this sparrow arrived at Fort Simpson in con- siderable numbers on May 18, and was common during the remainder of the month. During my trip down the Mackenzie I noted it on but two occasions, finding migrants common on an island below Fort Wrigley, June 8, and taking a breeding pair in a shrubby tract at Fort Good Hope, June 21. On my return trip I saw the species at Fort Simpson, July 27; at Smith Landing, August 5; at Fort Chip- ewyan, August 7; and near Edmonton, September 4. — Richardson first recorded this bird as Pringilla socialis from Fort Simpson.” The catalogue of the National Museum records specimens from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson (May 23, 1860; May 24, 1861), Fort Liard, and Fort Good Hope; and these localities, with the exception of the last, are now represented in the collection. Macoun includes the following records, which undoubtedly refer to the western form, under S. socialis. On the authority of Spread- borough, he gives it as a common [summer] resident at Edmonton, as seen at the crossing of McLeod River, June 19, and as common at Jasper Lake, July 2, 1898; also common from Lesser Slave Lake to Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XI, p. 484, 1843. 1908. ] BIRDS. 439 Peace River Landing in June, 1903. On the authority of J. M. Macoun, he states that [in 1888] it was abundant along the trail be- tween Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, but was rather rare on the Athabaska, and was common up the Clearwater and between Methye Portage and Isle a la Crosse.* J. Alden Loring reported séeing large flocks at Banff, Alberta, August 25 to September 1, 1894, and took two specimens there on August 28. Spizella pallida (Swains.). Clay-colored Sparrow. This species, originally described from the Saskatchewan, ranges northward to Great Slave Lake, as was first ascertained by Kenni- cott, occupying mainly prairie-like tracts and brushy clearings. In 1903 we first observed the clay-colored sparrow 20 miles north of Edmonton, May 12, noting some half a dozen individuals and collecting a male in song. As we traveled northward toward Atha- baska Landing we found the species common to the northward of Sturgeon River on May 13, and. observed one near Sandy Creek, May 14. We next observed the species on June 22 and 23 at Fort Resolution, where we saw several individuals in the shrubby field to the rear of the post buildings, and collected adults of both sexes. This bird was first recorded from the Mackenzie Valley by Ross, who gave it as occurring north to Fort Resolution.’ A specimen taken at that post by Kennicott, June 18, 1860, and another taken at the same place by Lockhart, June 9, 1863, * with nest and four eggs,” are in the National Museum. A specimen, together with eggs, is cata- logued as having been received from Strachan Jones, from Lesser Slave Lake, in 1868, but the skin at least has disappeared. Macoun says. on the authority of Spreadborough: ° First seen at Edmonton, Alta., May 31st [1897]; found a number of nests, all on the ground at the roots of a little clump of willows; none of the nests were more than four inches above the ground, and were made of dry grass lined with horse hair; eggs from two to five in a set; * * * common in all the open country from Lesser Slave Lake to Peace River Landing, Lat. 56° 15’ in June, 1903; common from Edmonton to Pembina River in June, 1898. He records also specimens taken at Edmonton in May, 1897, and Peace River Landing in June, 1903, and eggs taken at Edmonton, May 31 and June 1, 1897. Russell has recorded two alleged specimens from Fort Rae,’ but they prove on examination to have been incor- rectly identified. € Cat. Canadian Birds,. Part III, p. 492, 1904. 6 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 282, 1862. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 495, 497, 1904. @¥Expl. in Far North, p. 267, 1898. 440 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 2 Spizella breweri Cass. Brewer Sparrow. In the early autumn of 1896 J. Alden Loring observed this species: along the streams in the ‘ prairies’ between Jasper House and Smoky “River, and took a male in Smoky Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House, August 26. This specimen (Ne: 155779) is now in the Bio- logical Survey collection. Junco hyemalis (Linn.). Slate-colored Junco. This common species, sometimes called ‘tomtit’ in the North, is the sole representative of its genus throughout most of the wooded parts of the Athabaska-Mackenzie country. Over this vast region it is a common summer resident, being one of the earlest of the smaller migrants to arrive in spring and a rather late lingerer in autumn. In the spring of 1901 we saw numbers daily between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing, April 29 to May 5, and noted the species near Poplar Point on the lower Athabaska, May 16. In the vicinity of Fort Chipewyan we found it common May 19 to June 5, and col- lected several specimens. After leaving Fort Chipewyan we found it common all along our route as far north as Fort Rae. We noted the first nest, which contained four apparently fresh eggs, 10 miles below the mouth of Peace River, June 10. At Smith Landing, in a partially cleared tract near the river, we found several nests contain- ing young, June 12 to 18. At Fort Smith, where the species was abundant, we first observed fully fledged young June 25. We noted the bird almost daily along Slave River between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution, June 29 to July 4, and saw it on July 5 at the latter point, where Alfred E. Preble also observed it almost daily during the latter half of July. I saw it nearly every day at Fort. Rae, July 19 to 29, and on our return trip noted it at Athabaska. andi August 30, and near Vermilion Creek, September 3. e In the spring of 1903 we found this bird common at Edmonton, May 8 to 11, and daily saw a few between Sturgeon River and Atha- baska Landing, Alberta, May 13 to 15. While descending the Atha- baska, May 16 to June 2, we observed the bird nearly every day, noting a pair building at Grand Rapid on May 23. It was next observed at Smith Landing, June 11. It was common below Fort Smith, June 15, and one or two were seen above Limestone Point, June 17. A nest found on June 26, at Fort Resolution, where the bird was not common, contained eggs about to hatch. The junco was noted by my brother and Cary on several occasions at Fort Providence, July 3 to 7. It was rather common on the Nahanni Mountains, July 18 to 18, where a nest with four eggs was found July 17, and it was noted at the mouth of Willow Lake River, 20 miles south of Fort Wrigley, July 19. On their return trip the 1908.1] BIRDS. 44] boys noted several at Crooked Rapid, August 16, and found the species common at Grand Rapid, August 21, and in 1 the vicinity of Athabaska Landing, September 1 to 20. During my trip northward from Fort Rae in August of the same year, I noted the species on Grandin River, August 4 and 5; Lake Faber, August 8; and Lake Rae, August 9. Migrants were very common on the small lakes north of Lake St. Croix, August 14 and 15, and on Lake Hardisty,-August 19. A few were seen at our camp east of Leith Point, August 31 and September 1, and at Fort Frank- lin, September 19 and 27, one being taken on the latter date. The species was still common near the mouth of Bear River, September 30% at Fort Norman, October 1; and between there and Gravel River, October 2 and 3. A few were seen between Fort Wrigley and Na- hanni River, October 13 and 15, and the species was noted for the last time about 50 miles below Fort Simpson on October 16. In 1904 I first noted this bird at Fort Simpson on May 2, when a single individual in full song was taken. It was next seen May 6 when I found several in company with fox sparrows in low woods, and the species was common from this time. It was first seen at Willow River, near Fort Providence, on May 6, and several speci- mens were taken there by Messrs. Mills and Jones between that date and May 14. H. W. Jones also took a nest containing four eggs at Fort Simpson on June 5. It was built on the steep side of the river bank, and was quite bulky, the outer portion being constructed of fine twigs, strips of bark, and feathers. This foundation inclosed a cup-shaped nest of dry grass, thickly lined with gray dog’s hair. During my trip down the Mackenzie in June I saw a few at, Fort Norman, June 11 and 12, and noted it daily at Fort Good Hope, June 21 to 24. On my return trip I observed it near Mountain Rapid, on the Athabaska, on August 16. , J. W. Mills took a female at Willow River, May 7, 1905. H. W. Jones observed the species at the same place on May 1, and at Fort Simpson on November 18 of the same year. Richardson recorded this species from Fort Simpson.* Ross listed it as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Good Hope. MacFarlane found it in the Anderson River region, where it- nested throughout the wooded country.° Specimens from the following localities are in the National Museum: Fort Resolu- tion, Peel River (with four eggs), Fort Rae (June 4, 1862, taken with four eggs), Fort Simpson (May 4, 1860), and Fort Smith. Skins were received also from Big Island, and eggs from Lesser 4@Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XI, p. 484, 1843. 5 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 282, 1862. €Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 443, 1891. 449 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Slave Lake. Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborough, gives it as a common species at Edmonton and south in the foothills to Crow Nest Pass, as common from Edmonton to Yellowhead Pass in June, 1898, and as abundant from the mouth of Lesser Slave River to Peace River Landing in June, 1903. On the authority of J. M. Macoun, he stated that it was common [in 1888] between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing and up the Athabaska to Lesser Slave River, rare down the Athabaska to Fort McMurray, and common on Methye Portage and from there to Isle & la Crosse. Seton gives it as occurring in 1907 on Great Slave Lake east to its eastern end.° J. Alden Loring reported the species common at Edmonton, Al- berta, September 7 to 26, 1894, and took specimens September 23 and 26. In the early summer of 1896, he found it common all along the trail to the westward of Edmonton, taking specimens 25 miles north- west of Edmonton, May 25, and at Ste. Anne, May 27. He also took a specimen at the head of Grand Cache River, August 31. A speci- men taken at Baillie Island, May 22, 1901, has been identified by Dr. A. K. Fisher of the Biological Survey. Junco hyemalis connectens Coues. Shufeldt Junco. The form designated as above by the American Ornithologists’ Union is called by Mr. Ridgway Junco oreganus shufeldti, and con- nectens is considered by him a hybrid between Junco hyemalis and Junco oreganus shufeldti. Specimens referred to J. 0. shufeldti by Mr. Ridgway were taken by J. Alden Loring in 1896 et the following localities: Fifteen miles south of Henry House, where he reported it breeding commonly close to timber line, July 8 to 21, and took a specimen July 13; Smoky River Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House, two specimens, August 27; and the foothills of the Rocky Mountains, 25 miles northeast of Jasper House, one specimen, October 5. Another specimen (No. 157815), taken on the Jasper House trail 40 miles west of Edmonton, on May 30, 1896, was referred by Ridgway to ‘ connectens.’ Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborough, gives this form as oc- curring in the Rocky Mountains south of Yellowhead Pass in July, 1898; he records also two specimens taken at Edmonton, Alberta, in May, 1897.¢ Junco hyemalis montanus Ridgw. Montana Junco. This species, according to Ridgway, breeds in western Alberta, and specimens identified by him and now in the Biological Survey col- lection were taken by J. Alden Loring at the following localities: 4Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 501, 1904. ® Auk, XXV, p. 72, 1908. © Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 504, 505, 1904. 1908.] BIRDS. 443 Edmonton, September 17 and 22, 1894; Grand Cache River, August 31 and September 4, 1896; and the foothills of the Rocky Mountains, 25 miles northeast of Jasper House, October 5, 1896. Melospiza melodia (Wils.). Song Sparrow. This widely distributed species occurs throughout the region north to Great Slave Lake, but is rather rare in the northern part of its range. In 1901 it was common about Edmonton and on the road to Atha- baska Landing, April 29 to May 5; and was observed at Grand Rapid, May 10 and 11; at Brulé Rapid, May 12; and near the mouth of the Athabaska, May 17. Several were seen near Fort Chipewyan, May 23 to June 1, and a male was taken on May 24. The species was noted also near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 5, and 10 miles below the mouth of Peace River, June 12. At Fort Smith several were heard singing on the morning of June 19, and at Fort Rae I collected a male, the only one observed there, on July 29. In the spring of 1903 we found it common at Edmonton, May 8 to 10, and between there and Athabaska Landing, May 11 to 15. It was common and was noted nearly every day as we descended the Athabaska, May 16 to June 2. Two specimens were taken at Grand Rapid, May 22. The species was next noted at Fort Chipewyan, June 3 and 4, and at Fort Smith, June 14. It was last seen at Fort Resolution, where a pair were observed by Cary in the shrubby field back of the post building, June 22. On their return trip Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary noted 3 near Brulé Rapid, August 18, and found it common on the Athabaska between House River and Atha- baska Landing, August 22 to September 2. In 1904 I did not see this sparrow until I reached Fort McMurray on my return trip; here I saw several on August 11 and 14. I noted the species also near Cascade Rapid, August 16, and found it rather common between La Biche River and Sandy Creek on September 1 and 2. Ross recorded a specimen of JJ/elospiza gouldii, probably referring to this species, from Big Island.¢ Eggs collected at the post on Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, in June, 1891, by H. MacKay, were received by the National Museum. Macoun, on the authority of J. M. Macoun, states that [in 1888] it was common on the Clear- water, on Methye Lake, and in places south to Isle 4 la Crosse. He states also that Spreadborough first observed it at Edmonton, A1]- berta [probably in 1897], on April 20, and found nests May 26 and 27; and found it common from Edmonton to the crossing of McLeod River in June, 1898, and from the mouth of Lesser Slave River to 4Can. Nat. and Geol., VI, p. 4438, 1861. 444 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Peace River Landing in June, 19038. He records also specimens from Edmonton and Peace River Landing, Alberta.¢ While collecting at Edmonton, Alberta, in the early autumn of 1894, J. Alden Loring found the bird fairly common, and took speci- mens on September 11, 17, and 18. In the early summer of 1896 he reported it uncommon on the Jasper House trail, taking a specimen about 25 miles northwest of Edmonton, May 25. In the early autumn of the same year he found it rare and difficult to obtain along the trail between Jasper House and Smoky River. a. Melospiza lincolni (Aud.). Lincoln Sparrow. This is the common song sparrow of the region. In 1901 it was first noted near Poplar Point, on the lower Athabaska, where a male in full song was observed May 16. A female was taken at Fort Chipe- wyan, May 23. The species was next noted at Fort Smith, where numbers were seen, June 19 to 28, and three specimens were collected. Tt was noted at Fort Resolution, July 5 and 9, and at Yellowknife Bay, on the Northern Arm of Great Slave Lake, on July 16. At Trout Rock a nest containing four eggs was collected, together with the female parent, July 17. It was placed on the ground in a patch of thick grass near water. At Fort Rae the bird was noted almost daily, July 19 to 29, and several specimens, including young not long from the nest, were taken July 23 and 25. On our return trip a few individuals were seen on the Athabaska, above Pelican Portage, August 25. : On May 13, 1903, we first observed this bird a few miles north of Sturgeon River. We next noted it 50 miles below Athabaska Land- ing, May 17, arid observed it at Grand Rapid, May 21 and 22. We did not again note it until June 17, when one was seen near Lime- stone Point, on the lower Slave. We found it very common at Fort Resolution during the latter part of June. During their trip to the Mackenzie my brother and Cary noted it at Hay River, June 29, and the following day found a nest containing five heavily incubated eggs. The male bird was shot just after being flushed from the eggs, show- wwe that it assists in incubation. A few others were noted at Fort Providence, July 6 and 7; at the mouth of Willow Lake River, June 19; and at Fort Wrigley, June 21 and 22. On their return trip they noted an adult and two fledged young on the Athabaska, below Red River, on August 6, and found it common along the river from Brulé Rapid to Athabaska Landing, August 18 to September 13, and near the latter place up to September 23. They noted it also near Lily Lake, September 24. During my trip northward from Fort Rae, after the division of the party, I observed this sparrow on Grandin 4@Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 507-509, 1904. | | | 1908. ] BIRDS. 445 River, August 4 and 5; on Lake Faber, August 8; and on Lake Hardisty, August 16. 3 In the spring of 1904 I saw the first one at Fort Simpson on May 16. The species was next seen May 19, on which date it was common, and was noted nearly every day during the remainder of the month. Several specimens were taken near Fort Providence, May 18 to 21, by Mills and Jones. While descending the Mackenzie I noted it nearly every day at Fort Norman, June 11 to 15, and took one at Fort Good Hope, June 21. On my return trip I saw it near the mouth of Nahanni River, July 25; found it common at Fort Mc- Murray, August 11 to 14; and saw several between La Biche River and Athabaska Landing, September 1. H. W. Jones observed the species near Fort Providence, May 14, 1905. This bird was first recorded from the Mackenzie River region by Ross, who listed it as not rare north to Fort Simpson and as having been collected at that post. Two skins from Fort Rae, labeled as having been taken with eggs, and one from Fort Resolution, are now in the National Museum; and the bird catalogue shows that specimens were received also from Big Island, Fort Simpson, and Lesser Slave Lake, the skin from the latter locality being accompanied by eggs. Eggs taken at Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, in June, 1891, were received through MacFarlane. Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborough, states that this bird was first seen at Edmonton on May 5, 1897, and a nest found June 1; that it was observed every- where from Edmonton to Yellowhead Pass in June, 1898; and was abundant from Edmonton to Lesser Slave Lake and Peace River Landing in 1903.” J. Alden Loring collected a specimen at Edmonton, September 8, 1894, and in the early summer of 1896 reported the species abundant along streams on the Jasper House trail, taking one 25 miles north- west of Edmonton, May 25. Melospiza georgiana (Lath.). Swamp Sparrow. In 1901 the swamp sparrow was first noted at Fort Chipewyan, May 23, when several were seen and one was taken. Proc. U. S. Nat, Mus., XIV, p. 444, 1891, ee 474 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. (No. 27. The specimens sent by him to the Smithsonian include sets of eggs taken at Rendezvous Lake, June 28, 1864, and on the lower Anderson’ in June, 1865. Baird recorded specimens from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Big Island, Fort Simpson, Fort Good Hope, Fort Anderson, and Peel River. Sharpe lists skins from Fort Good Hope and Great Bear Lake.’ The earliest date for Fort Simpson recorded in the cata- logue of the birds in the National Museum collection is May 22. Macoun states that J. M. Macoun saw two or three on the Athabaska near Lesser Slave River [in 1888], and that Spreadborough saw one at the upper crossing of Lobstick Creek, west of Edmonton, in June, 1898.° Seton notes the species from Artillery Lake, where a female was seen feeding young on August 5, 1907.7 J. Alden Loring took a specimen at Edmonton, September 25, 1894. Dendroica virens (Gmel.). Black-throated Green Warbler. This bird was found by us only on a wooded island near the out- let of Athabaska Lake, where we encamped during the first few days of June, 1901. Here we saw several in dense spruce woods June 3, collecting a pair, and also saw one June 4. The males were in full song, and the birds were evidently located on their breeding grounds. Among his records for this warbler, Macoun says: First seen at Edmonton, Alta., May 15, 1897; common in spruce woods by May 22; breeding in the woods; one pair seen at Peace River Landing in latitude 56° 15’, in June, 1903. (Spreadborough.) ¢ Dendroica townsendi (Towns.). ‘Townsend Warbler. This western species probably occurs regularly as a migrant in western Alberta. A male, evidently a bird of the year, was taken by J. Alden Loring at Banff, August 28, 1894. Dendroica palmarum (Gmel.). Palm Warbler. This warbler has been taken at a number of points north to the upper Mackenzie. In 1901 I saw one or two in a mixed flock of small migrants at Fort Chipewyan, May 23. We noted it elsewhere at but one place—on Slave River about 125 miles below Fort Smith— where I took a pair in scattering woods at the edge of a marsh, July 2. In the summer of 19083 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary found this species rather common at Fort Providence, noting two on July 6, six on July 7, and two July 8. At this place they took a number of 2Rev. Am. Birds, p. 193, April, 1865. ° Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., X, p. 327, 1885. Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 617, 1904. FAUkK, XX ps 13; 1908: € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 620, 1904. | | a | { } j 1908.] BIRDS. 475 specimens in young spruces in a dry muskeg near the post on July 6 and 7. The song, consisting of several weak notes, was heard on several occasions, but usually a sharp ‘ chip’ was the only note. In 1904 I saw two individuals in a mixed flock of small migrants near Stony Creek, Alberta, on September 3. | Richardson, under the name Sylvicola petechia, first recorded this bird from the region, listing a specimen from Fort Simpson.* Baird recorded specimens from the same place, and from Fort Resolution, where its nest was discovered by Kennicott. Seiurus aurocapillus (Linn.). Oven-bird. The oven-bird occurs in suitable places in the Athabaska and Slave River valleys north at least tc Great Slave Lake. Since it has been taken at Fort Yukon ® and other points on Yukon River, it should occur also on the upper Mackenzie, but we failed to detect it there, and I find no records. In 1901 the oven-bird was first noted near Point La Brie, near Fort Chipewyan, May 29, when a male in full song was secured. It was next noted at our camp on Slave River, 10 miles below the Peace, where we found the species to be fairly common in a tract of poplar woods, June 8 to 10, and on the latter date secured a specimen. Con- trary to their usual habits, the birds were extremely shy, and the one taken was secured with difficulty. The species was noted also as we were descending Slave River about 50 miles below Fort Smith, where several were heard singing, June 30. In the spring of 1903 we first observed this bird at Cascade Rapid, May 28. We noted it next on Rocher River, June 6. Its presence, usually heralded by its loud familar song, was frequently noted as we paddled down Slave River between Fort Smith and Fort Reso- lution, June 15 to 19, and several were heard and seen at the latter place on June 22 and 23. While ascending the Athabaska on their return trip Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary observed two, collect- ing one, in poplar woods at Fort McMurray, August 10. Another was seen at House River on August 22. In 1904 I noted this bird only near Little Red River, where I saw one on August 9. The egg catalogue of the National Museum shows that eggs, taken by Strachan Jones, were received from Lesser Slave Lake in 1868. Macoun, from the notes of Spreadborough, states that the oven-bird was first seen at Edmonton May 14, 1897, was common by May 22, and had finished buiilding but not yet laid its eggs on June 3; it was common from Edmonton to the crossing of McLeod River in June, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XI, p. 484, 1848. 6 Rey. Am. Birds, p. 208, April, 1865. ¢ Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 278, 1869. 476 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. fo. 27. 1898; and abundant from the mouth of Lesser Slave River to Peace River Landing in June, 1903. J. M. Macoun in 1888 noted it along - the Athabaska between the Landing and Lesser Slave River about the last of May. Later in the season he saw a few at Fort McMurr ay and at the north end of Methye Portage.“ Seiurus noveboracensis notabilis Ridgw. Grinnell Water-thrush. The water-thrush breeds rather commonly throughout the Atha- baska-Mackenzie region north nearly to the limit of trees. Swamp- loving birds lke the water-thrushes can not fail to find congenial homes in this region of marsh and muskeg, and their sprightly songs are often heard as the traveler floats down its waterways. In 1901 we first noted the water-thrush on the Athabaska, near the mouth of Little Red River, May 15, where its song was several times heard in the thickets bordering the river. During the two following days, while traveling on the river to Athabaska Lake, we heard the species every little while. We did not note it at Fort Chipewyan, but while encamped on a wooded island near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 1 to 4, we heard the bird daily in a swampy thicket, and took a male on June 4. We noted it also on Rocher River, June 5 at the mouth of Peace River, June 6; 10 miles below that point, June 8; and at Smith Landing, June 15. We next noted it on the banks of Slave River, 25 miles below Fort Smith, June 30, and farther down the river on July 1 and 2. At Fort Rae I saw one or two on July 26, and took one July 27. In 1903 we first noted this species, a single individual, at Grand Rapid, May 22. We next noted it below Little Buffalo River, May 26, found it common at Cascade Rapid on the morning of May 28, and observed numbers nearly every day between there and the mouth of the Athabaska up to June 1. We observed the species at Fort Chipewyan, June 3, and near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 5, and found it common on Rocher River, June 6 to 8.. Along Slave River, between Fort Smith and Fort Resolution, June 15 to 19, we found it abundant, and we noted it at the latter place on June 22 and 23. During their trip to the Mackenzie, my brother and Cary saw it at Hay River, June 30 and July 1; at Fort Providence, July 2, 4 and 5; and at Fort Simpson, July 10. Qn their return trip they observed it at Fort McMurray, August 11. While on my way to Fort Rae from Fort Resolution, after the division of the party, I noted it at the delta of the Slave, July 17; and while following the canoe route north of Fort Rae I noted one on Lake St. Croix, August 13, and another, still in song, on a large lake a few miles south of MacTavish Bay, August 22. This was the last one of the season. “Catalogue Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 626, 1904. | | 1908.] BIRDS. 477 In the spring of 1904 I first saw the water-thrush at Fort Simpson on May 14, noted it next on May 17, and found it common May 18. Tt was in full song from the time of its arrival, and was noted nearly every day during the remainder of May. Several specimens were collected at Fort Simpson late in May by myself, and males were taken at Willow River, near Fort Providence, by J. W. Mills on May 17 and 22. During my trip down the Mackenzie I noted the species between Fort Simpson and Nahanni River, June 2 and 3; near Fort Wrigley, June 7; near Sans Sault Rapid, June 19; below Fort Good Hope, June 25 and 26; and at Fort McPherson, July 4 and 7, col- lecting one on July 4. While ascending the Athabaska on my return trip I saw one near Grand Rapid on August 22. Ross recorded Seiurus noveboracensis as common in the Mackenzie River region north to La Pierre House.* Baird reported specimens from Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Norman, and Peel River; ? and the catalogue of the birds in the National Museum records skins from Fort Resolution, Big Island, and La Pierre House. One from the latter locality, a female taken with nest and five eggs; an adult male from Fort Simpson, taken May 22, 1860; and a young one, just from the nest, taken at the same locality, August 10, 1860, are still in the collection. Russell took specimens at Fort Chipewyan, May 24 and 26, 1893.¢ Macoun records one seen at Edmonton, May 15, 1897, by Spreadborough, who also found it common from the mouth of Lesser Slave River to Peace River Landing in June, 1903.4 Oporornis philadelphia (Wils.). Mourning Warbler. On August 12, 1904, while collecting in deep poplar woods on a large island near Fort McMurray I shot an immature male of this species. It was taken in mixed undergrowth and was the only one observed. Oporornis tolmiei (Towns.). Tolmie Warbler. Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborouglt, notes this species as follows: : First seen at Edmonton, Alta., June 3, 1897, not common, found chiefly along the high banks back of the river where there is plenty of dead brush, they breed here without doubt; observed from Lesser Slave Lake to Peace River Landing in June, 1903. He also records a specimen taken at Edmonton, Alberta, June 4, BO (2 @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 279, 1862. 6Rey. Am. Birds, p. 216, April, 1865. €Wxpl. in Far North, p. 269, 1898. 4Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 631, 1904, ¢ Jpid., pp. 636, 637, 1904, 478 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Geothlypis trichas occidentalis (Brewst.). Western Yellow-throat. This bird seems to be of regular occurrence in suitable places north to Athabaska Lake and the Peace River Valley. In 1901, on my return trip, | saw several individuals, evidently a family party, in a thicket of young growth near Vermilion Creek, 42 miles north of Edmonton, on September 3. On June 1, 1903, Merritt Cary observed a singing male in a marsh bordering Athabaska River a few miles above its mouth. In the early summer of 1896, J. Alden Loring reported seeing several yellow-throats in the grassy margins of water-courses on the Jasper House trail west of Edmonton. Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborough, states that this bird was “ first seen at Edmonton, Alta., May 27, 1897, common and nest- ing in the willows by June Ist; common from Edmonton to the sum- mit of the Rocky Mountains in Yellowhead Pass in July, 1898, breed- ing in willow thickets on the borders of marshes; common from Lesser Slave Lake to Peace River Landing, Lat. 56° 15’, in June, 1903.” He records also 3 specimens taken at Edmonton in May, 1897.2 Wilsonia pusilla (Wils.). . Wilson Warbler. 3 The black-capped warbler apparently occurs throughout the region north to the tree limit. A dearth of specimens from the region makes it dificult to formulate the ranges of the eastern form and its subspecies péleolata, but the bird breeding over most of this area seems to be referable to the typical form, while the shght amount of evi- dence at hand indicates that the bird of the lower Mackenzie is pileolata. In 1901 I saw a single individual at Fort Chipewyan on May 23. T next noted the species a short distance below Grand Rapid, August 20, when I saw one in a thicket beside the river. In 1903 we observed numbers on the lower Athabaska on May 31 and June 1. In the autumn, while ascending the Athabaska on their return trip, Alfred E- Preble and Merritt Cary observed the species as follows: Fort McMurray, August 8 to 11, several seen and one secured; Brulé Rapid, August 18, one male seen; House River, August 22, one taken; Pelican Portage, August 25, several seen. In 1904 I took a female, the first one observed, en a willow-cov- ered island below the mouth of Nahanni River, June 6. I also noted it near Fort Wrigley, June 7, and 8 miles below there, June 8. At Fort Norman on June 11 I saw several; collecting a male. I ob- served several at Fort McPherson, July 14. During my return trip I took a specimen at Fort McMurray, August 11. *Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 6389, 1904, 1908.] BIRDS. 479 Baird recorded a specimen from La Pierre House;? and Sharpe, one from Fort Simpson.2 Macoun, on the authority of J. M. Macoun, states that a pair was seen at Fort McMurray, and that the species was common on Methye Portage, and between there and Isle a la Crosse [in 1888]. Spreadborough first saw it at Edmonton, Alberta, on May 29, 1897.¢ Seton records this warbler from the northern edge of the forest on Artillery Lake, where I collected a specimen on September 5, 1907.4 A specimen in the National Museum, taken at Fort Anderson, July 10, 1864, is pronounced by H. C. Oberholser to be referable to Wd- sonia pusilla pileolata. Wilsonia canadensis (Linn.). Canadian Warbler. This warbler is now ascertained to be a regular inhabitant of the lower Athabaska Valley north at least to the mouth of the Clearwater. In 1901 the Canadian warbler was detected only on the Athabaska a short distance below Grand Rapid on August 20, when I shot a male in a thicket bordering the river. While ascending the Athabaska in the fall of 1903, Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary found the species common at Fort McMur- ray, August § to 11, and took a male on August 10. Both adults and young were present and the males were. still in song. They fre- quented the heavy undergrowth of the poplar woods and were shy and difficult to approach. Several were afterwards observed in the hillside ravines between Grand Rapid and Pelican Portage, August 20 to 25. In 1904 I observed the species only at Fort McMurray, where I took one on August 11, and saw another August 12. Macoun records a specimen taken at Edmonton, Alberta, May 29, 1897, by Spreadborough.° Setophaga ruticilla (Linn.). Redstart. The redstart is a rather common summer inhabitant of the Atha- baska and Mackenzie valleys north at least to Fort Norman. In 1901 it was first noted at Fort Chipewyan on May 23, when a male was taken, and next on June 1, when a female was collected at the same place. It was found to be rather common at our camp 10 miles below Peace River, June 8 to 10, and a nest containing five fresh eggs was taken on the latter date. The nest was about 6 feet up in a clump 4 Rey. Am. Birds, p. 241, May, 1865. 5 Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., X, p. 436, 1885. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 648, 1904. d Auk, XXV, p. 73, 1908. | €Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 647, 1904, 480 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. of willows growing in a flooded swamp. In the same clump, 6 feet higher up, was the nest of a rose-breasted grosbeak. Several redstarts were seen and 2 specimens were taken at Smith Landing, June 15 and 17, and a pair was seen at Fort Resolution, July 6. In the spring of 1903 we first observed this bird on the Athabaska a few miles above Poplar Point, May 30. We next noted it on Rocher River, June 6, and also at Fort Resolution, June 23. My brother and Cary found it rather common at Fort Providence, July 2 to 8, noting several nearly every day; saw two on the way to Fort Simpson, July 9; and found it abundant at that place, July 10. They noted a few also near the mouth of Nahanni River on July 11 and 12, and one on the Nahanni Mountains, July 17. On their return trip they found it common at Grand Rapid, August 21, and at Quito or Calling River on August 28, the last date recorded. In the spring of 1904 I first observed the redstart at Fort Simp- son on May 25, noting two, and saw a few May 26 and 28. During my trip down the Mackenzie I saw one near the mouth of Nahanni River, June 3. At Fort Norman I took a male, the only one observed, on June 13. This was as far north as I detected the bird. On my return trip I saw a few at Fort McMurray on August 11, 12, and 14. J. W. Mills took specimens at Fort Simpson, May 26, 1905, and Jones reports it there on May 22. This bird was first recorded from the region by Richardson, who listed a specimen from Fort Simpson. Ross recorded it as common in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Good Hope.’ Baird re- corded skins from Fort Resolution and Fort Simpson;¢ and the bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that specimens were re- ceived also from Fort Liard and Lesser Slave Lake, accompanied in the latter case by eggs. The earliest dates recorded in the catalogue are as follows: Fort Simpson, May 20, 1860; May 28, 1861; Fort Resolution, May 23, 1860. Skins from the last two localities are still in the collection. Macoun states that this species was first seen by Spreadborough at Edmonton, Alberta, May 29, 1897, and was com- mon by June 1; it was common in willow thickets from Edmonton to Athabaska Pass in June, 1898; and in thick woods from the head of Lesser Slave Lake to Peace River Landing in June, 1903. J. M. Macoun saw a pair at the mouth of La Biche River in the summer of 1888. Macoun records specimens also from Edmonton and Peace River Landing.4 In the early summer of 1896, J. Alden Loring noted several dur- ing the first part of his trip along the trail between Edmonton and Jasper House. “Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Xl, p. 484, 1843: 5 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 280, 1862. ¢ Rev. Am. Birds, p. 256, May, 1865. 4Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 649, 651, 1904. 1908.] BIRDS. 481 Anthus rubescens (Tunstall). American Pipit. This species occurs rather commonly throughout the wooded part of the region in migration, and breeds on the Barren Grounds and the higher parts of the mountains. In 1901 we observed it only during the autumnal migration, finding it common about the fields at Athabaska Landing on August 30, when we collected a specimen, and noting a number on the road near Vermilion Creek on Sep- tember 3. In 1903 a flock of about 30 was observed at Edmonton, May 10; several individuals near Sandy Creek, May 14; and one or two near Pelican Rapid, May 18. The species was next observed by my brother and Cary at Fort Providence, where a female, whose ovaries contained small eggs, was taken on July 3. On their return trip in the fall they noted large flocks migrating at thabaska Landing, September 3 to 10. The last were seen about September 14. During the same autumn I first noted it on the shore of Great Bear Lake east of Leith Point, where I saw one August 28. I noted a small flock at my camp near the same place, September 5, and while ascending the Mackenzie saw a single individual near Gravel River, October 5. In the spring of 1904 the pipit arrived at Fort Simpson on May 14, when I noted about 10 individuals. It was next seen May 16, when it was common, and was noted daily up to May 21, the last date recorded. The birds frequented the fields about the post, associating largely with the Lapland longspurs and horned larks. Several speci-— mens, all of which proved to be females, were taken. The species was next observed along the road between Athabaska Landing and Lily Lake, Alberta, where it was abundant September 2 and 3. King obtained this species at Fort Reliance in May, 1834.° Sharpe records specimens from Fort Simpson, taken in May and September.? The catalogue of the birds in the National Museum shows that specimens were received from Fort Rae, Fort Anderson,’ Fort Simp- son, and Fort Good Hope, skins from the last two localities being still in the collection. Russell took the species at Fort Chipewyan, May 20, 1893.7 Spreadborough, as stated by Macoun, first observed it at Edmonton, April 27, 1897, noting about 20.. The birds were common there up to May 10, when they disappeared. He saw one @Narrative Journey to Arctic Ocean, II, p. 283, 1836. 5’ Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., X, p. 598, 1885. “Two female specimens taken with eggs near Rendezvous Lake, June 25 and 26, 1864 (the latter being referred to as Poocetes gramineus by MacFar- lane, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 441, 1891), were identified as Anthus ludovicianus by Baird, who inserted this name in MacFarlane’s field catalogue, and entered the specimens in the Museum register as Nos. 48247 and 43248. 4Expl. in Far North, p. 269, 1898, 44131—No. 27—08——_31 482 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. in the Athabaska Pass, September 29, 1898.4 Seton records the pipit from Clinton-Colden Lake.’ J. Alden Loring reported it common at Edmonton, September 7 to 26, 1894, taking two specimens on September’ 9. In 1896 he found it common above timber line in the mountains 15 miles south of Henry House, Alberta, July 3 to 21; and in the early autumn reported it common in the valleys between Jasper House and Smoky River, tak- ing two specimens on Sulphur Prairie, Grand Cache River, about 70 miles north of Jasper House, on September 12. Cinclus mexicanus unicolor Bonap. Northern Dipper. Water Ouzel. This species was first recorded from the region by Bonaparte, who clescribed a specimen in the collection of Mr. Leadbeater, said to have come from Athabaska Lake. Concerning the source of this speci- men, Richardson says: Three specimens of this bird were procured by Mr. Drummond near the sources of the Athabasca River, on the eastern declivity of the Rocky Moun- tains, * * * Several specimens, obtained at the same locality and at the same time with Mr. Drummond’s, came into Mr. Leadbeater’s hands through the Hudson’s Bay Company, one of which has been described and figured by the Prince of Musignano in his splendid American Ornithology.4? It is highly probable, therefore, that in this, as in several other cases, Bonaparte was either misinformed regarding the locality of the specimens, or applied the name ‘Athabasca Lake,’ which he sometimes qualified by the clause “near the Rocky Mountains,” ¢ to some lake near the source of Athabaska River.’ “Mr. Ridgway has recently revived the name Céinclus unicolory pro- visionally applied by Bonaparte to this specimen, so that the correct location of the type locality becomes highly important. Two specimens of this bird, taken by William Brass at Fort Hal- kett, British Columbia, on the upper Liard River, December 10, and ‘ December ’, 1862, and now in the National Museum, were recorded by Baird.’ J. Alden Loring, in the autumn of 1895, saw an individual of this species in the mountains west of Henry House, and observed three in the same general region in the autumn of 1896. In the late summer of the same year he saw several along streams in the high mountains between Jasper House and Smoky River. 4Cat. Canadian Birds, Part II], p. 654, 1904. b Auk, XXV, p. 73, 1908. ¢ American Ornithology, III, pl. 16, fig. 1, 1828. @¥auna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 173, 1831. € Zool. Journ., III, pp. 49, 52, 1827. f See note regarding source of Leadbeater’s specimens, p. 61. 9 Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., 50, Part III, p. 679, 1904. (‘‘ Cinclus unicolor Bona- parte, Zool. Journ., III, 1827, 52.) ’ Rey. Am, Birds, p. 60, June, 1864, 1908.] BIRDS. 483 Dumetella carolinensis (Linn.). Catbird. The catbird has not been found north of the Saskatchewan Valley. Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborough, says: First seen at Edmonton, Alta., May 25, 1897, heard a number of them singing next day, they soon became common and began to breed; common from Edmon- ton north [should be west] to the McLeod River in June, 1898. He also records a specimen taken at Edmonton, May 25, 1897.¢ Salpinctes obsoletus (Say). Rock Wren. In the early autumn of 1895, J. Alden Loring observed a rock wren at Jasper House, Alberta. Macoun, on the authority of Spread- borough, records one seen at Prairie Creek [near Jasper House], June 29, 1898.2 Troglodytes aedon parkmani Aud. Western House Wren. The house wren is apparently a regular breeder on the Athabaska and lower Peace, and has been detected once on the upper Mackenzie. Noted but once in 1901, a single individual being seen im a thicket near Athabaska Landing, August 30. The deserted nest of one was seen in a shed at Edmonton. Merritt Cary took a male at Fort McMurray, August 10, 1903, in the dense undergrowth near some abandoned cabins. He was in- formed by Bishop Young that a pair nested in one of the outbuild- ings at Fort Vermilion, Peace River, some years ago. , On the morning of May 20, 1904, while collecting at Fort Simpson, I saw a house wren in a brushy tract near the post clearing, but Tailed to secure it. This is the only instance known of its occurrence at this place. During my return trip, I saw two about a deserted cabin in the deep woods at Fort McMurray on August 12. Under the name 77oglodytes aedon, Richardson described a male taken “near the sources of the Elk River” [Athabaska], by Mr. Drummond.* Eggs taken at Lesser Slave Lake in 1868 by Strachan Jones were received by the Smithsonian Institution. Macoun, on the © authority of Spreadborough, states that the species was first seen at Edmonton, Alberta, May 6, 1897; nests with eggs were found, June 8 and 11; observed from Edmonton to Athabaska Pass in June, 1898; common from the mouth of Lesser Slave River to Peace River Land- ing in June, 1903; nesting in holes in trees and in the sandstone cliffs and cut banks of Peace River; specimens of the birds and eggs are recorded from Edmonton, Alberta.? J. Alden Loring took a specimen at Edmonton, September 11, 1894. @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p.. 662, 1904. bTbid., p. 665, 1904. Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 317, 1831. 4Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 669, 670, 1904. 484 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Nannus hiemalis (Vieill.). Winter Wren. The winter wren seems to be of regular occurrence in the Atha- baska—and probably in the Peace River—valleys. One was observed in a thicket beside the Athabaska a short distance below Grand Rapid, August 20, 1901. While ascending the Athabects in the fall of 1903 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary saw one near House River, August 22, and col- lected one near Athabaska Landing, September 14. It proves refer- able to the typical form. J. Alden Loring reported seeing single birds at Jasper House and Henry House in the early autumn of 1895. It is probable that they belonged to the western race, V. h. pacificus. Spreadborough, according to Macoun, who refers the record to the western form, found the winter wren common in thick spruce woods from Lesser Slave Lake to Peace River Landing in June, 1903.4 Telmatodytes palustris iliacus Ridgw. Prairie Marsh Wren. Under the name 7Zvoglodytes palustris, Richardson described a male from the “southern sources of the Elk River,” one of several taken by Drummond in that region.’ The Ges of the birds in the National Museum records 2 specimens collected by Strachan Jones at Lesser Slave Lake in 1868, and eggs were also received from the same locality. J. Alden Loring reported that two pairs were seen at Edmonton, September 16, 1894, and a specimen taken by him at that time has been recorded under the name Cistothorus palustris plesius by Ober- holser.c According to Macoun, Spreadborough observed a number at Edmonton, Alberta, May 10, 1897. The species was common by May 13, and had eggs about the last of the month. A pair was ob- served breeding at Peace River Landing, July 1, 1903. Specimens trom Edmonton and Peace River Landing are recorded.4 Certhia familiaris montana Ridgw. Rocky Mountain Creeper. While on their return trip in the fall of 1903 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary observed a brown creeper, probably referable to the present form, in a grove of Pinus divaricata 20 miles south of Atha- baska Landing, September 22. Sitta carolinensis aculeata Cass. Slender-billed Nuthatch. While ascending the Athabaska in the autumn of 1903 Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary observed a white-bellied nuthatch, proba- bly referable to the western form, near Swift Current Rapid, Au- gust 28. @ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 672, 1904. 6 Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 320, 1831. ¢ Auk, XIV, p. 193, 1897. 4Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 677, 678, 1904. 1908.] BIRDS. 485 Sitta canadensis Linn. Red-breasted Nuthatch. This nuthatch is a fairly common inhabitant, probably in summer only, north to the region of Fort Simpson. In 1901 we first noted it on the Athabaska a short distance below Athabaska Landing, May 6. We next observed it near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 2 and 3, taking a male on the former date. We saw another bird in spruce woods 25 miles below Peace River, June 13, and heard the familiar notes of the species beside Slave River 50 miles below Fort Smith on June 30. During the spring of 1903 we observed the Canada nuthatch but twice—above Pelican Rapid, May 18, and below Poplar Point, May 30. While ascending the Athabaska in the fall Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary found the species abundant along the river be- tween Brulé Rapid and La Biche River, August 18 to 29, and near Athabaska Landing, September 1 to 21. They observed it also 50 miles south of Athabaska Landing on September 23. In 1904 I saw this species only at Fort Simpson. It was first noted April 17, when I saw two in mixed woods of poplar and spruce on a ridge near Liard River, several miles south of the post. On April 22, when I made another trip to the same locality, I again observed a few in the same woods. J. Alden Loring reported several observed during the last week of August, 1894, at Banff,’Alberta, and took a male on August 31. In the early autumn of 1895, he found the species common in the moun- tains in the vicinity of Jasper House; he reported it quite common during the early autumn of 1896 in the mountains and foothills be- tween Jasper House and Smoky River. Macoun, from the notes of J. M. Macoun taken in 1888, states that this species was “not rare between Athabasca Landing and Lesser Slave River; first seen May 29th; not rare on the Clearwater River up to Methye Portage.” On the authority of Spreadborough, he states that the species was rather common in the spruce woods at Edmonton, June 12, 1897, when a nest with young was found; com- mon from Edmonton to Athabaska Pass in June, 1898; not common in the Peace River country, very few seen during the season of 1903. A specimen taken at Edmonton, April 29, 1897, is recorded.¢ Penthestes atricapillus septentrionalis (Harris). Long-tailed Chick- adee. The familiar black-capped chickadee of the east is represented in the Athabaska and Mackenzie valleys by this closely related form, which is a rather common breeder throughout the wooded portion of the region. During the more severe months it withdraws from the *Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 683, 685, 1904. 486 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. more northern parts of its range, but moves northward again with the first return of mild weather. On May 1, 1901, we first saw this chickadee near Edmonton, aaa on May 4 saw it 60 miles north of that point. While qe ding the Athabaska we observed the species near Brulé Rapid, May 12 and 13, and near Little Red River May 15. We noted it also at Fort Chipe- wyan, May 19, and 25 miles below Peace River June 13. At Fort Smith, on June 23, we observed a small company, including young birds, and evidently a family party, and collected three specimens. While we were ascending the Athabaska the species was observed at Big Cascade Rapid August 14, below Grand Rapid August 20, 10 miles below Pelican Rapid August 25, and at Athabaska Landing, where several individuals were observed, and one was taken, on Au- gust 30. In the spring of 1903 we first observed this chickadee at Edmon- ton, where we saw a few on May 8, 10, and 12. During the trip to | Atvebacks Landing, May 11 to 15, we noted a few Take and near Sandy Creek, May 14, saw one excavating a nesting hole. While de- scending the Athabaska we noted the species near Stony Rapid, May 26; near Fort McMurray, May 28; and daily between there and Athabaska Lake, May 29 to June 1. We noted it also near the mouth of Peace River June 9. It was next observed by my brother and Cary at Fort Simpson July 10, two individuals being seen. On their return trip in the fall they found it rather common on the Athabaska, noting it at Fort McMurray August 10, at Cascade Rapid August 14, and between Brulé Rapid and La Biche River August 18 to 29. The bird was abundant also near Athabaska Landing, and be- tween there and Edmonton, during September. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted the bird a few miles south of Mac- Tavish Bay, August 22, and while traveling along the south shore of Great Bear Lake I noted a few 40 miles west of McVicar Bay, Sep- tember 12, and observed small bands at Fort Franklin on September 18, 22, and 27. After my arrival at Fort Simpson I saw and collected single birds on November 17 and December 3 The species was not observed during the eoldlee part of the winter at Fort Simpson, and in the spring of 1904 was first seen on April 12, two being observed. It was next noted April 17, and became common toward the end of the month. A pair was taken at Willow River, near Fort Providence, on May 1 by H. W. Jones. During my re- turn trip up the Mackenzie I saw one below the mouth of Nahanni River July 23. Baird recorded specimens from Fort Simbu (October 19, 1859. and April 23, 1860), and Fort Liard (January 12, 1860) ;* two skins from Fort Sicon are still in the National Museum. Russell took 7Rey. Am. Birds, p. 80, July, 1864. 1908. ] BIRDS. 487 a specimen at Fort Chipewyan May 30, 1893.2. Macoun, on the au- thority of J. M. Macoun, notes the occurrence of this bird at Atha- baska Landing, at Fort McMurray, on Clearwater River, and between Methye Lake and Isle 4 la Crosse; and, on the authority of Spread- borough, between Edmonton and Athabaska Pass, and between Lesser Slave Lake and Peace River Landing.? J. Alden Loring reported it common at Edmonton September 7 to 26, 1894, and took a series of specimens. In 1895 he found it com- mon in the foothills of the mountains west of Edmonton. In 1896 he observed it frequently along the trail west of Edmonton, taking one 25 miles northwest of that place May 26; and found it breeding commonly in the mountains and valleys 15 miles south of Henry House July 3 to 21; he observed it frequently on the route between Jasper House and Smoky River in the late summer and early autumn, and took two specimens at the head of Muskeg Creek, a tributary of Smoky River, August 29; two on Grand Cache River September 2; and several in Grand Cache Valley September 24. He reported it common also in the mountains west of Henry House October 12 to 20. Penthestes gambeli (Ridgw.). Mountain Chickadee. On July 28, 1896, J. Alden Loring took an immature bird in Smoky Valley, 50 miles north of Jasper House, and on October 18 collected a female, one of a pair, 15 miles west of Henry House. Macoun states that Spreadborough observed two on a mountain north of Little Miette River, Athabaska Pass, in 1898.¢ Penthestes cinctus alascensis (Prazak). Siberian Chickadee. The first example of this bird known to have been procured in America was a female with seven eggs taken by MacFarlane at Fort Anderson June 1, 1864. The fact was first recorded by Turner,? and later by Nelson.“ MacFarlane also refers to it as follows: On June 1, 1864, a nest of this species, containing seven eggs, was found near Fort Anderson, in a hole in a dry spruce stump, at a height of about 6 feet from the ground. It was composed of a moderate quantity of hare or rabbit fur, intermixed with a sprinkling of dried moss. ‘The female parent was snared on the nest, but the male was not seen. The contents of the nest were tolerably fresh./ The eggs are still in the National Museum, but I am unable to find the skin of the parent bird. @Wxpl. in Far North, p. 270, 1898. ’ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 688, 1904. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 690, 1904. 4 Contributions Nat. Hist. Alaska, p. 182, 1886. € Rept. Nat. Hist. Collections in Alaska, p. 212, 1888. i Proce. U.S. Nat.,Mus:, XIV, p. 445, 1891. ” ——— ee ee a Me ee ee eee 7s eee ee eee > er | 488 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Penthestes hudsonicus (Forster). Hudsonian Chickadee. The Hudsonian chickadee occurs throughout the region north to the limit of trees. It is a more hardy species than the black-cap, but hike it is partially migratory. In 1901 it was first seen at Fort Chipewyan May 21, when a female was taken, and it was noted also near the same place on May 28. A pair was taken on a heavily wooded island near the outlet of Atha- baska Lake June 2, and on the following day a nest containing four young and two eggs on the point of hatching was found near the same place. A male was taken at the mouth of Peace River June 6, and the species was observed 25 miles below that point on June 12. Tt was noted also at Athabaska Landing August 30. During the summer of 1903 this chickadee was first noted on Mount Tha-on’-tha, where my brother and Cary observed a few daily, July 13 to 17, at various points between the base and 2,000 feet altitude, and noted young birds on July 14. They saw it also at Fort Simp- son July 24. Several specimens, including young of the year, were taken. While on their return trip they noted three near Swift Cur- rent Rapid August 28, and a few near Athabaska Landing Septem- ber 3,4, and 14. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I took a pair from a small band on Lake Hardisty August 18, and while traveling along the south shore of Great Bear Lake observed a small flock east of Manito Islands on September 14. After my arrival at Fort Simpson in the autumn I observed the species on but one occa- sion, on November 28, noting several, one of which was secured. During the colder part of the winter the Hudsonian chickadee was not seen, and in the spring of 1904 it was first noted on March 12, one being taken. It was several times observed during the latter part of March, and became rather common during the early part of April, when several were collected. During my trip down the Mackenzie I noted several, taking a female on Manito Island, near Fort Good Hope, on June 23. A specimen taken at Fort Simpson January 6, 1905, has been re- ceived from J. W. Mills, and H. W. Jones writes me pont the species was common about that post throughout the winter. Ross recorded Parus hudsonicus as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to Fort Simpson, and as wintering; ¢ and Baird listed specimens from Big Island, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Fort Liard.’ Specimens from Fort Rae, taken on October 30 and Decem- ber 13, 1862, and from Fort Simpson, taken by Kennicott on October 19 and December 19 [1859], are still in the National Museum. Ma- coun states that J. M. Macoun [in 1888] found the species common Can. Nat. and Geol., VII, p. 146, 1862. > Rev. Am. Birds, p. 83, August, 1864. 1908.] BIRDS. 489 on the upper Clearwater, on Methye Portage, and between there and Isle & la Crosse; and that Spreadborough took it at Edmonton in May. 1897, found it common at Jasper House in June, 1898, and observed one at Bear Creek, Peace River, latitude 56°, in August, 1903.¢ Seton records this species from the islands near the nerth © shore of Great Slave Lake, about longitude 112°.° During the last week of August, 1894, J. Alden Loring reported this bird common at Banff, Alberta, and took two specimens. In the autumn of 1895 he found it common in the Jasper House region, collecting two specimens at Henry House October 14. In 1896 he reported it common on the Jasper House trail from Blueberry Hills westward in the early summer, and on the trail between Jasper House and Smoky River in the late summer and early autumn. In the lat- ter region he found it associated with Penthestes a. septentrionalis and Penthestes gambeli. Ue found it common also in the mountains west of Henry House October 12 to 20, in company with P. a. septen- trionalis. During that season he took three specimens in Smoky Val- ley, 50 miles north of Jasper House, on August 26, and two at the head of Grand Cache River, about 60 miles north of Jasper House, on August 31. Regulus satrapa Licht. Golden-crowned Kinglet. In 1901 we noted this species but once—at our camp near Point La Brie, 12 miles northeast of Fort Chipewyan, where we took a male on May 27. During the summer of 1903 we observed it but once—noting one on the Athabaska 40 miles below Athabaska Landing, May 17. Macoun states, on the authority of Spreadborough, that this kinglet Was common in spruce woods from Jasper House to the summit of the Rocky Mountains in June, 1898.¢ Regulus calendula (Linn.). Ruby-crowned Kinglet. This diminutive songster is a common breeder nearly throughout the wooded region. In 1901 it was first noted near Vermilion Creek, 42 miles north of Edmonton, May 3, and its song was heard at various points between there and Athabaska Landing, May 4 and 5. It was next observed at Poplar Point on the lower Athabaska, May 16. While we were collecting at our various camps near Fort Chipewyan, May 19 to June 4, the bird was seen or heard nearly every day. It was next observed near Fort Smith, June 24, and was noted on the banks of the Slave 75 miles below Fort Smith, July 1. At Fort Resolution @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 692, 1904. Anko. DP. ‘Tos 1908. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 697, 1904. a SE ee 49() NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. (wo. 27. I saw it on July 6, and Alfred E. Preble noted it July 19. While ascending the Athabaska I saw it below Grand Rapid, August 20, and 10 miles below Pelican Rapid, August 25. During the spring of 1903 we first observed this species on the Athabaska 30 miles below Fort McMurray on the morning of May 29, and we noted it near Poplar Point on May 30. We heard its song also near the outlet of Athabaska Lake, June 5; on lower Slave River, June 19; and at Fort Resolution, June 20 and 22. During their trip on the Mackenzie my brother and Cary heard its song at Fort Provi- || dence, July 5 and 6, and cbserved a few on the Nahanni Mountains, July 13 to 18, noting fledged young on these dates. On their return | trip they noted the species near Brulé Rapid, August 18; saw several near Swift Current Rapid, August 28; and found it common near — Athabaska Landing, September 5 to 15. While on my way to Great | Bear Lake from Fort Rae, I observed the species on upper Grandin River, August 5, noting a female attending fledged young. In the spring of 1904 this kinglet was first noted at Willow River : by H. W. Jones on May 2, and several specimens, including both sexes, were taken May 2 to 14 by Mills and Jones. At Fort Simpson it was first observed on May 7, when I noted three individuals. Sev- eral others were seen on May 10 and 22. While descending the Mac- kenzie I saw and heard the bird about 100 miles below Fort Good | Hope on June 26. During my return trip I noted it at Fort McMur- | ray August 12. Baird recorded specimens from Fort Resolution;* one of these, taken on May 17, 1860, is still in the National Museum. Kennicott | mentions one taken at Fort Resolution May 7, 1860.2 MacFarlane did not meet with it on Anderson River, but both Indians and Eskimo, | when shown a specimen brought from Fort Good Hope, assured him | that they had seen the species. Russell took specimens at Fort | Chipewyan, May 30 and June 9, 1893, and heard its song at Big | Slavey Point, on the north shore of Great Slave Lake, near the North- ern Arm, on May 13, 1894, when the ground was still covered with snow.? According to Macoun, J. M. Macoun found it common at the south end of Methye Portage in 1888; and Spreadborough first saw — it at Edmonton, May 4, 1897; found it common along the trail to Athabaska Pass in June, 1898; and in the summer of 1903 found it common from the mouth of Lesser Slave River to Peace River Tsand- | ing. J. Alden Loring took a specimen at Edmonton, September 26, 1894. 2Rev. Am. Birds, p. 66, July, 1864. 6 Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, p. 171, 1869. € Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus) xaiVirp- 445) Aisa @ Expl. in Far North, p. 270, 1898. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 699, 700, 1904. 1908. ] BIRDS. 491 Myadestes townsendi (Aud.). ‘Townsend Solitaire. This bird, new to the Mackenzie region, was first observed by Al- fred E. Preble and Merritt Cary on the base of Mount Tha-on’-tha, at the mouth of Nahanni River, July 13, when a male was taken. A pair with young was noted at the same place, July 14, and a few others were seen higher up on the mountain on July-15, 16, and 17. Their clear bell-like notes were heard on the mountain every morning, and the singer could often be seen on the topmost twig of a towering spruce on the mountain side high above the camp. A pair of adults and a young one, which was full grown but still in the spotted plum- age, were collected. This species probably regularly breeds in the Rocky Mountains of western Alberta. On July 15, 1896, J. Alden Loring took an imma- ture bird, now in the Biological Survey collection, in the mountains 15 miles south of Henry House. Macoun, on the authority of Spreadborough, states that this spe- cles was seen everywhere in the mountains about the Athabaska Pass in 1898. He records also eggs taken by Spreadborough in the Yel- lowhead Pass July 13, 1898.2 Hylocichla fuscescens salicicola Ridgw. Willow Thrush. Macoun notes this bird as follows: First seen at Edmonton, Alta., May 11th, 1897; June 11th, found a nest on the ground containing two eggs; * * * common from Lesser Slave Lake to Peace River Landing, lat. 56° 15’ in June, 1903; observed from Edmonton to Atha- basca Pass, in June, 1898. (Spreadborough.) He records also specimens of both the birds and eggs taken at Edmonton in May and June, 1897 and 1898, by the same collector.? Six specimens, comprising both sexes, taken at Edmonton, May 11 to June 14, 1897, by Spreadborough, have been examined during the preparation of this report. Hylocichla alicie (Baird). (Gray-cheeked Thrush. The gray-cheeked thrush breeds from about the region of Great Slave Lake north to the tree limit, but is less abundant than the olive- back. In 1901 specimens were taken at Fort Chipewyan on May 22 and 23. A thrush thought to be this species was seen on Loon Island, 50 miles north of Fort Resolution, July 12. At Fort Rae it was noted nearly every day, July 19 to 29, and specimens, including young in the spotted plumage, were taken on July 23 and 25, In the spring of 1903 we first observed the gray-cheeked thrush near Pelican River, May 19, noting only one or two individuals. The species was not again detected until July 20, when I saw one @Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 702, 704, 1904. ’ Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, pp. 706, 707, 1904. 499 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. on the Simpson Islands, 40 miles northeast of Fort Resolution. On their return trip in the fall Alfred E. Preble and Merritt Cary saw two individuals, collecting one, near Athabaska Landing, September 12, and observed another 50 miles south of Athabaska Landing Sep- tember 23. During my trip northward from Fort Rae I noted this species on Lake Hardisty August 16, 18, and 19, and a few miles south of MacTavish Bay August 24. In the spring of 1904 J. W. Mills took a specimen at Willow River, near Fort Providence, on May 17. I did not note it at Fort Simpson and first saw it at Sans Sault Rapid June 19, when I collected a female. Baird recorded specimens from Fort Simpson, La Pierre House, and Fort Anderson.¢ A specimen from Fort Simpson, September 10, 1860; one from Fort Anderson, taken with eggs in June, 1864; and one from Fort Good Hope, May 31 [1862], are now in the National Museum. In the Anderson River region MacFarlane found the spe- cles very abundant, both in the wooded country and in situations where no trees grew, some nests being necessarily placed on the ground, contrary to the usual habit. One nest was found on the banks of Wilmot Horton River.’ In notes sent to the Smithsonian he recorded the species as tolerably numerous at Fort Anderson on May 28, 1865. Macoun, on the authority of Raine, records several sets of eggs taken by Messrs. Stringer and Young near the mouth of the Mackenzie.¢ Seton records the species from Fort Reliance and the south end of Artillery Lake.? Hylocichla ustulata swainsoni (Cab.). Olive-backed Thrush. This thrush is abundant over the wooded country, where during the short Arctic summer its song is heard nearly throughout the entire twenty-four hours. In 1901 it was first noted at Fort Chipe- wyan, May 24, and was seen. or heard almost daily until June 4, during our stay in the vicinity. After leaving Fort Chipewyan we everywhere found it common and heard its song almost continually . day and night. We noted it dailv between Athabaska Lake and Fort Smith, June 5 to 18, and found the first nest, containing four egos, 10 miles below Peace River, on June 10. The species was com- || mon at Fort Smith, where we noted it almost daily, June 19 to 29, and took a nest containing three eggs on June 21. We noted num- bers on Slave River, June 29 to July 2, and saw and heard several on July 6 at Fort Resolution, where Alfred E. Preble also noted the bird July 10, 11, and 22. I took a specimen at Fort Rae July 20, but did not hear its song after leaving Fort Resolution. 4Rev. Am. Birds, p. 23, June, 1864. 6 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 445, 1891. «Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 709, 1904. INOS DO JO, 78 IER 1908. ] BIRDS. 493 In the spring of 1903 this thrush was first observed 30 miles below Athabaska Landing on the morning of May 17. It was next seen a short distance above Grand Rapid, May 20, several being noted. One of these pioneers, rendered tame by the cold, ransacked the overhanging bank for spiders within a few feet of our noonday eampfire. The first song was heard at Fort McMurray on the even- ing of May 28. The species was common along the Athabaska be- tween there and its mouth, May 29 to June 1, and thence to Fort Reso- lution, being seen or heard almost daily. It was common also at Fort Resolution during the latter part of June. During their trip to the Mackenzie my brother and Cary found the species common, noting it at Hay River, June 30 and July 1, and observing numbers at Fort Providence almost daily until June 8. They found it com- mon also at Fort Simpson, July 10, and near the base of the Nahanni Mountains, July 11 to 19. On their return trip they found it common along the Athabaska above Fort McMurray during the latter part of August, and near Athabaska Landing, September 4 to 14. Sev- eral specimens were taken by them at Fort Providence and on the Athabaska. In the spring of 1904 I first noted the olive-back at Fort Simpson, May 31, taking a male. The song was first heard June 1. While descending the Mackenzie I found the bird common and in full song between Fort Simpson and Nahanni River, June 2 and 3. I noted it daily near the mouth of Nahanni River, June 4 and 5, and between there and Fort Norman, June 6 to 10. I found it common and noted it almost daily at Fort Norman, June 11 to 15; along the Mackenzie to Fort Good Hope, June 16 to 20; at Fort Good Hope, June 21 to 24; and between there and Fort McPherson, June 25 to 30. At Fort Me- Pherson I saw it only once, on July 2. During my return trip I noted the species at Fort McMurray on August 13 and 14. This thrush was first recorded from the region, under the name Merula wilsoni, by Richardson, who lsted a specimen from Fort Simpson.“ Ross recorded it as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to La Pierre House.’ Baird listed specimens from Fort: Resolution, Big Island, Fort Simpson, and Fort Good Hope.* Skins from Fort Resolution and Fort Simpson are still in the National Museum, and the catalogue shows that specimens were received also from Fort Rae, Peel River, and Lesser Slave Lake, eggs accompany- ing the skins from the last-named locality. The earliest date recorded for Fort Simpson is May 24. Eggs, accompanied by the female parent, taken at Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, in June, 1891, by H. MacKay, were received by the National Museum. Macoun, @Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XI, p. 484, 1848. 5 Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 279, 1862. ¢ Rey. Am, Birds, p. 21, June, 1864, 494 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. from the notes of Spreadborough, states that this species was first seen at Edmonton, May 8, 1897, was common from Edmonton to Atha- baska Pass in June, 1898, and was abundant from the mouth of Lesser Slave River to Peace River Landing in June, 1903.4 J. Alden Loring reported several seen at Banff, Alberta, during the last week in August, 1894, and took a male on August 29. Hylocichla guttata (Pallas). Alaska Hermit Thrush. J. Alden Loring took a hermit thrush referable to this species near the head of Grand Cache River, about 60 miles north of Jasper House, August 31, 1896. The species is probably a regular migrant through western Alberta. Hylocichla guttata pallasi (Cab.). Eastern Hermit Thrush. The common hermit thrush occurs in summer throughout the re- gion north at least to the vicinity of Fort Simpson. It is mainly an inhabitant of sparsely wooded ridges and pine barrens, and because of this preference 1s more local and less abundant than its congeners, though in favored places it is fairly common. It is the earliest of all the thrushes to arrive and the latest to depart. In 1901 the beautiful song of this bird first greeted us from a grove of mixed woods near Sturgeon River, 25 miles north of Edmonton, on May 1, and during the remainder of our journey to Athabaska Landing, May 2 to 5, the bird was frequently seen and heard, usually toward evening. Its song was heard at our camp near Brulé Rapid, May 11 and 12, and as we floated down the river below that point on May 13. During our stay in the vicinity of Fort Chipewyan the | bird was noted almost daily after May 20, and one was taken on May 29. Its song was heard 10 miles below Peace River, June 8 and 9. At Smith Landing we did not detect the bird itself, but a nest in which young had apparently been raised was seen on June 14. At Fort Smith we saw or heard the bird daily, June 19 to 29, and took a , young one just from the nest on June 27. We last noted the species | on Slave River 100 miles below Fort Smith, July 2. In the spring of 1903 we first observed the hermit thrush a few miles north of Sturgeon River on May 13, noting several, and again | near Athabaska Landing on May 15. While descending the Atha- | baska we noted it 30 miles below Athabaska Landing, May 17, and heard several on the lower river during the last few days of May. A specimen was taken at Smith Landing, June 11, and the bird was | found to be quite common on Smith Portage, June 12, and along the Slave below Fort Smith, June 15 and 16. My brother and Cary | noted several daily at Fort Providence, July 6 to 8, taking 2 speci- *Cat. Canadian Birds, Part ILI, p. 711, 1904. 1908.] BIRDS. 495 mens on the former date, and found it common at Fort Simpson, July 10, and at the mouth of Nahanni River, July 11. On their re- turn trip they saw two at Grand Rapid, August 21, taking one, and another near House River, August 22. Near Athabaska Landing they noted it September 5 and 14. While I was ascending the Mac- kenzie during the same autumn I saw a hermit thrush a short dis- tance above Nahanni River on October 15. In the spring of 1904 I first observed the hermit at Fort Simpson on May 10, noting three. I saw it*next on May 11, and found it rather common on May 12, when the birds were in full song. Dur- ing the remainder of the month the bird was often seen and the songs of several could be heard from the post almost any evening. While descending the Mackenzie I noted the species below Fort Simpson June 2, and near the base of Nahanni Mountains June 5. On my return trip I saw it a few miles above Pelican Portage August 27, and near Lily Lake, on the Edmonton road, September 3. Baird recorded specimens from Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, and Peel River.*. A female, taken with four eggs at Fort Resolution June 30, 1863, by J. Lockhart, is still in the National Museum. A set of eggs also, taken by H. MacKay at Pelican Lake, eastern Saskatchewan, in June, 1891, was received. Macoun, from the notes of J. M. Macoun made in 1888, notes the occurrence of this bird along the Athabaska between Lesser Slave River and Fort McMurray, on the Clearwater River, at Methye Portage, and thence to Isle a’ la Crosse. tle records it also, on the authority of Spreadborough, from Edmonton, where it was first seen May 3, 1897, and from White Mud River, Peace River Valley, where it was observed in June, 1903.° J. Alden Loring took a female in Grand Cache Valley, about 120 miles north of Jasper House, September 22, 1896. This specimen agrees with H. g. pallasi both in color and measurements, and was probably migrating from some point to the northward. Planesticus migratorius (Linn.). Robin. The robin is a common and quite generally distributed species throughout the timbered portion of the region. Around the trading posts and missions, the only settlements, it often builds its nest oa the beams of outbuildings or on the timbers of the surrounding fences. Though thus showing its preference for the haunts of man it seems well satisfied in the wilderness and breeds abundantly to the very edge of the timbered country, and even seeks isolated wooded areas within the confines of the Barren Grounds. Up to the region of Great Slave Lake two broods are usually reared, but to the north- ward of that point a single brood probably is the rule. It is one of 4@Rev. Am. Birds, p. 15, June, 1864. bCat, Canadian Birds, Part III, Dee omloOs. 496 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. the earliest of the strictly migratory birds to arrive in the spring, and in autumn delays its departure until severe weather and scarcity of food force it southward. In 1901 the robin was common at Edmonton and between there and Athabaska Landing April 29 to May 5. It was noted below Atha- baska Landing May 6, and was found to be common on the lower Athabaska May 15 to 17. It was occasionally seen in the vicinity of Fort Chipewyan May 19 to June 4, and was noted 10 miles below Peace River June 10, and 25 miles below, June 13, when one was taken. It was rather common at Smith Landing, where we noted it daily June 14 to 17 and took a specimen on June 15. At Fort Smith we found it more common than at any other point visited, and noted numbers daily June 19 to 28. On June 21 I found three nests con- taining eggs, undoubtedly representing second broods, since many young birds were then on the wing. We noted the species daily July 2 to 4 on lower Slave River, and July 5 to 9 at Fort Resolution, where Alfred E. Preble also observed it several times during the latter part of July. I saw a few on the north shore of Great Slave Lake near the mouth of the Northern Arm July 15, and one between Trout Rock and Fort Rae on July 18. At Fort Rae I noted the bird almost daily July 19 to 29, and took an immature bird on July 27. On our return trip we saw a few at Smith Landing August 6, and above La Biche River August 28. In the spring of 1903 we found robins abundant at Edmonton, Alberta, on our arrival there May 8, and found a nest containing 4 eggs on May 10. We found it common also during our trip to Atha- baska Landing May 11to15. Weobserved it at Grand Rapid May 22 and 24, occasionally saw it along the Athabaska between the latter point and its mouth, and found it rather common along Rocher and Slave rivers to Fort Resolution. At this post we noted it as an abundant and familar species during the latter part of June. Dur- ing their trip to the Mackenzie my brother and Cary observed a num- ber at Hay River June 28 and July 1, found it abundant at Fort Providence July 2 to 8, and noted it near the mouth of Nahanni River July 12. On their return trip in the fall they noted it migrat- § ing abundantly near Athabaska Landing September 1 to 14, and saw a few 50 miles south of Athabaska Landing September 23. After the division of the party I frequently noted it at Fort Resolution during the first half of July, and while crossing Great Slave Lake saw one near Trout Rock July 26. While following the canoe route northward from Fort Rae to Great Bear Lake I found this bird rather common. I noted it along Grandin River August 1 to 6, on Lake Faber August 7, on Lake Rae August 8, to the north of Lake St. Croix August 15, and at various points between there and MacTavish Bay, where it was common August 27. Several flocks were seen at 1908. ] BIRDS. A497 our camp on the shore of Great Bear Lake east of Leith Point Sep- tember 3, and one specimen was taken. A few birds were seen at the same place on September 4, and a very large flock on September 5 The birds were then feeding on the juicy crowberries which grow in profusion there. Many deserted nests proved the species to be a fairly common breeder along this semibarren shore. As we voyaged west- ward a few individuals were seen near McVicar Bay September 10, and 40 miles west of there September 12. At Fort Franklin a few were observed on September 19, 22, and 25, and while we were ascend- ing the Mackenzie two individuals were observed at Roche Trempe- Veau on the evening of October 9. In the spring of 1904 the robin was first observed at Willow River, near Fort Providence, on May 2, and several specimens were col- lected during May by Mills and Jones. The first female was taken May 10. At Fort Simpson it was first seen May 4, when I noted five individuals, and a few were observed nearly every day after- wards. It was abundant by May 13, when females were first ob- served. The first eggs were seen May 28, in a nest built beneath the eaves of an outbuilding. During my trip down the Mackenzie in June I found the bird present in small numbers at all the posts, and frequently noted it along the river. During my return trip I noted it at Smith Landing, August 5; at Fort McMurray, August 14; near Pelican Portage, August 27; and between Athabaska Landing and Lily Lake, Ee aember 2 2 and 3. In 1905, H. W. Jones Speed this species at Willow River, near Fort Providence, on April 29, and at Fort Simpson on November 17. _ Franklin, durimg his first overland journey to the Polar Sea, noted the arrival of this bird at Fort Enterprise on May 14, 1821.¢ In the narrative of his second expedition, he records its arrival at Fort Chipewyan on May 7, 1827; Richardson states that it arrived the same year at Fort Franklin on May 20.° Ross recorded the bird as occurring in the Mackenzie River region north to La Pierre House, and as having been taken at Fort Simpson.? MacFarlane intimates that it was common on Anderson River, and states that a few were met with also on the banks of Swan and Wilmot Horton rivers, on the Barren Grounds.’ The bird catalogue of the National Museum shows that skins were received from Fort Smith, Slave River, Fort Resolution, Fort Rae, Fort Simpson, Fort Good Hope, Peel River, and Fort Anderson, and that eggs were received from 4Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 301, 1823. + Narrative Second Expedition to Polar Sea, p. 307, 1828. ¢ Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 176, 1831. @Nat. Hist. Rev., II (second ser.), p. 279, 1862. €Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIV, p. 445, 1891. 498 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Lesser Slave Lake. R. G. McConnell noted the arrival of the bird at Fort Simpson on May 4, 1888.2. J. W. Tyrrell records a robin seen on White Island, Great Slave Lake, east of Fort Resolution, April 27, 1900. Later in the same season the bird was noted in the isolated strip of wooded country bordering the Thelon or Ark-i-linik River, northeast of Great Slave Lake.“ Hanbury observed robins in the lowest woods on the Coppermine, near the mouth of Kendall River, July 30, 1902.7 Macoun records this bird from Edmonton, where it was first seen April 16, 1897, and from several other points in Alberta.¢ J. Alden Loring reported large flocks seen at Edmonton, Septem- ber 7 to 26, 1894, and took a very dark, richly colored male on Sep- tember 25. He found it common also along the Jasper House trail west of Edmonton, in the early summer of 1896. The spring dates of arrival of the robin at Fort Chipewyan, for several years, are given in a table on page 23. Ixoreus nevius meruloides (Swains.). Northern Varied Thrush. Late on the evening of June 6, while stopping for a few hours on an island in the Mackenzie about 20 miles below the mouth of the Nahanni, I discovered a nest of this species, which I collected, together with the parent birds. The nest was placed in a small spruce growing in a dense forest and was about 7 feet from the ground. It is composed outwardly of small spruce twigs and sphag- num. 'On this foundation is reared a cup-shaped superstructure of bark, grass, and sphagnum mixed with mud, the latter material apparently having adhered to the roots of the moss. This cup is thickly and softly lined with fine grass and a few feathers. The eggs, 3 in number, had been incubated about three days. The birds flew excitedly about, uttering their characteristic alarm notes. The species was observed on but one other occasion. While collecting on Manito Island near Fort Good Hope on June 23, I saw a pair whose actions indicated that they had a nest somewhere in the vicin- ity. After a precipitate approach in response to my calling, their curiosity seemed to be satisfied and they retired into the recesses of | aswamp. The natives at Fort Norman and Fort McPherson recog- nized my specimens, and told me that the species occurred in the neighborhood of those posts. This bird was described by Swainson from a specimen taken at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake, in May, 1826. Concerning the species, Richardson says: “ We did not hear its song, nor acquire @ Ann. Rept. Can. Geol. Surv., IV (new ser.), p. 86D, 1891. b Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada) for 1900-1901, p. 185, 1902. ¢ Tbid., p. 122, 1902. @ Sport and Travel in Northland of Canada, p. 208, 1904. € Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 720, 1904. | a 1908.] BIRDS. 499 any information respecting its habits, except that it builds its nest in a bush, similar to that of the Werula migratoria.” * Baird says: “Mr. Kennicott found another in the Rocky Mountains, on Porcu- pine River, * * * August 28, 1861.2 Macoun publishes the fol- lowing note: I have a nest and four eggs that were taken by Rey. Mr. Stringer in the east channel of the Mackenzie River, 40 miles from its mouth. The nest was found, June 5th, 1895, in a spruce tree, 15 feet from the ground. The nest is made of goose grass and is six inches in diameter and three inches deep. The eggs are a paler blue than a robin’s, and are spotted with brown. (W. Raine.) ¢& Saxicola cnanthe leucorhoa (Gmel.). Greenland Wheatear. Under the name Sylvia wnanthe, J. C. Ross recorded a specimen taken at Felix Harbor, Boothia, May 2, 1830.7 It was the only one observed, and appears to represent the only record for this region. Sialia currucoides (Bechstein). Mountain Bluebird. This beautiful bird is of regular occurrence in the region now under consideration only in its southwestern part, along the Rocky Mountains and among their foothills, though a few specimens, 1n- cluding the type, have been taken to the eastward of the Mackenzie. During our investigations we met with it but once. On September 3, 1904, while traveling along the road near Stony Creek about 60 miles north of Edmonton I observed at least fifty mdividuals, old and young. The birds were in a loose flock and appeared to be mov- ing westward, feeding as they traveled. The species was described to me by a young man who had spent,the winter and spring of 1904 at Fort Nelson, on Nelson River, in northeastern British Columbia. He stated that it arrived there about May 10. According to informa- tion obtained by Merritt Cary, it is a common species in the Grand Prairie district, on upper Peace River. The Arctic bluebird was first described by Swainson, from a speci- men taken at Great Bear Lake, concerning which Richardson says: The only specimen that we procured of this beautiful bird was shot at Port Franklin in July, 1825. It is merely a summer visitor to the fur countries, and we obtained no information respecting its habits.¢ King took a specimen, which was recorded by Richardson, on Great Slave Lake. The exact locality was not specified, but was probably Fort Resolution.’ “Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, pp. 187, 188, 1831. Rey. Am. Birds, p. 32, June, 1864. Cat. Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 724, 1904. 7 Appendix to Ross’s Second Voyage, p. xxv1, 1835. © Fauna Boreali-Americana, II, p. 209, 1831. ' Narrative Arctic Land Expedition to Great Fish River, Appendix, p. 260, 1836, : 500 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. In the narrative of his third overland journey to the Arctic Sea, Richardson, perhaps referring only to his early experience with the species, says that Sialia arctica “ enlivens the banks of the Mackenzie, coming, however, not from the Atlantic coasts, but from the opposite side of the Rocky Mountain Range.”* The catalogues of the Na- tional Museum record a skin from Fort Halkett, on Liard River, and eggs from Lesser Slave Lake. Macoun, on the authority of Spread- borough, says: Observed a few about the end of July, 1903, at Dunvegan, Peace River; ob- served nesting at Lacombe, near Edmonton, Alta., June 18, 1897; * * * common from the upper crossing of the Lob-stick River to Camp River, B. C., west of the Athabasca Pass; also seen in large flocks at the Henry House, Athabasca Pass, September 2nd, 1898; last seen September 25th.? In 1895 J. Alden Loring reported a flock seen on the Jasper House trail at the crossing of McLeod River, probably in August. In 1896 he reported the species common in small flocks all along the trail between Edmonton and Jasper House in the early summer, and saw several families in the mountains and foothills along the trail be- tween Jasper House and Smoky River in the late summer and early autumn. MacFarlane, in a manuscript list, records a specimen which was shot at Fort Resolution early in June, 1880. It was sent to J. J. Dalgleish, who identified it. H.W. Jones, in a letter, reports seeing one at Hay River, Great Slave Lake, on July 12, 1907. REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS OF THE ATHABASKA-MACKENZIE REGION. But few reptiles and batrachians live in the territory now under review, and all the species known there were observed by our party. No systematic collection in this class has been made, but the list is probably fairly complete, although one or two salamanders may be found to occur. In the case of most of the species our observations extend the previously known ranges. Dr. Leonard Stejneger of the National Museum has assisted me in the work of identification. Thamnophis sirtalis parietalis (Say.). Northern Garter Snake. A specimen taken by us at Edmonton, Alberta, May 10, 1903, is referred to this form by Dr. L. Stejneger. This snake is common about Edmonton and along the road to Athabaska Landing. We did not observe it north of the latter point, but I was informed that garter snakes, probably of this form, are found in the Peace River Valley, and are especially common near Dunvegan, on the upper “Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 200, 1851. 6 Cat, Canadian Birds, Part III, p. 730, 1904, Se ee 1908.] REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS. 501 Peace. From several reliable sources I secured also information of its occurrence on the plains of Salt River, which enters the Slave near Fort Smith. This locality is said to mark its northern limit. Richardson records the occurrence of 7ropidinotus sirtalis on Ser- pent Lake, a short distance south of Isle 4 la Crosse Lake.¢ Bufo lentiginosus woodhousei B. & G. Western Toad. This form of the common toad is abundant along the Athabaska and Slave north at least to Fort Smith, where we took an adult, June 21, 1901. The species was common in the swamps at Fort Chipewyan, on June 3, 1903, and was then depositing its eggs and in _ full voice. | Cope records a specimen taken by Kennicott on Athabaska River [below the Clearwater |.” Rana pipiens Gmel. Leopard Frog. Specimens of this frog were collected at Smith Landing in June, 1901, and the species was observed also at Fort Smith. It was not seen farther north. Rana cantabrigensis latiremis Cope. Northern Wood Frog. This is the common frog throughout the region north to Great Bear Lake and the lower Mackenzie. In the course of our journeys we collected a large series, comprising specimens from the following localities: Fifty miles north of Edmonton; Fort Chipewyan; Slave River (near mouth of Peace); Smith Landing; Fort Smith; Fort Resolution; Fort Rae; Grandin River; Lake St. Croix; Fort Provi- dence; Willow River; Fort Simpson; mouth of Nahanni River; Birch Island, 90 miles below Fort Wrigley; Fort Norman; and site of old Fort Good Hope. At most of these localities we found the species common. Along the canoe route north of Fort Rae it was only occasionally seen, and none were observed about Great Bear Lake, probably on account of the late date of our'visit. Richardson records frogs, undoubtedly of this species, from Fort Franklin, where he says they croak loudly in the beginning of June.“ Boulenger, under the name 7. canta- brigensis, records specimens taken by Richardson at Great Bear Lake.’ Cope records specimens from Athabaska River, Fort Reso- lution, Big Island, and Fort Simpson.° The frogs reported by Mac- Farlane as found on Anderson River’ were undoubtedly of. this species. 4 Arctic Searching Expedition, I, p. 98, 1851. > Batrachia of N. Am. (Bull. 34, U. S. Nat. Mus.), p. 284, 1889. € Arctic Searching Expedition, II, p. 255, 1851. ¢ Cat. Batr. Salientia Brit. Mus., p. 45, 1882. € Batrachia of N. Am. (Bull. 34, U. S. Nat. Mus.), pp. 437, 438, 1889. / Canadian Record of Science, IV, p. 52, 1890. 502 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. In the spring of 1904 H. W. Jones heard the notes of this frog beside the Mackenzie above Fort Simpson on April 22. I heard the first ones in the vicinity of the post April 28, when I took three specimens. At this time the ponds were still frozen to the bottom in most places, but had thawed in the more exposed parts. Chorophilus septentrionalis Boulenger. Northern Chorophilus. This little frog, whose trilling notes are exactly similar to those of the more southern forms of the genus, is fairly common nearly throughout the region. ‘The name was based on specimens taken on Great Bear Lake.¢ We took the species at the following localities: Twenty-five miles - north of Edmonton; Slave River, 25 miles below the Peace; Smith Landing; and Fort Resolution. At Fort Simpson I first heard its notes on May 3, 1904, but failed to take specimens. I heard it also on the Mackenzie above Fort Norman early in June. FISHES OF THE ATHABASKA-MACKENZIE REGION. The following list includes practically all of the species of fresh- water and anadromous fishes known to occur in the Mackenzie Val- ley. It is based primarily on a collection made in the summers of 1903 and 1904. As my time was mainly occupied in other work, the col- lection of fishes was far from complete, some common species being purposely not preserved, while lack of facilities for their capture prevented the acquisition of small species, with a few exceptions. By some unfortunate accident a considerable portion of the collec- tion disappeared in the interval between its arrival in Washington and the time when it could be examined. These lost specimens unfor- tunately included: most of the examples of Coregonus—specimens which would have settled a number of doubtful points—from widely separated localities, some of them remote from the lines of regular travel. The remainder of the collection has been identified by Barton W. Evermann and Edmund lL. Goldsborough, and the records in- corporated in their recent Check List of the Freshwater Fishes of Canada, published in the Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington. In view of the fact that so many of my specimens were lost before they could be examined critically, I was gratified to find that the collection included a number of species not hitherto recorded from the Mackenzie Valley, and one which is new to the fauna of Canada. Collections of fishes from the Mackenzie region have been singu- larly unfortunate. A part of the first collection ever made there, those specimens taken on Sir John Franklin’s first journey, had to be abandoned during the disastrous retreat of the expedition across ¢Cat. Batr. Salientia Brit. Mus., p. 336, 1882. 1908. ] FISHES. . ~ 508 the Barren Grounds. A considerable part of Kennicott’s Yukon and Mackenzie collection also was lost on the Methye Portage, probably having been thrown away by some weary and irresponsible voyageur. In addition to the records furnished by the specimens I have in- cluded notes regarding the occurrence of a number of the better- known species in various parts of the region, in order to give their distribution in more detail. No attempt has been made, however, to include all the records available. Lampetra aurea (Bean). Lamprey. : Richardson, under the name Petromyzon fluvialis, recorded a specimen which was found adhering to an inconnu (Stenodus mackenzii) taken in Great Slave Lake.« Evermann and Goldsbor- ough refer this record to Z. aurea.’ It appears to relate to the only specimen of lamprey known to have been taken in the Mackenzie Valley. Catostomus catostomus (Forster). Northern Sucker. This widely distributed species is extremely abundant throughout the region, and is taken in large numbers by the natives. Its abun- dance makes it an important food fish, although its quality is far from the best. In some localities many are taken in winter in nets set beneath the ice. Specimens taken by me in a small lake near MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake, and near Fort Good Hope, have been recorded by Evermann and Goldsborough.° The Bear Lake specimen was taken in a small, deep lakelet on the summit of a rocky promontory 400 feet high, on the southern shore of MacTavish Bay. The little lake had no visible inlet, and its outlet, a tiny stream, fell over the cliff at its margin, a hundred feet at a time, into the lake below. As it was manifestly impossible for any fish to gain access to the lakelet by way of its outlet, I was much sur- prised to find it inhabited. Besides the small one secured, I saw a number of larger ones, presumably of the same species, in its clear depths. How these fish first became established there is not apparent. This species is abundant at the mouth of the Mackenzie in June. Simpson noted it near the mouth of the Coppermine.? MacFarlane mentions ‘carp* among the fish of the Anderson;¢ and Tyrrell states that they abound in Artillery Lake.’ Dawson took specimens in Frances Lake, at the head of Liard River. “Fauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 294, 1836. » Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., XX, p. 91, 1907. € Proce. Biol. Soe. Wash., XX, p. 93, 1907. @Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 267, 1843. € Canadian Record of Science, IV, p, 52, 1890. f Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada) for the year 1900-1, p. 115, 1902. 9 Ann. Rept. Geol. Sury. Canada, 1887, p. 231B, 1888. iE ees. ee, er 504 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. | [No. 27. Moxostoma lesueuri (Richardson). Gray Sucker. Under this name I include a few notes on a large-scaled sucker, usually called in the north gray sucker. It is equally common with the preceding species in many localities, and has nearly or quite as extensive a range. It is a common fish in Great Slave Lake and the Mackenzie. Pére Giroux informed me that it appears in numbers at Arctic Red River about the first week in June, but practically dis- appears after remaining abundant about three weeks. A specimen which he gave me measured: Total length, 18 inches; depth, 23 inches. It was among those subsequently lost. Couesius plumbeus (Agassiz). Northern Shiner. Previous to our explorations this species was unknown as an in- habitant of the Mackenzie Valley. In August, 1903, while following the canoe route between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes, I observed these small ‘ shiners’ in a number of places. While encamped on Lake St. Croix I succeeded after a good deal of effort (for I was not pro- vided with small hooks) in catching two of these fishes, using small spiders for bait. These specimens have been identified and recently recorded by Evermann and Goldsborough.* This fish probably has an extensive distribution in the Mackenzie Valley. In June, 1904, I saw a number of small fishes of precisely similar appearance and probably of the same species as my Lake Si. Croix specimens, in a small pond near the mouth of North Nahanni River. I have seen similar minnows in a number of other localities. Platygobio gracilis (Richardson). Flat-headed Minnow. This peculiar fish was first described by Richardson from the Sas- katchewan at Carlton House, but apparently was not recorded from the Mackenzie Valley until 1907, when Evermann and Goldsborough recorded specimens taken by myself in 1904 at Grand Rapid, Atha- baska River; and Fort Simpson and Fort Good Hope, Mackenzie River. Mr. Evermann, however, tells me that in working over the specimens in the National Museum he discovered an example which was taken by Kennicott at Fort Simpson, but which had been pre- viously overlooked. I found the flat-headed minnow to be an exceedingly abundant fish throughout the entire length of the Athabaska and Mackenzie rivers, trom Athabaska Landing northward. These muddy rivers seem to be its delight, and I have never seen it in clear water. It congregates in the eddies close to the bank and swims slowly along with the top of its head nearly flush with the surface. It is readily caught with a baited hook, and its capture is a favorite amusement with the Indian 2@Proe. Biol. Soe. Wash., XX, p. 98, 1907. ~1908.] FISHES. 505 women and children when the boats are tied up to the bank. Being slender and bony, it is but an indifferent food fish. It is usually called ‘roach’ by the English-speaking inhabitants. Hiodon alosoides (Rafinesque). Goldeye. The goldeye is a rather common inhabitant of Athabaska River, Athabaska Lake, and Slave River, becoming scarcer northward, and being practically unknown north of Great Slave Lake. It is less esteemed than the whitefish, with which it is taken. The most northern record of this species is of an example which I obtained from a native at Fort Norman on June 12, 1904. He had just taken it in his herring net, set at the mouth of Bear River. It was considered a great rarity—in fact, the man had never before taken one like it. Unfortunately, this specimen was among the number lost after reaching Washington. Coregonus spp. Whitefish. Owing to the loss of most of my specimens of this genus on which I depended for identification, I find it impossible to correlate most of my notes with definite specific names. The following species are known to occur in the Mackenzie Valley: C. guadrilateralis, described by Richardson, from Fort Enterprise, is a fish of very wide dis- tribution; (. richardsoni Gunther was described from Arctic North America, probably from Richardson’s collection. It is not well known, and may be the same as (. kennicotti, the type locality of which is Fort Good Hope. Whitefish of one or more species are found in nearly every lake and stream throughout the North. Some of the species are anadro- mous. The average weight of those taken is from 2 to 4 pounds, but in some lakes they attain a weight of 8, 12, or even 20 pounds. As a food fish probably none surpass it. In regard to this I may quote Richardson’s encomium, as his opportunity for forming an ome was of the best. He says: Several species of this subgenus [Coregonus] have been celebrated for the delicacy of their flavour, but none have been more justly so than the Attihaw- meg, which is an inhabitant of all the interior lakes of America, from Erie to the Arctic Sea. Several Indian hordes mainly subsist upon it, and it forms the principal food at many of the fur posts for eight or nine months of the year, the supply of other articles of diet being scanty and casual. Though it is a rich, fat fish, instead of producing satiety it becomes daily more agree- able to the palate; and I know from experience, that though deprived of bread and vegetables, one may live wholly upon this fish for months, or even years, without tiring.@ So important are whitefish as an article of diet that the sites of many, perhaps the majority, of the trading posts, as well as the win- tering stations of a number of exploring expeditions, places which. 4Fauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 195, 1836. 506 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. have become famous in Arctic hterature, have been selected with a view to the local abundance of this fish. | . Whitefish are taken altogether in gill nets, and at all times of the year. The nets are less successful, however, during the almost con- tinuous day of midsummer than later, when there is more or less dark- ness. But it is in autumn, just before the lakes close, that the ‘ fall fishery ’ is made, when more are taken than at any other season. At this time the whitefish congregate in the shallower parts of the lakes to spawn, and being then abundant and at their best, and the weather being favorable for their preservation, are taken in great numbers. A few citations will give some idea of the immense quantities of these fish which are annually taken, and of their great importance. Ogilvie, who spent a part of the fall of 1888 at Fort Chipewyan, says that the Hudson’s Bay Company required 36,000 for the use of its post, the Roman Catholic mission 12,000, and the remainder of the population at least 30,000 more. Most of these were caught near the post during three weeks.¢ | R. G. McConnell spent the autumn of 1887 about Great Slave Lake and has this to say in regard to its whitefish: The Big Island fishery supplied Fort Simpson and Fort Providence last year with about 40,000 fish, besides affording constant support to a number of In- dians. At the mouth of the Beaver about 20,000 were taken and the fisheries at the mouth of Hay River, in the bay in front of Fort Rae, and near Fort Reso- lution, yielded corresponding quantities. I estimated the total yield of the lake for the year 1887 at about half a million pounds. * * * The whitefish taken at Big Island average nearly 3 pounds in weight while those from Fort Rae are much smaller, and may belong to a different species.? After the regular fall fishery is brought to a close by the freezing over of the lakes, large numbers of whitefish are sometimes taken in nets set beneath the ice. Richardson describes this method as follows: The Attihawmeg is taken in the winter time in gill nets set under the ice. Each net is fifty or sixty fathoms long, and of a depth proportionate to that of the water, and in setting it for the first time a series of holes are made through the ice, at such a distance apart, that a long stick can be readily passed in the water from one to the other: a line, rather longer than the net to which it is fastened, being attached to the stick, is carried along and brought out at the extreme hole. The net being buoyed up above by thin oblong pieces of fir, and loaded below with stones, is drawn beneath the ice by means of the line, and firmly fixed at each end to stakes thrust through the holes. After the first time the intermediate holes in the ice, being useless, are allowed to freeze up, but the extreme ones are opened daily, and the net examined by the fisherman, who draws it out at one hole, while his assistant veers away the line at the other. * * * Most of the fish enter the net by night. They freeze as they are taken from the water, and are thus preserved in a perfectly sound state until spring.¢ i 4 Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada) for 1889, p. 90, 1890. 6’ Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada, IV, p. 74D, 1891. ¢Wauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 197, 1886. 1908.] FISHES. 507 In August, 1903, while following the canoe route between Great Slave Lake and MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake, my party sub- sisted to a considerable extent on these fish. We had more success with the nets in Lake St. Croix and Lake Hardisty than in any other places, mainly because it so happened that on these lakes we encamped at especially favorable fishing places. On one occasion a net about 75 feet in length took during the night 20 whitefish averaging about 4 pounds each. Large whitefish (the species is probably C. hkenni- cotti) also occur in Great Bear Lake, and we took a few. At least two species of Coregonus, the smaller of which is called locally ‘ broken nose,’ are abundant in the lower Peel and Mackenzie rivers nearly throughout the summer. Specimens of both were taken but were lost. Kennicott also took both species and gave some notes on their habits, but as his specimens also were lost I am unable to identify the species. It is evident that a full collection of whitefishes from this region is still especially desirable. Argyrosomus tullibee (Richardson). Tullibee. The foregoing notes on Coregonus refer in part to this species, as it is taken together with species of that genus in many places north to the Arctic coast, if the local name ‘ tullibee’ is distinctive. It is mentioned in many narratives, and the name is in common use throughout the region for a certain species. Peére Giroux informed me that these fish are extremely abundant at Arctic Red River in September, when they come in from the sea and spawn in very deep basins in the Mackenzie, where as many as a hundred may be taken in a net sunk to the bottom. They remain during October. My specimens having been lost, the identification 1s not positive. Simpson reported * tullibee’ taken near the mouth of the Copper- mine.? Argyrosomus lucidus (Richardson). Great Bear Lake Herring; Her- ring Whitefish. This little whitefish, first described by Doctor Richardson from Great Bear Lake, is an important food fish. It is extremely abundant in that lake, and also ascends the Mackenzie, Anderson, and other rivers in summer, presumably to spawn. Pére Giroux, of Arctic Red River, informed me that it passes there on its way up the Mac- kenzie about the second: or third week in June, remaining abundant about three weeks; that it is taken nearly all summer about Fort Good Hope; and that it returns to the mouth of the Mackenzie in late autumn. It was just appearing at Fort Good Hope on June 20, 1904. It ascends the river at least to Fort Simpson, and numbers are taken 4 Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 267, 1843. 508 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. wo. 27. in nets set at right angles to the bank. A special net, having a very small mesh, is necessary for the capture of this species, as it is smaller than any other fish regularly taken in the region. Its excel- lent flavor and good condition, however, make it one of the most desirable. The Hudson’s Bay and other trading companies, as well as the mission establishments, regularly establish a fishery at the west- ern end of Great Bear Lake, where great quantities are taken each autumn. During a period of about eighteen months in 1825-26, when Franklin’s second expedition was quartered at Fort Franklin, about 50,000 were taken. A specimen taken at Arctic Red River July 16, 1904, measured 164 inches in length; 3+ inches in depth. This was as large as any I saw, and larger than the usual size of the fish in Great Bear Lake, where I saw large numbers. MacFarlane states that some were obtained in Anderson River,? and it has been recorded from Herschel Island and other points west of the Mackenzie. | Stenodus mackenzii (Richardson). Inconnu; Coney. This large and important fish has a rather extensive distribution, being found in the Yukon and Mackenzie (and probably in the larger intermediate rivers), and also in the Anderson. It ascends these rivers in numbers to the first strong rapids, which it very rarely surmounts. Its range is thus limited by the Smith Rapids at Fort Smith, although great numbers ascend to their very foot. It also ascends all of the larger tributaries of Great Slave Lake to the first rapids. I find that Hearne first recorded this fish from the Mackenzie region, taking it in Great Slave Lake in January, 1772, when he crossed its eastern arm from north to south. After mentioning a number of species common in this lake, he says: Besides these, we also caught another kind of fish, which is said by the Northern Indians to be peculiar to this lake; at least none of the same kind have been met with in any other. The body of this fish much resembles a pike in shape; but the scales, which are very large and stiff, are of a beautifully bright silver colour: the mouth is large, * * * and though not provided with any teeth, takes a bait as ravenously as a pike or a trout. The sizes we caught were from two feet long to four feet. * * * The Northern Indians eall this fish Shees.¢ This description undeniably refers to the inconnu. True, Steno- dus is provided with teeth, but as they are small and inconspicuous, the fish is quite generally supposed to be toothless, and is called the ‘toothless fish ’ by some of the native tribes. “Richardson, Fauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 208, 1836. > Second Rept. Committee of Senate (Canada) on Mackenzie Basin, p. 54, 1891. ¢ Journey to Northern Ocean, p. 249, 1795. 1908.] FISHES. 509 These fish ascend the Mackenzie in summer, but apparently do not winter in that stream. Pére Giroux told me that they pass Arctic Red River from about the second week in June to the Ist of August, and reach there on their return toward the end of October, and that they winter at the mouth of the Mackenzie, where they are taken in numbers by the Eskimo at that season. The Eskimo catch them through the ice or from the edge ofa floe by means of a stout line which is attached to a stick about 15 inches long having a pistol-shaped handle to insure a firm grasp, and which has short pegs inserted near its extremities. This is used as a reel in lengthening and shortening the line. The bait is an ivory imita- tion of a small fish furnished with a barbless hook. The fish seizes this moving bait and is hauled out before it can disengage itself from the hook. The natives are said to be very successful in this method. The ‘conies’ are taken in summer at all the posts on the Mackenzie as far up at least as Fort Simpson, but I did not learn whether or not they ascend the Liard. They are taken in nets usually set in eddies. Most of them are caught in September and October, when presumably they are spawning, and are hung on stages to freeze. When thus preserved they are never used for human food except from necessity, as they are usually oily and rank, but are used for dog food. In summer, however, when many are taken in the white- fish nets, the smaller ones are quite palatable. This fish remains in Great Slave Lake the year round, but as far as I know this is the only inland lake which is thus distinguished. The fish frequently attains a weight of 30 or 40 pounds, and is said on good authority to reach even as high as 60 pounds. It is found as far east in Great Slave Lake as the Narrows, where Back took it in 1833. The vicinity of Rocher River, east of Fort Resolution, is a favorite fishery. In 1903 I took it at the lowermost rapid on Grandin River. Though ordinarily caught in nets, it takes a bait readily, especially in a strong current, or at the foot of a rapid. It is thus easily caught at the outlet of Great Slave Lake and in many other places. Tt is not a regular inhabitant of Great Bear Lake, but has been taken on one occasion at Fort Confidence. MacFarlane states that it is abundant in the Anderson, whose Hare Indian name, ‘ Beghula Tesse,’ is said to be derived from this fish. Oncorhynchus nerka (?) (Walbaum). Sockeye Salmon. Occasional specimens of salmon are taken in the Mackenzie. These are said by the traders, many of whom, because of a former residence in British Columbia or on the Yukon, are familiar with salmon, to 2 Simpson, Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 217, 1843. 510. NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [NO. 27. be identical with the common one of the Yukon. McConnell, on the authority of John Reid, mentions that one was taken near Fort Prov- idence some years ago.¢ Pére Giroux told me that perhaps three or four were taken at Arctic Red River, among thousands of whitefish, in the course of the autumn. John Firth also informed me that salmon like those found in the Yukon are occasionally taken in Peel River. Cristivomer naymacush (Walbaum). Lake Trout. This beautiful fish is an inhabitant of nearly every body of water throughout the north, not only in the Mackenzie basin, but in many other of the river systems. Being partial to clear, deep water, it is seldom found in the main rivers, although when these become clear, as 1s sometimes the case in autumn, numbers of trout find their way thence from the lakes. In the larger bodies of water, lake trout fre- quently attain a weight of 50 pounds, and occasionally even more. They are caught in large numbers and furnish a rich and nourishing food, but can not be eaten steadily, as they soon pall upon the appe- ‘tite. In the summer season they take a moving bait readily, espe- cially in swift water, but by far the greater number are caught in nets. In winter they seek the depths of the lakes, and are then taken with hooks set through the ice. Athabaska Lake, the Eastern and Northern arms of Great Slave Lake, and Great Bear Lake abound especially in these fine trout, and -as the water 1s there beautifully clear the traveler frequently sees them pursuing their prey in the depths, or lying motionless near the bottom. In the swift streams which enter these lakes, and in some which fall into the Arctic Sea, the pools at the foot of rapids are always tenanted by these voracious fish. JI found them abundant in the lakes and streams between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes, and along the south shore of that body of water. They took a spoon bait readily up to the last of August, but after that could be caught only in the nets. On September 15, while making a traverse of about 3 miles across the mouth of a deep bay near Manito Islands, we passed a broad level bar covered by only about 12 feet of water, though elsewhere the bottom was invisible. On this bar we saw hundreds of large trout, either lying motionless or swimming lazily about. I supposed them to be spawning. Large numbers were being caught by the Indians at Fort Franklin during September. 7 A trout taken by Simpson’s party at Fort Confidence, Great Bear Lake, measured 44 feet in length and 27 inches in girth, and weighed 47 pounds.’ Richardson states that Franklin’s party, during eighteen @ Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada, IV, p. 74D, 1891. 5 Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, p. 217, 1843. 1908. ] FISHES. | d11 months’ residence at Fort Franklin in 1825-26, took 3,500 trout weighing from 2 to 30 pounds each.* SPECKLED TROUT.—Under this general heading I include a few notes collected from various sources regarding the occurrence of speckled or brook trout, probably of several species, in a number of widely separated localities in the Mackenzie Basin. | Mr. John Firth of Fort McPherson assured me that speckled trout are found in West Rat River, a tributary of the Porcupine west of Fort McPherson. It is probable that these are either Salmo mykiss or Salvelinus malma, both of which are known to occur in Alaskan streams. In East Rat River also, which is connected with the west- ward-flowing stream (and therefore may contain trout of the same species) , but which flows eastward into the Peel, he said that speckled trout are common. Mr. Firth also informed me that a form of speckled trout is found im a stream which enters the sea a short distance west of the mouth of the Mackenzie. MacFarlane states that speckled trout have been taken in lower Anderson River.’? As anadromous trout of the Salve- linus alpinus type are known to occur in the Coppermine, these rec- ords may refer to the same species. I also learned from several independent sources that speckled trout occur in the Towattinow and in one or two other tributaries of the Athabaska, but I was never able to procure specimens. Thymallus signifer (Richardson). Arctic Grayling. The Arctic grayling, usually called bluefish in the north, has a very extensive range. It occurs throughout the region from Peace River and Athabaska Lake northward and northwestward to the Arctic Ocean. I can not find that it has been detected in the Atha- baska. As it prefers clear streams it is somewhat local in distribu- tion, occurring but seidom in the main rivers, which are usually muddy, but being abundant in many of the clear tributaries and the lakes which they drain. During my explorations I met with the grayling in the lake country between Great Slave and Great Bear lakes and at a number of points on the Mackenzie. It was especially abundant in the rapid stream which I descended to MacTavish Bay in August, 1903, and I caught many while fishing for trout with a spoon hook. It was common also in Great Bear Lake near Fort Franklin a little later, where many were being taken in the whitefish nets. In the spring of 1904 I had an opportunity to observe the method of taking this fish employed by the Indians of the Mackenzie. A *Fauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 208, 1836. ’ Second Rept. Committee of Senate (Canada) on Mackenzie Basin, p. 54, 1891, » 512 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. small stream, called locally Bluefish River, flowing into the Mac- kenzie opposite Fort Simpson, was the scene of operations. The fish, descend the stream in large numbers at this season, and the natives take advantage of this habit. When I visited the place, on May 16, the fishing was well under way. A tight dam (here called a ‘barrier ’) constructed of logs, stones, and interlacing spruce branches supported by stakes driven into the gravelly bottom, was built across the river at a favorable point. This dam was >-shaped and at the point of convergence an opening was left in which was fixed a sort of trough-like basket. This was constructed by binding together side by side slender peeled spruce poles about 10 feet in length, the thicker ends being all placed together, so that the finished article was a basket 10 feet long, open at the top and the larger end, where it was about 2 feet wide, and tapering to a point at the other. This trough or basket projected down stream from the apex of the dam, the broader open end nearly submerged, while the smaller end was slightly tilted and was practically dry, the structure being sufficiently open to allow the inrushing current to escape without overflowing. In descending the stream the fish encounter this barrier, and following its converging arms are led into the basket. When they find them- selves trapped they quickly turn and would mount the rushing cur- rent and escape were they not instantly scooped up by the watchful native, who kneels on a platform beside the trap. The amount of labor involved in constructing one of these ‘ barriers’ is considerable, as the dam must be built anew each spring just after the stream opens, when the water is ice cold; but as 200 or more fish are often taken in a night, at a season when the natives are usually short of food, the method is quite generally employed. The fish which I saw taken at this place varied from 11 to 16 inches in length. The fish of Rabbitskin River, a tributary of the Mackenzie above Fort Simp-- son, are said to average larger. The grayling is said to be scarce in the Liard below the mouth of the Nelson, but to be common above that point. It is also found in most of the tributaries of the Mackenzie, several of which have local names referring to its occurrence. As an index to the distribution of this interesting fish I have se- lected the following references: Back recorded it from the mouth of Hoarfrost River, Great Slave Lake; from the head of Back River; and from Lake Pelly on the same stream. Dr. G. M. Dawson re- ported its capture in upper Peace River; ” and in-the Finlayson, a tributary of the upper Liard.© MacFarlane has recorded it from Anderson River.? 4 Narrative Expedition to Mouth Great Fish River, pp. 114, 157, 346, 1836. >’ Rept. Prog. Geol. Surv. Canada, 1875-76, p. 38, 1877. ¢ Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada, 1887, p. 231B, 1888. 4 Canadian Record of Science, IV, p. 52, 1890. 1908. ] FISHES. 513 I am not aware that the grayling has been recorded from any stream tributary to Hudson Bay, except in one instance. Doctor Bell mentions that it was taken in tributaries of the lower Churchill, and that a specimen was identified by Professor Gill as Thymallus signifer.. A possible explanation of the occurrence of this fish in the Churchill is suggested by the fact that there is direct water con- nection between Churchill River and Athabaska Lake. The gray- ling occurs in Black or Stone River, which flows from Wollaston Lake into Athabaska Lake.’ The waters of another outlet of Wol- laston Lake, Cochrane River, flow by way of Reindeer Lake into the Churchill, thus affording to a torrent-loving species like the Arctic grayling a ready means of communication. Osmerus dentex Steindachner. Smelt. A specimen of this fish presented to me by Pére Giroux, of Arctic Red River, on July 16, 1904, has been recorded by Evermann and Goldsborough, and apparently furnishes the first record for Canada.° Pére Giroux informed me that the species is common at Arctic Red River all the summer and autumn. It is a common species on the Alaskan coast, and is an important food fish in some sections. Esox lucius Linneus. Pike; Jackfish. This species, the only pike of the Mackenzie Valley, is extremely abundant in practically all the waters of the region, and has given its name to scores of lakes and streams. In the larger lakes it attains a weight of 35 pounds or more. In this region of excellent food fishes it is not highly esteemed, but being easily captured it is often a means of preventing much suffermg from famine. As far as I can ascertain it is not found in the Ark-i-linik, Great Fish, or Copper- mine rivers, but it is an inhabitant of the Anderson. It is much less common in the muddy rivers than in the clear lakes. The pools at the foot of falls or rapids are favorite haunts, and in these situations it is especially easy to secure. Pygosteus pungitius (Linnzeus). Nine-spined Stickleback. I took two adult specimens of this fish, less than two inches in length, in a small muskeg pond a short distance from MacTavish Bay, Great Bear Lake. Evermann and Goldsborough have recently recorded these specimens, and refer Gosterosteus concinnus, described by Rich- ardson from Great Bear Lake (Fauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 57, 1836), to the same form.? It is probable that the sticklebacks “Rept. Prog. Geol. Surv. Canada, 1878-79, p. TC, 1880. 6 Tyrrell, Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada, VIII, p. 14D, 1896. €Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, XX, p. 105, 1907. 4 Tbid., p. 106, 1907. 44131—No. 27—08 Do 514 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. observed: by Kennicott at Fort Resolution, May 15, 1860, and later at Peel River (Fort McPherson), belong to the same species. g Although so small, these cache ek often occur in such myriads that they are used fon food. Richardson states that they were col- lected by the sledge load from a lake near Cumberland House, to be used for dog food.? Nelson reports that in the marshy country between the mouths of the Yukon and the Kuskoquim they were caught in great numbers in dip nets and formed an important item in the food supply of that district.¢ Stizostedion vitreum (Mitchill). Wall-eyed Pike; Doré; Pickerel. The doré, as it is almost universally called in the north, is rather common north to Great Slave Lake. It is taken in numbers in Athabaska River, Athabaska Lake, and Slave River, and is rather common in Great Slave Lake. It is found also in many of the smaller rapid streams such as are frequented by the grayling, and is an active and spirited fish, readily taking a troll, and when hooked fighting vigorously for its liberty. It is an excellent food fish, but of course must vield the palm in this regard to the unsurpassed whitefish, with which it 1s associated. The northernmost point where T took it was lower Grandin River, north of Fort Rae, and I was informed that it is fairly common in Willow or Horn River, near Fort Providence. Cottus cognatus Richardson. Bear Lake Bullhead; Miller’s Thumb. This small cottoid was described by Richardson from specimens taken in Great Bear Lake in May, at which time, he says, it resorts to the stony shallows to spawn.’ It is probable that the species has an extensive distribution in the north, but it has not been detected elsewhere in the Mackenzie region. Evermann and Goldsborough have recently recorded it from Lake Bennett, British Columbia.¢ Gncocottus hexacornis (Richardson). Six-horned Bullhead. This sculpin was described from specimens collected at the mouth of Tree River, near the Coppermine.’ It is a salt-water species, which occasionally enters the mouths of rivers. Pere Giroux in- formed me that it comes rarely to Arctic Red River. Lota maculosa (Le Sueur). Loche; Methye; Maria. This voracious fish is present in nearly every lake and stream throughout the Mackenzie region, and also in the Arctic Ocean. It @'Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., I, pp. 171, 208, 1869. ’Fauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 57, 1836. © Report on Nat. Hist. Collections in Alaska, p. 301, 1888. @Fauna Boreali-Americana, III, p. 40, 1836. € Bull. Bur. Fisheries, X XVI, p. 307, 1907. / Richardson in Franklin’s Narrative Journey to Polar Sea, p. 426, 1823. 1908. ] TREES AND. SHRUBS. 515 is so little esteemed as a food fish that even the dogs will not eat it unless starving, but the liver and roe are considered delicacies. It is taken in nets set for other fish and on hooks set for lake trout. Pére Giroux, of Arctic Red River, informed me that the loche appears at that place in numbers about June 15 and -passes up the river, and that there is a return movement in November and Decem- ber. The natives of the upper river (at Fort Simpson and elsewhere) eatch many in autumn, just before the river freezes over, by means of baited hooks thrown from the shore and allowed to sink to the bottom. Examples upward of 3 feet in length are thus often taken. Some of the Indians believe that no more loche will be taken if the bones of one are eaten by a dog. The wide distribution of this fish is attested by many references scattered through the narratives of northern travel, but they need not be particularized. Thomas Simpson recorded great numbers coming in with the ris- ing tide a short distance west of the mouth of the Mackenzie, and also took specimens near the mouth of the Coppermine. TREES AND SHRUBS OF ATHABASKA-MACKENZIE REGION. The following list of trees and shrubs contains, with one or two exceptions, only those species which were collected or observed by our parties, and is by no means a complete list of the species of the region. Most of the annotations are from our own notes. The species of Salix and ibes, except where otherwise credited, have been identified by F. V. Coville; in the case of the other shrubs my own identifications have been verified by his assistants, mainly by W. F. Wight. G. B. Sudworth has made a few suggestions regard- ing names. No attempt has been made to include all species re- ported by other observers, but in the case of some species observed by us notes regarding distribution have been collected from pub- lished sources. In order to avoid frequent repetition these notes are not accompanied by references, but they are mainly from the fol- lowing sources: DEASE and Simpson. Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, by Thomas Simpson, 1843. List of plants, by W. J. Hooker, pp. 409-418. TYRRELL BROTHERS. Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada, IX, 1897. List of plants, by John Macoun, pp. 205F—21S8F. J. W. TYRRELL. Ann. Rept. Dept. Interior (Canada), for 1901. List of plants, by John Macoun, pp. 61-62 of Separate. For fuller reference to these publications, see Bibliography, p. 535. * Narrative Discoveries on North Coast of America, pp. 111, 267, 1843. 516 NORTH AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27. Pinus divaricata (Ait.) Du M. de C. Banksian Pine. This is the only species of pine on the lower Athabaska and north- ward. Between Edmonton and Athabaska Landing it forms exten- sive forests in several places. Along the Athabaska and Slave rivers it appears only occasionally, usually where high gravelly banks ap- proach the river. It is common, however, on the rocky hills about Fort Chipewyan and Smith Landing, and is the predominating tree on the rolling sandy plains on Smith Portage and about Fort Smith. It occurs commonly on the Simpson Islands and about the Northern ° Arm of Great Slave Lake. On my route to the northward of Fort Rae it was seen in many places on Grandin River, reaching a diam- eter of 18 inches, but not growing very tall. North of the height of land it was rare, but I saw many trees on a portage a few miles north of the outlet of Lake Hardisty. On the Mackenzie it is common north to about latitude 64° 30’. About Fort Simpson in suitable localities it forms groves of well- grown trees, reaching a diameter of 18 inches. Zoological Appendix, pp. 287-379. (Published prob- ably in 1827.) Contains description of Arvicola trimucronata from Point Lake, Mackenzie; also notes on occurrence and habits of a number of species of mammals and birds at Fort Enterprise, on Coppermine River, and at other points in the Athabaska and Mackenzie region. PARRY, WILLIAM EDWARD, and Ross, JAMES CLARK. Journal of a Third Voyage for the Discovery of a Northwest Passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific; performed in the years 1824—25, in His Majesty’s Ships Hecla and Fury, under the orders of Captain William Edward Parry. 4to, pp. I-xxvi1l, 1-186; 1-151. (Appendix on Zoology, Ross, pp. 1-151.) The zoological appendix refers mainly to the natural history of Port Bowen, where the expedition wintered, and other points about Prince Regent Inlet. A few notes on natural history occur in the narrative. 1828. FRANKLIN, JOHN, and RICHARDSON, JOHN. Narrative of a Second Expe- dition to the shores of the Polar Sea, in the years 1825, 1826, and 1827, by John Franklin. Including an account of the progress of a detachment to the eastward, by John Richardson, surgeon and natural- ist to the expedition. 4to, pp. 1-320; and Appendix, pp. I-cLv11; with 31 Plates and six Maps. London. A Philadelphia edition, Svo, pp. 318, 1828. has been examined also, 1908. ] BIBLIOGRAPHY. aS Many notes on the natural history of the region explored occur in the narrative. “An account of the objects of Natural History has been reserved for a separate Work, which will be published as soon as possible, by Dr. Richardson and Professor Hooker.’ The magnifi- cent series of volumes, Fauna and Flora Boreali-Americana, was the outgrowth of this idea. 1828. RicHaRDSON, J. Short characters of a few quadrupeds procured on Cap- tain Franklin’s late expedition. Vertebrals, including Fossil Mammals. 4to, pp. I-XI, ie Pl xxxti. London. Descriptions of skeletons of Ovis montana from Rocky Mountains west of Mackenzie River; of Barren Ground Caribou from Fort Con- fidence: and of a Musk-ox, probably the one taken by Rae near the mouth of Coppermine River in summer of 1851. 1855. BELCHER, Epwarp. The Last of the Arctic Voyages; Being a Narrative of the Expedition in H. M. S. Assistance, under the command of Captain Sir Edward Belcher, C. B., in search of Sir John Franklin, during the years 1852, 1853, 1854. With notes on the Natural History by Sir John Richardson, Professor Owen, Thomas Bell, J. W. Salter, and Lovell Reeve. Two Volumes: Vol. I, pp. 388; Vol. II, pp. 419. London. The different parties from the Assistance examined portions of Barrow Strait, Wellington Channel, Northumberland Sound, and Ar- thur Strait. Very few natural history notes occur in the text. The Appendix (Vol. II, pp. 263-419) includes reports on Meteorology, Fishes, Fossils, Shells, and Crustacea. 1856. [ANDERSON, JAMES.] Letter from Chief Factor James Anderson, to Sir George Simpson, F. R. G. S., Governor in Chief of Rupert Land. 220, | Vulpes alascensis, 215-216. alascensis abietorum, 217. | -| Voyages (names of vessels) : Assistance, 67. Enterprise, 68. Erebus, 64. Fox, 67. Fury, 58. Gjoa, 68. Griper, 58. Heela, 58. Intrepid, 69. Investigator, 68. Lady Franklin, 66. North Star, 69. Pioneer, 69. Plover, 66. Prince Albert, 66. Resolute, 69. Sophia, 66. Terror, 64. } Victory, 62. fulvus, 543. lagopus, 5438. lagopus innuitus, 217-220. Vulture, northern turkey, 351. Walrus, Pacific, 241. Atlantic, 241. Wapiti, Canadian, 129-130. Warbler, Audubon, 471. bay-breasted, 472-473. black and white, 463-464. black-poll, 473-474. black-throated green, 474. Canadian, 479. Cape May, 468. magnolia, 472. mourning, 477. myrtle, 470-471. Nashville, 464. orange-crowned, 464-465. palm, 474-475. Tennessee, 465-468. Tolmie, 477. Townsend, 474. Wilson, 478-479. yellow, 468—470. yellowrump, 471. Water-thrush, 476-477. Wavey, gray, 302, 3083. horned, 302. scabby-nosed, 301. white, 297. Waxwing, Bohemian, 61, 457-458. cedar, 458-459. Weasel, Bonaparte, 230-231. least, 234. long-tailed, 238. Richardson, 231-232. tundra, 232-238. Wenusk, 159. Whale, black, 126. Greenland, 126-127. white, 128. Wheatear, Greenland, 499. 573 574 NORTH Whisky jack, 65. Whitefish, 505-507. broken nose, 507. herring, 507-508. White-footed mouse. Arctic, 174-176. Whitney, Caspar, 79. Willet, western, 328. Willow, 342, 343, 520—523. Wilsonia canadensis. 479. pusilla, 478-479. pusilla pileolata, 479. Wolf, Barren Ground, 213-214, black, 212. gray, 211-2138. prairie, 214. timber, 211. Wolfberry, 534. Wolverene, Hudson Bay. 239-241. Wolverene Rock, 33, 106, 110. Woodchuck, Canadian, 159-160. Woodcock, 317. Woodpecker, Arctic three-toed, 381-382. banded-backed, three-toed, 382-384. Nelson downy, 380-381. northern hairy, 379-380. northern pileated, 385-386. yellow-bellied, 384, 385. Wood-rat, Drummond, 176-177. AMERICAN FAUNA. [No. 27, 1908.]} j Wren, prairie marsh, 484, rock, 483. western house, 483. winter, 484, Xanthocephalus xanthocephalus, 408. Xema sabini, 271. XY Company, 92. Yellowberry, 526. Yellow-legs, greater, 325-326. lesser, 326-327. Yellow-throat, western, 478. Zamelodia ludoviciana, 448-449. Zapus hudsonius, 196. princeps, 197. princeps minor, 197. Zone, Arctic, 50, 53. Arctic-Alpine, 50-351. Canadian, 52, 53. Hudsonian, 51-52, 53. Zones, Life, 49-53. Zonotrichia albicollis, 52, 4833—435. coronata, 433. gambeli, 433. leucophrys, 431. leucophrys gambeli, 431-4388. leucophrys intermedia, 433. querula, 430-4381. s I) At, x iT > 7 . , . i ) i, ' t a i ’ mM vEY ' I wl uy : c Peetu : \ hat , ) ; f } 7 , a4 3) ~ u a ts : ; } ih On; J 7 y ae) y y ' bi A , ; » y ‘ ‘ n a a . A - va ¥ - it 4 a : \ A oe t {iA 5 ts Ce ie i , fs , mst , S y ‘i - ‘ r L : i A ¥ ot r - Diirg > uf 2 NS { 4 y — / , Hy Bi Aes) Ay i i - a i ‘ 7 be : 5 r at ‘ oat ° ; T i 4 ' i ‘ t i 7 4 . ¥' © q i v 3 co fh } 1 my G , z Wee Tas { « v - i} ‘ rn v i 4 ey : ’ i \ t aes a. i ‘ a ‘ ¥ : y ; i — * fl , i , . 4 = ; y 7 y R f ; c ‘ ; \ is } a eed) i 4 f . 1 ¢ = Ron i t v a * " } \ . 7 j ; . as F it F i ‘ ! : { r, j ; \ ; } ‘ " f i f n { { i Sem F i Bie ! 1) i ~ i ) # ‘ ¥ iN, i ‘ oy ' Y m hay 2 . , i : , ‘ } Orit: i | “A r ‘ H Hiiey | F i \ ~ } i f i) ) ne : ; ) } ‘ sai i ‘ * i} 4 . i ie } yal fois 1 y . u | j , ; f D \ . 2 : Ve ‘ f i . y) ‘ Die i i dl ‘ ‘ 7 f t rane val i ’ et i it i Y 5 ie H ; i . fi , . , i ort , f ‘ ’ i j i * “a r i it hie ‘ bie 2 fA F = ii i A F \, i Pia Ati f ; : ee: . % i 4 1 ae i Ne \ i} " ' Is 1 ; ats! 4 H rs 7 i if ‘ i} {G ne i hee 4 a y Y y i ; \ i G iy a " wie ie re ‘e ‘ i uy . > , ee i, : tee 7 4 , : . i : a - f iy in ’ i 1 ; } ic 1 : r =) ig ' s a n ; ; E eS i { . : : 7 } i i 4 , q { f Z , a i Detiere ty ‘ ee : . 4 ; r y i ANG uy il ) + f ; J j ii ne F il rc aN i j j ‘ ‘ i te > a . ; a di } i t i i ‘ Bes f yen ele ae ‘ ‘ f 4 i e ; { : “Ca ' ; imi hes a 1 i . . r L f it F ay: ; Se : | ‘e P F < y - ] os i Oe " i (van y bE Te Me 5 ' ) ; wit i ) Y cial Suse ieee = ri P s | . j : | i | | S 5 | | | \ F | | | ; / | ra | ; ‘ 3 9088 01316 8471 ee